200R98005
United States " Office of
Environmental Protection Administration arid February 1998
Agency Resources Management (2304)
EPA FACILITIES MANUAL, VOLUME 1
ARCHITECTURE, ENGINEERING,
AND PLANNING GUIDELINES
FEBRUARY 1998
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
February 1998
Foreword
The EPA Facilities Manual
The EPA Facilities Manual is comprised of four distinct, yet complementary resources for planning and managing
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) facilities. These four volumes are meant to be used simultaneously to
determine design intent, requirements, and the ongoing evaluation of all EPA facilities. The use of one volume
without reference to the other three would result in an incomplete understanding of the requirements for EPA
facilities.
Volume 1: The Architecture, Engineering, and Planning Guidelines (referred to as the AE&P Guidelines)
provides guidance for facilities management, engineering, planning, and architecture professionals
in the design and construction of new EPA facilities and the evaluation of existing facilities.
Volume 2: Space Guidelines, Volume I contains information on space planning, space estimation, environment,
materials, furniture, process, and maintenance. EPA's Office of Administration and Resources
Management developed this document to help EPA facilities managers, space managers, and line
personnel plan and use their space.
Volume 3: Space Guidelines, Volume II is a technical handbook describing EPA's mission and providing space
standards, information on technical considerations and materials safety, and other related
documents. It is also intended for use by EPA facilities managers, space managers, and line
personnel.
Volume 4: The Facility Safety, Health, and Environmental Management Manual (referred to as the Safety
Manual) outlines safety, health, and environmental management considerations for owned or leased
EPA facilities. The Manual's goal is to maintain a safe and healthful workplace that protects against
injury, illness, and loss of life.
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
February 1998
Table of Contents
Architecture, Engineering, and Planning Guidelines
CONTENTS
Introduction Ix
1 - General Planning and Design Data 1-1
1.1 General Scope of Project 1-1
1.1.1 Purpose 1-1
1.1.2 Planning Studies. Evaluations,
and Reports 1-1
1.2 Background Information 1-1
1.2.1 Existing Facility Description 1-1
1.2.2 Facility and Campus Components .. 1-1
1.2.3 Functional Organization 1-1
1.3 Planning Requirements 1-1
1.3.1 Planning Goals 1-1
1.3.2 Planning Objectives 1-2
1.3.3 Planning Criteria 1-2
1.4 Scope of Requirements 1-3
1.4.1 General 1-3
1.4.2 Codes 1-3
.4.3 Facility Organization 1-3
.4.4 Summary of Requirements 1-3
1.5 Facility Design and Layout 1-7
.5.1 Overview 1-7
.5.2 Site Development 1-7
.5.3 Programmed Space for Design
and Layout 1-7
1.5.4 Planning of Exterior Areas and
Facilities 1-8
1.5.5 Architectural Requirements 1-8
1.5.6 Space Identification 1-14
1.5.7 Specific Room Requirements 1-14
1.5.8 Guide for Architectural Layout ... 1-14
1.5.9 Environmental Design Requirements 1 -16
1.6 Special Room Requirements 1-19
.6.1 Restrooms 1-19
.6.2 Janitor Closets 1-19
1.7 Hazardous Waste Handling 1-19
.7.1 General Design Issues 1-19
.7.2 Radioisotopes 1-19
.7.3 Chemical Storage and Handling ... 1-20
1.7.4 Hazardous Materials/Waste Storage •
Facility 1-20
1.8 Security 1-20
1.8.1 Access and Egress 1-20
1.9 Structural Design Requirements 1-20
1.9.1 General 1-20
1.9.2 Calculations 1-21
1,9.3 Loads 1-21
1.9.4 Structural Systems 1-24
1.9.5 Building Movement Joints ....... 1-25
1.10 Lease Administration 1-25
1.10.1 Offer Requirements 1-26
2 - Site Work 2-1
2.1 Scope of Project 2-1
2.1.1 General 2-1
2.1.2 Development Codes 2-1
2.2 Site Influences 2-1
2.2.1 LandResources 2-1
2.2.2 Transportation Systems 2-2
2.2.3 Environmental Considerations 2-2
2.3 Site Investigation 2-3
2,3.1 Site Surveys 2-3
2.3.2 Site Evaluation 2-4
2.3.3 Geotechnical Investigation 2-4
2.3.4 GroundwBter Investigation 2-5
2.4 Site Development 2-6
2.4.1 Surveying 2-6
2.4.2 Site Planning and Design 2-8
2.4.3 FacilitySiting 2-11
2.4.4 Site Preparation 2-13
2.4.5 Dewatering 2-13
2.4.6 Shoring and Underpinning 2-13
2.4.7 Earthwork 2-13
2.4.8 Waterfront Construction 2-13
2.5 Landscaping and Site-Related Requirements. 2-14
2.5.1 General 2-14
2.5.2 Professional Qualifications for
Site Design ., 2-14
2.5.3 General Site Requirements 2-15
2.5.4 Hardscape Requirements 2-17
2.5.5 Recreational Requirements 2-17
2.6 Vehicle and Pedestrian Movement 2-17
2.6.1 Access and Circulation 2-17
2.6.2 Parking and Loading Facilities 2-18
2.6.3 Pedestrian Access 2-19
2.6.4 Airports and Heliports 2-20
2.7 Stonnwater Management 2-21
2.7.1 Street Drainage 2-21
2.7.2 Watershed Development 2-21
2.7.3 Erosion and Sedimentation Control 2-21
2.7.4 Stonnwater Retention and Detention 2-21
2.7.5 Conveyance 2-21
2.7.6 Stonnwater Quality 2-22
2.7.7 Floodplain and Wetlands
Development 2-22
2.7.8 Coastal Development 2-22
2.8 Utilities and Support Services 2-23
2.8.1 Water Distribution Systems 2-23
2.8.2 Wastewater Collection Systems ... 2-25
2.8.3 Natural Gas Distribution Systems . 2-26
2.8.4 Electrical Distribution Systems ... 2-26
2.8.5 Telecommunications Systems .... 2-26
ill
-------
February 1998
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
Table of Contents
2.8.6 Solid Waste Collection Systems ... 2-26
2.9 Reference Materials 2-26
2.9.1 General 2-26
2.9.2 Sources 2-26
3 - Concrete 3-1
3.1 General Requirements 3-1
3.1.1 Design and Construction 3-1
3.1.2 Codes 3-1
3.1.3 Use of Coal Fly Ash in Concrete ... 3-1
3.2 Concrete Formwork 3-1
3.3 Concrete Reinforcement 3-1
3.3.1 Reinforcement Materials 3-1
3.3.2 Reinforcement Details 3-1
3.4 Cast-In-Place Concrete 3-1
3.4.1 General 3-1
3.4.2 Materials, Testing, and Quality
Control 3-1
3.4.3 Tolerances 3-1
3.4.4 Selecting Proportions for Concrete
Mixes 3-1
3.4,5 Mixing, Transporting, and Placing .. 3-2
3.4.6 Climatic Considerations 3-2
3.4.7 Post-tensioned Concrete 3-2
3.5 Precast/Prestressed Concrete 3-2
3.5.1 Structural 3-2
3.5.2 Architectural 3-2
3.6 Cementitious Decks for Buildings 3-2
3.6.1 General 3-2
3.6.2 Materials, Design, and Construction 3-2
3.7 Repair and Restoration of Concrete Structures 3-2
3.8 Concrete Inspection and Testing 3-3
4 - Masonry 4-1
4.1 General Requirements 4-1
4.1.1 Design and Construction 4-1
4.1.2 Codes and Specifications 4-1
4.2 Mortar and Grout ;... 4-1
4.2.1 General 4-1
4.2.2 Mortar 4-1
4.2.3 Grout 4-1
4.3 Unit Masonry 4-1
4.4 Masonry Accessories 4-2
4.5 Reinforced Masonry 4-2
4.6 Masonry Inspection and Testing 4-2
5 - Metals 5-1
5.1 General Requirements 5-1
5.2 Structural Steel 5-1
5.3 Steel Joists 5-1
5.3.1 Codes and Specifications 5-1
5.3.2 Intended Use . 5-1
5.3.3 Support of Vibrating Equipment ... 5-1
5.4 Steel Decks 5-1
5.5 • Miscellaneous Metals 5-1
5.5.1 Definition 5-1
5.5.2 Codes and Specifications 5-1
5.6 Light-Gauge Steel 5-2
5.7 Preengineered Metal Buildings 5-2
5.7.1 Codes and Specifications 5-2
5.7.2 Loads 5-2
5.8 Structural Steel Inspection and Testing 5-2
6 -Wood and Plastics 6-1
6.1 General Requirements 6-1
6.2 Partitions 6-1
6.2.1 Ceiling-High Partitions 6-1
6.2.2 Wood Stud Partitions 6-1
6.2.3 Less-Than-Ceiling-High Partitions .. 6-1
6.3 Use of Wood and Plastic 6-1
7 >Thermal and Moisture Requirements 7-1
7.1 General Requirements 7-1
7.2 Design Characteristics 7-1
7.3 Thermal Resistance 7-1
7.4 Moisture Transport 7-1
7.5 Panel, Curtain, and Spandrel Walls 7-1
7.5.1 Panel and Curtain Walls 7-1
7.5.2 Spandrel Walls 7-1
8 - Doors and Windows 8-1
8.1 Doors 8-1
8.1.1 General 8-1
8.1.2 Exterior Doors 8-1
8.1.3 Interior Doors 8-1
8.1.4 FireDoors 8-1
8.1.5 Laboratory Doors 8-2
8.2 Windows 8-2
8.2.1 General 8-2
8.2.2 Fixed Window Systems 8-2
8.2.3 Safety of Storefront and Curtain
WallSystems 8-2
8.2.4 Window Height 8-2
8.2.5 Glazed Panels in Interior Partitions
andWalls 8-2
8.3 Sun Shading 8-3
8.3.1 General 8-3
8.3.2 Laboratory Windows 8-3
9- Finishes 9-1
9.1 Ulterior Finishes 9-1
9.1.1 Trim and Incidental Finishes 9-1
9.1.2 Final Finishing Material 9-1
9.1.3 Airspace 9-1
9.1.4 Combustible Substances 9-1
9.2 WallMaterials 9-1
9.2.1 Lead-Based Paint 9-1
9.2.2 Wall Finishes 9-1
9.2.3 Wall Covering and Finishes' 9-2
9.3 Finished Ceilings 9-2
9.3.1 General 9-2
9.3.2 Ceilings Not Along Exit Path 9-3
9.3.3 Ceilings Along Exit Path 9-3
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planninq Guidelines
February 1998
Table of Contents
9.3.4 Ceiling Finishes 9-3
9.3.5 Open Ceilings 9-3
9.4 Floor Treatments 9-3
9.4.1 General 9-3
9.4.2 Carpet 9-3
9.4.3 Vinyl Tile ; 9-4
9.4.4 Seamless Vinyl Flooring 9-4
9.4.5 Ceramic Tile Flooring 9-5
9.4.6 Special Flooring 9-5
9.4.7 Exposed Concrete Flooring 9-5
9.5 Painting 9-5
9.5.1 General 9-5
9.5.2 Reflectance Values 9-5
9.5.3 Wall and Ceiling Colors 9-5
9.5.4 Accent Areas 9-5
9.6 Window Covering 9-5
9.6.1 Blinds •.... 9-6
9.6.2 Blackout Shades 9-6
9.6.3 Draperies and Curtains 9-6
10 - Specialties 10-1
10.1 Magnetic, Liquid Chalk, Dry-Marker Boards
andTackBoards 10-1
10.2 Interior Signage Systems and Building
Directory 10-1
10.2.1 General 10-1
10.2.2 Door Identification 10-1
10.2.3 RoomNumbering 10-1
10.2.4 Building Directory 10-1
10.3 Portable Fire Extinguishers 10-1
10.3.1 Fire Extinguisher Locations 10-1
10.4 Safety Devices 10-2
10.5 Laboratory Casework 10-2
10.5.1 General 10-2
10.5.2 Modular Design 10-2
10,5.3 Support Capability 10-2
10.5.4 Cabinet Assemblies 10-2
10.5.5 BaseCabinets 10-3
10.5.6 Wall Cabinets 10-3
10.5.7 Shelving 10-3
10.5.8 Countertops 10-3
10.5.9 Materials 10-3
10.5.10 Quality 10-4
10.5.11 Minimum Standards 10-4
10.5.12 Laboratory Fume Hoods 10-4
10.5.13 Environmental Rooms 10-4
11 - Equipment 11-1
11.1 Design 11-1
11.2 Catalog Cut Sheets 11-
11.3 Layout and Clearances 11-
11.4 Floor Preparation 11-
11.5 Structural Support ti-
ll.6 Special Ventilation Requirements for Equipmedfl-
11.7 Equipment Specifications 11-
11.8 High-technology Equipment 11-
11.9 Mechanical and Electrical Equipment 11-2
11.10 Equipment Consultants 11-2
12 - Furnishings 12-1
12.1 Furnishings 12-1
13-Special Construction 13-1
13.1 Noise Control 13-1
13.1.1 Vibration Isolation 13-1
13.1.2 Piping And Ducting Systems 13-1
13.1.3 Sound Dampening 13-2
13.2 Fire Walls and Fire Barrier Walls 13-2
13.2.1 Firewalls 13-2
13.2.2 Fire Barrier Walls 13-2
13.2.3 Openings 13-2
13.3 Vertical Openings and Shafts 13-2
13.3.1 Atriums 13-2
13.3.2 Shafts 13-2
13.3.3 Monumental Stairs 13-3
13.3.4 Escalators 13-3
13.3.5 Penetrations 13-3
14 - Conveying Systems 14-1
14.1 General 14-1
14.2 Elevators 14-1
14.2.1 Elevator Recall 14-1
14.2.2 Smoke Detectors 14-1
14.2.3 CaptureFloor 14-1
14.2.4 Signage 14-1
14,2.5 Chemical Transport Use 14-1
14.3 Escalators 14-1
15 - Mechanical Requirements 15-1
15.1 General 15-1
15.2 References '... 15-1
15.3 Heating, Ventilation, and Air-conditioning
Requirements 15-2
15.3.1 General 15-2
15.3.2 HVAC System Performance 15-2
15.3.3 Selection Procedure 15-3
15.3.4 Ventilation-Exhaust Systems 15-4
15.3.5 Equipment Room Ventilation 15-5
15.3.6 Waste Heat Recovery Systems 15-6
15.3.7 Energy Efficiency : 15-6
15.3.8 Laboratory 15-6
15.4 Energy Management Control Systems 15-7
15.4.1 General 15-7
15.4.2 Zoning 15-7
15.4.3 Control Setback and Shutoff
Devices 15-7
15.4.4 Humidity Control 15-7
15.4.5 Simultaneous Heating and Cooling 15-7
15.4.6 Mechanical Ventilation Control ... 15-8
15.4.7 Economizer Cycle 15-8
15.4.8 Automatic Control Dampers 15-8
15.4.9 Variable-Air-Volume System Fan
Control 15-8
15.4.10 Fire and Smoke Detection and
-------
February 1998
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
Table of Contents
Protection Controls 15-8
15.4.11 Gas-Fired Air-Handling Unit Controll5-9
15.4.12 Zone Control/Distribution System
Control 15-9
15.4.13 Control Valve Selection 15-9
15.4.14 Two-pipe and Three-pipe Combination
Heating And Cooling Systems 15-9
15.4.15 Load Control For Hot-Water
Systems 15-10
15.4.16 Load Control for Chilled-Water
Systems ; 15-10
15.4.17 Cooling Tower and Water-Cooled
Condenser System Controls 15-10
15.4.18 Control of Steam Systems 15-10
15.4.19 Energy Management Systems ... 15-10
15.4.20 Energy Metering 15-11
15.5 Heating, Ventilation, and Air-Conditioning
Systems 15-11
15.5.1 General 15-11
15.5.2 Air-Conditioning Systems 15-11
15.5.3 WaterChillers 15-12
15.5.4 Condensers/Condensing Units ... 15-12
15.5.5 Cooling Towers 15-13
15.5.6 Building Heating Systems 15-13
15.5.7 Heating Equipment 15-14
15.5.8 Water Distribution Systems 15-15
15.5.9 Pumps and Pumping Systems ... 15-16
15.5.10 Steam Distribution Systems 15-16
15.5.11 Air-Handling and Air Distribution
Systems 15-16
15.5.12 Fans/Motors 15-17
15.5.13 Coils 15-18
15.5.14 Ducts 15-18
15.5.15 Walk-In Environmental and Cold
Storage Rooms 15-18
15.5.16 Central Plant Heat Generation
and Distribution 15-19
15.6 Load Calculations 15-22
15.6.1 GENERAL 15-22
15.6.2 Submission 15-22
15.6.3 Design 15-22
15.6.4 Air Volume/exchange 15-22
15.6.5 Auxiliary Air 15-22
15.7 Laboratory Fume Hoods 15-23
15.7.1 Hood Requirements 15-23
15.7.2 Fume Hood Exhaust 15-24
15.7.3 Constant Volume Bypass-Type
Fume Hood 15-24
15.7.4 Variable-air-volume (VAV) Hoods 15-25
15.7.5 Radioisotope Hoods 15-25
15.7.6 Perchloric Acid Fume Hoods 15-26
15.7.7 Special Purpose Hoods 15-26
15.7.8 Horizontal Sashes 15-26
15.7.9 Other Ventilated Enclosures 15-27
15.7.10 Face Velocities 15-27
15.7.11 Annual Certification 15-27
15.7.12 Exhaust System 15-27
15.7.13 Noise 15-28
15.7.14 Effluent Cleaning 15-28
15.8 Other Equipment 15-28
15.8.1 GloveBoxes 15-28
15.8.2 Biological Safety Cabinets 15-28
15.8.3 Flammable Liquid Storage Cabinetsl5-29
15.8.4 Laboratory Service Fittings 15-29
15.9 Air Filtration and Exhaust Systems 15-29
15.9.1 Dry Filtration 15-29
15.9.2 Absolute Filtration 15-29
15.9.3 Air-Cleaning Devices for Special
Applications 15-30
15.9.4 Operation 15-30
15.9.5 Maintenance Access 15-30
15.9.6 Location of Air Intake 15-30
15.9.7 Ventilation Rates 15-30
15.9.8 Room Air Change Rates 15-31
15.9.9 Plume Study (Laboratory Exhaust) 15-31
15.10 Plumbing 15-31
15.10.1 Piping 15-31
15.10.2 Plumbing Fixtures 15-32
15.10.3 Backflow Preventers 15-33
15.10.4 Safety Devices 15-33
15.10.5 Emergency Eyewash Units 15-33
15.10.6 Emergency Safety Showers 15-33
15.10.7 Glassware Washing Sinks 15-34
15.10.8 Compressed-air Systems 15-34
15.10.9 Vacuum Systems 15-34
15.10.10 Centralized Laboratory Water
Systems 15-34
15.10.11 Natural Gas Distribution System . 15-35
15.10.12 Nonflammable- and Flammable-Gas
Systems 15-35
15.10.13 Drinking Fountains 15-36
15.10.14 Toilets, Sinks, and Lavatories ... 15-36
15.10.15 Shower Stalls 15-38
15.10.16 HoseBibbs 15-38
15.11 Nonsanitary Laboratory Waste 15-38
15.12 Codes and Standards 15-38
15.13 Testing, Balancing, and Commissioning ... 15-39
15.13.1 Independent Contractor 15-39
15.13.2 Contractor Credentials 15-39
15.13.3 Contractor Registration 15-39
15.13.4 Scope of Work 15-39
15.13.5 Testing and Balancing Devices .. 15-40
15.13.6 Mechanical System Commissioning 15-41
15.13.7 Reporting 15-41
15.14 Ductwork 15-41
15.14.1 General 15-41
15.14.2 Fabrication 15-41
15.14.3 AccessPanels 15^2
15.14.4 Insulation 15-42
15.14.5 FireDampers 15-«
15.15 Fire Protection
15.15.1 General
15.15.2 Water Supplies 15^12
15.15.3 SizeandZoning 15-43
15.15.4 Systems
15.15.5 Operation
15.15.6 Codes 15-46
VI
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planninq Guidelines
February 1998
Table of Contents
16 - Electrical Requirements 16-1
16.1 General 16-1
16.1.1 Code Compliance 16-1
16.1.2 Electrical Installations 16-1
16.1.3 Energy Conservation in Design ... 16-1
16.1.4 Coordination of Work 16-2
16.1.5 Power Factors 16-2
16.1.6 Handicapped Accessibility
Requirements 16-2
16.1.7 Material and Equipment Standards 16-2
16.1.8 Environmental Requirements 16-2
16.2 Primary Distribution 16-3
16.2.1 Ductbanks and Cable 16-3
16.2.2 Switches 16-3
16.2.3 Overhead Power Supply Lines 16-3
16,2.4 System Redundancy 16-3
16.3 Service Entrance 16-3
16.3.1 Overhead Services 16-3
16.3.2 Underground Services 16-4
16.3.3 Service Capacity 16-4
16.3.4 Metering 164
16.3.5 Service Entrance Equipment 16-4
16.4 Interior Electrical Systems 16-4
16.4.1 Basic Materials and Methods 16-4
16.4.2 Service Equipment 16-5
16.4.3 Conductors 16-5
16.4.4 Raceways 16-5
16.4.5 Harmonics 16-6
16.4.6 Distribution Equipment 16-6
16.4.7 Motor Controllers and Disconnects 16-8
16.4.8 Grounding 16-10
16.4.9 Laboratory Power Requirements . 16-10
16.5 Interior Lighting System 16-11
16.5.1 Illumination Levels 16-11
16.5.2 Lighting Controls 16-12
16.5.3 Lamps And Ballasts 16-12
16.5.4 Emergency Lighting (Battery Units)16-12
16.5.5 Energy Conservation 16-13
16.5.6 GreenLights 16-13
16.5.7 Glare 16-13
16.5.8 Automatic Data Processing Areas 16-13
16.6 Fire Safety Requirements for Lighting
Fixtures 16-13
16.6.1 Mounting 16-13
16.6.2 Fluorescent Fixtures 16-14
16.6.3 Light Diffusers 16-14
16.6.4 Location 16-14
16.7 Exterior Lighting Systems 16-14
16.7.1 General 16-14
16.7.2 Parking Lot Lighting 16-14
16.7.3 Building Facade Lighting 16-14
16.7.4 Traffic Control Lighting 16-14
16.7.5 Roadway Lighting 16-15
16.7.6 Exterior Electric Signs 16-15
16.8 Emergency Power System 16-15
16.8.1 General 16-15
16.8.2 Emergency Loads 16-16
16.8.3 Uninterruptible Power Supply ... 16-17
16.9 Lightning Protection System 16-20
16.9.1 Minimum Scope 16-20
16.9.2 Additional Scope 16-20
16.9.3 Master Label 16-20
16.10 Seismic Requirements 16-20
16.10.1 Seismic Review 16-20
16.11 Automatic Data Processing Power Systems . 16-20
16.11.1 Isolation of ADP Systems 16-20
16.11.2 Computer Power 16-20
16.11.3 Power Panelboards and Distribution
Panels 16-21
16.11.4 Ughting 16-21
16.11.5 Grounding 16-21
16.12 Cathodic Protection 16-21
16.12.1 Investigation and Recommendation 16-21
16.13 Environmental Considerations (Raceways,
Enclosures) 16-21
16.13.1 Corrosive Atmosphere 16-21
16.13.2 Saltwater Atmosphere 16-21
16.13.3 ExtremeCold 16-21
16.13.4 Explosive Atmosphere 16-21
16.13.5 Floodplain Areas 16-22
16.14 Communication Systems 16-22
16.14.1 Telecommunications/Data Systems 16-22
16.14.2 Video Conference Rooms 16-22
16.14.3 Recording Systems 16-22
16.14.4 Satellite Dishes 16-22
16.14.5 Television Broadcast Systems ... 16-22
16.14.6 Microwave Communications .... 16-23
16.14.7 Other 16-23
16.15 Alarm and Security Systems 16-23
16.15.1 Fire Alarm System 16-23
16.15.2 Safety Alarm System 16-28
16.15.3 Security Systems 16-29
16.15.4 Disaster Evacuation System 16-32
16.15.5 Exit Lighting and Markings 16-32
APPENDICES
Appendix A: Codes, Regulatory Requirements,
Reference Standards, Trade
Organizations, and Guides
Appendix B: Indoor Air Quality (IAQ)
Requirements
Appendix C: Room Data Sheets
Appendix D: Design Guidelines
Appendix E: Abbreviations and Acronyms
INDEX
Vll
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines . ,_ , February 1998
Introduction
Introduction
PURPOSE
The Architecture, Engineering, and Planning Guidelines (hereafter referred to as either the AE&P Guidelines or this
Manual) is a compilation of generic information that shall be used in conjunction with the Facility Safety, Health, and
Environmental Management Manual (the Safety Manual) as the basis for the Program of Requirements (FOR) and
Solicitation for Offers (SFO) for new construction (including additions and alterations) of Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA) laboratory facilities projects and for the evaluation of existing facilities. This Manual is not a Program
of Requirements or a Solicitation for Offers but is a set of standards and guidelines to be used for a number of purposes.
It shall be used alongside codes and regulations to develop construction documentation for EPA facilities. This Manual
is restrictive only in that it is a set of guidelines and minimum standards. It is intended to be used throughout the
design process, with the concurrence of EPA, to develop and establish solutions that meet the requirements established
herein in the form of construction documents for public bidding and the award of construction contracts.
Citations of standards, codes, or references within this Manual should be assumed to refer to the most current edition.
Years and publication dates specifically stated in the Manual reflect the version in use when the Manual was originally
written and published. When using this Manual, the user should verify that the documents referenced are the most
current and have not been superseded.
The primary purpose of this Manual is to establish a consistent, Agencywide level of quality and excellence in the
planning, design, and construction of all EPA facilities projects. The Manual provides basic standards and guidelines
for design and construction. It is not intended to deter use of more stringent or greater performance criteria for design.
Project-specific design and construction requirements that are not in conflict with the requirements of this document
should be met in developing the final program. The generic information and requirements described herein must be
verified and further defined and refined. They are used in specific design cases.
ORGANIZATION OF THE MANUAL
This document is generally organized according to the Masterformat, published by the Construction Specifications
Institute (CSI). The 16-section format, outlined below, should be familiar to many in the fields of architecture,
planning, engineering, and construction. When used throughout this Manual, the term "new construction*' shall be
understood to include additions and alterations to existing buildings.
SECTION 1: GENERAL PLANNING AND DESIGN DATA
This section provides information on EPA's planning goals, which may relate to any specific project
The various project-specific EPA offices and their organizations are defined, and the planning
objectives and criteria are documented. The requirements that may apply to a specific project are
compiled, and the project-specific requirements documented, in an overview and summary fashion.
General facility requirements will be unique to each project. This section outlines the categories that
should be addressed.
The section mixes project-specific information with guidelines that may be used for all projects. It
provides an overview of new construction and describes the major elements of, and information for,
any project for which predesign and conceptual design can be performed. Section 1 sets the tone for
any specific project design and its development. The general information in Section 1 shall be
carefully modified to be made project specific. Section 1 also contains an outline for lease
administration and offer requirements, which shall also be made project specific.
IX
-------
February 1998
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
Introduction
SECTION!: SITE WORK
Section 2 provides site and civil requirements for EPA facilities. In addition to technical
requirements relating to site work, this section contains design criteria and landscape requirements.
SECTION 3: CONCRETE
Section 3 contains standards and guidelines that apply to all new construction and alterations, along
with some project-specific information.
SECTION 4: MASONRY
Section 4 contains standards and guidelines that apply to all new construction and alterations, along
with some project-specific information.
SECTIONS: METALS
Section 5 contains standards and guidelines that apply to all new construction and alterations, along
with some project-specific information.
SECTION 6: WOOD AND PLASTICS
Section 6 contains standards and guidelines that apply to all new construction and alterations, along
with some project-specific information.
SECTION?: THERMAL AND MOISTURE REQUIREMENTS
Section 7 contains standards and guidelines that apply to all new construction and alterations, along
with some project-specific information.
SECTION 8: DOORS AND WINDOWS
Section 8 contains standards and guidelines that apply to all new construction and alterations, along
with some project-specific infonnatioa
SECTION 9: FINISHES
Section 9 contains standards and guidelines that apply to all new construction and alterations, along
with some project-specific information.
SECTION 10: SPECIALTIES
Section 10 contains standards and guidelines that apply to all new construction and alterations, along
with some project-specific information.
SECTION 11: EQUIPMENT
Section 11 contains standards and guidelines that apply to all new construction and alterations, along
with some project-specific information.
SECTION 12: FURNISHINGS
No information specific to furnishings is included in this manual. Information on Green
specifications can be obtained from the Architecture, Engineering and Real Estate Branch (AEREB)
and the Green Buildings Council.
SECTION 13: SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
Section 13 contains standards and guidelines that apply to all new construction and alterations, along
with some project-specific information.
SECTION 14: CONVEYING SYSTEMS
Section 14 contains standards and guidelines that apply to all new construction and alterations, along
with some project-specific information.
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Introduction
SECTION 15: MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 15 contains standards and guidelines that apply to all new construction and alterations, along
with some project-specific information.
SECTION 16: ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 16 contains standards and guidelines that apply to all new construction and alterations, along
with some project-specific information.
APPENDICES Several appendices are included with this document. They contain certain necessary project-specific
and generic information, descriptions, procedures, and data that are required for the project but are
too lengthy and detailed to be included in the main document. Included in these appendices are
guideplates of room data and floor plans for specific room types. These guideplates illustrate
minimum dimensions, handicapped access, equipment, furnishing layouts, and specific room
requirements for finishes; heating, ventilation, and air-conditioning (HVAC); electrical power,
plumbing; and communications.
INDEX The Index provides an alphabetical listing of topics contained in this Manual referenced to paragraph
numbers.
USE OF THIS MANUAL
This Manual does not relieve the architects, engineers, and consultants of any of their responsibilities as design
professionals. It is intended only to clarify and supplement existing codes and requirements to facilitate the design
process for the design professional and the offerer. The architect, engineers, and consultants who will be involved in
the design of an EPA-occupied laboratory, office, or storage facility shall be licensed professionals in their fields of
expertise and shall be experienced in the design of such facilities. They will be required to ensure that all portions of
the project comply with all established applicable codes, regulations, and practices for laboratory facilities, as well as
with this Manual.
This document establishes basic design parameters. It is a set of standards and guidelines that must be used in
programming and designing a laboratory.
FORMATTING AND PARAGRAPH NUMBERING
The paragraphs in each section of this Manual are considered to be subsections and are identified by a hierarchical
numbering system. When a paragraph is not numbered, it should be considered pan of the preceding subsection.
When subsections from this Manual are used in the project-specific manual, the subsections shall have the same
numbers that they have in this Manual. Because the subsections of the project-specific manual are not renumbered,
the project-specific manual can be directly compared and referenced to subsections in this generic Manual. When
subsections from this Manual are not used, those numbers are omitted from the project-specific manual. As an
alternative, the project-specific manual may contain all subsection numbers from this Manual, with the notation "this
subsection not used" inserted after those numbers not included in the project-specific manual.
END OF INTRODUCTION
XI
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data
Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data
1.1 General Scope of Project
1.1.1 PURPOSE
A description and purpose of any proposed new facility shall be provided. The following questions are among
the items to be addressed when a new facility is under consideration:
• Does the new facility construction replace an old facility or a number of facilities?
• Does the new facility construction represent expansion of an existing facility or the addition of new square
footage without moving the current operation?
• Does the new facility construction represent consolidation?
• Has a specific site been established?
• Are there special studies that must be performed early in the project development, such as analysis of
whether a group must consolidate or whether more or less space is required?
• Is the proposed project required for the upgrade and/or improvement of the efficiency of existing
operations?
1.1.2 PLANNING STUDIES, EVALUATIONS, AND REPORTS
A list of all planning documents, studies, evaluations, and reports shall be provided, along with an executive
summary of their conclusions and results.
i
1.2 Background Information
1.2.1 ' EXISTING FACILITY DESCRIPTION
A brief overview and description of all existing facilities, and of the campus if the facilities are so composed,
shall be provided. The use of photographs is encouraged.
1.2.2 FACILITY AND CAMPUS COMPONENTS
A more descriptive short subsection on each component of the facility or campus shall be provided.
1.2.3 FUNCTIONAL ORGANIZATION
A brief introductory description of the organization of the various branches and laboratories in the project and
how they interrelate, and a more detailed description of each branch and laboratory, shall be provided.
1.3 Planning Requirements
1.3.1 PLANNING GOALS
A brief description of the goals of the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and of the subgoals required
to reach each goal shall be provided for any given project. The goals and subgoals should state which current
conditions are good or correct and must be maintained and which current conditions are not good or not
correct and must be resolved or improved. Each subgoal should state any new condition that must be met.
Examples are as follows:
1-1
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data
• Increase interaction and communication among offices and laboratories, among all laboratories, and/or
among all offices, as necessary.
Improve circulation for safety and to minimize travel distances and time.
Consolidate laboratories if such consolidation is necessary and feasible.
Anticipate expansion.
Zone and separate according to function.
Share resources.
Design laboratories according to a modular design plan.
Design the typical laboratory module for flexibility.
Increase efficiency of laboratory module.
Increase flexibility and adaptability.
Decrease maintenance costs.
Enhance image.
Enhance quality of life.
Increase personnel safety.
Define spaces or functions that must be adjacent to one another.
1.3.2 PLANNING OBJECTIVES
Each of the goals listed under Planning Goals shall be defined, and the specific subgoal shall be stated. Each
requirement shall also be noted and described.
1.3.3 PLANNING CRITERIA
Planning criteria must be established and agreed upon in order to establish the net design area for the project
(net design area is defined in subsection 1.5.3). There are likely to be several categories of space, such as
office spaces, laboratory spaces, specialized spaces, and storage spaces. An additional category, exterior areas,
contains space not directly included within the facility and not included in net design area.
1.3.3.1 GROSS AND NET AREA
Cross area represents all net area plus all additional space required to provide a complete and functioning
facility (e.g., egress and other required corridors, stairs, restrooms, mechanical and electrical rooms,
interior and exterior walls, building structure, shafts and similar nonoccupied or nonoccupiable spaces,
and construction). Net area is the gross area less circulation and utility spaces, as defined by the General
Services Administration (GSA). The net area divided by the gross area yields the percentage design
efficiency of the facility. Definitions of net usable and gross usable area (which are distinct from net and
gross design areas) can be obtained from the EPA project officer.
1.3.3.2 INCLUSION OF EXTERIOR AREA
Exterior area is space that is not included within the facility buildings but that must be on the facility site.
This space may be open air and unprotected, such as storage areas for vehicles; semienclosed (for instance,
under a shed roof or in a fenced enclosure), such as fuel storage areas; or totally enclosed, such as a remote
power plant for support services.
1.3.3.3 OFFICE SPACE
Planning criteria must be established for general office and interior support spaces. Criteria may be
established by using the GSA formula, which sets primary square footage for office space for clerical,
administrative, paraprofessional, professional, managerial, and executive personnel at 125 net square feet
per person plus an additional 22 percent, or 27'/z net square feet per person, for support areas. Support
areas do not include storage or specialized spaces. Thus, with this method, 1521/3 net square feet are
allocated per individual. EPA must agree upon the method to be used to establish square footage. The
above (GSA) method of determining general office and interior support space shall be followed unless
specific and demonstrated functional requirements would justify doing otherwise.
1-2
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February1998
Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data
1.3.3.4 LABORATORY-RELATED OFFICE SPACE
Laboratory personnel who must also evaluate and interpret data and prepare written reports and
manuscripts must have some office space outside of the laboratories where they work. The size of these
offices should be computed as indicated in subsection 1.3.3.3. The same standards utilized for the regular
office spaces are applicable to these office spaces, with the added provision that the laboratory-related
office space should be located as close as possible to the laboratory space to which it relates. Laboratory-
related office space shall not be included within the physical laboratory room.
1.3.3.5 LABORATORY SPACE
Planning criteria must be established for modular laboratory space. Square footage may be set at 308 net
design square feet per module. On the basis of EPA functions and tasks, a module size of 11 feet by no
less than 26 feet and no more than 33 feet has been established as the standard that must be followed in
all laboratories except those where functions and tasks would justify using a different standard.
1.3.3.6 SPECIALIZED SPACE
Specialized spaces include special laboratories that do not fit a set module and require square footages
significantly greater than those needed for standard laboratories. Such spaces include pilot plant
operations and animal care facilities. These spaces may or may not need to be located with other modular
laboratory space or office space.
1.3.3.7 STORAGE SPACE
Storage spaces, as herein classified, represent large open storage areas that are required to support
specialty or specific functions; these include, in addition to standard storage space, storage space that is
part of laboratory or office space. This storage space may have to be adjacent to or near a laboratory or
remote from the new facility.
1.3.3.8 DAY-CARE FACILITIES
Day-care centers must comply with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 101, Life Safety Code,
as well as with EPA's guidelines, GSA's Child Care Center Design Guide (PBS-PQ140), and the
licensing requirements of the local jurisdiction. Refer to the Safety Manual for minimum requirements.
1.4 Scope of Requirements
1.4.1 GENERAL
A brief overview of the scope of the specific project requirements shall be provided.
1.4.2 CODES
A brief statement about applicable local codes that must be followed shall be provided here, with a reference
to Appendix A, Codes, Regulatory Requirements, Reference Standards, Trade Organizations, and Guides.
This reference shall include a statement noting that not all potentially applicable codes, requirements,
references, organizations, and guides may be listed. Include the occupancy classification of the facility and
reference to compliance with applicable codes. A code review document shall be produced that documents
the research performed to comply with all applicable codes. This document shall be updated, at a minimum,
at the end of each phase of the project.
1.4.3 FACILITY ORGANIZATION
Program function statements shall be provided for each of the offices, branches, and laboratories involved in
the project and for their interrelationships.
1.4.4 SUMMARY OF REQUIREMENTS
A general description of the required total net area of the new facility shall be provided, excluding all exterior
areas. A general description of the net exterior area shall be provided.
1-3
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data
1.4.4.1 FACILITY SUMMARY
A general listing of net assignable space shall be provided in net area for each of the following types of
ace:
• Office space
* Modular laboratory space
* Specialized space
* Storage space
• Exterior areas
- Vehicle holding
- Fuel storage
. Hazardous material/waste storage.
1.4.4.2 NET AREA SUMMARY
A sample summary chart of total net area is provided in Table 1.4.4.2, Net Area Summary.
1.4.4.3 PERSONNEL SUMMARY
A sample summary chart of personnel, by organization and group, is provided in Table 1.4.4.3, Personnel
Summary.
1-4
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
February 1998
Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data
Table 1.4.4.2 Net Area Summary
(Example for Illustration and Format Only)
Net Area (square feet)
EPA Building
ORD
OAR
OARM
Total
HERL
OD
NTD
GTD
RSD
DTD
ETD
AREAL
OD
ACMD
MRDD
HEFRD
QATSD
EERD
AEERL
OD
GECD
PCD
. ECAO
OSORD
OAQPS
00
ESD
AQMD
TSD
OARM
OD
CMD
HRMD
NCPD
FMSD-O
FMSD-C
NDPD
Office
127,900
41,283
1,375
6,937
10,138
6,000
6,650
10,183
54,325
4,950
14,375
10,500
9,625
7,500
7,375
20,670
3,035
8,170
9,465
9,372
2,250
55,030
55,030
2,935
20,900
19,195
12,000
71.125
71,125
2,250
7,000
3,500
11,250
6,250
6,250
40,875
254,055
Lab
137,597
73,350
0
11,110
16,720
1,100
15,180
31.240
42,120
0
9,680
12,100
6,920
9,020
4,400
16,590
0
3,520
13,070
0
3,537
4,620
4,620
0
0
0
4,620
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
142,217
Special
99,535
38,733
1,320
1,210
1,870
30,583
1,440
2,310
22,305
990
3,190
6,985
4,840
3,860
440
33,482
6,402
3,840
23,240
1,400
3,615
9,385
9,385
2,455
1,680
3,650
1,600
100,415
100,415
600
1,920
1,920
2,525
11,505
23,980
57,965
209,335
Storage
15,470
2,890
600
220
0
1,410
0
660
9,080
5,200
440
220
3,200
0
240
1,100
0
0
1,100
1,600
800
3,680
3,680
0
400
640
2,640
10,023
10,023
150
738
300
300
3,385
0
5,150
29,173
Total
380,722
158,256
3.295
19,477
28.728
39,093
23,270
44,393
128,050.
11,140
27,685
31,805
24,585
20,380
12,455
71.842
9,437
15,530
46,875
12,372
10,202
72,715
72,715
5,390
22,980
23,485
20,860
181,563
181,563
3,000
9,658
5,720
14,075
21,140
23.980
103,990
635,000
The above acronyms are sample organizational codes. Each major organization must be subdivided into its component groups.
1-5
-------
February 1998
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
Table 1.4.4.3
EPA Building
ORD
OAR
OARM
Total
Personnel Summary
HERL
00
NTD
GTD
RSD
DTD
ETD
AREAL
OD
ACMD
MRDD
HEFRD
QATSD
EERD
AEERL
OD
GECD
PCD
ECAO
OSORD
OAQPS
OD
ESD
AQMD
TSD
OARM
OD
CMD
HRMD
NCPD
FMSD-0
FMSD-C
NDPD
Section 1 - General Planning
and Design Data
(Example for Illustration and Format Only)
Office*
893
254
11
42
55
48
40
58
417
22
115
84
77
60
59
142
23
58
61
62
18
418
418
19
160
143
96
567
567
18
56
28
90
50
0
325
1,878
Number of Personnel
Technician**
428
295
0
46
89
35
45
80
60
60
0
0
0
0
0
73
4
23
46
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
108
108
0
0
0
0
0
0
108
536
Total
1,321
549
11
88
144
83
85
138
477
82
115
84
77
60
59
215
27
81
107
62
18
418
418
19
160
143
96
675
675
18
56
28
90
50
0
433
2,414
* Office personnel working in laboratories are shown only as office occupants.
"The term "technician" refers to laboratory personnel who do not have office space outside of the laboratory area.
This is done so that the total personnel count reflects an accurate head count of people.
The above acronyms are sample organizational codes. Each major organization must be subdivided into its component groups.
1-6
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 1 • General Planning and Design Data
1.5 Facility Design and Layout
1.5.1 OVERVIEW
In general, the information contained in this document must apply to existing buildings as well as to any
possible new construction. EPA can only present the generic space requirements, identify the types of spaces
anticipated for the various functions of the facility, identify general technical requirements, and give general
guidance for actual layout. This subsection contains design requirements that shall be used as guides and
references. In addition, model room data sheets are included in Appendix C with examples that provide
general, and some specific, program requirements. Specific program criteria and space identification and
sizes shall be developed during the programming phase of the specific project. The purpose of the
programming phase is to determine the quantitative and qualitative requirements of the specific program and
to relate these requirements to the available budget. Specific project criteria and requirements must be
verified with EPA. The design professional must work in close coordination with EPA to produce the final
building layout in accordance with this document and the guidance gained through consultation with EPA.
Appropriate local, state, and federal regulatory agencies shall also be consulted.
1.5.2 SITE DEVELOPMENT
Design and layout requirements relating to the facility site and exterior environment are discussed in
Section 2, Site Work, of this Manual.
1.5.3 PROGRAMMED SPACE FOR DESIGN AND LAYOUT
The final accepted program shall establish the definite net design area requirements for the facility and shall
establish gross and net area requirements for the exterior areas of the project. Exterior areas are areas that
are not contained within the building envelope of the main facility but must be on-site. An understanding of
the design efficiency of the facility and all exterior areas provides the foundation for the layout of all on-site
requirements. EPA may require additional space in remote facilities; however, these facilities are not a part
of the program established by this document.
1.5.3.1 EFFICIENCY
Net design area for the project is established by the planning goals and objectives and the planning criteria
defined in subsection 1.3. The planning goals and objectives, along with the established typical generic
or specific laboratory requirements, as defined in the room data sheets included in Appendix C, produce
a design efficiency for research facilities of this type (ratio of net to gross area). Generally, the design
efficiency ratio ranges from approximately SO percent to 65 percent, with an average efficiency of
approximately 58 percent.
1.5.3.2 EXPANSION
Providing for future expansion is an integral part of the requirements for any new EPA project. The
design professional shall review and/or confirm with EPA all anticipated expansion needs and shall
recommend methods of accommodating expansion to meet these anticipated needs, as well as addressing
future expansion beyond the anticipated needs. The design professional shall be responsible for
recommending the direction(s) of expansion, after consultation with EPA. All expansion shall be
accommodated in a logical manner, both programmatically and by construction sequencing. For new
construction, EPA expects provision for a 25 percent expansion.
• Corridor layout and circulation patterns shall enhance flexibility and aid in future expansion. Open
plans, which allow greater flexibility in expansion and general facility changes, are encouraged where
feasible, practical, and permitted by EPA.
• Floor plans that encircle a department with permanent corridors, stairs, mechanical and electrical
rooms, or other fixed building elements that are difficult to relocate should be avoided.
1-7
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data
* Column-free functional areas should be maximized, and use of transfer beams should be minimized.
• Anticipated expansion must be reviewed by representatives of all disciplines on the project.
• Expansion space shall be designed for each type of space used in the facility and for parking facilities.
* Electrical, mechanical, plumbing, and other support systems should be designed and sized to permit
modification and expansion with the least cost and least disruption to overall operations.
- Utilities and support services, such as heating, ventilation, and air-conditioning (HVAC);
plumbing; and electrical systems, shall allow expansion or contraction in the services provided.
The location of utilities and support services and the size of lines, method of connection, and
valving shall be such as to minimize interruption of service, maximize the systems' accessibility
to the space they service, and allow access to each module of the system for service and repair
without disrupting services in other modules.
• Design drawings that show existing building and site conditions along with proposed building and site
designs are required to show both proposed building and expansion areas. All drawings shall be at
the same scale. Enlarged studies of selected areas may be included. However, EPA desires a complete
overview massing of the entire site for each proposed design, with expansion and flexibility clearly
defined.
1.5.4 PLANNING OF EXTERIOR AREAS AND FACILITIES
The types of spaces included as exterior areas are listed in subsection 1.3.3.2. Information for specific facility
design and layout is provided in subsection 1.5, Facility Design and Layout, and subsection 2.4, Site
Development Exterior areas may include the following areas and facilities:
1.5.4.1 OUTSIDE SERVICE AREAS
Outside service areas comprise:
Meters
Vaults
Transformers
Dumpsters
Compactor units
Emergency generators
Oxygen tank/manifold
Pressure reducers
Valves
Pump hoses
Loading docks.
1.5.4.2 ANCILLARY FACILITIES
Ancillary facilities are appurtenant facilities that are required by the building program and must be located
immediately outside of a laboratory or specialty space or in close proximity to that space.
1.5.5 ARCHITECTURAL REQUIREMENTS
The architectural design of all EPA facilities must meet the requirements set forth in the following
subsections. Goals and guidelines to be considered in the architectural design process are also presented.
1-8
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data
1.5.5.1 GENERAL
Hie architecture of any proposed EPA facility shall be functional and flexible—capable of keeping pace
with the changes that are continually occurring in EPA programs. Facility components shall be organized
in a functional and aesthetic manner, according to a modular design concept that addresses the needs of
all users of the facility. The facility should blend in with its natural and man-made environment. The
design should provide for reduced energy consumption as called for in these design guidelines.
1.5.5.1.1 LIGHTING
Use of natural light should be maximized where possible. Proposed nonlaboratory work areas that are
above grade and contiguous with an outside wall shall have windows. Goals set forth in EPA's Green
Lights Program shall be followed throughout the facility.
1.5.5.1.1.1 LABORATORY LIGHTING
Lighting considerations for laboratory space include adequate task lighting; use of natural lighting,
where feasible; and reduced energy consumption.
• Laboratories require a high quality of lighting for close investigative work in order to eliminate
eye strain and fatigue. Task lighting must be bright, uniform, and glare free. Lighting fixtures
must be so positioned as to provide shadow-free illumination of the laboratory work area.
• The introduction of natural light into the laboratory provides operators with an opportunity for
visual relief from the pressures and stress of the work environment. This issue presents design
challenges in large, multistoried facilities and has significant impact on planning and
functional zoning concepts. Whenever possible, and unless achievement of this end is in direct
conflict with functional requirements, laboratories shall be located in a way that maximizes
natural daylight. Windows in laboratory spaces shall be fixed-panel, nonoperable windows.
Laboratories utilizing photographic and optical diagnostic techniques shall have blackout
capability.
1.5.5.1.2 QUALITY-OF-LIFE STANDARDS, LABORATORIES
This subsection establishes quality-of-life standards for laboratory spaces in the facility. Comfortable
work environments stimulate productivity, enhance recruitment, and help EPA retain top scientific
investigators.
1.5.5.1.3 FLEXIBILITY AND ADAPTABILITY
The building itself and all of its systems—architectural, mechanical, and electrical—shall be as
flexible and adaptable as possible because functions and related laboratory operations often change.
The proposed building(s) and systems shall allowfor future space adjustments with minimal disruption
to ongoing activities.
1.5.5.1.4 MODULAR DESIGN
Modular design is the concept upon which flexible laboratory facilities are based. In this design, the
laboratory module represents the fundamental planning and organizing element. The discipline of
repetitiveness and regularity of size, shape, and arrangement of space provides the ability to convert
and renovate space quickly on the basis of each investigator's unique set of laboratory design
requirements and demands.
1.5.5.1.4.1 PLANNING MODULE
The laboratory planning module establishes a dimensional discipline for dividing space and a
method of calculating laboratory systems requirements and distribution concepts. The intent is to
determine common denominators for space and systems that will accommodate a variety of
functions and uses. As changes are required, the modular planning approach allows the expansion,
1-9
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data
subdivision, or reconfiguration of rooms without disturbing adjacent spaces or altering or forcing
shutdown of, central building utility systems.
• A modular design is required. The planning module size represents the size thought to be most
responsive to user requirements. The design professional shall, therefore, study the
requirements, evaluate the equipment and instrumentation needed for each laboratory, and
either use the planning module size or propose other module sizes that architecturally and
operationally will provide the required features.
• The structural system shall allow for future changes in various mechanical and utility services.
Floor-loading capability shall be uniform throughout the building to permit space usage
conversions.
• Laboratory systems capacity must be determined on the basis of a common per-module
denominator that anticipates future needs. In this determination, each module represents a unit
of capacity for the building system (e.g., gallons of water, watts of power, cubic feet per minute
[dm] of supply and exhaust air). This generic method of calculating systems distribution
ensures adequate building utility systems capacity and prevents costly shutdown and
reconstruction of primary building systems components.
• Modular laboratory design shall integrate primary building systems (HVAC, piping, electrical
power, and communications) into a distribution loop with modulated, consistent, recurring
points of distribution relative to each planning module. These points of distribution give each
module access to all laboratory systems; any additional services required in the future can easily
be extended from the main distribution loop to the point of use. Each module shall have a
readily accessible disconnect from each building system.
• Building systems must be readily accessible for maintenance and servicing. Components that
require routine servicing should be located in corridor ceiling spaces or other spaces outside
the laboratory perimeter. Servicing building systems components inside the laboratories is
disruptive and difficult because of the amount of scientific equipment that must be protected.
Whenever systems components are placed above ceilings, a lay-in type ceiling should be used,
or access panels installed, to facilitate access for servicing and maintenance.
1.5.5.1.4.2 SIZE OF LABORATORY MODULE
The size of a laboratory module shall be as follows:
• The width of the laboratory module shall always be at least 11 feet, from the centerline of the
walls framing the laboratory module.
• The depth of a laboratory module should not be less than 26 feet or more than 33 feet. Within
these limits, size shall be determined on the basis of the task requirements and shall be
consistent throughout a given block of laboratory rooms within a laboratory building.
1.5.5.1.4.3 EXPANSION
Recognizing the probability of future expansion, a plan should be established that zones the facility
horizontally and/or vertically and accommodates future growth in a logical manner. This plan
must establish a framework for central building systems, which framework can easily be extended
or added to depending on the amount of growth.
1-10
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data
1.5.5.2 ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS
All entrances to the facility must be clearly defined. There shall be only one main entrance, although
access to this main entrance may be from a variety of directions. The following are general design
requirements for the main entrance:
• Means of egress shall comply with all applicable codes, with particular attention to the fire safety
requirements in NFPA101 and Chapter 4, paragraph 4, of the Safety Manual.
• The main entrance shall be consistent with the design of the facility. The design of the space(s) and
the material selection shall express EPA's and the facility's position in the world environmental
community. Materials shall be high quality and durable,
• All entry spaces should be open, airy, and inviting to the entrant
• The main entrance must be easily recognizable and allow easy transition to other facility areas by first-
time users of the facility.
• The building subdivisions and the arrangement of exits, corridors, vestibules, lobbies, and rooms
should allow fast and orderly exit in case of emergency and provide appropriate security for personnel,
property, and experiments. The facility and interior modules shall have controllable access, which
should ensure a safe and secure working environment.
• A security control station shall be at the main entrance, and security personnel shall have good visual
control over the building's main entrance and lobby space, as well as monitor control over all other
exits and entrances.
- Often a full-time security station is not economically justified by the amount of staff and visitor
traffic through the main entrance of the facility. The receptionist may need to fulfill the security
role.
• Administrative areas shall be near security control stations.
• The receptionist shall support the security control staff, and the reception and security control areas
shall be at the same location within the entrance/lobby area.
• The lobby shall be sized and designed to accommodate the special concerns of tours while maintaining
discrete security and function.
1.5.5.3 AMENITIES
A workplace that encourages communication, interaction, and collaboration among its users enhances
worker productivity and increases employee retention. Staff interaction, especially in laboratory facilities,
must be promoted by the design solution. Functional organization and relationships that promote such
interaction must be utilized. Strategic location of common support areas (i.e., conference rooms,
restrooms, coffee and vending areas, clerical support services, and supplies) and carefully considered
circulation patterns shall be incorporated to foster meaningful interaction. It is also important to provide
a place to safely consume food and drink outside of the laboratory. Building amenities must be dedicated,
neutral spaces that are protected from encroachment and future conversion.
1.5.5.4 HANDICAPPED ACCESS
The design and layout of an EPA facility must ensure that the facility is accessible to the physically
challenged, in accordance with the Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS) (1988) adopted by
the GSA in 41 CFR Parts 101-19.6, the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), and all other applicable
federal, state, and local laws and standards for buildings and facilities required to be accessible to and
1-11
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data
usable by physically challenged people (barrier-free design). Where different laws and standards are in
conflict, the most stringent code shall apply. If there is difficulty in determining which code is most
stringent, the Government reserves the right to make the final decision on the interpretation of all codes.
1.5.5.4.1 GENERAL ACCESSIBILITY
General access to the facility and any portion thereof shall be based on common sense design and shall
comply with all applicable standards, guidelines, and codes, including ADA and GSA 41 CFR Parts
101-19.6. EPA recognizes that the facility will not be designed only for physically challenged
individuals. All applicable requirements shall be clearly understood, and the final design shall not
only meet these requirements but shall apply their essence in a commonsense manner throughout the
facility. At a minimum, the design shall meet and exceed all applicable standards, guidelines, and
codes. Other aspects of general access are as follows:
• Avoid crossing pedestrian and vehicular circulation paths.
• Provide adequate circulation space at points of traffic congestion and provide architectural features
that emphasize overall circulation patterns and major entrances.
• Avoid confusing corridor systems and extensions of through corridors from department to
department
• Avoid horseshoe-shaped major corridor systems that require excessive walking distances.
• Avoid dead-end departmental corridors.
• Minimize single-loaded corridors.
• Eliminate major corridors through elevator lobbies or through other areas that tend to concentrate
circulation patterns.
• Locate vertical transportation so that it is visible from major entrances.
1.5.5.4.2 LABORATORY ACCESSIBILITY
Accommodating the handicapped in a laboratory demands a design that is flexible, adaptable, and
common sense. The environment must function properly within handicapped regulatory requirements
of the law and must offer safety for the users. Casework in all laboratories shall be capable of being
modified to meet accessibility requirements at minimum cost Some general criteria for handicapped
accommodation in laboratories are as follows:
. • The handicapped-accessible workstation shall provide a work surface that is 30 inches above the
floor, with all wheelchair clearances below. Adjustable work surfaces that provide a range of
height adjustments shall be considered for all such workstations.
• Utilities, equipment, and equipment controls for laboratory furniture should be within easy reach
of persons who are physically handicapped and have limited mobility. Controls shall have single-
action levers or blade handles for easy operation.
• Aisle widths and clearances shall be adequate for maneuvering of wheelchair-bound individuals.
Aisle widths of 60 inches are required.
• Handicapped-accessible workstations shall be located as close to laboratory exits and safety showers
as possible.
1-12
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data
1.5,5.5 EXTERIOR BUILDING MATERIALS
In selecting building materials, careful consideration shall be given to all technical criteria.
1.5.5.5.1 EXTERIOR ELEMENTS
Mechanical, electrical, transportation, and equipment elements that are to be located on the exterior
of the facility shall be integrated elements of the design. These elements include air intake and
exhaust vents, exterior lights, utility connections, plumbing vents, fuel tank vents, liquid oxygen tanks,
transformers, trash compactors, containers, loading docks, condensers, coolingtowers, and mechanical
equipment
Mechanical equipment should not be located on roofs, due to vibration concerns, unless it is totally
impractical to do otherwise. .If mechanical or other equipment is located on the roof, particular
attention must be paid to the vibration and to isolating such vibration inside the building. The
equipment must also be aesthetically screened. Screening shall be designed to aesthetically hide the
equipment and to prevent the entrance of rain into the fresh-air intakes of the facility and to prevent
entrainment of laboratory exhaust air into the fresh-air intakes of the facility and adjacent facilities.
t
1.5.5.5.2 DESIGN CHARACTERISTICS
The design characteristics of wall schemes shall be evaluated in terms of aesthetics, function, and cost
effectiveness with respect to the following:
• Moisture transport.
*
• Thermal performance.
• Aesthetic appropriateness.
• Historic considerations (if applicable and appropriate).
• Durability (life cycle maintenance costs).
• Exterior wall termination at the roof or top of parapet walls (including penthouse).
• Construction and control joint locations, considering impact on construction sequence and building
movement due to expansion and contraction.
• Corner conditions, especially material relationships at the intersection of vertical planes and the
continuity of wall supports and flashings.
• Load transfer of the wall to the structure, including consideration of structural frame exposure and
lateral wall supports.
• Weathertight design, including sealant profiles, material adjacencies, and flashing configuration.
• Window placement relative to the wall, secondary connection requirements, material adjacencies,
window washing, glass type and thickness, and life safety hardware.
Refer to Section 7, Thermal and Moisture Requirements, of this Manual for additional information on
exterior building requirements in relation to thermal and moisture protection.
1-13
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data
1.5.5.6 PARTITIONS
Standardization of interior partitions is desirable. Partitions within the administrative area should be
easily removable. Sound isolation and laboratory partitions between modules shall be designed to be
removable in order to accommodate future reconfiguration of spaces.
1.5.5.6.1 SUBDIVIDING PARTITIONS
Office subdividing partitions shall comply with the applicable local building code requirements. These
partitions must be provided at a ratio of 1 linear foot per 10 square feet of space. Partitioning over
interior office doors is included in the measurement. Partitions must extend from the finished floor
to the finished ceiling and have a flame spread rating of 25 or less, a smoke development rating of 450
or less (American Society for Testing and Materials [ASTM] E-84 Test), and a minimum sound
transmission loss (STL) rating of 40.
1.5.5.6.2 PERMANENT PARTITIONS
Permanent partitions must be provided, as necessary, to surround stairs, corridors, elevator shafts,
toilets, janitor closets, meeting and conference rooms, and mechanical rooms. They shall have a flame
spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke development rating of 450 or less (ASTM E-84 Test). Stairs,
elevators, and other floor openings shall be enclosed by partition(s) and have the fire resistance
required by applicable codes. These partitions shall extend from the floor to the underside of the
structure above, shall effectively isolate sound and vibration, and shall meet all fire separation
requirements.
1.5.6 SPACE IDENTIFICATION
Specific information will be provided for each project
1.5.7 SPECIFIC ROOM REQUIREMENTS
This subsection describes information and design requirements for specific rooms and areas.
1.5.7.1 ROOM DATA SHEETS
A typical room data sheet, which can be used for various anticipated functions, is contained in Appendix
C, along with examples of how to use room data sheets. These room data sheets must indicate specific
room or laboratory requirements and identify appropriate installed equipment. Location of fume hoods
within laboratory spaces shall conform with the specifications of Appendix C, as applicable. The design
professional will be responsible for the final design for these areas, after consultation with representative
facility users and approval by EPA.
1.5.7.2 STANDARDS AND SYMBOLS
In addition to specific requirements, standard requirements for each area and room must be identified in
the various sections of the guidelines. An annotated example of a listing and definitions of standard
requirements, symbols, and abbreviations (where used) shall be presented in this subsection of the project-
specific manual.
1.5.7.3 SPECIAL EQUIPMENT
The list of movable equipment and furnishings required on the room data sheets is meant to provide
assistance in determining the anticipated demand loads for electrical, HVAC, plumbing, specialty gas, and
other piped services connections. All special equipment will be furnished by EPA unless otherwise
identified during the program verification and design phase of the specific project. The exceptions are
major fixed pieces of equipment requiring hard-connected electrical and piped utility services and HVAC
(e.g., fume hoods, environmental rooms, glassware washers). Each room and area housing special
equipment must have the utilities, electrical power, and HVAC capability necessary to ensure the
equipment's proper and efficient operation.
1-14
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data
1.5.8 GUIDE FOR ARCHITECTURAL LAYOUT
The concept for architectural layout should be to group all administrative functions and all technical functions
into separate organizational blocks of space while keeping them sufficiently close together to facilitate and
encourage employee interaction. The guiding principle in developing this basic concept shall be the
separation of the facility into three definable zones: administrative with support, laboratory, and building
support. This division will allow not only the most flexibility for facility design, but also the most cost-
effective construction. In reference to the interior space of a building or facility, the following definitions
apply:
* Rooms and spaces refer to individual divisions of space, each one usually defined or enclosed by partitions
or walls.
• Blocks are groups or series of rooms or spaces, usually having similar orientation and adjacencies.
• Zones are composed of two or more blocks of spaces, often providing the same or similar functionality.
1.5.8.1 ADJACENCIES
The building design concept shall establish the appropriate horizontal and vertical alignments of the
facility to facilitate required programmatic relationships. Floor plate areas shall be optimized to
accommodate the required occupancies and to allow for future expansion or alterations.
1.5.8.1.1 LABORATORY ZONE
This zone shall include all laboratories and laboratory support blocks within an individual branch or
section. Laboratory-related office blocks shall be located in close proximity to related laboratories and
laboratory support blocks. These offices shall be across from related laboratory space or in "clusters"
along a laboratory related corridor. The laboratory block(s) shall utilize a modular laboratory planning
concept to maximize flexibility and adaptability of research space. Window exposure for both offices
and laboratories should be maximized.
1.5.8.1.2 ADMMSTRATTVE-WITH-SUPPORTZONE
The administrative-with-support zone should be physically separated from the laboratory zone in the
same building. Building links between the administrative-with-support zone and the laboratory zone
shall house pleasant and comfortable interaction spaces, such as a lounge. Administrative-with-
support spaces shall include, but shall not be limited to, break areas, restrooms, copier areas,
mailrooms, and conference areas.
1.5.8.1.3 BUILDING SUPPORT ZONE '
The building support zone should be located adjacent to the laboratory zone to facilitate the movement
of equipment and material to and from the laboratories. Its location shall be determined in accordance
with the site master plan and should optimize service vehicle circulation. The building support zone
design shall house a receiving dock, facility physical plant, mechanical equipment, and central storage.
An isolated hazardous materials/waste storage facility (HMSF) shall be located near this zone to
facilitate transportation and handling of explosive/flammable materials, toxic chemicals, and
biohazardous waste before disposal at an off-site location by a licensed contractor.
1.5.8.2 BUFFER ZONES
The buffer zone between the EPA facility and other existing or potential sites for building(s) shall be no
less than 100 feet. The HMSF shall be at least 50 feet away from any building or potential sites for
building(s). Both the main facility and the HMSF shall be located at least 50 feet away from the property
line. Existing highways and streets can be part of the 100-foot buffer zone. Paved parking area(s) for
vehicles can be considered as part of the building buffer zone.
1-15
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data
1.5.8.3 TECHNICAL SPACE
Research support personnel (i.e., technicians, postdoctoral employees, laboratory assistants) should be
provided with work space outside of the laboratory room in order to minimize long-term exposure to
laboratory chemicals and the hazards presented by their use. Technician space, such as shared offices,
alcoves, and cubicles, does not have to be directly outside of the laboratory as long as it can be placed
reasonably close to the laboratory. Some desktop work space should also be provided in the laboratory for
laboratory-related reporting and documentation that should not be done at the laboratory bench. These
workstations, where provided, must be so located as to minimize exposure to noxious, or otherwise
hazardous, conditions. The supply air and exhaust distribution system within the laboratory must be
carefully coordinated with the designed work space to provide one or more "clean air" zones. In some
instances, a physical separation, or barrier, may be required between the work space and the laboratory
bench.
1.5.8.4 LABORATORY SUPPORT BLOCK
The laboratory support block is defined as the space that houses common, or shared, activities or
equipment, such as analytical instrumentation, specialized equipment, environmental rooms, and
glassware preparation areas, that indirectly support laboratory activities. These spaces can be interspersed
between laboratories, supporting a specific activity, or can be grouped together adjacent to a block of
laboratories. Particular attention shall be paid to functional relationships among laboratory support spaces
and laboratories, with an emphasis on the efficiency of the travel path of personnel, tasks, and material
within a particular zone and between zones.
1.5.9 ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN REQUIREMENT'S
The facility shall be designed to conserve energy, to avoid the use of construction materials insensitive to the
environment, to efficiently utilize water, to promote effective recycling, to be free of radon, to have excellent
indoor air quality, and to avoid the use of ozone-depleting chemicals.
1.5.9.1 GENERAL
The architectural and engineering design of the facility shall use proven methods, strategies, and
technologies exhibiting respect for, and protection of, the environment. These methods, strategies, and
technologies include the selection of site, materials, and construction systems that prevent infiltration of
radon; to the extent possible, the use of recycled construction materials and construction materials
produced with minimal expenditure of energy, and use of insulation, fire protection, and refrigeration
systems that avoid use of chlorofiuorocarbons (CFCs) and other ozone-depleting chemicals. The facility
shall also be designed to promote the use of natural light and to afford optimum use of energy-efficient
lighting systems (e.g., ballasts, task lighting). The facility shall be designed to meet the requirements of
the EPA Internal Pollution Prevention Program. All EPA buildings should be designed to meet ecological
design criteria, which include maximum use of natural tight, Green Lighting, light fixtures operated by
sensors, recycled material, and other devices that save energy without jeopardizing safety. This section
of the project-specific manual should state that the facility design must meet the requirements of the
following Executive Orders and Memorandum: Executive Order 12856, Federal Compliance with Right-
to-Know Laws and Pollution Prevention Requirements; Executive Order 12873, Federal Acquisition,
Recycling and Waste Prevention; Executive Order 12902, Energy Efficiency and Water Conservation at
Federal Facilities; Executive Order 12843, Procurement Requirements and Policies for the Federal
Agencies for Ozone-Depleting Substances; Executive Order 12845, Requiring Agencies to Purchase
Energy Efficient Computer Equipment; the presidential memorandum on environmentally beneficial
landscaping; or any subsequent or superseding Executive Order relating to the protection of the
environment.
1-16
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data
1.5.9.2 ENERGY-CONSCIOUS DESIGN
Fundamental design decisions related to energy conservation snail be made during the planning stages.
The new design shall utilize passive design techniques to minimize heating and cooling loads. These
techniques include:
• Siting of facilities in relation to sun path, wind, and vegetation.
• Efficient design of building form and envelope in response to climate.
• Reducing cooling load through use of daylighting.
- The use of natural but controlled daylighting shall be maximized to the extent that it does not
conflict with other EPA energy conservation objectives. EPA values natural light and considers
it part of a good working environment The building organization and design concept shall
consider bringing natural light into personnel spaces.
- Size, number, and location of windows shall be determined on the basis of need for natural light
and ventilation and of other energy considerations. All windows in heated or air-conditioned
spaces shall be double-glazed, insulated windows. Low E glass should be used for all exterior
windows. Laboratory windows shall be fixed-pane, nonoperative windows. In an air-conditioned
building where office windows are operative, these windows must have a removable operating
handle.
* Reducing solar heat gains through proper design of solar-shading devices combined with proper
selection and location of building materials. Laboratory windows in particular are sensitive to solar
gain and should be shaded on the exterior from direct rays with efficient devices.
• HVAC systems designed for an integrated, energy-conserving facility.
In addition, the new facility shall meet energy efficiency standards set by the American Society of Heating,
Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE 90-1,1989) for new buildings. The building
design, and all construction features (materials and methods of installation, including mechanical and
electrical systems) shall provide concepts that will reflect reduced energy consumption.
1.5.9.3 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS
EPA wishes to take a very active role in the selection of the materials used in the project and during the
construction process. In this regard, the design professional, in close coordination with EPA, shall
carefully examine the environmental sensitivity of materials and products specified for construction and
build-out for the new facility. EPA will encourage minimal use of products that are insensitive to the
environment during and after manufacture.
1.5.9.3.1 MATERIALS TO BE AVOIDED AND/OR NOT USED
These materials are as follows:
* Insulation containing CFCs and other refrigerants harmful to the environment.
• Products that off-gas chemical pollutants and whose presence is hazardous (e.g., formaldehyde-
treated materials, especially materials containing urea-formaldehyde). (See also EPA/400/1-
91/033, Building Air Quality: A Guide for Building Owners and Facility Managers, December
1991.)
• Products that are not biodegradable when repaired or removed.
1-17
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data
• Products that contain asbestos.
• Lead-containing plumbing, lead-based solder, lead-soldered tanks and valves. These should not
be used for potable drinking water supplies. Drinking water plumbing products (faucets, values,
fittings, piping, etc.) shall be prohibited from use in EPA facilities unless they bear the National
Sanitation Foundation (NSF) standard 61 certifying mark indicating compliance with USEPA
Safety Drinking Water Act
1.5.9.3.2 MATERIALS TO USE
Materials must meet the following requirements:
• Interior architectural systems must be made of nontoxic materials and components and be free of
asbestos, lead-based paints, and toxic fumes. (See the Safety Manual.)
• Materials should minimize the depletion of natural resources and should not require a high energy
input to produce.
* Sanitation finishes shall be nonpenneable, noncorrosive, easily cleaned, and easily maintained.
1.5.9.3.3 RECYCLED CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS
Under Section 6002 of the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA), EPA has set guidelines.
which apply to federal, state, and local procuring agencies using appropriated federal funds, for
purchasing items composed of the highest practicable percentage of recovered materials. EPA wishes
its facility to follow the guidelines, Procurement ofBuilding Insulation Products Containing Recovered
Materials, 40 CFR Part 248, February 17,1989, and Cement and Concrete Containing Fly Ash, 40
CFR Part 249, January 28,1983, within the constraints of cost and required technical performance.
1.5.9.3.4 BUILDING SHELL MATERIALS
The external treatment and materials utilized shall be of proven long-term durability and require
minimum maintenance. The quality of materials shall be consistent with the image and dignity
appropriate to a U.S. agency. Material selection should be based on an anticipated 100-year life cycle.
1.5.9.4 RECYCLING
The facility shall be designed to support an aggressive solid waste management plan. The facility design
shall properly locate, and provide for, spaces that facilitate the collection, separation, compaction, storage,
and shipment of all recyclable materials. General office space, freight elevator area, shipping and storage
area, and loading docks shall be designed with this important activity in mind.
1.5.9.5 RADON ABATEMENT
EPA seeks to limit the presence of radon and radon daughters in the new facility. Site geological surveys
shall be carefully examined to obtain predictive radon infiltration data from subgrade geological
structures. Building materials, such as concrete aggregate and stone, shall be selected from sources with
low probabilities of radioactivity. The level of activity in any area of the building shall not exceed 4
picocuries per liter (pCi/L) of air. In areas known to have high radon in structures, buildings shall be
designed to include preventive techniques such as caulking of all joints between concrete slab and walls
below grade, caulking of all pipe penetrations, and venting of all nonoccupied spaces below grade.
1.5.9.6 ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS
EPA seeks to limit the presence of electromagnetic fields (EMFs) in close proximity to people within the
new facility. Prudent avoidance is required in the routing of electrical power. EPA recommends that the
routing of power throughout the facility be well away from people and offices; for instance, elevator
electrical chases and other electrical chases should be located away from offices and on exterior walls.
1-18
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines ; February 1998
Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data
1.5.9.7 WATER CONSERVATION
EPA requires that the design of new facilities minimise water consumption through the use of water-
saving measures. The facility design shall make use of gray-water recycling where feasible, flow-
restricting spray nozzles for faucets and showers, and low-flow fhishments for fixtures, and shall optimize
the sizing of all plumbing systems.
1.5.9.8 OZONE DEPLETION PROTECTION
Any contribution to depletion of the ozone layer of the geosphere by the use of CFCs will be discouraged.
EPA requires that selection of materials and processes using CFCs be consistent with the guideline goals
related to Protection of Stratosphere Ozone, 40 CFR Part 82, August 1988.
1.5.9.8.1 CHLOROFLUOROCARBONS
Current recommendations, guidelines, and requirements shall be reviewed and addressed.
1.5.9.8.2 REFRIGERANTS
Equipment in an EPA facility may use any significant new alternatives policy (SNAP) approved
refrigerant with zero ozone depletion potential for electrically driven screw or centrifugal chiller
designs. (See Chapter 7 of the Safety Manual.) In addition, a design professional shall specify which
portable refrigerant reclamation/recycling unit is used with each refrigeration system, excluding water-
cooled centrifugal chillers. Ventilation requirements for the chiller plant(s), new or existing, shall
comply with ASHRAE standard 15-1991, Safety Standard for Mechanical Refrigeration.
1.5.9.8.3 HALON
Use of halon for fire protection systems is prohibited. To obtain the most current list of alternatives
approved under SNAP, call the Stratospheric Ozone Protection Hotline at 1-800-296-19% or access
the associated Internet site at http://www.epa.gov/docsyozone/title6/snap/snap.html.
1.5.9.8.4 INSULATION
All work shall be done in accordance with EPA's recommended uses of hydrochlorofluorocarbons
(HCFCs) and hydrofluorocarbons (MFCs) in replacing CFC-based insulation. (See also Chapter 7 of
the Safety Manual.)
1.5.9.9 INDOOR AIR QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
Refer to Appendix B of this Manual for the indoor air quality requirements.
1.6 Special Room Requirements
1.6.1 RESTROOMS
Each men's and women's restroom that is located in the laboratory area shall have shower stalls and adequate
lockers for the laboratory operation and the number of people, men and women, who may be required to use
it. All sanitation finishes shall be nonpermeable, noncorrosive, and easily maintainable.
1.6.1.1 FINISHES
All restrooms shall have ceramic tile to a height of 4 feet 6 inches and wall covering of not less than
13 ounces per square yard or equivalent quality, as approved by the contracting officer, on remaining wall
areas, unless an alternate finish is approved by the contracting officer.
1.6.2 JANITOR CLOSETS
Janitor closets shall be provided in sufficient numbers to service the various areas of the building(s). Each
block shall have at least one janitor closet with mop sink. These rooms shall be equipped with exhaust
ventilation and louvered doors.
1-19
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data
1.7 Hazardous Waste Handling
1.7.1 GENERAL DESIGN ISSUES
Safe handling and storage of hazardous materials within the laboratory spaces, and in the facility generally,
shall be provided. A system for managing hazardous waste materials for the facility must be carefully planned
with EPA and the facility users. The plan shall consider receiving, storage, distribution, use, and waste
removal for all materials utilized in the laboratory spaces of the facility. To reduce the quantities of hazardous
materials stored in the laboratories, the plan must provide for centralized storage areas specifically designed
to store and dispense hazardous materials.
1.7.2 RADIOISOTOPES
Requirements for laboratories using radioisotopes vary depending on the quantity and energy level of the
isotopes utilized. The design professional shall be responsible for verifying and evaluating with the users of
the facility the specific project requirements for the safe storage and handling of radioisotopes. A space shall
be provided near the loading dock of the facility where radioisotope waste containers can be marshaled for
removal from the facility by a certified radioisotope waste contractor.
1.7.3 CHEMICAL STORAGE AND HANDLING
Ventilated cabinets (vented to the outside, either directly, by manifolding, or by connection to fume hood
exhaust stack) must be provided for collection of waste in each laboratory. A central area must be provided
for collection and storage of chemical waste for disposal where the chemical waste disposal contractor can
collect the waste for removal from the facility. Refer to the following subsection.
1.7.4 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS/WASTE STORAGE FACILITY
The storage of flammable and combustible liquids shall comply with the restrictions set forth in 29 CFR
Chapter XVII, paragraph 1910.106(a), (b), (c), (d), (e), and (f). The primary purpose of the HMSF is to
house large quantities of hazardous and flammable materials away from the main laboratory facility and other
structures. The determination of "large quantities" shall be made in conjunction with the facility used and
the Safety, Health and Environmental Management Division (SHEMD). This facility shall be constructed
for the highest hazard rating per applicable building code and in accordance with NFPA 30, Flammable and
Combustible Liquids Code. The facility shall be located at least SO feet from the main facility and from the
property line and shall contain fully enclosed rooms for the separate storage of drum containers, flammable
and combustible liquids, toxic chemicals, and acids. Cylinder gas*q may be in an open space part of the
facility, as long as the space meets all applicable code and safety requirements. If the HMSF is located less
than SO feet from the main facility, then the two must be separated by appropriate fire separation. Whenever
possible, and where required by weather conditions, the HMSF shall be connected to the main laboratory by
a covered walkway.
1.8 Security
1.8.1 ACCESS AND EGRESS
The building subdivisions and the arrangement of exits, corridors, vestibules, lobbies, and rooms shall allow
fast and orderly exit in case of emergency and provide appropriate security for personnel, property, and
experiments. The facility, buildings, and interior modules shall have controllable access, which should ensure
a reasonably safe and secure working environment.
1-20
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data
1.9 Structural Design Requirements
1.9.1 GENERAL
This section applies to the structural elements of buildings and other incidental structures. The structural
elements include, but are not limited to, the following:
• All floor, roof, and wall framing members and slabs.
• All piers, walls, columns, footings, piles, and similar elements of the substructure.
• All other substructures and superstructure elements that are proportioned on the basis of stress, strength,
and deflection requirements.
1.9.1.1 MATERIAL, FRAMING SYSTEMS, AND DETAILS
Material, framing systems, and details shall be compatible with the following:
• Clear space and span requirements.
• Serviceability requirements.
• Applicable fire protection classification, applicable local building code, and/or NFPA 220,
as applicable.
• Security requirements.
• Foundation conditions.
• Future expansion requirements.
• Architectural requirements.
* Climatic conditions.
* Structural design loads for the specific facility and location.
1.9.1.2 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS AND LABOR
Local availability of construction materials and labor force shall be considered in the selection of the
structural system.
1.9.1.3 DESIGN CRITERIA
The structural design drawings shall indicate the design criteria; the structural materials and their
strengths, with applicable material standards; the design loads, including loads that can occur during
construction; and the allowable foundation loads that were used in the design.
1,9.2 CALCULATIONS
Calculations shall be prepared and presented as stated in the following paragraphs.
1.9.2.1 GENERAL
All design (including calculations) shall be performed and checked by a registered structural engineer.
All calculations shall be on S'/i-by-l 1-inch paper. Calculations shall be indexed and every page
numbered. Dividers shall be placed between distinct sections. A summary shall be included describing
the type of structure and indicating the live load capacity of each floor and roof.
1.9,2.2 MANUALLY PREPARED CALCULATIONS
Manually prepared calculations shall be neat and legible. Each sheet shall indicate the structural
consultant's firm name, address, and telephone number. Each sheet shall indicate the designer's name
or initials, the checker's name or initials, and the date prepared. Design assumptions regarding live loads,
material strengths, conditions of fixity, etc., shall be clearly stated. Calculations shall be sufficiently
cross-referenced that a third party can review the calculations without requiring additional information.
1-21
-------
February 1998
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data
1.9.2.3 COMPUTER ANALYSIS AND DESIGN
1-22
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1996
Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data
Computer software used for structural analysis and design shall be from a nationally recognized vendor.
Each separate run shall indicate software licensee, project name and number, engineer's name, and date.
Additional manual annotation shall be provided, if necessary, to adequately cross-reference computer
printouts, so that a third party can review the calculations without requiring additional information.
1.9.3 LOADS
Structures and their elements shall be designed for the loads prescribed in these criteria unless applicable
codes or ordinances provide more stringent requirements. The most stringent requirement shall be used.
1.9.3.1 DEAD LOADS
Dead loads are loads that remain permanently in place. They shall include the weights of all permanent
materials and equipment (including the structure's own weight) supported in, or on, a structure. Load
calculations shall include an allowance for any loadings that are anticipated to be added at a later date.
Initially assumed loads shall be revised so that the final design reflects the configuration shown on the
drawings.
• The minimum allowance for the weights of partitions, where partitions are likely to be rearranged or
relocated, shall be as follows:
- For partition weights of 150 pounds per linear foot (plf) or less, an equivalent uniform dead load
may be used, determined on the basis of the room dimensions (normal to the partition) and the
partition weight in pounds per linear foot, but not less than 20 pounds per square foot (psf)-
- For partition weights above 150 plf, the actual loads shall be used.
- Partitions that are likely to be rearranged or relocated should be calculated as live loads for load
factor design. A factor of 1.1 shall be applied to the live loads due to movable partitions before
application of building code-required live-load factors.
• The unit weights of materials and construction assemblies for buildings and other structures shall be
those given in American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/American Society of Civil Engineers
(ASCE) Standard ANSI/ASCE Standard 7-88. Where unit weights are neither established in that
standard nor determined by test or analysis, the weights shall be determined from data in the
manufacturer's drawings or catalogs.
• Design dead loads shall include the weight of all permanent service equipment. Service equipment
shall include plumbing stacks, piping, heating and air-conditioning equipment, electrical equipment,
flues, fire sprinkler piping and valves, and similar fixed furnishings. The weight of service equipment
that may be removed with change of occupancy of a given area shall be considered as live load.
1.9.3.2 LIVE LOADS
Live loads shall include all loads resulting from the occupancy and use of the structure whether acting
vertically down, vertically up, or laterally. The weight of service equipment that may be removed with
change of occupancy of a given area (e.g., fume hoods) shall be considered as live load. Operating,
moving, stopping, and impact forces shall be considered part of the live loads. Live loads shall include
neither dead loads nor loads from the environment, such as wind, tornado, earthquake, thermal forces,
earth pressure, and fluid pressure.
• Live loads for buildings and other structures shall be those produced by the intended use or occupancy.
In no case shall they be less than the minimum uniform load or concentrated load stipulated in
ANSI/ASCE Standard 7-88, or required by the local building code, whichever is more stringent. A
minimum of 60 psf of hanging load shall be included for any central energy plant or major mechanical
room where significant hanging loads are anticipated.
1-23
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data
• Live loads on roofs shall be as stipulated in ANSI/ASCE Standard 7-88, or as required by local
building codes, whichever is more stringent. Live loads on roofs shall include the minimum roof live
loads or the snow loads and snow drifts or possible rain loads stipulated in the code, whichever
produces the more severe effect An allowance of 10 psf shall be included in the design of all roofs
to allow for one reroofing in the future.
• In continuous framing and cantilever construction, the design shall consider live load on all spans, as
well as arrangements of partial live load that will produce maximum stresses in the supporting
members.
1.9.3.3 SNOW LOADS
Snow loads shall be as calculated in compliance with the provisions of ANSI/ASCE Standard 7-88, or the
requirements of local building codes, whichever is more stringent
1.9.3.4 WIND LOADS
Wind load design for buildings and other structures shall be determined in accordance with the procedures
in ANSI/ASCE Standard 7-88, or local codes, whichever is more stringent, by using the basic wind speed
obtained by the procedures used.
• Exposure "C," as defined in ANSI/ASCE Standard 7-88, shall be used as a minimum for all
construction unless it can be shown that the necessary permanent shielding will be provided by natural
terrain (not including shielding from trees or adjacent buildings).
• To determine the design wind loads, all factors and coefficients stipulated in ANSI/ASCE Standard
7-88 shall be applied to the site-specific basic wind speeds.
• Building additions shall be designed as parts of a totally new building without regard to shielding from
the original building and without regard to lesser wind resistance for which the original building may
have been designed. The possibility that the original portion of the building may require strengthening
because of an increase in the wind loads acting on it shall be considered.
1.9.3.5 SEISMIC LOADS
To comply with Executive Order 12699, Seismic Safety of Federal and Federally Assisted or Regulated
New Building Construction, seismic load design for buildings and other structures shall be determined
in accordance with the recommendations of the Interagency Committee on Seismic Safety in Construction
(ICSSC). Thus, the completed design for all new construction projects shall be submitted along with
proper certification from a registered structural engineer that the design substantially meets or exceeds
the seismic safety level in the National Earthquake Hazard Reduction Program (NEHRP) Recommended
Provisions for the Development of Seismic Regulations for New Buildings.
• Each of the model codes listed below provides a level of seismic safety substantially equivalent to that
provided by use of the NEHRP Recommended Provisions, with the requirement that revisions of these
model codes must be affirmed to be substantially equivalent to or to exceed the then current or
immediately preceding edition of the NEHRP Recommended Provisions, as it is updated triennially.
- The Uniform Building Code, published by the International Conference of Building Officials
(ICBO).
- The National Building Code, published by the Building Officials and Code Administrators
International (BOCA).
- The Standard Building Code, published by the Southern Building Code Congress International
(SBCCI).
1-24
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data
• State, county, local, or other jurisdictional building ordinances adopting and enforcing these model
codes in their entirety without significantly diluting seismic safety are also adequate. In all other
circumstances, substantial equivalency of the ordinances to the seismic safety level contained in the
NEHRP Recommended Provisions must be confirmed by a registered structural engineer.
1.9.3.6 OTHER LOADS
Other load requirements are as follows:
1.9.3.6.1 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
Equipment supports shall be designed to avoid resonance resulting from the harmony between the
natural frequency of the structure and the operating frequency of reciprocating or rotating equipment
(e.g., fume hood exhaust fens, vacuum pumps) supported on the structure. The operating frequency
of supported equipment shall be determined from manufacturers' data before completion of structural
design. Resonance shall be prevented by designing equipment isolation supports to reduce the
dynamic transmission of the applied load to as low a level as can economically be achieved in the
design.
1.9.3.6.2 FOUNDATION OR OTHER RETAINING STRUCTURES
Every foundation or other wall serving as a retaining structure shall be designed to resist, not only the
vertical loads acting on it, but also the incident lateral earth pressures and surcharges, and the
\ hydrostatic pressures corresponding to the maximum probable groundwater level
1.9.3.6.3 RETAINING WALLS
Retaining walls shall be designed for the earth pressures and the potential groundwater levels
producing the highest stresses and overturning moments. When a water-pressure-relief system is
incorporated into the design, only earth pressures need be considered. In cohesive soils, the long-term
consolidation effects on the stability of the walls shall be considered. Lateral earth pressures shall be
determined in accordance with accepted structural and geotechnical engineering practice.
1.9.3.6.4 STRESSES AND MOVEMENTS
The design of structures shall include the effects of stresses and movements resulting from variations
in temperature. The rise and fall in the temperature shall be determined for the localities in which the
structures are to be built. Structures shall be designed for movements resulting from the maximum
seasonal temperature change.
1.9.3.6.5 CREEP AND SHRINKAGE
Concrete and masonry structures shall be investigated for stresses and deformations induced by creep
and shrinkage. For concrete and masonry structures, the minimum linear coefficient of shrinkage shall
be assumed to be 0.0002 inch per inch, unless a detailed analysis indicates otherwise. The theoretical
shrinkage displacement shall be computed as the product of the linear coefficient and the length of the
member.
1.9.3.6.6 VIBRATION-SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT
The design professional shall be responsible for verifying the requirements of, and for, installation of
vibration-sensitive equipment in all laboratory areas. The structural system in laboratory areas shall
be designed to accommodate and control specific high localized frequency loads and vibration inputs
from the general building systems to these sensitive areas. Five controls must be pursued:
• Use of physical separation to keep powerful sources of vibration well clear of the laboratory space.
• Identification and isolation of particular services that involve running speeds close to the natural
frequencies of the floor.
1-25
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 1 • General Planning and Design Data
• Identification and additional isolation of sources that, although they do not match the running
speed of equipment and primary structural response frequencies, may produce sufficient vibration
to cause a threat to the building.
• Identification, and, where possible, appropriate attenuation, of powerful transient impulses from
services (e.g., switching in or out).
• Providing structural stiffliess to reduce the peak acceleration responses caused by footfall-induced
vibration.
1.9.3.7 LOAD COMBINATIONS
Combination of loads, allowable stresses, and strength requirements for buildings and incidental structures
shall be as stipulated in the governing local building code.
1.9.4 STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS
The following paragraphs concern the basic supporting systems of buildings.
1.9.4.1 FOUNDATIONS
The provisions of the local governing building code shall be the minimum requirements for foundation
design. The potential adverse effects of frost heave and movements due to expansive soils shall also be
considered in the design. For all structures, the requirements of standard design criteria shall be met with
respect to determining subsurface conditions, recommending foundation type, establishing allowable soil-
bearing pressure, determining seismic potential, and differential settlement
* Where concrete slab-on-grade construction is used, the slab shall be placed on a capillary waterbarrier
overlying a compacted subgrade. A moisture retardant shall be used under the slab, where moisture
conditions warrant. Excess loads, or equipment subject to vibration, shall be supported by separate
pads isolated from the rest of the floor slab with flexible joints.
1.9.4.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS
Buildings shall be framed to allow for simple formwork, fabrication, and construction procedures.
Structural systems shall be designed for ductile modes of failure to the extent feasible.
• In the selection of a framing system, consideration shall be given to the structure's functional
requirements, including:
- Column-free areas
- Floor-to-ceiling heights
- Number of stories
- Elevator, escalator, crane, and hoist installations
- Heavy loads
- Other requirements pertaining to the specific facility.
• For framed floors, the economy of prefabricated systems shall be considered, especially systems that
simplify the installation of mechanical, electrical, and communications services.
1.9.4.3 LATERAL LOAD-RESISTING SYSTEMS
Lateral load-resisting systems shall be provided to resist the effects of wind, earthquake motions, thermal
forces, soil pressures, and dynamic forces caused by rotating, reciprocating, or moving equipment. Use
systems recognized by the local building code. In the absence of local building code criteria, use structural
systems recognized by the BOCA National Building Code for use in resisting seismic loads.
1-26
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data
1.9.5 BUILDING MOVEMENT JOINTS
Devices, usually in the form of joints, shall be designed into buildings to control movement
1.9.5.1 CONTROL JOINTS
Control joints shall be provided in all materials subject to drying shrinkage. Control joint size and spacing
shall be based on a rational analysis.
1.9.5.2 EXPANSION JOINTS
Expansion joints shall be provided in all materials subject to thermal expansion. Expansion joint size
shall be based on a rational analysis. In the absence of local building code requirements, building
expansion joints shall be provided as recommended in the publication Expansion Joints in Buildings
(Federal Construction Council of the Building Research Advisory Board).
1.9.5.3 SEISMIC JOINTS
When seismic design is required, building expansion joints shall be seismic type. Buildings shall be
separated adequately to prevent contact during an earthquake that would damage the structural systems
of the buildings.
1.10 Lease Administration
For a leased facility the following topics must be included in the Solicitation for Offers. The required
information in this section shall be provided by EPA for each specific project. Contact the project officer for
project information.
DEFMTION OF GROSS AREA
NET USABLE SQUARE FEET
General
Square Feet
Appurtenant Areas and Facilities
VENDING FACILITIES
JANITORIAL SERVICES
MAINTENANCE AND TESTING OF SYSTEMS
General
Testing
Watertight Integrity
Additional Requirements
FLAG DISPLAY
General
Display
SAFE AIR CONTAINMENT LEVELS
General
Asbestos
Post-Asbestos-Abatement Monitoring
Abatement Actions Other than Removal
Nonfriable Asbestos
Abatement Plan
Inspection and Testing
1-27
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data
1.10.1 OFFER REQUIREMENTS
HO WTO OFFER
OVERVIEW OF SERVICES •
PHASES, TASKS, AND DELIVERABLES
OFFER DUE DATE
OCCUPANCY
TERM
NEGOTIATIONS
PRICE EVALUATION
AWARD
CONSTRUCTION
FIRE PROTECTION/OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENTAL SAFETY
HANDICAPPED AND SEISMIC SAFETY
ALTERNATE PROPOSALS
QUALIFICATION CRITERIA
EVALUATION FACTORS FOR AWARD
END OF SECTION 1
1-28
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 2-Site Work
Section 2 - Site Work
2.1 Scope of Project
2.1.1 GENERAL
The location, type of building and support facility proposed, impact on site development, and general scope
of work shall be described for the project. The description shall include such elements as access roads,
parking areas, and loading and unloading areas.
2.1.2 DEVELOPMENT CODES
All projects must comply with the applicable zoning and building codes and with the requirements of the
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). Information on applicable codes must be provided as stated in the
following subsections.
2.1.2.1 ZONING
A brief overview of local zoning and land development codes and their impact on site development shall
be given for the proposed project
2.2.2.2 BUILDING CODES
Description of the applicable building codes shall be provided, with any specific references to seismic,
floodplain, or coastal development as it relates to site development.
2.1.2.3 ADA REQUIREMENTS
The proposed project will comply with current federal (28 CFR Parts 35 and 36), state, and local ADA
guidelines for the physically disabled.
2.2 Site Influences
2.2.1 LAND RESOURCES
Information shall be provided on the geography, geology, climate, and hydrology of the site areas.
2.2.1.1 SITE VICINITY
The geographic location of the project shall be described. Site location with respect to designated
floodplains will be noted. EPA facilities shall not be located within the 100-year floodplain. Appropriate
information on the local area economy, business, and industry shall also be provided.
2.2.1.2 PHYSIOGRAPHY AND GEOLOGY
A general description ofknown site geology and physiography shall be provided. Appropriate information
shall be taken from the preliminary geotechnical investigation if this has been performed and is available
when information is being gathered for this document. Site planning must consider seismic effects and
the geological, foundation, and tsunami (seawave) hazards often associated with earthquakes. Probability
with respect to severity and frequency of ground shaking varies from one geographic region to another;
regions in which there are similar hazard factors are identified as seismic zones. Refer to the National
Earthquake Hazards Reduction Program to determine the seismic zone in which the site is located. Site
planning must avoid fault zones because damage caused by ruptures along a fault cannot be prevented by
reasonable design and construction practices.
2-1
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 2-Site Work
2.2.1.3 CLIMATOLOGY
The specific climatic conditions of the proposed site shall be described, especially precipitation and
predominant wind directions and highest expected wind gust on the site. Where available, local
precipitation data shall be used in lieu of regional data for specific site hydrologic modeling.
2.2.1.4 HYDROLOGY
A general description of site hydrology shall be provided. This description shall include data taken from
the preliminary geotechnical investigation and the Soil Conservation Service soil survey. The following
specific site information shall be assembled for use in the hydrologic modeling of the project:
Geographic location.
Precipitation frequency data.
Drainage area.
Soil and cover.
Runoff distribution.
Groundwater.
Rainfall intensity-duration curves based on historic record should be developed and used for each
locale. The design storm events shall be based on a study of precipitation frequency, runoff potential,
and runoff distribution relative to the physical characteristics of the watershed. Where available,
stream gauge data shall be used to estimate design flows in major channels. Where stream gauge data
are inadequate or unavailable, rainfall information shall be taken from documented sources, such as
National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration/U.S. Weather Bureau Technical Paper No. 40.
Design storm precipitation values taken from documented sources or derived by published engineering
methodology shall be used to estimate design flood discharges.
2.2.2 TRANSPORTATION SYSTEMS
The transportation requirements of the project and the project's relationship to and effect on existing roadways
shall be described.
2.2.2.1 AIR
A general description of project requirements for heliports or airfields shall be provided
2.2.2.2 LAND
A general description of the proposed project and its location relative to existing roadways shall be
provided. Development of the proposed facility and the impacts on the existing roadway system shall be
addressed. This assessment shall include references to the traffic impact analysis if such an analysis is
required for the project. For sites located in metropolitan areas with extensive public transportation
systems, access to public transportation is desirable.
2.2.2.3 WATER
A general description of project requirements relative to boating shall be provided, including requirements
for marinas, docking and/or storage facilities, seawalls and refueling facilities. Applicable permitting
requirements of federal, state, and local agencies shall also be addressed.
2.2.3 ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS
The project's effects on air quality, water quality, and noise levels shall be addressed. This subsection also
provides requirements related to environmental justice and community involvement.
2.2.3.1 AIR QUALITY
The impact of the proposed project on air quality shall be addressed. The assessment shall include all
sources of air emissions and compliance with the requirements of federal, state, and local agencies.
2-2
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 2 - Site Work
2.2.3.2 WATER RESOURCES
The proposed project's impact on available water resources, including both ground and surface waters,
shall be addressed.
2.2.3.3 NOISE POLLUTION
Any noise pollution that will be associated with the proposed project, its impact on surrounding
development, and the project's compliance with applicable zoning and land development codes on noise
pollution shall be addressed.
2.2.3.4 ENVIRONMENTAL JUSTICE
Environmental justice should be considered in selecting a location for a new EPA facility. Communities
involved should be given the opportunity to participate in the selection of the site and in the identification
of ways to reduce adverse environmental effects that negatively affect human health.
2.3 Site Investigation
2.3.1 SITE SURVEYS
The design professional shall be responsible for providing site investigations, land (metes and bounds)
surveys, and an environmental assessment of the site. Site investigations, land surveys, and environmental
assessments shall be performed by registered professional engineers and/or land surveyors, as applicable.
At a minimum, the survey(s) shall show legal property boundaries, easements^ and legal restrictions, as well
as all man-made and natural physical characteristics, utility service locations (temporary and permanent),
horizontal and vertical controls, benchmarks, roadways, and parking areas. Land surveys should conform
to the requirements of General Services Administration (GSA) document PBS-PQ280, as applicable.
The degree of accuracy of construction, control, property, and topographic surveys shall be consistent with
the nature and importance of each survey. Where required by law (i.e., applicable state statutes), all control
and property surveys at EPA sites shall be performed by, or under the supervision of, a professional land
surveyor registered in the state in which the site is situated.
2.3.1.1 PRELIMINARY SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION
Preliminary subsurface exploration shall be performed by a registered geotechnical engineer. The
registered geotechnical engineer shall supervise all required testing, review and analyze all data and
samples, and submit a report. All tests shall be performed by independent testing laboratories. Subsurface
investigations should conform to the requirements of GSA document PBS-PQ280, as applicable.
2.3.1.2 ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT
Design and environmental professionals selected by EPA will evaluate the effects that the additions and
improvements will have on the local environment. Under the purview of the National Environmental
Policy Act (NEPA), an environmental assessment (EA) may also be required, which will determine the
need for an environmental impact statement (EIS). The EA should conform to EPA environmental
assessment requirements, as applicable. The preparation of the environmental assessment, if required,
may be included as a part of the professional services contract. See also Chapter 7, paragraph 9, of the
Safety Manual.
2.3.1.3 OUTDOOR POLLUTANT SOURCES
The facility shall meet the indoor air quality requirements described in Appendix B of this document. To
address these requirements, primary strategies for indoor air quality control, as listed in Appendix B,
subsection B. 1.1.2, shall be addressed. The first strategy for indoor air quality control is source control,
which involves outdoor pollutant sources. The design professional must respond to the requirements
established in Appendix B, subsection B. 1.2.1.3, which includes a list of factors that must be considered.
2-3
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 199B and Planning Guidelines
Section 2-Site Work
2.3.2 SITE EVALUATION
Site elements must conform to the siting requirements noted in subsection 1.5, Facility Design and Layout,
of this Manual and in Chapter 1, paragraph 9, of the Safety Manual.
2.3.2.1 PURPOSE OF STUDY
The ultimate purpose of the site evaluation is to provide EPA with sufficient pertinent data to allow a
complete understanding of the physical assets and liabilities of the given project site.
2.3.2.2 SITE DATA COLLECTION
Using the information developed above and in other sources required by this document, the design
professional shall consider planning and zoning criteria for the subject property. This consideration shall
include the investigation of all potential site development regulations such as density limitations, building
setbacks, building height, building coverage, buffer requirements, and other development guidelines set
forth in any applicable campus, site, or facility master plan or elsewhere in this document.
• An on-site investigation and review shall be conducted, which shall include representatives of the
client, the design professional, and the preconstruction testing and inspection company. A site
representative shall verify land features indicated on the survey. Photographs shall be taken at various
locations to provide a visual record to aid in the development of the site analysis drawings.
2.3.2.3 SITE RESOURCE INVENTORY AND ANALYSIS
A site resource inventory and analysis shall be prepared, which shall include investigation of soil
information, identification of site vegetation, hydrology and drainage analysis, topographic and elevation
analysis, and analysis of view corridors and other physical characteristics of the site. A "buildable area"
plan shall be developed by compiling information from the various analysis drawings. This plan shall
indicate the acres of land that are suitable for construction. The site inventory and analysis shall include,
but shall not be limited to, the following:
• The site overview will include, but will not be limited to, location, parcel delineation and acreage,
existing zoning, and adjoining land uses.
• Physical site characteristic analyses include, but are not limited to, slope analysis, elevation analysis,
existing vegetation identification, hydrology analysis, geological and soils analysis, site analysis,
buildable areas analysis, and analysis of prevailing winds.
• Utilities include, but are not limited to, stormwater drainage, potable water, sanitary sewer, electrical
power and communications, and mechanical systems.
2.3.3 GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION
For permanent structures, subsurface conditions shall be determined by means of borings or other methods
that adequately disclose soil and groundwater conditions. Data obtained from previous subsurface
investigations shall be used, along with any additional investigations at the location that are deemed
necessary. Subsurface investigations shall be performed under the direction of a professional geotechnical
engineer. In earthquake-prone areas, appropriate geological investigations shall be made to determine the
contribution of the foundation (subsurface) to the earthquake loads imposed on the structure. These
investigations shall include, but shall not be limited to, a recommendation of foundation type, determinations
of allowable soil bearing capacity, and assessment of the possible effects of seismic activity on the soil mass.
A settlement analysis under different design loads shall be performed where differential settlement may cause
structural, architectural, or any other type of building damage.
2-4
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 2-Site Work
2.3.3.1 TESTING AND SAMPLING METHODS
Testing and sampling shall comply with American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) standards,
including ASTM D-1586, ASTM D-1587, and ASTM D-2113. Soil samples shall be taken below the
existing grade and at each change in soil stratification or consistency. The depth of soil samples shall be
determined by the geotechnical engineer after consultation with the project engineer on site-related design
requirements.
2.3.3.2 TEST REPORTS
All data required by ASTM or the other standard test methods used shall be obtained, recorded in the field,
and referenced to boring numbers. Soil shall be visually classified in the field logs in accordance with
ASTM D-2488, but the classification for final logs shall be based on the field information, results of tests,
and further inspection of samples in the laboratory by the geotechnical engineer preparing the report. At
a minimum, the report shall:
• Include a chart illustrating the soil classification criteria and the terminology and symbols used in the
boring logs.
• Identify the ASTM or other recognized standard sampling and test methods used.
• Provide a plot plan giving dimensioned locations of test borings.
• Provide vertical sections plotted showing (1) material encountered, (2) reference to known datum,
(3) number of blows per linear foot (N value), and (4) groundwater level for all holes where
groundwater is encountered. Data for groundwater shall include both the initial groundwater level and
the static groundwater level. Groundwater levels must be recorded when initially encountered and
after they have been allowed to stabilize.
* Note the location of strata containing organic materials, weak materials, or other inconsistencies that
might affect engineering conclusions.
• Describe the existing surface conditions.
• Summarize the subsurface conditions.
*
• Provide pavement structural design data, including results of California bearing ratio tests or modulus
of subgrade reaction tests.
• Provide a profile and/or topographic map of rock or other bearing stratum.
• Analyze the probable variations in elevations and movements of subsurface water due to seasonal
influences.
• Report all laboratory determinations of soil properties, including shrinkage and expansion properties.
2.3.4 GROUNDWATER INVESTIGATION
A groundwater investigation shall be made before selection of a dewatering control system. The investigation
shall examine the character of subsurface soils, groundwater conditions and quality, and the availability of
an electric power source. The source of seepage shall be determined and the boundaries and seepage flow
characteristics of geologic and soil formations at, and adjacent to, the site shall be analyzed in accordance with
the mathematical, graphic, and electroanalogous methods discussed in Technical Manual 5-818-5, U.S. Army
Corp of Engineers. Field reports identifying groundwater elevations and other relevant features should be
provided to the construction contractor responsible for dewatering and groundwater investigation.
2-5
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 2-Site Work
2.4 Site Development
2.4.1 SURVEYING
The following surveys must be conducted, and the following survey documentation provided, for each site.
2.4.1.1 GENERAL
Construction, control, properly, and topographic surveys shall be coordinated with the appropriate EPA
authority. Where feasible, surveying support available from EPA contractors shall be used. Survey field
notes shall be legibly recorded on standard (8'/2-by-l 1-inch) field-note forms. Field notes and final plots
of surveys shall be furnished to the appropriate EPA authority. Any boundary surveys and recorded maps
shall be forwarded to the appropriate EPA authority.
The degree of accuracy of construction, control, property, and topographic surveys shall be consistent with
the nature and importance of each survey. Where required by law (i.e., applicable state statutes), all
control and property surveys at EPA sites shall be performed by, or under the supervision of, a professional
land surveyor registered in the state in which the subject site is situated.
2.4.1.2 SURVEY CONTROL
The appropriate EPA authority shall be responsible for establishing, recording, and perpetuating primary
on-site horizontal and vertical control monumentation. In addition, the appropriate EPA authority shall
be responsible for correlating primary site-specific horizontal and vertical monumentation with that of
other appropriate agencies. All surveying and mapping shall conform to the standards listed in Table
2.4.1.2, Survey Standards.
Table 2.4.1.2 Survey Standards
Survey Standard Survey Type
TEC-1110-1-147 CORPS Construction
ETL-1110-1-150 Global Positioning System (GPSyDredging
EM-1110-1-1000 Photogrammetry
EM-1110-1-1001 Geodetic control
EM-1110-1-1002 Monumentation
EM-1110-1-1003 GPS control
EM-1110-1-1005 Topographic and field supervision and maintenance
[FY-94]
EM-1110-1-1006 Land boundary [FY-95]
EM-1110-2-1003 Hydrographic survey
EM-1110-1-1807 Computer-aided drafting design (CADD) (volumes 1-4)
2.4,1.3 MONUMENTATION
Requirements with respect to monumentation are as follows.
2.4.1.3.1 TEMPORARY CONTROL
For temporary control monuments:
• Where the scope and complexity of the project warrants, the placement, number, and location of
temporary horizontal and vertical control monuments in new development areas shall be
coordinated with the existing system and approved.
2-6
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 2-Site Work
• A minimum of two intervisible control monuments shall be placed along, or adjacent to, right-of-
way lines. These temporary control monuments shall be tied to an established grid. The surveyor
who sets such momimentation shall submit legible notes, drawings, and reproducible
documentation to the appropriate EPA authority. The location and construction of all temporary
monuments in the immediate vicinity of new construction shall be indicated on the construction
drawings.
• Temporary control monuments shall be S/8-inch-diameter mild steel bars or 3/4-inch-diameter iron
pipe with a minimum length of 2 feet or plastic hubs. These monuments shall be set flush with,
or within 0.2 feet of, the ground surface. Manhole rims, markings chiseled in concrete, PK nails
in asphalt, and lead and tack in bedrock shall be suitable as alternative temporary monumentation
when approved.
• Three guard posts with reflective-paint striping shall be installed adjacent to temporary control
monuments in high-traffic areas to prevent vehicular damage. Temporary control monuments shall
be set in conformance with the accuracy standards of the U.S. Corps of Engineers.
2.4.1.3.2 PERMANENT CONTROL
For permanent control monuments:
• The placement, number, and location of permanent survey monuments for horizontal and vertical
control shall be coordinated with, and approved by, the appropriate EPA authority. The location
and description of the nearest permanent survey monument shall be provided on construction
drawings. These monuments shall be tied to an established state plane coordinate system.
• Any surveyor who sets a permanent survey monument shall submit legible notes, sketches, or other
reproducible documentation that shows the location of the new monument relative to the on-site
horizontal and vertical control network, to the applicable state plane coordinate system, to the
North American Datum (NAD) of 1983, and to the Navigable Ground Vertical Datum (NGVD)
of 1929. The convergence, scale factor, and elevation at the monument shall also be shown.
• Permanent survey monuments shall be considered properly positioned and represented only after
the appropriate EPA authority has approved all survey procedures and calculations and has verified
conformance to the Corps of Engineers standards and specifications. ,
• Permanent survey monuments shall be identified as prescribed by Corps of Engineers standards.
• These identification numbers shall be documented within the survey field notes and shown on the
design drawings and within related documents. Temporary point identification for permanent
survey monuments maybe assigned by the surveyor, however, permanent point identification shall
only be assigned to such monuments by the appropriate EPA authority. Permanent survey
monuments shall not be removed without prior authorization from the appropriate EPA authority.
2.4.1.3.3 BENCHMARKS
For benchmarks:
• A minimum of one permanent benchmark for vertical control shall be established in each new
development area. A minimum of three benchmarks shall be established if there are no existing
benchmarks within a 3-mile radius of each new development area. Elevations shall be referenced
to the North American Vertical Datum (NAVD) of 1983 and to the NGVD of 1929. Level section
misclosures between fixed benchmark elevations shall equal or exceed third-order accuracy, as
defined in the Federal Geodetic Control Committee (FGCC) Standards and Specifications for
Geodetic Control Networks or the Corps of Engineers standards.
2-7
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 2-Site Work
* Permanent benchmarks shall be identified in the same manner as permanent survey monuments.
Permanent benchmarks shall not be removed without prior approval by the appropriate EPA
authority. The location and description of all benchmarks in the immediate vicinity of new
construction shall be indicated on the construction drawings.
2.4.1.3.4 UTILITY, ROADWAY, AND PARKING AREA SURVEYS
Surveys of utilities, roadways, and parking areas shall be conducted according to the following
requirements:
• Coordinates and elevations shall be determined for utilities, roads, and parking areas at their
principal points of definition. Triisinfonnationshallbeprovidedontheconstruction drawings. The
principal points of definition for utility systems shall be utility poles, obstructions, manholes, valve
boxes, and other appurtenances for heating and cooling lines, sewers, and overhead and
underground power and telephone systems.
• Principal points of definition for potable water, and natural gas, distribution systems shall be valve
boxes, main line intersects, and fire hydrants.
• The principal points of definition for roads shall be roadway centerline intersects. Road alignment
surveys shall include stationing, bearings, and curve information tied to these principal points of
definition. Where applicable, the following information shall also be provided on the construction
drawings:
- Stations and deflection angles for each point of intersection.
• Right-of-way lines and markers.
- Spot elevations (centerline, edge of pavement, and at intersects) at maximum intervals of 100
feet
- Otherimpojvements (e.g., coinage inlets, wheelchair ramps, fire hydrants, sidewalks, and curt)
and gutter).
- Topographic features within project limits.
- Elevation contours.
- Overhead and underground utility crossingsi(plan and profile).
- Roadway drainage crossings. •
- Location and description of underground utility witness markers.
2.4.1.3.5 UNDERGROUND UTILITIES
Where exact routes of underground utilities are not defined within record drawings, the appropriate
EPA authority shall coordinate necessary electronic line detection and exploratory excavation
activities. Such utilities shall be located by survey and documented on the construction drawings.
2.4.1.3.6 CONSTRUCTION STAKING
Construction staking for new EPA facilities shall comply with local standards and with practices
approved by the appropriate EPA authority.
2.4.2 SITE PLANNING AND DESIGN
In the development of a site proposed for construction, it is necessary, at a minimum, to address, analyze, and
assess all site-related issues outlined below and to comply with the requirements of Chapter 2, Site Planning
and Landscape Design, GSA PBS-PQ100.1, as applicable.
2.4.2.1 IMPACT
The following issues are to be studied in assessing the impact of a project on a given site:
• On-site capacities of present and future utilities.
2-8
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 2 - Site Work
• Existing buildings (discussion shall include any need for temporary facilities and services to these
buildings).
• Existing site utilities (discussion shall include any need for utility relocation and shutdown).
• Existing traffic patterns and vehicles, including emergency and service vehicles.
• The need for traffic phasing and control-plan requirements.
• Existing parking structures and surface parking (discussion shall include any need for temporary
parking areas and additional capacity).
• Need for an environmental impact statement
2.4.2.2 DEVELOPMENT
The following issues must be taken into account in determining whether the proposed development is
appropriate and compatible with its natural environment and surrounding community.
• PTeservingsurroundingneighborhoodsandcommuruties. Laboratory facilities shall be located in areas
where local zoning permits; however, facilities should be no less than one-quarter mite from existing
residential developments and shall be located in such a way that prevailing winds will not direct fumes
exhausting from EPA stacks toward existing residential developments.
• Preserving the character of the site, to the maximum possible extent, by retaining natural features, such
as ground forms, trees, and other natural vegetation.
• Using the existing site to best advantage by locating and orienting buildings so that they are
compatible with natural site features.
• Developing functional relationships between site access points, parking lots, buildings, service areas,
and all other project site elements.
• Providing for orderly future expansion of facilities by considering logical expansion of buildings,
parking, and support services.
• Reviewing and assessing the impact of development with respect to any approved campus master plan
and site infrastructure master plan.
2.4.2.3 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
The following issues must be considered in planning any EPA facility or site.
2.4.2.3.1 ENERGY CONSIDERATIONS
Sun angles, prevailing winds, existing topography, microclimatic conditions, and major wooded areas
shall be carefully analyzed to contribute to a more energy-efficient solution. Energy conservation
should be enhanced by careful consideration and evaluation of the orientation of buildings. Climate
assets should be maximized and climate liabilities minimized
2.4.2.3.2 VIEWS
Proper orientation of facilities to capitalize on major vistas is strongly encouraged. Views into the site
from major roadways should be carefully designed to be attractive and reflective of EPA's mission.
2-9
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 2-Site Work
2.4.2.3.3 TOPOGRAPHY AND DRAINAGE
A design shall be provided that works with, and not against, the existing grades. Significant positive
drainage away from any existing or new construction is a primary concern. The design shall preserve,
as much as is practical, any major existing drainage patterns.
• The natural grades of the site should be used to develop multilevel entry points, if possible.
Positive drainage away from all portions of the building is required.
* The location of the 100-year floodplain should be determined, and if this is present on the site, the
boundaries should be delineated on all surveys and site plans.
• The impact of development on stormwater runoff must be assessed
2.4.2.3.4 ADJACENT LAND USE
In siting a facility, consideration should be given to existing land uses or potential development
nearby, because such hind use may affect or restrict the facility design. Existing and proposed traffic
patterns shall be considered in the design of site access and driveway locations.
2.4.2.3.5 NOISE, FUMES, AND ODORS
Adjacent land uses may contribute noise, fumes, and odors; these uses shall be considered in the site
development process. Noise or odors may be severe enough to disqualify a site from consideration;
therefore, a thorough analysis of neighboring facilities must be undertaken to ensure compatibility of
the proposed facility with the existing adjacent land uses and environment
2.4.2.3.6 VIBRATION
If there are adjacent land uses that produce vibrations that can be measured on a proposed site, the
extent of the vibration and whether it will affect the proposed program shall be determined.
2.4.2.4 HISTORICAL AND ARCHAEOLOGICAL CONSIDERATIONS
All publicly available documents shall be reviewed for any on-site historical or archaeological information.
Any public record indicating historically or archaeologically sensitive areas on-site must be reported to
EPA before any design is initiated. Archaeologically and historically sensitive areas on-site must be
completely avoided until, and after, a thorough investigation has been completed and findings documented
that provide direction on whether the area(s) in question may be used or must be preserved for future
exploration.
2.4.2.5 COMMUNITY ISSUES AND ENVIRONMENTAL JUSTICE
Environmental justice issues, as established by EPA, shall be addressed and the requirements of any
required community review processes ascertained. A report shall be provided to EPA early in the design
process and well before any community review is required on the project. All community reviews are over
and above any EPA design review, reviews shall not be combined. Requirements of community review
panels may include, but are not limited to, the following:
• Separate plans prepared to specifically highlight or emphasize that group's concern.
• Research and data collection to be used in generating special reports and in the environmental
assessment.
• Presentation graphics for a formal submission or presentation during the review process.
• Documentation of the review and approval process, submission requirements, deadlines for each
portion of the process, and the sequence that must be followed.
2-10
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 2-Site Work
• Identification of the methodologies, research, and data needed to identify and evaluate populations at
disproportionately high environmental or human health risks and to ensure that these needs are
considered in developing any EPA facility.
2.4.3 FACILITY SUING
This subsection addresses facility siting issues and requirements.
2.4.3.1 GENERAL
A site development plan shall be used to locate new facilities on existing or new sites in order to ensure
effective site utilization and avoid future conflicts between existing and new facilities.
• During facility siting, an environmental assessment shall be prepared before the initiation of a
Government action that may significantly affect the environment
• To the extent possible, facilities shall not be sited in floodplains or in areas subject to flash floods;
facility siting shall minimize destruction, loss, or degradation of wetlands.
• In selecting sites for new facilities, the following conditions and requirements shall be considered:
- Programmatic and operating efficiency.
- Natural topographic and geologic conditions.
- Existing cultural, historical, and archaeological resources.
- Endemic plant and animal species.
- Past use of site and existence of known Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) and/or
Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (CERCLA) sites.
- Special siting requirements for facilities containing, using, or processing hazardous materials.
* Health, safety, and environmental protection requirements.
- Indoor air quality impacts (e.g., presence of radon in foundation soils and contamination from
other exterior sources, natural or man-made).
* Hazardous operations and consequences of potential accidents in adjacent facilities.
- Natural hazards, including seismic activity, wind, hurricane, tornado, flood, hail, volcanic ash,
lightning, and snow.
- Wave action within any natural or man-made body of water (in accordance with the Coastal
Engineering Research Center f CERC] Shore Protection Manual).
- Physical protection requirements, security, and safeguard requirements (e.g., patrol rooms, gates,
security posts, and vehicle barriers).
- Adequacy of existing or planned support and service facilities, including utilities, roads, and
parking areas.
- Interrelationships among facilities and facilities' aesthetic compatibility.
- Energy conservation requirements.
- Impact of site selections.
2.4.3.2 LABORATORY SITING
New laboratories, EPA owned and leased, should be sited in consideration of the following guidance.
• Guidance from Criteria for Siting of Laboratory Facilities Based on Safety and Environmental
Factors, prepared for EPA by Johns Hopkins University, School of Hygiene and Public Health, Peter
S. J. Lees and Morton Com.
• Siteacquisitionmethodologyasprescribedin the Environmental ClosureProcessforEPALaboratories
chapter of the Safety, Health and Environmental Management Program Guidelines.
• Local zoning code.
2-11
-------
February 1998
Architecture, Engineering,
'' and Planning Guidelines
Section 2-Site Work
• Indoor air quality criteria referenced in Chapter 7, paragraph 3.e, of the Safety Manual.
• Location shall be large enough to accommodate the laboratory building and outbuildings (hazardous
materials building) with adequate setbacks meeting local requirements and RCRA requirements.
• Laboratories preferably shall be located in light industrial areas where there are provisions for
containing accidental spills prior to discharge to the local stormwater system and in areas that have
fully staffed emergency response personnel (fire and medical), including hazardous materials
(HAZMAT) teams.
• Laboratories shall not be located in residential areas or in mixed-occupancy high rise locations.
2.4.3.3 BUILDING LOCATION
New buildings and building additions shall be located in accordance with the site development plan.
2.4.3.3.1 OPEN SPACE
Open space shall be provided between structures to accommodate site security, landscaping, and other
environmental considerations. Sufficient access shall be provided around building exteriors to
accommodate emergency vehicles, maintenance vehicles, and snow removal equipment In cold
climates, building entrances, stairs, and other pedestrian circulation features should not be placed
along the north side of buildings or within shaded areas. Off-site drainage areas and the
environmental impacts that proposed stormwater management practices will have on surrounding
properties shall also be carefully reviewed.
2.4.3.3.2 CONDITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS
The following conditions and requirements shall be considered during site selection for new buildings:
Architectural and functional compatibility with the environment
Operation and service function relationships
Natural topographic and geologic conditions
Existing cultural and archaeological resources
Historic sites
Abandoned mines or wells and potential for subsidence
Endemic plant and animal species
Availability of existing utility services
Building setback requirements
Availability of existing road systems
Traffic volume
Refuse handling and loading zone requirements
Adequacy for parking, future expansion, and other land use requirements
Health, safety, and environmental protection requirements
Physical protection requirements
Security and safeguard requirements
Energy conservation requirements
Indoor air quality impacts (e.g., presence of radon in foundation soils)
Impact of site selection -
Minimum fire separation between buildings (in accordance with National Fire Protection
Association [NFPA] 80A).
2.4.3.4 HAZARD SEGREGATION
In general, occupancies posing different levels of risk shall be separated by fire-resistive construction.
Areas shall be segregated as noted below and as required by local building codes and NFPA 101.
2-12
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 2 - Site Work
2.4.3.4.1 PARKING STRUCTURES
The construction, protection, and control of hazards in parking structures shall comply with the
requirements of NFPA 88 A. Parking garages located within buildings that contain other occupancies
shall be separated from the remainder of the building by construction that has a fire resistance of at
least 2 hours. Entrances between garages and elevators shall be protected by a vestibule having a 1 l/a-
hour, Class B or higher fire door. Doorways between garages and stairs, building corridors, or other
non-garage areas shall be protected by 1 '/2-hour, Class B or higher fire doors. The garage ventilation
system must be designed as a separate entity from the main building and from the occupied spaces,
with the exhaust from the garage directed outside. No recirculation of air is allowed in garages. In
garages located under buildings, elevator vestibules shall be positively pressurized to prevent garage
vapors from entering the occupied areas.
2.4.4 SITE PREPARATION
Local topography shall be considered during project and facility design. New facilities shall be planned to fit
the local topography and to require a minimum amount of grading. Design shall include provisions for erosion
control and soil stabilization in ditches, fill slopes, embankments, and denuded areas, and restoration of areas
disturbed by the project Restoration shall be to original or improved conditions.
2.4.4.1 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
Site preparation design shall meet the following criteria:
• Vehicle parking, sidewalks, and road requirements shall comply with subsection 2.6 of this Manual
* Site drainage design shall comply with subsection 2.7 of this Manual
• Site power and lighting shall comply with Section 16, Electrical Requirements, of this Manual.
• Site security requirements shall be taken into account and provided for in accordance with criteria
established by the appropriate EPA authority.
2.4.5 DEWATERING
The design, installation, and operation of dewatering systems for groundwater control shall be the
responsibility of the construction contractor, unless otherwise stipulated in the contract. The groundwater
investigation and the selection and design of a dewatering control system shall comply with TM 5-818-5. The
design engineer shall determine whether the assistance of a qualified groundwater hydrologist shall be
required.
2.4.6 SHORING AND UNDERPINNING
All shoring and underpinning shall comply with the safety requirements of CFR Part 1926, Subpart P.
Remedial underpinning shall be performed where existing foundations are inadequate. Precautionary
underpinning shall be performed where new construction adjacent to an existing structure requires deeper
excavation. A structural engineer specializing in underpinning shall perform any underpinning design, which
shall comply with the principles in Winterkorn and Fang, Foundation Engineering Handbook.
2.4.7 EARTHWORK
Earthwork includes excavation, filling, stabilizing, and compaction of earth at the site. Earthwork also
includes the addition of borrow and the disposal of excavated material. The earthwork design shall
incorporate the findings of the geotechnical report required by subsection 2.3.3 of this Manual.
2.4.8 WATERFRONT CONSTRUCTION
Waterfront construction includes seawalls, docks, marinas, and other ancillary boating facilities associated
with coastal development. This type of construction for EPA facilities shall comply with applicable federal,
state, and local standards and with practices approved by the appropriate EPA authority.
2-13
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 2-Site Work
2.5 Landscaping and Site-Related Requirements
2.5.1 GENERAL
Landscape planning, design, and development must be integrated with building massing, design, and
materials. The landscaping design process must coincide with the building design process to create a single
design that integrates site and buildings(s). The use of datable exterior materials that enhance both the site
landscaping and the building design and help to integrate the two design disciplines is strongly encouraged.
If the facility is to be a part of an existing campus or among other buildings in a master-planned development,
the landscape design as well as the building design must be integrated with, and compatible with, the style(s)
of the previously constructed permanent facilities on campus. The existing and developed site assets shall be
used to full advantage. The existing physical features of the site and surrounding buildings shall be observed
and documented.
• The landscaping of the site shall create an environmentally sensitive and aesthetically attractive design.
The natural environment should blend with the proposed new construction.
• Landscaped courts and open spaces that are accessible to all staff are encouraged.
• Grass-covered areas away from public view shall be provided and equipped as outside eating and visiting
areas (with picnic tables, benches, and landscape furnishings).
• The facility surroundings shall be landscaped with trees, shrubs, flowering plants, and grass in a way that
will enhance the aesthetic character of the building(s) and hide or screen exposed equipment and building
parts, features, or functions that, by their nature, are not aesthetically pleasant. Vegetation may be used
to screen, or form a barrier to, paniculate matter and to protect the building{s) from motor vehicle
pollutant sources.
• The topography of the site around the building(s) shall slope away from the buildiag(s) and away from
neighboring building(s) to direct any water away from the new facility and from any neighboring
building(s).
• Xeriscape design practices (use of vegetation requiring minimal watering) shall be used to minimize
maintenance of the plantings.
• In general, low-maintenance landscape design and features shall be used.
2.5.2 PROFESSIONAL QUALIFICATIONS FOR SITE DESIGN
All site landscaping shall be designed by a registered landscape architect This landscape architect must
maintain his or her registration continuously and without break for at least the entire design and construction
process and for the life of the design contract for the project
• All site landscaping shall be installed and/or modified by a professional landscaper or professional
gardener. All landscaping (plants and grass), except for annuals, if used, shall be guaranteed for 16
months after acceptance by EPA.
• All costs for the landscaping shall be anticipated in the final cost estimate. These costs shall be included
in the overall costs of the project. Such costs shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:
- Retaining curbs and walls
- Plantings and grasses
- Exterior signage and graphics
2-14
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 2 - Site Work
- Site furniture and furnishings
- Irrigation
Site hardscape and special pavings
- Warranties and guarantees
- Exterior screens and barriers
- Specialty features incorporated into the design
Maintenance guarantees
- Site lighting
- Site sculpture.
2.5.3 GENERAL SITE REQUIREMENTS
All landscaping and site amenities for the proposed development shall be in accordance with all applicable.
local, state, and federal codes and industry standards. Also, landscaping and site amenities shall comply with
any master plan or campus design requirements and all construction requirements and standards. The more
stringent requirements shall be used if a conflict exists.
\
2.5.3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
The landscape architect shall (1) preserve existing trees and undergrowth, where appropriate, for buffers;
(2) review buffer requirements of the local community; and (3) use existing trees to the extent possible,
since the larger size will provide greater immediate impact on-site.
2.5.3.2 PLANTINGS
Guidelines on plantings are as follows:
• Establish functional design criteria.
• Consider focal or entry area; design main entry area to produce an obvious sense of arrival at facility
* Create views or screen views as needed.
• Develop color and seasonal interest
• Provide orientation (e.g., with respect to sun and wind) for facility and creation of shade.
* Consider ultimate size and scale relative to specific area or site size.
• Consider formal planting plan or informal, naturalistic plan.
• Avoid major plantings in areas where expansion is planned.
• Provide appropriate location of plantings relative to prevailing wind and sun.
• Break up large areas of pavement with landscape islands.
* Choose plants and design plantings to be tolerant of climate, weather conditions, rainfall, and other
environmental conditions.
• Determine irrigation requirements.
• Determine maintenance requirements such as fertilization rates, soil acidity, and, if required, pruning
and trimming needs.
* Coordinate plantings with location of signs, light standards, hydrants, underground utilities, and other
man-made structures.
• Ensure that lawns slope to provide proper drainage (minimum 1 percent grade).
• Provide ground cover on severe slopes for aesthetic and maintenance considerations.
• Planting must be reviewed and approved by the appropriate EPA personnel.
2.5.3.3 SITE FURNITURE AND FURNISHINGS
Guidelines for choosing and locating site furniture and furnishings are as follows:
Select furniture design to complement the building theme.
Determine quantity and location of furniture.
Establish function intended for seating and waiting areas, outdoor meeting areas, and eating areas.
Determine flag pole heights, location, and quantity and integrate into the design.
Locate fences and identify their style, color, and purpose.
2-15
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 2 -Site Work
• Integrate trash receptacles, cigarette urns, newspaper dispenser boxes, and mailboxes into the design.
* Include safety review of proposed surfaces, equipment, and layout of programmed recreational and
playground equipment.
2.5.3.4 SITE LIGHTING
The following guidelines apply to site lighting:
• Design lighting to complement the architectural and land planning theme and to accord with any
current nmstGr pl3n or csunpus
• Utilize energy-efficient and easily maintainable fixture types (the selection of lighting fixtures must
consider long-term costs).
• Heights of lighting standards must be appropriate to the scale of the building and the area being lit.
• Provide lighting intensity that is commensurate with the use of the area and the health and safety of
employees and other persons accessing the building during non-daylight hours.
• Control light with respect to adjacent property.
2.5.3.5 EXTERIOR SIGNAGE AND GRAPHICS
Considerations with respect to exterior signage are:
Appropriate scale.
Viewing angle and speed of observer.
Appropriate color and letter style and clarity of message.
Appropriate locations for signage, including intersections, parking lots, and entries.
Design that complements the building style, accent color, or building color.
Clear identification of functions: traffic direction, orientation, and general information.
Coordination of building identification at site entries with that on the buildings themselves;
identification should be strong, legible, and compatible with interior signage and graphics.
Compliance with signage ordinances (such compliance is required).
Providing special identification for the project, if required.
Signage must be reviewed and approved by appropriate EPA personnel.
Designing exterior signage to allow future removal and change without damage to existing exterior
materials and to allow possible reuse of the signage after its removal and/or reuse of the lettering of
the removed signage.
2.5.3.6 OUTSIDE SERVICE AND UTILITY AREAS
Many elements are necessary for the proper operation of a building. Some are visually undesirable and
require proper planning for screening and buffering, which should be incorporated into the building
design. The design professional is responsible for coordinating the work of all disciplines and for
identifying all elements of the proposed project that will have a visual impact. The following are among
the items that may require appropriate screening and buffering:
Meters
Vaults
Transformers
Dumpsters
Compactor units
Emergency generators
High pressure gas cylinder storage and manifold systems
Pressure reducers
2-16
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 2-Site Work
Valves
Pump hoses
Outdoor storage areas
Loading docks
Mechanical equipment
Compressors and cooling lowers.
2.5.4 HARDSCAPE REQUIREMENTS
Hardscape (paving) and hardscape materials shall be integrated with the building and architectural planning
and with landscaping design and concept. In general, materials that soften typical hardscape (paving) designs
shall be used. Appropriate material usage shall be integrated with an understanding of project budget and
public versus restricted access and use areas.
2.5.5 RECREATIONAL REQUIREMENTS
Recreational site requirements shall be reviewed with EPA on a project-by-project basis.
2.6 Vehicle and Pedestrian Movement
2.6.1 ACCESS AND CIRCULATION
Although visual and other aesthetic aspects of access to the project site, and thus to the project facilities, are
critical, the primary access requirements involve fire and life safety. The most current version of the Safety
Manual shall be reviewed for these guidelines. Either traffic data will be provided or a traffic impact analysis
will be performed. Geometric design of all roads, streets, access drives, and parking areas shall also comply
with American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHFO) GDHS-84. Gradients
for roads, streets, and access drives also shall comply with AASHTO GDHS-84. Road and street grade
changes in excess of 1 percent shall be accomplished by means of vertical curves. The length of vertical curves
shall be determined in accordance with AASHTO GDHS-84. Roadway centerline gradient profiles shall be
shown for vertical control.
• Design and details of construction of flexible and rigid pavements shall comply with the local state
highway department standards. Concrete valley gutters may be provided if swales with flexible pavements
are necessary. Joint layout plans and details shall be provided for all rigid pavements. A thickened edge
shall be used along edges of rigid pavement where future construction will occur.
• Signs, pavement markings, channelization, and other traffic control measures shall comply with the
requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) Manual of Uniform Traffic Control
Devices.
2.6.1.1 FIRE DEPARTMENT APPARATUS ACCESS
Public records must be reviewed for any codes, on-site and campus design requirements, ordinances, and
local fire department requirements for all emergency requirements. Fire department access involves fire
department apparatus and on-site fixed fire safety equipment (e.g., fire hydrants, fire loops, postindicator
valves, automatic sprinkler and standpipe system connections), vehicular circulation, pedestrian
circulation, and parking. The following minimum requirements shall be met:
• All new buildings shall have at least two sides readily accessible to fire department apparatus at all
times.
• Fire lanes shall be provided for buildings that are set back more than 150 feet from a road or that
exceed 30 feet in height and are set back more than 50 feet from a road.
2-17
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 2-Site Work
* Fire lanes shall be at least 20 feet wide, and the road edge closest to the building shall be at least 10
feet from the building.
• The minimum roadway turning radius shall conform to a 48-foot semitrailer template.
• Fire lanes shall be constructed of an all-weather driving surface capable of supporting imposed loads
of 25 tons. If appropriate for the area and climate, these lanes may consist of compacted earth with
top soil and seed
• Any dead-end road more than 300 feet long shall be provided with a turnaround at the closed end of
at least 90 feet in diameter.
• Fire lanes and access areas for fire hydrants and automatic sprinkler or standpipe connections shall
be clearly identified by painting the curbs yellow, with black lettering reading "NO PARKING - FIRE
LANE" spaced at 40-foot intervals. In addition, signage carrying the same message shall be posted
at 100-foot intervals along the restricted area.
2.6.1.2 VEHICULAR CIRCULATION
Vehicular circulation design shall comply with the following requirements and guidelines:
• Vehicular circulation shall be designed in accordance with industry standards, code requirements, and
any overall campus master plan or facilities master plan philosophy in effect at the subject site.
Circulation shall respect the pedestrian circulation environment of the campus and/or facilities and
provide for safe movement of vehicles and pedestrians. Existing traffic studies shall be evaluated and
coordinated in order to implement the best possible overall circulation system.
* Vehicular access to a new project shall be evaluated with respect to existing and planned site
circulation and shall provide for clear separation of staff, visitor, service, and bus vehicular circulation.
* Adequate emergency vehicle access shall be provided to all points on the building periphery by use of
proper grades, surface materials, clearances, and other design features.
* Entrances to the facility or campus shall be clearly marked and located so that access to each building,
parking area, group of buildings, and service area is convenient and recognizable.
• The siting of new buildings shall take into account the requirements of future expansion, design of
buildings, roads, and surface and structured parking.
• Site vehicular design shall provide adequate space for queuing at drop-offs and exit drives for visitors,
buses, 18-wheel vehicles, taxis, and other vehicle types, keeping turning conflicts to a minimum and
permitting proper service vehicle maneuvering and staging.
• Internal drive aisle widths and turning radii shall be designed to allow for the expected service and
emergency vehicles.
2.6.2 PARKING AND LOADING FACILITIES
Parking areas should not be located in front of buildings or at visually prominent locations along routes of
approach. Landscaping, grading, and location shall emphasize attractive features and de-emphasize or
obscure undesirable features. Parking lots shall meet local governmental standards for circulation, layout, and
safety. Handicapped parking allocations shall comply with ADA guidelines. Perimeter concrete curbs and
gutters shall be considered for all parking areas and access drives in built-up areas. In remote or little-used
areas, concrete curbs and gutters shall be used only when required to control drainage. Removable
2-18
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February1998
Section 2-Site Work
prefabricated concrete wheel stops may be used where appropriate. Specific parking design guidelines are
presented in the following subsection.
2.6.2.1 PARKING DESIGN
Parking for the proposed development shall be based on applicable codes for occupancy, local zoning
requirements, and any campus or facility master plan in effect at the subject site. As part of the site
development phase, multilevel parking garages or below-ground parking shall be considered as an
alternative to surface parking. At a minimum, the following guidelines shall be followed:
• Distribution of total parking (e.g., employee [by type], police, emergency vehicle, visitor, handicapped,
motorcycle, bicycle) shall be calculated and clearly shown in the site development phase. The
minimum size for standard passenger car stalls shall be 9 feet x 19 feet. Up to 15 percent of the
parking may be designated for compact cars. Stalls for compact cars shall be at least 8 feet x is feet.
• The structural design for pavement on surface lots shall comply with local state highway department
standards for general parking areas.
• Parking aisles and lots subject to frequent truck traffic shall be evaluated to determine whether thicker
pavement sections are required.
• Design calculations shall provide for a potential growth in staff of 10 percent Provision shall also be
made for 25 percent expansion of the facility, with the design for future parking expansion shown.
* Parking areas must be clearly related to entry points. Walking distances should be kept to a minimum.
* Handicapped parking spaces shall be provided in accordance with ADA requirements or the
requirements of state codes and ordinances if these are more restrictive.
* Sufficient slope (1 percent minimum) shall be provided for positive drainage for runoff.
* Slopes shall be no more than 4 percent.
• Sufficient open lawn area shall be allowed adjacent to parking lots for snow storage, as required by
climate and area.
• Wherever possible, 90-degree parking design should be used.
• Surface drainage in parking areas must not cross designated pedestrian paths.
• Dead-end parking bays are not allowed.
• Existing large trees should be integrated into new parking areas, where feasible.
• Parking areas should provide curbs (consistent with site design) with a minimum 2-foot overhang
behind the curb. Use of concrete wheel stops should be avoided.
2.6.3 PEDESTRIAN ACCESS
A functional system of walks connecting structures, operational areas, parking areas, streets, and other access
paths shall be provided to meet the demands of pedestrian traffic. The location and width of these areas and
paths shall be determined in accordance with the site development plan. Walks subject to use by the physically
disabled shall comply with current ADA guidelines. Specific guidelines for the design of pedestrian walkways
are prescribed in the following subsection.
2-19
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 2-Site Work
2.6.3.1 DESIGN OF PEDESTRIAN WALKWAYS
Pedestrian circulation shall be designed in accordance with industiy standards, code requirements, and
any overall campus master plan philosophy in effect at the subject site.
• Sidewalks $iiaii follow accepted design standards.
* Pedestrian walks shall have a minimum of 1 percent cross pitch for drainage.
• The width of walks shall be a function of pedestrian traffic volumes determined by the master plan
and/or by specific project requirements.
• Walks shall accommodate handicapped persons. Slopes, landings, and access points shall be in
accordance with ADA requirements as well as with the most stringent applicable code or combination
of codes applicable to the project.
• Crosswalks from parking and other buildings shall be clearly painted and properly assigned.
• Walkway paths shall be designed in response to the expected-origin/destination analysis of the site and
its users.
• Drop curbs shall be used to provide transition for handicapped persons at crosswalks, drop-off zones,
and ends of walkways.
2.6.4 AIRPORTS AND HELIPORTS
This subsection provides general guidelines for design of aviation facilities and indicates requirements and
conditions that must be considered in designing and assessing such facilities.
2.6.4.1 GENERAL
Planning and design of aviation facilities and airspace clearances shall comply with Federal Aviation
Administration (FAA) AC 150/5050-5. Planning and design of aviation facilities shall emphasize safety
for all modes of aircraft operations. Aircraft installations require permanent unobstructed airspace, and
facilities and equipment constructed to facilitate maintenance, ground handling, and flight operations.
• Landing and takeoff paths (traffic patterns) shall be oriented to avoid need for critical-facility
overflights. Traffic patterns and altitudes shall be established and published to provide for aircraft
approaches that are away from critical facilities.
• Heliports shall be sited, and traffic patterns established, so that normal operation does not require
overflights of critical facilities. Heliports shall not be located closer to critical facilities than 2 times
the dimension of the landing pad or 3 times the rotor diameter of the largest helicopter authorized to
land at the heliport.
2.6.4.2 SITE CONSIDERATIONS
The following site conditions shall be taken into account in determining the adequacy of the aviation
facility:
Topography
Vegetation and existing construction
Weather elements
Prevailing wind direction in summer and winter
Soil conditions
Flood hazards
Natural and man-made obstructions
2-20
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 2 - Site Work
Adjacent land uses
Availability of usable airspace
Accessibility of usable roads
Location of site utilities
Accommodation of future expansion
Aboveground utilities.
2.6.4.3 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
The layout of airfield facilities shall support operational efficiency and provide safe conditions for takeoff
and landing operations and for ground handling of aircraft.
* Airfield safety clearances shall comply with the clearance criteria of FAA AC ISO/5300. The critical-
decision-point and emergency land^g areas for the various airci^usingafadUryshal^
on the basis of the respective aircraft performance charts.
• All other applicable design elements shall conform to the most current FAA criteria.
• In accordance with FAA AC 150/5070-6A, airfield layout shall also consider:
- Wind direction and velocity analyzed
- A taxiway system
- Parking aprons
- Supporting facilities.
2.7 Stormwater Management
2.7.1 STREET DRAINAGE
Street drainage in developed areas shall be conveyed within the roadway cross section. Curb inlets shall be
used to divert storm flows to surface and subsurface stormwater conveyance systems. Curb inlets shall not be
located within curb returns or in areas of heavy pedestrian traffic. Pedestrian and cyclist safety shall be
considered during selection of storm inlet grates. Curb gaps shall be used where roadside drainage swales
exist. Wherever possible, curb openings with inlets located in grassed areas should be utilized in lieu of curb
inlets.
In locations where uninterrupted vehicular access is essential to critical operational activities, roadway cross
sections shall be designed to convey runoff from the 25-year, 6-hour storm so that one driving lane width (12
feet) is free of flowing or standing water. Lower classification roadways shall be designed to convey runoff
from the 10-year, 6-hour storm. Stormwater management systems shall have sufficient capacity to ensure that
runoff from the 100-year, 6-hour design storm will not exceed a depth of 10!/a inches at any point within the
street right-of-way or extend more than 2V» inches above the top of the curb in urban streets. Inverted crown
roadway cross sections shall not be used unless approved by EPA.
2.7.2 WATERSHED DEVELOPMENT
Site development plans shall be developed with careful review of the impact the plan will have on the
watershed. Appropriate stormwater management strategies shall be developed to minimize or eliminate
adverse effects on existing and future development within the watershed.
2.7.3 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
Erosion and sedimentation control measures, in accordance with federal, state, and local standards, should
be used during construction. The site should be properly graded and planted to minimize erosion.
2.7.4 STORMWATER RETENTION AND DETENTION
2-21
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 2-Site Work
Site development plans shall incorporate appropriate stormwater retention/detention facilities into the storm
drainage system. These facilities must be designed in strict accordance with all applicable federal, state, and
local requirements.
2.7.5 CONVEYANCE
Subsurface and open channel stormwater conveyance systems shall meet the following requirements.
2.7.5.1 STORM SEWERS
Subsurface drainage systems shall be sized to accommodate runoff from the 10-year, 6-hour storm and
shall be sized for a greater storm in locations where there is substantial risk to critical facilities and
operations. Subsurface system designs shall meet sediment transport requirements. Storm sewers shall
be designed to maintain a minimum scour velocity of 2 feet per second. New storm sewers shall be sized
for open channel flow. The minimum storm sewer size shall be 15 inches. The minimum culvert size shall
be IS inches. For roof drain systems, the minimum pipe size for laterals and collectors shall be 6 inches.
2.7.5.2 OPEN CHANNELS
Open channel stormwater conveyance systems shall be sized to accommodate the 10-year, 6-hour design
flow with a minimum freeboard and shall be sized for a greater storm in locations where there is
substantial risk to critical facilities and operations.
Open channel stormwater conveyance systems shall be designed for minimum maintenance. The potential
for scour or deposition within earth-lined channels shall be considered before approval by the appropriate
EPA authority. Preference for earth-lined or "armored" channels shall be based on a comparison of capital,
maintenance, and operation costs. Inlets to open channel stormwater conveyance systems shall be placed
at locations where erosion potential is minimal.
2.7.6 STORMWATER QUALITY
Site development shall incorporate quality control measures that reduce the concentration of pollutants in
stormwater prior to discharge into receiving waters.
2.7.7 FLOODPLAIN AND WETLANDS DEVELOPMENT
Development, modification, or occupancy of floodplains and wetlands should be avoided, particularly when
practical alternatives exist To the extent possible, EPA shall meet the requirements of Executive Orders
11988 and 11990. EPA shall:
• Avoid, to the extent possible, the long-term and short-term adverse impacts associated with the destruction
of wetlands and the occupancy and modification of floodplains and wetlands, and avoid direct and indirect
support of floodplain and wetlands development wherever there is a practicable alternative for new
development.
* Incorporate floodplain management goals and wetland protection considerations into its planning,
regulation, and decision making.
• Carefully consider the potential impacts of any EPA action in a floodplain and the impacts of any new
EPA construction in wetlands not located in a floodplain.
• Identify, consider, and, as appropriate, implement alternative actions to avoid or mitigate adverse impacts
on floodplains and wetlands.
* Provide opportunity for early public review of any plans or proposals for actions in floodplains or.new
construction in wetlands.
2-22
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines . February 1998
Section 2 - Site Work
• Ensure that construction within floodplains or wetlands complies with 10 CFR Part 1022 and NEPA and
implementing regulations.
2.7.8 COASTAL DEVELOPMENT
The development of site boating, docking, and seawall facilities shall conform to all federal, state, and local
requirements.
2.8 Utilities and Support Services
2.8.1 WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
This subsection applies to water distribution systems for domestic (potable) and industrial (nonpotable) uses.
The use of dual water systems (i.e., domestic and industrial or irrigation) is subject to the approval of the
appropriate EPA facilities engineering group. Where use of dual water systems is approved, the location and
alignment of such systems must be clearly identified by location markers placed throughout the site at
intervals specified by the appropriate EPA facilities engineering group. Both systems must also be clearly
identified on the record drawings.
• Cross connections between domestic and industrial or irrigation systems are prohibited. Domestic water
conveyed within distribution systems that serve EPA facilities shall comply with the applicable Safe
Drinking Water Act (SDWA) requirements; 40 CFR Parts 141-142; and all other applicable state,
regional, and local requirements. The quality of domestic water within such distribution systems shall be
protected from degradation by installation of reduced-pressure principal assembly backflow preventers to
prevent backflow of contaminants or pollutants into the system.
* Backflow prevention devices shall be installed in accordance with the National Plumbing Code. Only
devices approved by the Foundation for Cross-Connection Control and Hydraulic Research shall be used.
(Refer to Manual of Cross-Connection Control [6th Edition, August 1979].)
2.8.1.1 PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS
The following considerations shall be incorporated into the project planning.
• During route selection and initial planning for water distribution systems, the following conditions and
requirements shall be considered:
- Projections concerning future population and development
- Anticipated average daily flow for fully developed conditions
• Anticipated peak flows for domestic, industrial, fire, and special water usage
- Hydraulic design criteria
- Health and safety requirements
- Physical constraints (e.g., utility corridors and topographic features)
- Energy conservation and environmental constraints.
• Distribution system layouts shall be as simple and direct as possible. Where feasible, initial planning
efforts shall optimize system layouts (e.g., system loop lines) in order to:
- Facilitate future system expansion
- Strengthen fire protection capabilities
- Minimize conflicts with other utilities
- Reduce maintenance requirements.
• Water distribution systems shall be included within the utility master plan.
2-23
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 \ . and Planning Guidelines
Section 2-Site Work
2.8.1.2 SYSTEM DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
Domestic water distribution mains shall be sized to accommodate the greatest anticipated demand (e.g.,
fire demand, special requirements, or the peak domestic demand). Domestic water distribution systems
shall be designed to deliver a peak domestic flow of 214 times the average daily demand, plus any special
demands, at a minimum residual pressure of 30 pounds per square inch (psi) at ground elevation (or
higher pressure residual pressure if special conditions warrant).
• Domestic water distribution systems that also serve fire protection requirements shall be designed to
satisfy fire flow requirements plus 50 percent of the average domestic requirements plus any industrial
or process demands that cannot be reduced during a fire.
• Each fire hydrant within the distribution system must be capable of delivering 1,000 gallons per
minute (gpm) at a minimum residual pressure of 20 psi. Where domestic water distribution systems
. must serve internal fire protection systems (i.e., sprinklers or foamite systems), adequate residual
pressures shall be maintained for proper operation of these systems. Fire hydrant branches (from main
to hydrant) shall be not less than 6 inches in diameter and shall be no longer than 300 feet. A gate
valve shall be installed within each fire hydrant branch to facilitate maintenance. Fire hydrants shall
be installed at maximum intervals of 400 feet and shall not be located more than 300 feet from the
buildings to be protected. Each building shall be protected by at least two hydrants. All water mains
supplying fire protection systems and fire hydrants shall be treated as fire mains and installed in
accordance with NFPA 24. Water mains shall have a minimum pressure rating of ISO psi. Water
distribution systems shall be designed to maintain normal operating pressures of 40 psi to 100 psi (at
ground level) in mains and building service lines. Where the gradient across the service area is such
that multiple pressure zones are necessary to maintain the normal operating pressures, pressure*
reducing valves shall be used to separate each pressure zone. Use of pressure relief and surge relief
valves shall be considered, as necessary, to preclude system damage from water hammer.
• Air release and vacuum breaker valves shall be installed, as required, at high points within the
distribution system and in long supply mains.
• DistribuUonsystemmaimshallhaveanunimumdepthofcoverof3feet. In cold climates, at roadway
crossings in high traffic areas, and at railroad crossings, additional cover shall be provided to prevent
freezing. Building service lines shall be at least 1 inch in diameter. Service lines that are less than 2
inches in diameter shall be connected to the distribution main by a corporation stop and a copper
gooseneck, with a service stop below frostline. Service lines that are more than 2 inches in diameter
shall be connected to the distribution main by a rigid connection and shall have a gate valve located
below frostline. Risers from frostline to floorlines of buildings shall be adequately insulated. Water
storage facilities shall comply with NFPA 22.
* Soil and groundwater conditions (e.g., soil corrosivity) on the site shall be considered in the selection
of pipe materials. Where ferrous pipe is installed within the distribution system, insulating couplings
shall be installed to prevent galvanic corrosion.
2.8.1.3 WELLHEAD DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS FOR RESEARCH PURPOSES
Where and when water must be provided for fish culture, on-site drilled wells shall be capable of
producing a minimum of 20 gallons of water (of consistent quality) per minute unless otherwise required
by the EPA project officer. The water must be of a suitable quality for rearing and maintaining fish
cultures. It must not be contaminated with pesticides, heavy metals, sulfides, silica, or chlorides. The
anions should be those found in natural lakes or streams. Water quality parameters should be as follows:
• Dissolved oxygen: > 6.0 milligrams per liter (mg/L)
• pH: 7.2-8.5
• Hardness: 40-200 mg/L (as CaC03)
2-24
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 2-Site Work
• Alkalinity: Slightly less than hardness
* Iron: < 1.0 mg/L
* Chlorides: < 250 mg/L as chlorides and sulfates
* Sulfides: < 2.0 micrograms per liter (^g/L) as undissociated H2S.
The well and pump shall be protected from the elements. Two 500-gallon water tanks shall be installed
as reservoirs for water prior to distribution.
2.8.2 WASTEWATER COLLECTION SYSTEMS
This subsection applies to sanitary wastewater collection systems (i.e., lift stations, force mains, collector
sewers and interceptor sewers, and building sewers 5 feet beyond the building foundation).
2.8.2.1 SYSTEM DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
Industrial wastewater and pollutants above the minimum concentrations specified by EPA shall be
excluded from sanitary wastewater collection systems.
• Pretreatment systems (such as acid neutralization) shall be installed where required and shall meet
EPA specifications.
• Hydraulic design of wastewater collection systems shall comply with TM 5-814-1, TM 5-814-2, and
American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) 37. All wastewater collection systems shall be designed
for gravity flow unless such systems are not economically feasible. Sewage lift stations and force mains
shall not be used unless approved by the appropriate EPA authority. Feasibility analyses and economic
evaluations of the costs of lift stations and force mains for construction, operation, and maintenance
shall be prepared and submitted to the appropriate EPA authority for approval. Sewers and force mains
shall be sized to accommodate the estimated daily maximum and minimum flow for the initial and
final years of the design period. These maximum and minimum flows shall be specified by the
appropriate EPA authority in accordance with ASCE 37.
- Velocities in gravity sewers and force mains shall not exceed 10 feet per second.
- Gravity sewers shall be designed for a minimum velocity of 2 feet per second.
- Force mains shall be designed for a minimum velocity of 3 Vt feet per second.
• For the preliminary design, domestic water consumption rates shall be used to approximate wastewater
flows. For the final design, where possible, actual flow data from an adjacent service area similar to
the service area under consideration shall be used to estimate wastewater discharges. In the absence
of such data, metered water use, less the consumptive use (i.e., water withdrawal rate), can be used.
• Sewers and force mains shall have a minimum depth of cover of 2 feet. Additional cover shall be
provided to prevent freezing in cold climates and at roadway crossings. Sewer and force main trench
widths shall be minimized; however, excavations, trenching, and shoring shall comply with 29 CFR
Part 1926, Subpart P. Pipe bedding specified by the pipe manufacturer shall be in place before sewers
and force mains are installed.
• Sewers or force mains shall not be routed within 50 feet (75 feet in pervious soils) of any well or
reservoir that serves as a potable water supply. In all instances where such horizontal separation cannot
be maintained, the sewer or force main shall be ductile iron pipe. Where groundwater is near the
surface, special precautions shall be taken to prevent sewer infiltration or exfiltration. Where feasible,
sewers or force mains shall not be routed within 10 feet of potable water lines or firelines.
• The horizontal distance between the water pipe and a sewer or force main shall not be less than 10 feet
except where the bottom of the water line will be at least 12 inches above the top of the sewer pipe or
force main, in which case the water pipe shall be laid at least 6 feet (horizontally) from the sewer or
2-25 .
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 2 -Site Work
force main. Where water pipes cross under gravity-flow sewer lines, the sewer pipe shall be fully
encased in concrete for at least 10 feet each side of the crossing or, for this same distance, shall be
made of pressure pipe, with no joint located within 3 feet horizontally of the crossing. Water lines
shall, in all cases, cross above sewage force mains or inverted siphons and shall be at least 2 feet above
the sewer main. Joints in the sewer main that are within 3 feet (horizontally) of the crossing shall be
encased in concrete.
• Where feasible, sewers and force mains shall not be routed under buildings or other permanent
structures. Sewers and force mains shall be adjacent and parallel to paved roadways. Sewers and force
mains shall not pass beneath paved roadways except at roadway crossings. Where feasible, utility cuts
within existing roadways shall be perpendicular to the roadway centerline to minimize trench length.
Diagonal roadway cuts shall be avoided whenever possible.
• The selection of sewer and force main material shall be based on wastewater characteristics and soil
conditions. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) shall be considered where tree roots and infiltration are
problems. Ductile iron pipe shall be used for force main and gravity sewer stream crossings. Ductile
iron shall also be used for sewers located in parking lots and other high-traffic areas. Pipe joints shall
have a watertight seal. Maximum infiltration-exfiltration test requirements shall be specified within
the contract documents.
2.S.3 NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
Gas distribution shall comply with local codes and requirements. Fuel gas systems shall comply with NFPA
54. Liquefied petroleum gas systems shall comply with NFPA 58.
2.8.4 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
Site power and lighting shall be coordinated as detailed in Section 16, Electrical Requirements, of this
Manual.
2.8.5 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
Site cx>mmuiucationssliaH be coor
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 3 - Concrete
Section 3 - Concrete
3.1 General Requirements
3.1.1 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
This section covets the design and construction of plain, reinforced, and prestressed concrete structures,
whether of cast-in-place or precast concrete construction. The use of recycled materials in cast-in-place and
precast applications is encouraged, to the extent permitted by local and applicable technical codes. The
requirements of this section shall be used in conjunction with the structural design activities.
3.1.2 CODES
Concrete materials, design, and construction for buildings and other structures shall comply with American
Concrete Institute (ACI) 318 and local building codes.
3.1.3 USE OF COAL FLY ASH IN CONCRETE
Basic guidelines for using coal fly ash in concrete are contained in ACI 211.1.
3.2 Concrete Formwork
Formwork for concrete construction shall comply with ACI 347, ACI SP-4, and local building codes.
3.3 Concrete Reinforcement
3.3.1 REINFORCEMENT MATERIALS
Reinforcement materials for buildings and other incidental structures shall comply with local building codes
and ACI 318.
3.3.2 REINFORCEMENT DETAILS
Reinforcement details shall comply with ACI 352R, ACI SP-66, ACI 318, and local building codes.
3.4 Cast-ln-Piace Concrete
3.4.1 GENERAL
This subsection covers the selection of materials; proportioning of mixes; and mixing, placing, testing, and
quality control of cast-in-place concrete.
3.4.2 MATERIALS, TESTING, AND QUALITY CONTROL
Materials, testing, and quality control shall comply with ACI 318 and local building codes. Recycled
materials shall be used to the extent permitted by codes.
3.4.3 TOLERANCES
Tolerances shall be as recommended in ACI 347.
3.4.4 SELECTING PROPORTIONS FOR CONCRETE MIXES
The proportions for concrete mixes of normal-weight concrete shall comply with ACI 211.1. The proportions
for structural lightweight concrete shall comply with ACI 211.2.
3-1
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 3 - Concrete
3.4.5 MIXING, TRANSPORTING, AND PLACING
Mixing, transporting, and placing shall comply with the recommendations of ACI304.
3.4.6 CLIMATIC CONSIDERATIONS
Hot-weather concreting shall comply with the recommendations of ACI 305R. Cold-weather concreting shall
comply with the recommendations of ACI 306R.
3.4.7 POST-TENSIONED CONCRETE
In addition to the standards and resources referenced in other subsections, the Post-Tensioning Institute (PTI)
Post-Tensioning Manual may be used for the design and construction of post-tensioned concrete structures.
3.5 Precast/Prestressed Concrete
3.5.1 STRUCTURAL
This subsection covers materials, design, and construction of precast, precast and prestressed, and precast
and post-tensioned structures. In addition to meeting the requirements of other subsections, precast concrete
shall comply with the Precast Concrete Institute Manual (PCI MNL)-116. PCI MNL-120 and the PTI Post-
Tensioning Manual may also be used as guides for the design and construction of precast concrete structures.
3.5.2 ARCHITECTURAL
This subsection covers materials, design, and construction of architectural precast, and architectural precast
and prestressed, concrete members. In addition to meeting the requirements of other subsections, architectural
precast members shall comply with the PCI MNL-117.
3.6 Cementitious Decks for Buildings
3.6.1 GENERAL
This subsection covers materials, design, and construction of cementitious decks for building structures and
prefabricated floor and roof systems such as:
* Lightweight precast reinforced concrete planks
• Lightweight precast reinforced concrete channel slabs
• Reinforced gypsum planks
• Structural cement-fiber roof deck systems
• Reinforced poured-gypsum-over-formboard roof systems.
3.6.2 MATERIALS, DESIGN, AND CONSTRUCTION
The materials, design, and construction of cementitious decks for buildings shall comply with the
requirements of local building codes and the manufacturer's recommendations. In the event of a conflict
between the local building code and the manufacturer's recommendations, the more stringent shall apply.
3.7 Repair and Restoration of Concrete Structures
This subsection covers the evaluation of damage or deterioration, selection of repair methods, surface
preparation, and repair and restoration of concrete structures. The materials covered are portland cement
mortars and concretes, latex-modified portland cement mortar, epoxy mortars, epoxy concrete, and methyl
methacrylate concrete. Methods, procedures, and materials for the repair and restoration of concrete
structures shall comply with guidelines ACI 503.4 and ACI 546.1R.
3-2
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 3 - Concrete
3.8 Concrete Inspection and Testing
Inspection and testing shall comply with the requirements of local building codes and ACI318.
END OF SECTION 3
3-3
-------
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 4 - Masonry
Section 4 - Masonry
4.1 General Requirements
4.1.1 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
This section covers the design and construction of masonry structures. It shall apply to unit masonry
construction; reinforced and unreinforced masonry structures; structures using cement, clay, and stone
products; and those including brick, block, and tile structures. The requirements of this subsection shall be
used in conjunction with those in other sections and subsections.
4.1.2 CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS
Materials, design, and construction of masonry structures shall comply with the requirements of local building
codes. Recycled materials shall be used to the extent practical and allowed by code. The following sources
may also be used as guides for the design of masonry structures:
• American Concrete Institute (ACI) S31
• ACI 531.1
• National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA) TR 75B
• Brick Institute of America (BIA) Building Code Requirements for Engineered Brick Masonry.
4.2 Mortar and Grout
4.2.1 GENERAL
Requirements for materials, mixing, strength, and specifications for mortar and grout used in masonry
structures shall comply with local building codes.
4.2.2 MORTAR
Mortar shall be designed to perform the following functions:
* Join masonry units into an integral structure.
• Create tight seals between masonry units to prevent the entry of air and moisture.
• Bond with steel joint reinforcement, metal ties, and anchor bolts, where used, so that they act integrally
with the masonry.
• Give exposed masonry surfaces a desired architectural quality through color contrasts or shadow line from
various joint-tooling procedures.
• Compensate for size variations in the units by providing a bed to accommodate the different unit sizes.
4.2.3 GROUT
Grout shall be used in reinforced load-bearing masonry construction to bond the masonry units and the
reinforcing steel so that they act together to resist the imposed loads. It may also be used in unreinforced load-
bearing masonry construction to give it added strength.
4-1
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 4 - Masonry
4.3 Unit Masonry
Materials, design, and construction of masonry units shall be in accordance with the requirements in
subsection 4.1, General Requirements.
4.4 Masonry Accessories
Joint reinforcement, anchors, ties, and wire fabric shall comply with the following:
• Local building codes
• ACI 530.1.
4.5 Reinforced Masonry
Design and construction of reinforced masonry shall comply with the following:
• Local building codes
• ACI 530
• ACI 530.1.
4.6 Masonry Inspection and Testing
Inspection and testing of unit masonry, grout, mortar reinforcing, and accessories shall comply with the
following:
• Local building codes
• ACI 530.1.
END OF SECTION 4
4-2
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1996
Section 5 - Metals
Section 5 - Metals
5.1 General Requirements
This section covers the design and construction of steel and aluminum structures. The requirements of this
section shall be used in conjunction with those of other sections.
5.2 Structural Steel
Structural steel for buildings and other incidental structures shall comply with the following:
• Local building codes
• American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc., (AISC) MO 16 or M015L.
5.3 Steel Joists
5.3.1 CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS
Steel joists and joist girders shall comply with the following:
• Local building codes
• Steel Joist Institute's StandardSpecifications: Load Tables and Weight Tables for SteelJoists and Joist
Girders.
5.3.2 INTENDED USE
Steel joists shall not be used for wind bracing or other types of bracing. They shall be used only as horizontal
load-carrying members supporting floor and roof decks.
5.3.3 SUPPORT OF VIBRATING EQUIPMENT
Steeljoists shall not be used to support air-conditioning, air-handling, or any type of vibrating equipment.
Steeljoists serving as floor joists and roof purlins shall not have bracing members attached to them that would
transmit vibrations from vibrating equipment into the steel joists and/or structural diaphragms.
5.4 Steel Decks
Steel decks shall comply with the following:
• Local building codes
• Steel Deck Institute Publication 20
• Steel Deck Institute Publication DDM01.
5.5 Miscellaneous Metals
5.5.1 DEFINITION
Miscellaneous metals are all ferrous and nonferrous metals other than structural steel as defined in the AISC
Code of Standard Practice.
5-1
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 5 - Metals
5.5.2 CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS
Miscellaneous metals shall comply with the requirements of local orders and with all applicable industry
standards for the specific type of metal and use, as listed elsewhere in this section.
5.6 Light-Gauge Steel
Light-gauge steel shall comply with the following:
• Local building codes
• American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural
Members.
5.7 Preengineered Metal Buildings
5.7.1 CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS
Preengineered metal buildings shall comply with:
* Local building codes
* The Metal Building Manufacturers Association Metal Building Systems Manual.
5.7.2 LOADS
Where the use of the design loads specified in these design criteria would prevent procurement of
preengineered metal buildings, consideration may be given to deviating from said loadings. Such
considerations shall be based on an evaluation of whether such deviations would jeopardize personnel and/or
material safety, a review of the type of occupancy and functional requirements of the particular building, and
a determination of whether such deviation could be considered justified and permissible in accordance with
local building codes.
5.8 Structural Steel Inspection and Testing
Structural steel inspection shall be as required by:
• Local building codes
• AISC Manual of Steel Construction.
END OF SECTION 5
5-2
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 6 - Wood and Plastics
Section 6 - Wood and Plastics
6.1 General Requirements
This section covers the use of wood and plastic materials in construction. The use of recycled materials in
compliance with local and industry codes is encouraged. The requirements of this section shall be used in
conjunction with the requirements of other sections in this Manual.
6.2 Partitions
Partitions requiring fire-resistance ratings shall be constructed of noncombustible/limited combustible
(NC/LC) materials and either listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) or approved by Factory Mutual
(FM) and listed in its approval guide. Refer to the description of off-gassing in Chapter 4, paragraph 3.b, of
the Safely Manual for more information on indoor material requirements.
6.2.1 CEILING-HIGH PARTITIONS
As restricted by subsection 6.2, all ceiling-high partitions shall be constructed of NC/LC material. Interior
finish or trim may be combustible to the extent permitted by the description in the interior finish discussion
in Section 9, Finishes, of this Manual. Combustible insulation on electrical installations may be used to the
extent described in Section 16, Electrical Requirements, of this Manual.
6.2.2 WOOD STUD PARTITIONS
Wood studs shall not be installed as part of new construction or as part of a major alteration or space
adjustment in other types of construction.
6.2.3 LESS-THAN-CEILING-HIGH PARTITIONS
Bank type partitions, acoustical screens, freestanding space dividers, and other partitions that do not reach
the ceiling shall conform to the requirements for movable partitions set forth by the General Services
Administration (GSA) in PBS-PQ100.1. In addition, the placement of partitions relative to sprinklers shall
comply with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 13, and adequate passageway width and
identification of means of egress shall comply with NFPA 101. Another factor limiting the height and
location of partitions is that tall or massive partition systems may interfere with the even distribution of
conditioned air. Consideration should be given to the location of supply diflusers and return registers; the
location of thermostats; and the clearance above, below, and around die partitions to allow adequate air
circulation.
6.3 Use of Wood and Plastic
Laboratory shelving and casework may be fabricated using wood (plywood) and plastic materials. See
subsection 10.5 of this Manual for requirements.
END OF SECTION 6
6-1
-------
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 7 - Thermal and Moisture Requirements
Section 7 - Thermal and Moisture Requirements
7.1 General Requirements
In selecting building materials, careful consideration shall be given to all technical criteria. Vapor barriers
to vapor flow through the walls and roofs shall be placed with the aim of preventing moisture accumulation
and condensation within the building structure, reduction of thermal performance, and increased latent
cooling load in the space.
7.2 Design Characteristics
Design characteristics of exterior wall sections should be evaluated for functional and cost effectiveness in
relation to the following:
• Moisture transport
• Thermal performance
• Weathertight design, including sealant profiles, material adjacencies, and flashing configuration.
7.3 Thermal Resistance
For information on the thermal characteristics of single materials or wall assemblies, refer to the American
Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) Handbook of Fundamentals
or the manufacturer's certified technical information. Thermal resistance (R) values shall be identified for
each element in the building shell. "IT factor calculations are prepared by following the recommended
procedures as documented in the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals.
7.4 Moisture Transport
Dew point calculations are prepared by following the recommended design procedures in the ASHRAE
Handbook of Fundamentals. The exterior envelope will be designed to prevent condensation within wall
cavities, building spaces, etc.
7.5 Panel, Curtain, and Spandrel Walls
Openings between panel, curtain, and spandrel walls and the building structure or floor slabs around them,
shall be fire stopped in accordance with the provisions outlined in Section 13, Special Construction, of this
Manual. The requirements in this subsection in no way reduce the requirements for protection of walls subject
to an exterior fire exposure. See Chapter 3, paragraph 8, of the Safety Manual for information on exposure
protection.
7.5.1 PANEL AND CURTAIN WALLS
All panel and curtain walls shall conform to the requirements for nonbearing walls for the type of construction
and model code involved and shall be securely anchored to the building in a manner that will prevent failure
of the anchors in a fire or failure of the panel and its components in high wind.
7.5.2 SPANDREL WALLS
Except as noted below, spandrel walls shall be provided at each floor and shall have a height of at least 3 feet
above the finished floor and a fire resistance equivalent to the floor involved.
7-1
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 7 - Thermal and Moisture Requirements
7.5.2.1 EXCEPTION NO. 1
Exterior spandrel walls are not necessary and, if provided, are not required to have any fire resistance if
the rooms located directly inside the exterior wall of the building and on the floor below contain low-
hazard occupancies or occupancies that are sprinkler protected
7.5.2.2 EXCEPTION NO. 2.
Spandrel walls are not required at grade level.
END OF SECTION 7
7-2
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines ; February 1998
Section 8 - Doors and Windows
Section 8 - Doors and Windows
8.1 Doors
8.1.1 GENERAL
Unless otherwise noted, all doors shall be 36 inches wide. Doors in designed egress ways shall swing in the
direction of egress. Doors shall not swing into exit ways in a manner that reduces the effective exit width.
8.1.1.1 HARDWARE
All doors shall be equipped with heavy-duty hardware. Each leaf (up to 80 inches high) shall be provided
with minimum 1 Vi pair butt hinges or 2 pair butt hinges on doors higher than 80 inches. All doors shall
have floor stops or wall bumpers. Exterior, egress, and laboratory doors shall have automatic closers. All
public-use doors must be equipped with push plates, pull bars or handles, and automatic door closers.
Corridor and outside doors must be equipped with cylinder locks and door checks. All locks must be
master-keyed. The Government must be furnished with at least two master keys and two keys for each
lock. Hardware for doors in the means of egress shall conform to National Fire Protection Association
(NFPA) standard 101.
8.1.1.2 ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS
Doors, windows, and hardware exposed to highly corrosive conditions, as in marine or very humid
environments, shall be nonferrous or provided with a protective, corrosion-resistant finish.
8.1.2 EXTERIOR DOORS
Exterior doors shall be weathertight and equipped with an automatic door closer, shall open outward, and
shall have a drip rain diverter mounted above the door to channel water to the exterior wall. The force of the
door closer shall comply with requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
8.1.3 INTERIOR DOORS
Interior doors must have a minimum opening of 36 inches (width) by 80 inches (height) and shall comply
with AD A. Hollow-core wood doors are not acceptable. Hardware shall be AD A compliant. Doors shall be
operable by a single effort and shall be provided with vision panels in accordance with all applicable code
requirements. All requirements of AD A shall be incorporated.
8.1.3.1 LANDING AREAS
The landing areas for doors that open onto walkways, ramps, corridors, and other pedestrian paths shall
be clear and level with a slope of no greater than 1:50; they shall extend at least 5 feet from the swing side
of the door, 4 feet from the opposite side, and at least 1 '/j feet past the latch side (pull side) of the door and
1 foot past the latch side (push side).
8.1.4 FIRE DOORS
Fire doors shall conform to NFPA 80. Doors, hardware, and frames shall bear the label of Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc.; Factory Mutual; or another approved laboratory testing organization, in accordance with
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) E-152. Glazing material shall not be allowed in fire
doors with a 3-hour fire protection rating or in fire doors with a 1.5-hour fire protection rating that are used
in locations with severe fire exposure potential (such as in a flammable-liquids storage room). The maximum
area of glazing in a 1- or 1.5-hour door shall be 100 square inches (0.06S square meters) unless the area has
been tested and meets the requirements of NFPA 80. The area of glazing in fire doors that have less than 1-
hour fire-resistance ratings shall be limited to the maximum area tested. All glazing shall be wired glass or
other glass approved for use in fire doors.
8-1
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 8 - Doors and Windows
8.1.4.1 EXIT DOORS
Fire doors in exits or means of egress shall also conform to the requirements contained in Chapter 4,
paragraph 4, of the Safety Manual. Fire doors in air-handling systems shall also conform to the
requirements outlined in Section 15, Mechanical Requirements, of this Manual.
8.1.5 LABORATORY DOORS
Laboratory doors shall be 48 inches wide (36 inches wide for the active leaf and 12 inches wide for the
inactive leaf) and 84 inches high to facilitate easy movement of equipment and carts. Laboratory doors must
swing out and should be inserted in alcoves regardless of the corridor width. In general, large vision panels
should be provided to allow easy and quick safety inspection of laboratory spaces. Hardware shall be ADA-
compliant and shall provide various levels of access control as required; it will include both combination and
key access locks. Areas where a high level of security will be required shall be provided with card-key access
control.
8.2 Windows
8.2.1 GENERAL
The use of natural but controlled daylighting should be maximized as part of a total energy conservation
program. EPA values natural light and perceives it as part of an exemplary working environment as well as
a potential source of energy savings. The building organization and design concept shall bring adequate
natural light into personnel spaces. Window size, number, and location shall be determined on the basis of
need for natural light and ventilation and of energy considerations. All exterior windows in heated or air-
conditioned spaces shall use double-glazed, insulated, low E glass and thermal break sashes. All windows
in laboratory rooms that may contain explosive materials shall be glazed with safety glass.
8.2.2 FIXED WINDOW SYSTEMS
Laboratory space shall have windows that are nonoperable (except with a key, where windows must be opened
for cleaning purposes) in order to maintain temperature and humidity control and room pressurization
relationships.
8.2.3 SAFETY OF STOREFRONT AND CURTAIN WALL SYSTEMS
Windows extending to within 18 inches of the floor and located at least 4 feet above grade shall be provided
with a safety bar on the interior window approximately 3 feet above floor level. Off-street, ground-level
windows and those accessible from fire escapes and adjacent roofs must have anti-intrusion alarm systems
to deter forcible entry.
8.2.4 WINDOW HEIGHT
Wherever windows extend to within 36 inches of the finished floor and are at least 4 feet above grade, a
suitable metal barrier shall be provided on the interior side, approximately 56 inches above floor level.
(Perimeter heating and cooling units may form this barrier.) If the glass construction can withstand a
horizontal force of 200 pounds or more and meets the requirements of 29 CFR § 1910.23,16 CFRPart 1201,
and the local building code, no barriers are required. For windows in walls that must have a fire-resistance
rating, see NFPA 80 A and Chapter 2, paragraph 7, of the Safety Manual.
8.2.5 GLAZED PANELS IN INTERIOR PARTITIONS AND WALLS
Interior glazed panels must comply with the Consumer Products Safety Commission Safety Standard for
Architectural Glazing Materials (16 CFR Pan 1201). When glazing panels and windows are used in fire
barrier walls, such use shall also meet the criteria set forth in the Safety Manual.
8-2
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 8 - Doors and Windows
8.3 Sun Shading
8.3.1 GENERAL
The design professional shall be responsible for providing window coverings for interior and exterior windows
where required by the room data sheets. All exterior windows shall be reviewed and considered for window
coverings. Use of window coverings shall be considered even when such coverings are not required by the
data sheet, when solar glare and heat gain should be controlled. Nonpermanent window coverings installed
on the inside of windows are considered "interior finishes" and are discussed in subsection 9.6 of this Manual.
8.3.2 LABORATORY WINDOWS
Laboratory windows exposed to direct sunlight shall be shaded with permanent exterior shading devices that
shade the window from direct sun.
END OF SECTION 8
8-3
-------
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 9 - Finishes
Section 9 - Finishes
9.1 Interior Finishes
The required finishes for each room are specified in the room data sheets included in Appendix C. The
following requirements apply to interior finishing.
9.1.1 TRIM AND INCIDENTAL FINISHES
Interior wall and ceiling finish that covers no more than 10 percent of the aggregate wall and ceiling area
involved may be Class C material in accordance with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 101,
Chapter 6.
9.1.2 FINAL FINISHING MATERIAL
Wallpaper, paint, veneer, and other thin finishing materials that are applied directly to the surface of walls
and ceilings and are not more than 1/28-inch thick shall not be considered as interior finishes per NFPA 101,
Chapter 6.
9.1.3 AIRSPACE
Whenever an airspace is located behind combustible material, the space shall be blocked so that no void
extends more than 10 feet in any direction. For example, wood paneling applied to wood furring strips will
meet the requirement if the distance between the furring strips is no more than 10 feet in both a horizontal
and a vertical direction.
9.1.4 COMBUSTIBLE SUBSTANCES
Materials composed of basically combustible substances (e.g., wood, fiberboard) that have been treated with
fire-retardant chemicals throughout the material (e.g., pressure impregnation), as opposed to surface
treatment, may be used as interior finish subject to the following conditions: (1) the treated material shall be
installed in full accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and (2) the treated material shall not be
installed in any location where conditions exist that may reduce the effectiveness of the fire-retardant
treatment (e.g., high humidity). Surface treatments may be used to reduce the risks associated with existing
conditions, in accordance with Chapter 6 of NFPA 101. No material that will result in higher flame spread
or smoke development ratings than those permitted in this Manual shall be used as an interior finish.
9.2 Wall Materials
Wall materials must be capable of withstanding washing with detergents and disinfectants. Materials selected
shall be compatible with their intended use and shall emphasize durability and low maintenance while
creating a comfortable work environment.
9.2.1 LEAD-BASED PAINT
Lead-based paint shall not be used in EPA facilities per subsection 1.5.9.3.2 of this Manual. Refer to
Chapter 4, paragraph 3.a, of the Safety Manual for restrictions on the use of lead-based paint.
9.2.2 WALL FINISHES
In general, walls shall be gypsum wallboard, with a painted finish, on metal studs. Walls in laboratory areas
will be required to support additional loads due to movable casework, mounting rails, upper cabinets or
adjustable shelves, and equipment anchorage. Therefore, structural wall studs, backing plates, and lateral
bracing sufficient to withstand heavy loads will be required. Where concrete masonry unit (CMU) block or
poured concrete walls are used to meet other design requirements or constraints, they shall be furred with
gypsum wallboard or covered with another appropriate finish.
9-1
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 9 - Finishes
9.2.3 WALL COVERING AND FINISHES
Wall coverings and finishes, and the process by which they are selected, must meet the requirements outlined
in the following subsections.
9.2.3.1 GENERAL
The required finishes must be designated for each room in the room data sheets, a copy of which is
included with this document Actual material selection, color, texture, etc., is left to the design
professionals who shall make selections in consultation with the users. Paint shall be carefully selected
so as not to affect laboratory operations. The design professional must also select finish materials for
items and areas not specifically designated in the room data sheets. These selections shall be submitted
to the Government representative for final approval.
9.2.3.2 FLAME SPREAD AND SMOKE LIMITATIONS
Wall finishes on walls that are part of a means of egress must have an interior finish of Class A (flame
spread 0-25, smoke developed 0-450). (Interior finish ratings are derived from American Society for
Testing and Materials [ASTM] E-84 and NFPA 255.) For any existing construction that is not protected
throughout by a sprinkler system meeting the Government's approval, wall finishes must have an interior
finish of Class A (flame spread 0-25, smoke developed 0-450). All new construction for EPA shall be
protected throughout by a sprinkler system meeting the Government's approval; in construction that is
so protected, wall finishes in all areas, except those that are a part of the means of egress, may have an
interior finish of Class B (flame spread 26-75, smoke developed 0-450), unless otherwise restricted by an
applicable code. The most restrictive requirement shall govern. In sprinkler-protected exit accesses or
passageways, the interior finish may be composed of materials with a Class B interior finish rating (flame
spread 26-75, smoke developed 0-450). (See NFPA 101 and PBS-PQlOO.l as the sources of this
requirement.)
9.2.3.3 WALL COVERING
Wall covering made of materials that are considered "environmentally friendly" shall be provided in the
administrative and other office areas when required (none shall be provided in the laboratory areas). Such
wall covering shall meet the following criteria:
• Construction: All material shall be of uniform color throughout. Colors and patterns shall be chosen
and approved by EPA from standard manufacturer lines offered by the design professional.
• Maintenance properties: All wall covering shall be resistant to permanent stains and mildew and shall
be capable of being cleaned with mild, nonabrasive cleaners.
• Fire hazard requirements: Each type of wall covering used will have a minimum interior finish of
Class C (flame spread 76-200, smoke developed 0-450) when tested in accordance with ASTM E-84.
• Application: Application of all wall covering shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
9.3 Finished Ceilings
9.3.1 GENERAL
Ceilings shall be set at a minimum height of 9 feet 8 inches in laboratory zones both in general spaces and
in laboratory spaces and at a minimum height of 8 feet in corridor and office spaces. Except in service areas,
ceilings must have acoustical treatment acceptable to the contracting officer, a flame spread rating of 25 or
less, and a smoke development rating of 450 or less (ASTM E-84). Protrusion of fixtures into traffic ways
is not allowed. Refer to the Safety Manual for fire-resistance requirements for ceilings.
9-2
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines ] February 1998
Section 9 - Finishes
9.3.2 CEILINGS NOT ALONG EXIT PATH
Ceilings and interior finishes in areas that are not part of the normal exit route may have an interior finish
of Class C (flame spread 76-200, smoke developed 0-450), unless an applicable code is more restrictive.
9.3.3 CEILINGS ALONG EXIT PATH
In sprinkler-protected exit ways or enclosed corridors leading to exits, ceilings and interior finishes may be
composed of materials with an interior finish rating of Class B (flame spread 26-75, smoke developed 0-450),
unless an applicable code is more restrictive. The most restrictive applicable code shall be used.
9.3.4 CEILING FINISHES
Where ceiling finishes are required, they will, in general, be suspended acoustical tile with recessed
fluorescent lighting fixtures. Other ceiling finishes will be required in special rooms, as specified on the room
data sheets. These finishes will include hard ceilings with sealed openings for clean analytical laboratories.
Special consideration shall be given to the type of grid system and acoustical tile when the ceiling is in a moist
area or in food service and other specialty areas.
9.3.5 OPEN CEILINGS
All areas above open ceilings shall be painted. The necessary coordination shall occur for all requirements
regarding painting of exposed areas, including engineered systems that require color-coded painting or
stenciling and general code-required stenciling of nomenclature defining the rating of fire walls.
9.4 Floor Treatments
9.4.1 GENERAL
Floor finishes shall be compatible with the intended use of the room and shall emphasize durability and low
maintenance. Floors and floor coverings may be of any material normal to the intended use. Materials may
be either combustible or noncombustible, including wood, asphalt tile, carpet, rags, linoleum, concrete, and
terrazzo. Interior floor finishes shall meet the interior finish requirements noted above. (See subsection 9.1.1
on page 9-1 for more information on interior finish requirements.) Materials must be smooth, nonabsorbent,
skid-proof, and wear resistant Laboratory flooring should resist the adverse effects of acids, solvents, and
detergents. Materials must be monolithic or have a minimum number of joints. The base may be a 4-inch
vinyl or rubber base or an integral-coved base where sheet vinyl flooring is used.
9.4.1.1 FIRE SAFETY
Interior floor finishes shall be in accordance with Chapter 6 of NFPA 101 and shall be tested in
accordance with NFPA 253. Flooring materials used as wall sections or wall coverings shall comply with
the fire safety characteristics described in Chapter 4, paragraph 13.c, of the Safety Manual for flame
spread and smoke development. The flame spread and smoke development characteristics shall be
determined through testing in the orientation in which the material is to be installed (NFPA 253 results
shall not be used to evaluate flooring tested in the vertical position).
9.4.2 CARPET
Carpet tiles shall cover all office floors and must meet the static buildup and flammability requirements that
follow.
9.4.2.1 SPECIFICATIONS
The following specifications must be met for all new carpet installation:
• Pile yarn content: Continuous filament soil-hiding nylon or wool/nylon combinations.
• Carpet pile construction: Level loop, textured loop, level cut pile, or level cut/uncut pile.
9-3
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1996 and Planning Guidelines
Section 9 - Finishes
» Pile weight. Minimum of 28 ounces per square yard.
* Secondary back: Synthetic fiber or jute for glue-down installation.
• Total weight: Minimum of 64 ounces per square yard.
• Flammability: In all areas except exits, carpet must have a critical radiant flux (CRF) of 0.25 or
greater, with a specific optical density not higher than 450. Carpet in exits most have a CRF of at least
0.50. Carpet passing the Consumer Products Safety Commission FFL-70 (Pill Test) is acceptable for
office areas; it may also be used in corridors that are protected by automatic sprinklers. Check
applicable codes for any more restrictive requirements. The most restrictive requirement shall apply.
• Static buildup: 3.5 kilovolts (kV) maximum with built-in static dissipation is recommended; static-
controlled is acceptable. More restrictive levels shall be required in sensitive areas such as computer
rooms; these levels shall be determined by calculations for any special equipment in use.
• Interior finish requirements: As required by NFPA 101, Section 6-5.
9.4.2.2 COLOR
For new carpet, the Government shall be provided with at least three color samples. The sample and color
must be approved by EPA prior to installation. No substitutes may be made after sample selection.
9.4.2.3 INSTALLATION
Carpet must be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
* In leased space, carpet shall be replaced at least once every 7 years during Government occupancy, or
whenever backing or underlayment is exposed and/or there are noticeable variations in surface color
or texture, whichever occurs first.
• Carpet replacement shall include the moving and returaing-m-plara of aUfiirniture. Floor perimeters
at partitions must have wood, rubber vinyl, or carpet base. Any exceptions must be approved by the
contracting officer.
• An additional 10 percem of the selected carrot tiles sriall be provided^ the contractor for the owner's
own stock and replacement These carpet tiles are not to be used during the warranty period.
• The off-gassing requirements in Chapter 4, paragraph 3.b, of time Safety Manual shall be followed.
9.4.3 VINYL TILE
Unless otherwise indicated elsewhere in this document, all new vinyl tile shall be 12 inch * 12 inch * 1/8-inch
thick, shall have 35 percent to 40 percent reflectance, and shall be high density, meeting the requirements of
Federal Specification SS-T-312, Type IV. Adhesives used to set tiles shall be environmentally acceptable.
Colors and patterns will be selected from three or more samples by the contracting officer or his or her duly
appointed representative.
9.4.4 SEAMLESS VINYL FLOORING
Seamless flooring shall be vinyl seamless flooring, shall be chemical-resistant as manufactured by Tarket or
Mipolan or an approved equal, and shall be coved 4 inches up the wall using the same material. Joints shall
be chemically welded smooth without any grooves. Adhesive used to set the flooring shall be environmentally
acceptable.
9-4
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines . February 1998
Section 9 - Finishes
9.4.5 CERAMIC TILE FLOORING
Ceramic tile flooring shall be sealed in all grout areas. At least five color samples shall be incorporated into
the color boards for selection and approval by the contracting officer (or his or her duly appointed
representative).
9.4.6 SPECIAL FLOORING
Special floor-coating systems shall be troweled, jointless floor systems with slip-resistant top coatings which
shall be waterproof and resistant to alkalies and acids. The special flooring system selected should be
compatible with its intended use.
9.4.7 EXPOSED CONCRETE FLOORING
Steel trowel finish shall be used on exposed concrete floors that will not receive other finish. Exposed interior
concrete floors shall be sealed withapenetrating-type solvent base or water-emulsion base unpigmented sealer
containing a suitable type resin and no wax
9.5 Painting
9.5.1 GENERAL
Before occupancy, all surfaces designated for painting must be newly painted with paint finish and colors
acceptable to, and approved by, the contracting officer or that officer's duly appointed representative. The
contracting officer or duly appointed representative shall be provided with color samples and color schemes,
with their average surface reflectance value clearly identified, for selection.
9.5.2 REFLECTANCE VALUES
Minimum average surface reflectance values that will be used as a base for the selection of interior colors are
as follows:
• Ceiling: 80 percent.
• Walls: 50 percent
• Floors: 30 percent.
• Furniture and equipment: 35 percent.
• Chalkboards: Not less than 15 percent nor more than 20 percent, as recommended by the American
Illuminating Engineering Society and the American Institute of Architects in their report, American
Standard Practice for School Lighting, AIA No. 32F28.
9.5.2.1 ADDITIONAL SPECIFICATIONS
Deviations from the above reflectance requirements are allowed for aesthetic treatment of such areas as
conference rooms, lobbies, corridors, and executive offices. Surfaces shall also have a matte finish to
prevent excessive brightness ratios and to minimize specular reflections.
9.5.3 WALL AND CEILING COLORS
Ceiling color can be extended from 1 to 3 feet down the walls, or to the level of the fixtures, to obtain up to
20 percent increase in illumination.
9.5.4 ACCENT AREAS
Up to 20 percent of wall surfaces may have reflectance values lower than those listed, for accent purposes,
without being considered part of the average.
9.6 Window Covering
Permanent devices installed on the outside of buildings to control sunlight are considered sun shades and are
discussed in subsection 8.3 of this Manual.
9-5
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 9 - Finishes
9.6.1 BLINDS
Window blinds in laboratory spaces may be either vertical or horizontal with nonmetallic slats. Color
selection will be made by the EPA representative. The hardware and bUnd mechanisms shall be made of acid-
resistive materials.
9.6.2 BLACKOUT SHADES
Rooms requiring blackout capability shall be equipped with blackout shades. Shades should be a
preengraeered unit with a fiberglass-coated fabric shadecloth. They must have a noncorroding, concealed-
variable adjustment mechanism, adjustable from 100 percent friction (static mode) with finite positions to 15
percent friction (dynamic mode) with only preselected positions.
9.6.3 DRAPERIES AND CURTAINS
All draperies, curtains, and similar hanging materials gh»u be of a noncombustible or flame-resistant fabric
(chemically treated). Flame-resistant means that the fabric or films (e.g., thin plastic sheets or cellophane)
must meet the performance criteria described in NFPA 701. In addition, draperies, curtains, and other
window finishes shall be formaldehyde free and shall meet the off-gassing criteria set forth in Chapter 4,
paragraph 3 .b, of the Safety Manual.
END OF SECTION 9
9-6
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 10 - Specialties
Section 10 - Specialties
10.1 Magnetic, Liquid Chalk, Dry-Marker Boards and Tack Boards
Magnetic dry-marker boards (liquid chalk) shall be used except when the solvent markers used on these
boards would affect operations undertaken in laboratories; chalk-type chalkboards shall not be used.
Locations of magnetic dry-marker boards and tack boards shall be determined by the design professional in
close coordination with the contracting officer's representative (COR).
10.2 Interior Signage Systems and Building Directory
10.2.1 GENERAL
All signage, identification, room numbering, and building directories shall comply with the requirements of
the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
10.2.2 DOOR IDENTIFICATION
Door identification shall be installed in approved locations adjacent to office entrances. The form of door
identification must be approved by the COR. Toilet, stairway, and corridor doors must be identified by the
international symbol of accessibility at a height of 54 to 66 inches above the floor, wherever possible, such
identification should be mounted on the wall at the latch side of the door. Seldom-used doors to areas posing
danger to the blind must have knurled or acceptable plastic-abrasive-coated handles. Tactile warning
indicators shall not be used to identify exit stairs.
10.2.3 ROOM NUMBERING
A room-numbering and room-naming system is required for the identification of all spaces in the facility.
Plans shall be submitted to the COR for review and approval before construction documentation begins.
10.2.4 BUILDING DIRECTORY
A wall-mounted, glass-enclosed directory with lock shall be provided at a conspicuous location in the lobby
or entrance of the building. The directory shall be approximately 2 feet by 3 feet in size. The building
directory shall be approved by the COR.
10.3 Portable Fire Extinguishers
Portable fire extinguishers shall be provided and located within recessed cabinets, in accordance with National
Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 10, Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers. Portable fire extinguishers
shall be provided on the basis of the classes of anticipated fires and the size and degree of hazard affecting
the extinguishers' use. Portable fire extinguishers containing halon shall not be used.
10.3.1 FIRE EXTINGUISHER LOCATIONS
Portable fire extinguishers shall be provided in every laboratory room. In the other areas of the building, the
minimum number of fire extinguishers needed for protection shall be determined in accordance with NFPA
10, Chapter 3, Distribution of Extinguishers.
• Class A and D extinguishers shall be located so that the travel distance to the respective Class A and D
hazard areas does not exceed 75 feet.
• Class B extinguishers shall be located so that the travel distance to the Class B hazard areas does not
exceed 50 feet.
10-1
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1996 and Planning Guidelines
Section 10-Specialties
• Extinguishers with Class C ratings shall be located on the basis of the anticipated Class A or B hazard.
• One extinguisher may be installed to provide protection for several hazard areas provided that travel
distances are not exceeded.
10.4 Safety Devices
Eye and face washing equipment and safety showers must be provided for every laboratory and laboratory
support room where chemicals are being utilized, in accordance with the American National Standards
Institute (ANSI) Standard Z3S8.1. At least one double-spray-head, hands-free-operating eyewash shall be
provided within every laboratory, or for every two laboratory modules, next to or as close as possible to the
source of hazard (e.g., fume hood or other hazard). Safety showers shall be provided in accessible locations
that require no more than 10 seconds to reach from hazard locations; safety showers should be no more than
SO feet travel distance from the hazard source. The location and installation of emergency showers and
eyewash equipment shall be in accordance with the Safety Manual.
10.5 Laboratory Casework
10.5.1 GENERAL
Preferably, all laboratory casework and associated fume hoods required in the facility shall be the product of
one manufacturer and shall be installed under the recommendations of that manufacturer. The laboratory
casework shall meet the functional, aesthetic, flexibility, and maintenance needs of each user. Unless noted
otherwise, all surfaces shall be of stainless steel or another nonporous, durable, corrosion-resistant material.
Plastic laminate or other similar facing materials, over wood or composite material, are permitted only when
the laminate or surfacing material is certified by the manufacturer to be impervious to acids and other
common laboratory solvents.
10.5.2 MODULAR DESIGN
Design of laboratory casework (cabinets, counters, fume hoods, etc.) should be coordinated and compatible.
Basic laboratory casework systems shall be composed of modular dimensioned units of modern design
consisting of a self-supporting steel frame capable of containing service piping and drain lines and permitting
the attachment and/or support of various styles of countertops, sinks, cupsinks, and utility hoses and
connections, independently from base cabinet assemblies. Support systems shall provide the flexibility and
unlimited horizontal interchangeability of any or all cabinet sizes without removal of the working top or
interference of immediate vertical legs, supports, brackets, or framing between cabinets. Fixed laboratory
casework shall be similarly flexible. The design of fixed casework shall be approved by the COR.
10.5.3 SUPPORT CAPABILITY
The system shall support work surfaces and steel undercounter cabinets independent of one another. All
components shall be self-supporting and essentially independent of the building structure. The system shall
support sinks, service fittings, plumbing fixtures, and service and waste lines by utilizing pipe clamps. The
assembly shall be designed and manufactured in such a manner that each linear foot of span between
supporting elements, is capable of supporting a live load of 200 pounds per linear foot plus a dead load of 50
pounds per linear foot. In addition, it should be possible to place a concentrated load of 250 pounds on the
front edge of the assembly at any point (assuming legs spaced at 6 feet on center) without causing the system
to fail in its suspension or tip or deflect more than Vi< of an inch.
10.5.4 CABINET ASSEMBLIES
Cabinet assemblies shall be suspended from the support system with fastener devices mounted in front of the
unit for attachment to the front rail and shall be designed so that removal of units can be easily accomplished
by use of common hand tools. Such fastener devices shall be of forged or cast steel and shall be commercially
cadmium plated. Filler panels shall be provided at exposed-to-view areas, between backs of cabinets and
10-2
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 10 - Specialties
walls, between backs of cabinets at the end of the peninsula or island benches, and at knee openings, to allow
for the maintenance of mechanical services.
10.5.5 BASE CABINETS
Casework shall be of a metal construction of slimline design and shall be built in accordance with the highest
standards and practices of the metal casework industry. Superior quality casework shall be established by use
of proper machinery, tools, dies, fixtures, and skilled workmanship so that the fit of doors and drawers allows
vertical and horizontal openings of minimum tolerance. All units shall be of flush-front construction so that
drawer and door faces are in the same planeasexteriorcase members. Each unit shall be a completely welded
structure and should not require additional parts such as applied panels at ends, backs, or bottom.
10.5.6 WALL CABINETS
Upper wall cabinets shall be designed so that cabinets hang rigidly vertical without sag or tilt. The design
professional shall be responsible for ensuring that proper reinforcement is installed at the walls to support the
load of the cabinets and contents. Construction of wall cabinets shall be of similar to that of base cabinets;
wall cabinets shall be modular in design and installation to permit immediate interchangeability of all wall
cabinets and/or shelf units.
10.5.7 SHELVING
The following subsections provide information on reagent and adjustable shelving.
10.5.7.1 REAGENT SHELVES
Reagent shelves shall be 1-inch-thick plywood, faced on both sides with acid-resistant plastic laminate,
with all exposed edges edge-banded in 3-millimeter (Vn-inch) thick polyvinyl chloride (PVC).
10.5.7.2 ADJUSTABLE SHELVING
Adjustable shelving shall be 16-gauge steel shelving with hat-section reinforcing and shall be
interchangeable with wall-hung cabinets. Shelving standards shall be double-slotted, 30 inches in length,
mounted at a height of 54 inches above finished floor (measured to the bottom of the standard). Brackets
shall be 16-gauge metal with three blade hooks and shall be screwed to each shelf.
10.5.8 COUNTERTOPS
Countertop materials will vary depending on the intended use. The design professional shall be responsible
for evaluating the requirements of the laboratories to determine what countertop material is most suitable for
each specific application. The material used for the countertop shall also be used for back-splashes, side-
splashes, and services ledge covers.
10.5.8.1 PLASTIC LAMINATE
Chemically resistant plastic laminate countertops may be used in many applications where the use of
extremely corrosive chemicals or large amounts of water is not expected. •
10.5.8.2 EPOXY RESIN
Epoxy resin countertops shall be utilized in laboratories or in areas where large quantities of water or
extremely corrosive chemicals are being utilized on a routine basis. All joints shall be bonded with a
highly chemical-resistant and corrosion-resistant cement having properties similar to those of the base
material.
10.5.8.3 STAINLESS STEEL
Stainless steel countertops shall be used in special applications where sterile conditions are required (e.g.,
glassware washing areas, autoclave rooms), where there are controlled environmental temperatures (e.g.,
cold rooms, growth chambers), and where radioisotopes are being used.
10-3
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 10 - Specialties
10.5.9 MATERIALS
Standard laboratory casework shall be of metal construction unless otherwise indicated. For rooms that do
not require casework of metal construction, the casework materials shall be wood or approved plastic.
Hardware used for wood or plastic casework shall be epoxy coated
10.5.10 QUALITY
The laboratory casework that is subject to the above requirements shall have components, configuration,
materials, finish, and performance (including performance on chemical and physical performance tests)
comparable to cantilevered frame (C-frame) casework systems manufactured by Hamilton Industries and
Kewaunee Scientific Equipment Corporation. Equipmentinanufacturedby others is acceptable if the products
are of equal performance and have similar appearance and construction, but only after approval by the
contracting officer.
10.5.11 MINIMUM STANDARDS
Performance set forth herein shall establish minimum standards for design, performance, and function.
Products that Ml to meet these standards will not be considered.
10.5.12 LABORATORY FUME HOODS
Fume hoods shall be provided in all laboratories and laboratory support spaces where hazardous chemicals
or other toxic materials are being utilized. The purpose of the laboratory fume hood is to prevent or minimize
the escape of contaminants from the hood into the laboratory. The fume hood work surface shall be of
recessed design so that spills can be effectively contained. The design professional shall be responsible for
determining, with the users of the facility, types and sizes of fume hoods appropriate to their intended use.
See Section 15, Mechanical Requirements, of this Manual for more specific requirements.
10.5.12.1 FUME HOOD LOCATION
Fume hoods must be located away from doors and pedestrian traffic. The location of the hood shall be at
the end of a room or bay, but not less than 1 foot from the corner, where the operator is essentially the only
one who enters the zone of influence. Further, hoods shall be placed in such a way that one hood cannot
draw air from another hood
10.5.13 ENVIRONMENTAL ROOMS
Environmental rooms shall be of modular, insulated panel construction, providing temperature and humidity
control with specified setpoint control. Temperature requirements for individual rooms shall be appropriate
to the rooms' intended use. Rooms shall be provided with emergency auxiliary power backup to allow 24-
hour operation. All rooms involving laboratory procedures shall be ventilated. Fume hoods shall not be
allowed in environmental rooms. The following should also be provided: remote air-or water-cooled dual-
sequencing compressor, temperature and humidity recorders, high/low alarm, adjustable epoxy-coated wire
shelving on wall supports or movable racks, and personnel emergency alarm.
•
END OF SECTION 10
10-4
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 11 - Equipment 11-1
Section 11 - Equipment
11.1 Design
Planning for equipment shall be integrated with the planning of architectural, structural, mechanical, and
electrical systems. Equipment shall be arranged and organized to provide circulation, workflow, and
maintenance clearances.
11.2 Catalog Cut Sheets
Appropriate catalog cut sheets shall be provided for all items of equipment. Each cut sheet shall have a
logistical category and code. Each item shall be clearly identified if it has unique utility requirements,
structural support needs, or space requirements.
11.3 Layout and Clearances
Equipment should be arranged to provide service clearances and maintenance access so that service and
maintenance can be executed with minimum disruption to workspaces. When expansion is anticipated in a
project, the design professional should ensure that some additional equipment can be added without disruption
or reconfiguration of workflow.
11.4 Floor Preparation
Floor depressions shall be provided to accommodate items and design requirements, such as can washers,
environmentally controlled room equipment, walk-in refrigerators, computer rooms, and any other appropriate
spaces or items, except in laboratory spaces where future flexibility is a requirement.
11.5 Structural Support
Wall-partitioning systems for wall-hung equipment and toilet accessories shall be adequately reinforced.
Ceiling support systems for service columns, hoist equipment, and other ceiling-mounted items shall be
structurally braced. All fixed equipment shall be mounted to resist seismic forces in accordance with seismic
levels defined for each applicable project.
11.6 Special Ventilation Requirements for Equipment
Control of ventilation for the employee working environment must be provided by the equipment supplier.
All requirements of Appendix B, Indoor Air Quality, shall be addressed.
11.7 Equipment Specifications
Equipment specifications shall be developed for all equipment that does not have current guide specifications.
All equipment specifications should permit procurement of the most current model of equipment through
General Services Administration (GSA) services where possible. All equipment specifications should be
developed to accommodate reputable vendors. Equipment specifications should discuss the scope of services
to be provided by mechanical and electrical contractors installing Government-furnished equipment.
11-1
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February1998 and Planning Guidelines
• Section 11 - Equipment
11.8 High-Technology Equipment
11-2
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 11 - Equipment 11-3
Project-specific guidance should be obtained on high-technology equipment. Design shall be in accordance
with selection and guidance of the respective manufacturers.
11.9 Mechanical and Electrical Equipment
Refer to Sections 15 (Mechanical Requirements) and 16 (Electrical Requirements) of this Manual for
information on mechanical and electrical equipment respectively.
11.10 Equipment Consultants
Use of an equipment consultant is recommended for defining and specifying what research equipment must
be procured. Such consultants shall also provide information on equipment during the design and
construction document phases to assist in planning and documentation.
END OF SECTION 11
11-3
-------
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 12 - Furnishings
Section 12 - Furnishings
12.1 Furnishings (
No material specific to furnishings is included in this Manual.
Information on "Green" specifications can be obtained from the Architecture, Engineering and Real Estate
Branch (AEREB). Sample copies of Green Rider provisions are available to assist in determining Green
furnishings. Additional information may be obtained from the Green Buildings Council.
END OF SECTION 12
12-1
-------
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 13 - Special Construction
Section 13 - Special Construction
13.1 Noise Control
Noise levels in the different rooms of the facility should be in accordance with the American Society of
Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE) handbook, HVAC Systems and
Applications, Chapter 52 (Sound and Vibration Control). Proper schematic planning should isolate noise-
sensitive areas from noise sources by separation with a nonsensitive buffer area. In addition, dedicated
laboratory support spaces should be provided to isolate noise-producing equipment, such as centrifuges and
vacuum pumps, from laboratories. In any instrument or laboratory space in which one or more fume hoods
are used, the noise level should be 55 or less decibels of sound measured on an A-scale (dBA) but shall not
exceed 70 dBA at the working position in front of the hood.
The combined noise resulting from several pieces of equipment shall not exceed 65 dBA when measured 3
feet from any piece of equipment. Noise generated from vibration by heating, ventilation, and air-
conditioning (HVAC) systems may be minimized by several means: judicious equipment selection; limitation
of fluid flow velocities; isolation of key mechanical, piping, and ducting systems; and other prudent
engineering and architectural means.
13.1.1 VIBRATION ISOLATION
Vibration isolation systems should be provided on rotating mechanical equipment of greater than 1A
horsepower (hp) (for equipment located within a critical area), greater than 5 bp (for other areas in the
building), and greater than 10 hp (outside and within 200 feet of the building). Reciprocating equipment
(other than emergency equipment) shall not be used. Vibrating equipment shall not be placed on top of
buildings, unless no other locations are feasible. Vibrating equipment that must be mounted on the roof shall
be placed directly over columns and on pads and springs to totally isolate the vibration from the building
structure.
• Concrete inertia bases will be used with rotating mechanical equipment handling liquids (e.g., pumps) and
with compressors. Steel frames will be used for air-handling equipment.
* Flexible pipe connectors (e.g., twin-sphere connectors) will be used on piping connecting to isolated
equipment and where piping and ducting exit the mechanical room(s).
• Flexible duct connectors will be used in a manner similar to flexible piping connectors.
13.1.2 PIPING AND DUCTING SYSTEMS
Passive piping and ducting systems are defined as those that are at a great distance from their energy source
and have low flow rates and/or infrequent use (examples of such systems are city water, gases, and waste
water). Conversely, active piping systems are defined as those that are close to energy sources and can
constitute a major vibration problem requiring isolation.
• Active piping and ducting shall be sized for economical flow velocities.
l
* Ducts that are less than 24 inches in diameter do not require isolation, provided that the flow velocities
do not exceed 1,200 feet per minute. Ducting that does not meet this requirement shall be isolated.
• Active piping associated with HVAC (chilled water, condenser water, hot water, steam, and refrigerant
piping) within mechanical rooms, or at least 50 feet (whichever distance is greater) from connected
vibration-isolated equipment (e.g., chillers, pumps, air handlers) or from the ground, shall be isolated from
the building structure; resilient penetration sleeves shall be used where this piping penetrates walls.
13-1
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 •. . .'. and Planning Guidelines
Section 13 - Special Construction
Flexible piping connectors shall be used where the piping leaves the mechanical room. All active piping
in the critical area having a diameter of 4 inches or less shall be isolated.
13.1.3 SOUND DAMPENING
Sound dampening features (acoustical treatment), preferably of rigid materials, shall be provided in
instrument rooms so that the noise level does not exceed 55 decibels (dBa). If a hood is required in these
rooms, the noise level shall not exceed 70 dBa at the face of the hood.
13.2 Fire Walls and Fire Barrier Walls
Fire walls must be structurally independent and have sufficient structural stability under fire conditions to
allow collapse of construction on either side of the firewall without collapse of the fire wall itself. The wall
is also required to allow collapse of the structure on one side without compromising the integrity of the
structure on the opposite side of the fire wall. Fire walls differ from fire barrier walls, which do not require
structural stability. Fire barrier walls may rely on the building structure for support. Refer to National Fire
Protection Association (NFPA) 221 for specific criteria related to fire walls and fire barrier walls.
13.2.1 FIREWALLS
Every fire wall shall be made of noncombustible material with the fire-resistance rating required by local
codes for segregating the building into separate buildings or fire areas. Openings in fire walls shall be
protected as noted in subsection 13.2.3 below. Unprotected windows are not allowed in fire walls.
13.2.2 FORE BARRIER WALLS
Unless other fire-resistive construction is provided to create a complete enclosure on all sides, all fire barrier
walls must extend from floor slab to floor slab or to roof deck. Openings in fire barrier walls shall be
.protected as noted in subsection 13.2.3 below.
13.2.3 OPENINGS
Openings in fire walls and fire barrier walls shall be protected with fire-rated components capable of
maintaining the fire-resistive integrity of the wall. The minimum fire-resistance requirement for protection
of openings in fire walls and fire barrier walls shall be the more restrictive of Chapter 6 of NFPA 101 and the
local building code. Greater fire resistance maybe required by code requirements for specialized occupancies
such as computer rooms and laboratories. Fire window assemblies are allowed in fire barrier walls with a
1-hour or lower fire-resistance rating. The maximum allowed glazing area in windows shall be the maximum
area tested and shall be in accordance with NFPA 80. Refer to Chapter 2 of the Safety Manual for restrictions
on utilities penetrating required fireproofing.
13.3 Vertical Openings and Shafts
Fire-resistance ratings for enclosures of vertical openings and shafts shall conform to the requirements in
NFPA 101, Chapter 6. Openings into vertical openings and shafts shall be protected by fire doors or fire
dampers as outlined in subsection 13.3.2 and in Chapter 2, Basic Fire Safety Standards, oftheSafetyManual.
13.3.1 ATRIUMS
Atriums and other openings, where permitted by NFPA 101 and the local building code, shall be protected
in accordance with Chapter 6 of NFPA 101. In addition, exits shall be separately enclosed from the atrium.
Access to exits is permitted to be within the atrium space.
13.3,2 SHAFTS
When telephone rooms, electrical closets, and similar spaces are located one above the other, the enclosure
walls are considered to form a shaft, and protection shall be provided in accordance with the requirements
of NFPA 101 and the local building code. Shafts shall not be installed between a structural member and the
fireproofing for that member. If allowed by the local building code, all floor penetrations within telephone
13-2
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 13 - Special Construction
and electric closets can be sealed or otherwise grouted, in lieu of creating a shaft, to maintain the fire
resistance of the floor assembly.
Structural members passing through a shaft shall be fireproofed separately from the shaft enclosure so that
the entire structural member is protected as required by the model building codes. The fireproofing shall be
of concrete, plaster, or other hard material that is resistant to mechanical damage and not subject to rusting
or corrosion,
13.3.3 MONUMENTAL STAIRS
Large, open stairs shall be protected by one of three methods. If the stairs are not involved in the building
exit requirements, they may extend one floor above and one floor below the main entrance lobby, provided
that fire partitions and self-closing fire doors are installed at the upper and lower levels. Alternatively, they
may be protected as a vertical opening in accordance with the requirements of Chapter 6 of NFPA101. If the
stairs are pan of the exit system, they must be protected as outlined in Chapter 5 of NFPA 101.
13.3.4 ESCALATORS
Escalators shall be treated in the same manner as monumental stairs with the additional option of using
curtain boards and sprinkler protection as detailed in NFPA 13.
13.3.5 PENETRATIONS
Openings around penetrations in vertical openings and shafts shall be fire-stopped as described in subsection
13.3.2 above.
END OF SECTION 13
13-3
-------
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1996
Section 14 - Conveying Systems -*_
Section 14 - Conveying Systems
14.1 General
Elevators, dumbwaiters, escalators, and moving walks shall be in accordance with American National
Standards Institute (ANSI) Standard A17.1. Other requirements are described below.
14.2 Elevators
14.2.1 ELEVATOR RECALL
All automatic elevators having a travel distance of 25 feet or more shall be recalled when any fire
alarm-initiating device, such as elevator lobby smoke detectors, manual fire alarm stations, or sprinkler
system waterflow switches, is activated. All elevators must be recalled when the recall system is activated.
Smoke detectors other than those required by ANSI A17.1 shall not initiate automatic elevator recall.
14.2.2 SMOKE DETECTORS
Smoke detectors shall be provided for every elevator lobby, including the main lobby. Smoke detectors that
activate the automatic elevator recall are also required in the elevator machine rooms. Elevator lobby smoke
detectors should not initiate the building fire alarm system but shall send an alarm to the fire department or
central station service and shall activate the elevator recall system.
14.2.3 CAPTURE FLOOR
An alternate capture floor shall be provided in accordance with Rule 211.3b(2) of ANSI A17.1. Activation
of an alarm-initiating device on the main capture floor shall return the elevators to the alternate capture floor.
14.2.4 SIGNAGE
Signs must be placed in the elevator lobbies next to all elevators to inform occupants not to use the elevators
if there is a fire!
14.2.5 CHEMICAL TRANSPORT USE
If elevators are used to transport chemicals, provisions shall be made to ensure that nonlaboratory personnel
and space (administrative or business occupancies) are not exposed to or contaminated by chemical
substances. For example, chemicals must be packaged in accordance with U.S. Department of Transportation
(DOT) specifications, or an alternative route of transport must be provided. This alternative route may
include an elevator opening into a vestibule separate from administrative or business occupancies, a multiple-
door elevator entering into a laboratory, separate dumbwaiters, or alternate corridors or routes. A combination
of these options can be used to achieve this goal.
14.3 Escalators
Escalators shall be treated in the same manner as monumental stairs with an additional option of providing
curtain boards and sprinkler protection as detailed in National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 13.
END OF SECTION 14
14-1
-------
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
February 1998
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
15.1 General
The design professional shall be responsible for ensuring that all mechanical systems conform to the
requirements of this section and that all systems are installed and operating in accordance with all governing
codes, ordinances, and regulations; the most current edition of applicable publications; and as set forth
below. The design professional is responsible for the design of all mains, lines, meters, and other
mechanical components required for utility services. The building air-conditioning, heating, and ventilation
systems shall provide a safe and suitable environment both for occupants and for functional operation of the
facility.
15.2 References
All work discussed in this section shall comply with all applicable federal, state, city, and local codes,
regulations, ordinances, publications, and manuals. When codes or publications conflict, the most stringent
standard shall govern. Unless otherwise specified in this Manual or approved by the Architecture,
Engineering and Real Estate Branch (AEREB) and the Safety, Health and Environmental Management
Division (SHEMD), all mechanical system installations shall conform to the applicable requirements of the
following National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) and American Society of Heating, Refrigerating,
and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE) standards, American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
safety codes, and other sources in the following list:
Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems (NFPA 12)
Installation of Sprinkler Systems (NFPA 13)
Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems (NFPA 14)
Water Spray Fixed Systems (NFPA 15)
Dry Chemical Extinguishing Systems (NFPA 17)
Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems (NFPA 17A)
Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances (NFPA 24)
Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire Protection Systems (NFPA 25)
Automotive and Marine Service Station Code (NFPA 30A)
Installation of Oil Burning Equipment (NFPA 31)
Spray Application Using Flammable and Combustible Materials (NFPA 33)
Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines (NFPA 37)
Fire Protection for Laboratories Using Chemicals (NFPA 45)
National Fuel Gas Code (NFPA 54)
Storage and Handling of Liquefied Petroleum Gases (NFPA 58)
Storage and Handling of Liquefied Natural Gas (NFPA 59 A)
Protection of Electronic Computer/Data Processing Equipment (NFPA 75)
Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems (NFPA 90A)
Installation of Exhaust Systems for Air Conveying of Materials (NFPA 91)
Smoke Control Systems (NFPA 92A)
Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations (NFPA 96)
Water Cooling Towers (NFPA 214)
Water Supplies for Suburban and Rural Firefighting (NFPA 1231)
Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems (NFPA 2001)
Elevators, Dumbwaiters, Escalators, and Moving Walks (ANSI A17.1)
Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality (ANSI/ASHRAE 62)
Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment (ANSI Z358.1)
Laboratory Ventilation (ANSI/American Industrial Hygiene Association [AIHA] Z9.5)
15-1
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 15-Mechanical Requirements
• Quantitative Performance Test for Laboratory Fume Hoods (ASHRAE 110-1985)
• MethodofTestingPerformanceofLaboratoryFumeHoods(ANSI/ASHRAE 110, as modified per EPA
requirements)
• Procedures Manual for Certifying Laboratory Fume Hoods To Meet EPA Standard
• Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration (ANSI/ASHRAE IS)
* Fire Suppression Rating Schedule (Insurance Services Office)
• Building Air Qualify: EPA Guide for Building Owners and Facility Managers, EPA/400/1-91/033 or
December 1991
• Industrial Ventilation: A Manual of Recommended Practice, American Conference of Government
Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH)
* Prudent Practices in the Laboratory: Handling and Disposal ofChemicaIs,National'Research Council,
1995
• Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (SEFA) 1/1994
• National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) standard 49 for Biohazard Safety Cabinets.
15.3 Heating, Ventilation, and Air-Conditioning Requirements
A heating, ventilation, and air-conditioning (HVAC) system that will satisfy the requirements indicated in
this document shall be provided. The air-conditioning and refrigeration equipment for the mechanical
systems shall not use chlorofluorocarbon (CFC) refrigerants. The use of hydrochlorofluorocarbon (HCFC)
will be permitted only if the equipment required cannot be replaced with equipment that uses a non-ozone-
depleting refrigerant.
15.3.1 GENERAL
Building HVAC systems and subsystems shall be evaluated, and major HVAC equipment components shall
be selected on the basis of a consideration of health and safety requirements, initial costs, operating costs,
and maintenance costs. A life cycle cost analysis (LCCA) done with a nationally recognized computer
program shall be performed to select the most cost-effective HVAC system.
15.3.2 HVAC SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
HVAC system performance shall meet the following requirements.
15.3.2.1 Indoor space shall meet the EPA National Ambient Air Quality Standards. As established in ASHRAE
62-1989, HVAC systems will be designed and operated to provide:
• 20 cubic feet per minute (cfm) of outdoor air per person in offices and 20 cfm of outdoor air per
person in laboratories.
• 60 cfm of outdoor air per person in smoking lounges, which also must have local mechanical exhaust
with no air recirculation.
* A local mechanical exhaust with no air recirculation for copy rooms and rooms with similar
stationary sources of contaminants.
15.3.2.2 Installation of new furniture, rugs, or drapery that may off-gas chemical contaminants (particularly in
a facility that minimally meets the HVAC performance criteria listed above) should, ideally, be done
with at least 48 hours of off-gassing time before occupancy. Providing a high rate of fresh air ventilation
during this time will increase the effectiveness of the off-gassing process. This procedure should be used
to speed dispersion of gases, vapors, and other potentially harmful building products resulting from
activities such as painting and application of pesticides.
15-2
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1996
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
15.3.2.3 HVAC intakes should be located as far as possible from cooling towers, vehicle exhaust sources, and
laboratory hood exhaust systems. The position and design of the HVAC intakes should minimize
potential contamination from such sources, both on-site and off-site.
15.3.2.4 For maintenance program requirements, see the Safety Manual.
15.3.3 SELECTION PROCEDURE
HVAC equipment shall be sized to satisfy the building and cooling load requirements and to meet all
equipment design and selection criteria contained in the ASHRAE Fundamentals, HVAC Systems and
Equipment, HVAC Applications, sad Refrigeration handbooks.
15.3.3.1 INSIDE DESIGN TEMPERATURES
Environmental design temperatures and relative humidities for special space uses other than those listed
here shall be designated in the project criteria. The design temperatures shall be 5 degrees Fahrenheit
. (°F) lower for cooling, and 5°F higher for heating, than the required operating temperature.
• When space cooling is required, the inside design temperature (design values are not necessarily the
same as operational values) for maintaining personnel comfort shall be 70°F, dry bulb (db), unless
otherwise indicated in project criteria. The relative humidity shall be SO percent. Summer
humidification shall not be provided for personnel comfort. Cooling systems shall be designed to
maintain the relative humidity conditions of space through the normal cooling process and should
not have controls that limit the maximum relative humidity unless system type or project-specific
criteria dictate.
• The inside design wintertime temperature (design values are not necessarily the same as operational
values) for personnel comfort shall be 77°F db unless otherwise indicated here or directed by other
project-specific criteria. Table 15.3.3.1, Inside Design Temperatures (Heating), shows the design
temperatures for a number of space uses.
• Except where it can be substantiated from records or engineering computations that the inside
relative humidity will be less than 30 percent, winter humidification for personnel comfort and
health shall not be provided. Where such a condition has been substantiated, a design relative
humidity of 30 percent shall be used in establishing minimum requirements for humidification
equipment.
TABLE 15.3.3.1 Inside Design Temperature* (Heating)
Temperature ("F db) Space •
As indicated by project criteria Storage (unoccupied)
55 Storage (occupied)
50 , Warehouses
60 Kitchens
65 ' Laundries
65 Shops (high work activity)
70 Toilets
75 Change rooms (heating only when occupied)
As indicated by project criteria Specialty rooms (e.g., laboratories, clean rooms)
15.3.3.2 OUTSIDE DESIGN TEMPERATURES
15-3
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
The HVAC system equipment shall be designed by using the outside design temperatures shown in
Table 15.3.3.2, Outside Design Conditions, for the particular application. The percentages of dry bulb
and wet bulb (wb) temperatures are derived from the sources of tabulated weather data described below.
When data for a particular location are not listed, design conditions shall be estimated from data
available at nearby weather stations or by interpolation between values from stations, taking into account
elevation and other local conditions affecting design data. Weather data for use in sizing HVAC
equipment shall be obtained from one or more of the following:
• Local weather station
* ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals.
Table 15.3.3.2 Outside Design Conditions
Winter Summer Application
99% db 1 %db and mean coincident wb Process, laboratory, and other uses where close
temperature and humidity control is required by
project criteria
97.5% db 2.5% db and mean coincident wb Personnel comfort systems
— 1%wb Cooling towers* and research, technical-type
systems
— 1%dbplusS°F Air-cooled condensers*
•Temperature should be verified by reviewing actual site conditions.
15.3.3.3 EQUIPMENT SIZING
The capacity of central heating, refrigeration, and ventilation equipment shall be set for the peak block
building or the maximum simultaneous zone heating and cooling design loads and in accordance with
the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals. The equipment shall not be sized for future additional
capacity or to provide redundancy unless indicated in project-specific criteria. Individual zone
equipment shall be sized according to the peak zone load.
15.3.3.4 EVAPORATrVE/ADIABATJC COOLING
In locations where a wide variation exists between the dry bulb and wet bulb temperatures for extended
periods of time, evaporative/adiabatic cooling shall be considered for the applications listed below.
Selection of cooler types shall depend on system configuration, user experience, and LCCA. All
evaporative coolers shall maintain a positive water-bleed and water-makeup system for control of
mineral buildup.
#
• Applications for which evaporating adiabatic cooling are considered include warehouses, shops that
do not require close (within 5°F plus or minus) temperature control, nonresidential-size kitchens,
makeup air ventilation units, and mechanical equipment spaces.
* Air duct design, number and location of coolers, and relief of the higher rate of air supply to the
atmosphere shall be considered as means of ensuring a satisfactory operating system. Multistage
evaporative cooling systems shall also be considered.
• Indoor design dry bulb temperatures for spaces that are air-conditioned by adiabatic cooling systems
shall be as specified in project-specific criteria. Design operating efficiency of adiabatic cooling
equipment shall be at least 70 percent. System-installed capacity shall be based on the peak design
cooling load for the air-conditioned space. An arbitrary air-change rate shall not be used for design
airflow. Adiabatic cooler specifications shall be stated in terms of the air capacity, the entering
ambient dry and wet bulb temperatures, and the leaving dry bulb temperature.
15-4
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
15.3.4 VENTILATION-EXHAUST SYSTEMS
All processes, operations, or other situations that present the possibility of hazardous accumulation of
combustible or explosive vapors, dust, fumes, or other airborne substances shall be provided with ventilation
facilities in accordance with NFPA 91 and NFPA 45. Ventilation-exhaust systems shall be selected for the
effective removal of noxious odors, hazardous gases, vapors, fumes, dusts, mists, and excessive heat and for
the provision of fresh air to occupants. The design criteria contained in this subsection shall be followed
in determining the required air quantity and quality for ventilation and exhaust systems.
15.3.4.1 Use of exhaust stack(s) to provide exhaust air dispersion and prevent exhaust-to-intake return of air to.
the facility or to an adjacent facility shall be considered. Local weather and site conditions, along with
guidance found in the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals shall be used to determine an appropriate
solution.
15:3.4.2 Areas from which air shall not be recirculated include areas that produce or emit dust particles, heat,
odors, fumes, spray, gases, smoke, or other contaminants that cannot be sufficiently treated and could
be injurious to health and safety of personnel or damaging to equipment. These areas shall be 100
percent exhausted (e.g., fume hood exhausts). Project criteria shall indicate other areas of
nonrecirculation.
15.3.4.3 Restrooms, janitor closets, garbage rooms, and other malodorous spaces shall be exhausted at a rate of
not less than 50 cfin per toilet or urinal, and as specified in ASHRAE standard 62 or in local building
codes, whichever is the more stringent, regardless of any other calculated ventilation requirements.
15.3.4.4 Air from adjacent spaces should be used as the ventilation supply air for the 100 percent exhausted
spaces, as long as:
• Ventilation by this method does not violate any requirements of NFPA 90 A or NFPA 101 or special
space pressurization requirements.
• The air supplied is not potentially more hazardous than the air from the space being exhausted.
• Adjacent spaces are not laboratory or specialty spaces requiring once-through ventilation.
15.3.4.5 Industrial-type facilities and laboratories shall be pixmd
as required for heat exposure control or dilution ventilation. Ventilation air shall be provided in the
quantities required to comply with Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) air quality
requirements. Design air quantities and transport velocities shall be calculated according to the methods
prescribed in the ASHRAE Handbook ofHVAC Systems and Equipment, the ASHRAE Applications
Handbook, the ACGJK Industrial Ventilation manual, and NFPA 45.
15.3.4.6 Cooking equipment used in processes that produce smoke or grease shall be designed and protected in
accordance with NFPA 96. Any insulation shall be of noncombustible materials. If other utilities are
included in a vertical shaft with the grease duct, they shall not be insulated or lined with combustible
materials.
15.3.4.7 The guidelines in the ASHRAE HVACApplications Handbook (under the topic of Laboratories) shall
be followed in designing laboratories and laboratory buildings, except where the standards in this
Manual are more stringent. Makeup air shall be provided in the quantities needed to maintain required
. .—- positive or negative room static pressure and to offset local exhaust air quantities. Makeup air shall be
tempered.
15.3.5 EQUIPMENT ROOM VENTILATION
15-5
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 [ and Planning Guidelines
Section 15-Mechanical Requirements
/
Mechanical and electrical equipment rooms shall be exhausted so that room temperature does not exceed
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) equipment ratings. The project criteria shall
establish the space temperature limits. Where mechanical ventilation cannot maintain a satisfactory
environment, evaporative cooling systems (indirect evaporative cooling for electrical rooms) or other
mechanical cooling systems shall be provided. Exhaust air openings should be located adjacent to heat-
producing equipment to minimize ambient thermal loads.
* Thermostatic controls shall be used to operate the ventilation and exhaust systems.
• Equipment rooms containing refrigeration equipment shall be ventilated in accordance with ASHRAE
standard 15.
• For all equipment roomswithfuel-bumingappliancesorequipment, combustionairfortheseappliances
and this equipment shall be drawn directly from the outside, in accordance with Building Officials and
Code Administrators International, Inc. (BOCA) Basic/National Mechanical Code.
15.3.6 WASTE HEAT RECOVERY SYSTEMS
Energy conservation and waste heat recovery systems shall be considered and designed according to the
procedures outlined in specific chapters of the ASHRAE Fundamentals, Systems and Equipment,
Applications, and Refrigeration handbooks, and the Sheet Metal and Air-Conditioning Contractors National
Association (SMACNA) Energy Recovery Equipment and Systems Manual, The following types of heat-
recovery methods and systems shall be considered for incorporation into the building HVAC system design
where appropriate.
• Useof rotary heat exchanger, heat pipe, or coil runaround systems for heating and air-conditioning air-
handling systems.
* Recovery of rejected heat from the condenser systems of central station cooling equipment for use in
heating the remainder of the building (when the central station cooling equipment must operate during
the heating season to cool computer rooms or high internal gain areas or to meet process requirements).
• Use of exhaust heat from the condenser systems of continuously operated refrigeration equipment for
space heating or domestic hot-water heating.
* Use of a free cooling system that uses cooling tower water (water-side economizer) when air-side
economizer systems are not feasible.
• Use of a heat pump runaround loop.
15.3.7 ENERGY EFFICIENCY
After a careful study of the facility's requirements as well as of the day-to-day operation of its various
departments has been made, systems shall be designed that meet the operating requirements in an energy-
efficient manner. The local utility companies shall be contacted to investigate the system dollar credits for
load shifting to off-peak times. The health and safety aspects of the operation must be given first priority,
and they cannot be relaxed or traded off for greater efficiency.
15.3.8 LABORATORY
Requirements specific to laboratory spaces are as follows.
15.3.8.1 GENERAL
Laboratory spaces shall be designed with 100 percent outside air (OSA) ventilation systems. In no
circumstances will the air supplied to any laboratory space be recirculated to any other space.
15-6
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines . . February 1998
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
15.3.8.2 LABORATORY PRESSURIZATION
Laboratory spaces shall be designed to maintain a pressurization level, relative to other common spaces,
that is appropriate for the type of work performed in each laboratory and is negative to the laboratory
corridor. In general, biology and chemistry laboratories shall be maintained with a negative
pressurization relative to common spaces to ensure containment of odors and contaminants. Levels of
pressurization shall be project specific.
15.4 Energy Management Control Systems
15.4.1 GENERAL
This subsection covers safety and operating controls, automatic temperature and humidity controls, energy
monitoring and (central supervisory) control systems, energy conservation requirements for controls, and
zoning requirements and restrictions.
• Special control requirements shall be indicated in the project-specific criteria. Control systems and
associated equipment shall be chosen on the basis of cost and maintainability.
• Control air compressors shall be duplex nonlubricated type with oil-lubricated crankcase and distance
piece. Air shall be filtered and dried by refrigerated air dryers for dew point of 15°F and above, and by
regenerative silica air dryers for dew point below 15°F.
• Copper piping shall be used for high-pressure air in inaccessible locations (plastic piping may be used
if it is installed in conduit). Air leakage shall not exceed 5 percent of pressure in 24 hours. Transmitters
' shall be capable of being field calibrated, and thermometers or pressure gauge ports shall be provided
at transmitters. All controllers and thermostats shall be pilot-bleed type.
15.4.2 ZONING
Zoning for automatic control of space temperature, static pressure, humidity, ventilation, and smoke and
fire detection shall satisfy health and safety requirements as indicated in the project criteria. Zoning
requirements are as follows:
• Automatic controls shall be provided to shut off heating or cooling to any individual zone or central air-
handling unit.
• Interior zones shall not be combined with external zones if this can be avoided.
• Interior space zones shall be placed on separate air-handling systems from external zones, if such
placement is cost-effective. External space zones shall be selected for each individual exposure.
15.4.3 CONTROL SETBACK AND SHUTOFF DEVICES
Automatic control setback and shutdown devices with a manual override feature shall be provided for all
HVAC systems except those used for spaces for research or process and those used for other environmentally
sensitive spaces identified by the project criteria as requiring constant year-round temperature or humidity
control. Use of separate, or dual-setting, thermostats, switches, time clocks, or connections for on/off control
through the energy management system (EMS) shall be considered for control of air-conditioning to raise
the cooling setpoint with humidity override during unoccupied periods in the summer and to control the
heating setpoint during unoccupied periods in the winter.
15.4.4 HUMIDITY CONTROL
Summer and winter space or zone humidity control shall be provided only on a space-by-space or zone-by-
zone basis and not for the entire central ventilation system unless required for project-specific humidity
requirements as stated in the project criteria. No controls shall be provided for dehumidifying spaces to
15-7
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 ; and Planning Guidelines
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
below 50 percent relative space humidity or for humidifying spaces to greater than 30 percent relative space
humidity unless required by project-specific criteria.
15.4.5 SIMULTANEOUS HEATING AND COOLING
Simultaneous heating and cooling, which controls comfort conditions within a space by reheating or
recooling supply air or by concurrently operating independent heating and cooling systems to serve a
common zone, shall not be used except under the following conditions:
• Renewable energy sources are used to control temperature or humidity.
• Project-specific temperature, humidity, or ventilation conditions require simultaneous heating and
cooling to prevent space relative humidity from rising above special-space relative humidity
requirements.
• Project-specific building construction constraints, as established in the project criteria, prohibit
installation of other types of HVAC systems.
15.4.6 MECHANICAL VENTILATION CONTROL
All supply, return, and exhaust ventilation systems shall be equipped with automatic and manual control
of fan operation to shut off the fan when ventilation is not required. To prevent introduction of outside air
when ventilation is not required, these systems shall also be provided with manual gravity-operated or
automatic control of dampers for outside air intake and exhaust or relief. Systems that circulate air shall
be provided with minimum outdoor air damper position control to ensure that the minimum amount of
outdoor air is being introduced into the system. Unless otherwise required by life safety or the specific
project criteria, automatic dampers should fail open for return air and fail to a minimum setting for outside
air.
15.4.7 ECONOMIZER CYCLE
Where feasible, all air-handling systems that recirculate air and are used for space cooling shall be designed
to automatically use outside air quantities of up to 100 percent of the fan system capacity for cooling the
space. Economizer cycle control shall not be used for air-handling systems in which introduction of the
additional outside air would actually increase energy consumption.
• The economizer cycle control system shall have a reset feature.
* The economizer cycle control system shall be designed with a relief air control cycle designed to
positively relieve the supply air from the space by sequencing return or relief fans or dampers to
maintain a constant room static pressure. Systems that use the economizer cycle should be provided
with adequate air filtration to handle the quality of the outside air.
15.4.8 AUTOMATIC CONTROL DAMPERS
Automatic air control dampers must be of the low-leakage type with a maximum leakage of 6 cfm per square
foot at a maximum system velocity of 1,500 feet per minute (fpm) and a 1-inch pressure differential, as
stipulated in Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA) standard 500. The dampers shall be opposed-
blade type for modulating control, but may be parallel-blade type for two-position control. Pilot positioners
and operators shall be out of the airstream.
15.4.9 VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEM FAN CONTROL
Variable-air-volume (VAV) systems shall be designed with control devices that sense ductwork static air
pressure and velocity air pressure, and control supply-fan airflow and static pressure output through
modulation of variable inlet vanes, inlet/discharge dampers, scroll dampers, bypass dampers, variable pitch
blades, or variable frequency electric drive controls, as described in ASHRAE HVAC Applications
Handbook, Chapter 41, and ASHRAE Handbook of HVAC Systems and Equipment, Chapter 18. These
15-8
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
control systems shall have a minimum of one static pressure sensor mounted in ductwork downstream of
the fan and one static pressure controller to vary fan output through either the inlet vane, the damper, the
belt modulator, or the speed control. Exhaust fans, supply fans, and return or relief fans shall have devices
that control the operation of the fans to monitor air volumes and maintain fixed minimum outdoor air
ventilation requirements.
15.440 FIRE AND SMOKE DETECTION AND PROTECTION CONTROLS
All air-handling systems shall be provided with the smoke and fire protection controls required by NFPA
72.
• All supply, return, relief, and exhaust air ventilation systems shall have interlock controls that interface
with the fire and smoke detection system controls. In the event of fire, these interlock controls shall
either turn off or selectively operate fans and dampers to prevent the spread of smoke and fire through
the building. These controls shall comply with NFPA 90A.
* Special exhaust systems shall be designed to include fire and smoke safety controls as required by NFPA
91. Kitchen exhaust ductwork systems shall be designed to include all fire and smoke safety controls
as required by NFPA 96.
• Engineered smoke pressurization and evacuation systems shall comply with the following:
- NFPA 90A
- NFPA 72
• ASHRAE manual, Design of Smoke Control Systems for Buildings
- ASHRAE Htmdbook of HVAC Systems and Equipment.
• Special hazard protection systems that initiate an alarm shall be in accordance with the provisions in
Section 16, Electrical Requirements, of this Manual.
15.4.11 GAS-FIRED AIR-HANDLING UNIT CONTROL
Gas-fired air-handling units shall be equipped with operating limit, safety control, and combustion control
systems. Gas burner and combustion controls shall comply with Factory Mutual (FM) loss prevention data
sheets and be listed in the FM Approval Guide. Gas-fired air-handling units shall have controls that lock
out the gas supply in the following conditions:
Main or pilot flame failure
Unsafe discharge temperature (high limit)
High or low gas pressure
No proof of airflow over heat exchanger
Combustion air loss
Loss of control system actuating energy.
15.4.12 ZONE CONTROL/DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM CONTROL
Each zone or air-handling system shall be designed with individual terminal unit-valved control. Use of
either two-way or three-way valves shall be considered on the basis of part-load pump performance
requirements and potential pump boiler horsepower (bhp) savings.
Water systems that vary the load to the terminal by varying water flow rates with two-way control valves
'shall be provided with differential pressure controls to reduce system pressure buildup and save energy.
These controls shall either signal control valves to route water flow around terminal devices, signal variable-
speed pumping controls to reduce pump speed, or turn off one or several pumps working in parallel or
series.
15-9
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
15.4.13 CONTROL VALVE SELECTION
Temperature control valves shall be either two-way or three-way proportioning-type valves. Control valves
shall be calibrated to allow for a 3-to-S pound-per-square-inch (psi) pressure differential across the valve
or a pressure differential of 50 percent of the combined branch piping and coil pressure drop, whichever is
greater. Control valves shall use either pneumatic, electric, electronic, or self-contained controllers. Valves
in cooling and heating systems shall be fail-safe. Valve operators shall be selected to close against pump
shutoff head for two-way valves.
15.4.14 TWO-PIPE AND THREE-PIPE COMBINATION HEATING AND COOLING SYSTEMS
For fan coil terminal devices with one coil, control valves shall be operated by a room or coil discharge
temperature thermostat that can change from summer to winter operation. For air-handling units with
heating and cooling coils, control valves shall be controlled by normal sequences of operation but shall be
provided with two-position control valves in the piping entering each coil, to prevent hot water from
entering the cooling coil and chilled water from entering the heating coil and to sequence on/off and
summer and winter operation.
If the two-pipe or three-pipe water distribution system is not provided with heat exchangers to isolate the
boilers and chillers from the distribution system, a control system that uses three-way control valves to
control and route water around the source devices shall be designed to prevent hot water from entering the
chiller and cold water from entering the boiler during the changeover periods from heating to cooling
systems.
15.4.15 LOAD CONTROL FOR HOT-WATER SYSTEMS
The temperature of hot water for building heating systems shall be controlled by a supply temperature sensor
that modulates the boiler-operating controls. If feasible, the supply delivery temperature shall be reset on
the basis of either the temperature outside (lowering the delivery temperature as the outdoor air temperature
rises and raising the delivery temperature as the outdoor air temperature falls) or, preferably, discriminator
logic from the control devices.
15.4.16 LOAD CONTROL FOR CHILLED-WATER SYSTEMS
Central station cooling equipment producing chilled water shall be controlled by a signal from a sensor
mounted in the return chilled-water piping or, preferably, in the leaving chilled-water piping; this signal
modulates the chiller to control chilled-water supply. Central station cooling equipment shall be provided
with controls to limit the current draw of the cooling equipment in periods of high electrical demand.
When appropriate, additional controls and sensors may be added to the central chilled-water system to
provide chilled water to laboratory equipment that may require it. In addition, provisions for supplying
emergency chilled water to laboratory equipment may be required.
15.4.17 COOLING TOWER AND WATER-COOLED CONDENSER SYSTEM CONTROLS
Design of cooling tower fans shall consider use of variable-speed drives (if feasible) or two-speed motors
(if feasible) and on/off controls to reduce power consumption and maintain condenser water temperature.
Bypass valve control shall be provided, if required, to mix cooling tower water with condenser water in order
to maintain the temperature of entering condenser water at the low limit. To decrease compressor energy
use, condenser water temperature shall be allowed to float, as long as the temperature remains above the
lower limit required by the chiller. The design shall provide basin temperature-sensing devices and, if the
cooling tower is operated under freezing conditions, shall provide additional heat and control system
components to maintain cooling tower sump water temperatures above freezing.
When appropriate, additional controls and sensors may be added to the condenser water system to provide
condenser water to laboratory equipment that may require it. In addition, provisions for supplying
emergency condenser water to laboratory equipment may be required.
15-10
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1996
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
15.4.18 CONTROL OF STEAM SYSTEMS
Each zone air handler, heating coil, and individual terminal unit shall be controlled by two-way control
valves that are activated either electrically, pneumatically, or through use of self-contained liquid or wax-
filled sensing elements. These control valves shall modulate the steam flow to the coil or terminal unit,
according to the space temperature or the coil discharge temperature preset to meet zone temperature
requirements. Steam pressure and temperature control valves shall be selected according to the
requirements in the ASHRAE handbooks.
15.4.19 ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS .
Central emergency management systems shall be provided where feasible. If such integration is cost-
effective, an EMS shall be combined with integral fire and smoke detection supervisory systems and
lighting-control systems. An EMS shall have the capability of connecting to additional building utility
systems. When use of an EMS is contemplated for the future, the design professional shall sect other
building system controls and instrumentation that will connect easily to the future EMS.
15.4.20 ENERGY METERING
In facilities where the energy consumption is expected to exceed 500 million British thermal units (Btu) per
year, energy metering systems for all incoming electric, gas, oil, and water utilities shall be designed to be
monitored and tracked by the EMS. Submetering of utilities to various buildings or equipment shall be
based on project criteria or, in the absence of these, on sound engineering judgment.
15.5 Heating, Ventilation, and Air-Conditioning Systems
15.5.1 GENERAL
Selection of central station cooling systems shall be based on the LCCA procedures. Size, selection, and
design shall be based on guidelines in the ASHRAE Fundamentals, HVAC Systems and Equipment, and
HVAC Applications handbooks. Refrigeration equipment shall comply with Air-Conditioning and
Refrigeration Institute (ARI) 520, ARI550, and ARI590. To ensure the most economical operation, the
number and size of central station cooling units shall be based on the annual estimated partial-load
operation of the plant
• The project design criteria shall provide direction on installed standby chiller capacity. Wherever
possible, the central station chilled-water equipment shall be designed into the chilled-water distribution
systems as part of a primary-secondary loop system maintaining the chilled-water inlet temperature
below a maximum predetermined value; ideally, the central station cooling equipment will be the
secondary portion of the loop.
• Temperature-critical areas (such as laboratories and computer centers), as determined by project criteria,
shall be provided with independent refrigeration systems with backup systems if the areas are involved
with vital programs. Use of off-peak cooling systems shall be considered in areas that have high electric
peak demand charges.
15.5.2 AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEMS
The refrigerant in air-conditioning systems should be recycled during servicing, as required under Section
608 of the Clean Air Act. Existing chillers should be retrofitted or replaced with CFC-free refrigerant
systems. Except as set forth herein, all air-conditioning and ventilating systems for the handling of air that
is not contaminated with flammables or explosive vapors or dust shall conform to the requirements of NFPA
90A.
15.5.2.1 AIR DISTRIBUTION
No vertical portion of the exit facilities or protected hallways leading from the vertical exit to the outside
of the building shall be used for the normal distribution or return of air.
15-11
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
15.5.2.2 SMOKE CONTROL SYSTEMS
Smoke control systems shall be provided in all facilities that are 12 stories tall or taller. Smoke control
systems shall be provided in accordance with NFPA 92A.
15.5.2.3 SHAFT CONSTRUCTION
The construction of shafts containing, or used as, vertical ducts shall comply with the vertical shaft
requirements contained in Section 13, Special Construction, of this Manual and Chapter 2, Basic Fire
Safety Standards, of the Safety Manual.
15.5.2.4 AUTOMATIC FIRE DOORS AND DAMPERS
Automatic fire doors and fire dampers shall be provided in the air distribution and air return and exhaust
systems per the requirements of NFPA 90A and Section 8, Doors and Windows, of this Manual, except
where doors and dampers are omitted in accordance with other standards (e.g., no fire dampers are to
be provided in fume hood exhaust ducts, per NFPA 45).
15.5.3 WATER CHILLERS
The selection of either centrifugal, reciprocating, helical, rotary-screw, absorption, or steam-powered
chillers shall be based on coefficients of performance under full-load and partial-load conditions; these
coefficients are used in analysis done by LCCA methods. LCCA shall also consider the pumping-energy
burdens on the chilled-water and condenser water system as pan of the evaluation. Compression
refrigeration machines shall be designed with the safety controls, relief valves, and rupture disks noted
below, and design shall be in compliance with the procedures prescribed by ASHRAE standard 15 and
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 207.
* Controls shall include, at a minimum:
- High-discharge refrigerant pressure cutout switch
- Low-evaporator refrigerant pressure or temperature cutout switch
- High and low oil pressure switches
• Chilled-water flow interlock switch
- Condenser water flow interlock switch (on water-cooled equipment)
- Chilled-water low-temperature cutout switch.
• Centrifugal compressors shall be designed to operate with inlet control or variable-speed control for
capacity modulation. Units shall be capable of modulating to 10 percent of design capacity without
surge. Reciprocating compressors shall bedesignedforcapacitycontrolbycylinderunloading. Designs
using hot-gas bypass control of compressors for capacity modulation shall not be used except when
capacity modulation is required at conditions below 10 percent of the rated load. Compressor motors
for refrigeration equipment shall be selected in compliance with all requirements of the National
Electrical Code (NEC).
• Absorption refrigeration machines shall be provided with the following safety controls, at a minimum:
- Condenser water flow switch
- Chilled-water flow switch
- Evaporation refrigerant level switch
- Generator high-temperature limit switch (gas-fired units)
- Generator shell bursting disc (high-temperature water or steam)
- Concentration limit controls.
• Liquid coolers (evaporators) shall be designed to meet the design pressure, material, welding, testing,
and relief requirements of ASHRAE standard 15 and the American Society of Mechanical Engineers
15-12
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
(ASME) Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section Vm. Evaporators shall be selected according to the
requirements of ASHRAE standard 24-78.
15.5.4 CONDENSERS/CONDENSING UNITS
Water-cooled condensers shall comply with ASHRAE standard 15 and ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code, Section Vm. Water-cooled condenser shells and tubes shall have removable heads, if available, to
allow tube cleaning. The use of marine water boxes on the condenser shall be considered for ease of tube
cleaning.
Air-cooled condensers and condensing units shall meet the standard rating and testing requirements of ARI
460 and ASHRAE standard 20. Air-cooled condenser intakes shall be located away from any obstructions
that will restrict airflow. Air-cooled equipment shall be located away from noise-sensitive areas, and air-
cooled condensers shall have refrigerant low-head-pressure control to maintain satisfactory operation during
light loading.
15.5.5 COOLING TOWERS
Cooling towers shall be located and placed to avoid problems with water drift and deposition of water
treatment chemicals. Cooling towers shall have ample clearance from any obstructions that would restrict
airflow, cause recirculation of discharge air, or inhibit maintenance.
15.5.5.1 Cooling tower acceptance and factory rating tests shall be conducted in accordance with Cooling Tower
Institute (CTI) Bulletin ATC-105.
15.5:5.2 An automatically controlled water-bleed shall be designed for all cooling towers. A cooling tower water
treatment program should be selected by a specialist
15.5.5.3 Cooling towers shall have sump water heating systems if they will operate during freezing weather.
15.5.5.4 Combustible casings are acceptable in cooling towers, provided that the fill and drift eliminators are
noncombustible. (Polyvinyl chloride [PVC] and fire-retardant-treated, fiberglass-reinforced plastic are
classified as combustible.) In determining cooling tower requirements, the definitions of combustible
and noncombustible in NFPA 214 shall be used. Cooling towers with more than 2,000 cubic feet of a
combustible fill shall be provided with an automatic sprinkler system, designed in accordance with
NFPA 214, when any of the following conditions exist:
• The continued operation of the cooling tower is essential to the operations in the area it services.
• The building is totally sprinkler protected.
• A fire in the cooling tower could cause structural damage or other severe fire exposure to the
building.
• The value of the cooling tower is five or more times the cost of installing the sprinkler protection.
The cost of the sprinkler protection shall include all factors involved, such as the sprinkler piping
distribution system, the heat-sensing system, the control valve, and any special water supplies or
extension of water supplies required. c
15.5.5.5 Cooling towers with airstreams that pass through water shall have the water treated with an EPA-
approved biocide to control etiological organisms or any chlorinated hydrocarbon pesticides, herbicides,
or other chemicals that may be present because of local conditions. A maintenance program must be
established to ensure continued, effective operation of these treatment systems.
15.5.6 BUILDING HEATING SYSTEMS
This subsection applies to heat-generating equipment or heat-transfer equipment and accessories located
in individual buildings. The project criteria shall provide direction on factors to be considered in the
selection of heating system capacity; such factors include redundancy, future expansion or building
15-13
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1996 and Planning Guidelines
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
modification, thermal storage or solar assistance, and other project-specific considerations. If maintaining
the building design temperature is critical, a stand-alone heating system shall be designed with backup
capability and with no dependence on other facility systems.
15.5.6.1 Where buildings are connected to the central plant heat generation/distribution system, one of the
following shall be provided:
• Steam-to-building hot water heat exchanger
• High-temperature water (HTW)-to-building hot water heat exchanger
• Steam-pressure reducing station.
t
15.5.6.2 For space heating by hot water, conversion of the central heating plant steam or HTW shall provide a
heating-water supply temperature of 200°F for building terminal units. For space heating
by steam, the building steam supply pressure shall be reduced to 1 5 pounds per square inch gauge (psig)
unless a higher supply pressure is needed for process requirements. For process-related or other high
temperature requirements, the project criteria shall indicate the capacities and the temperature and
pressure requirements. For facilities with a central plant condensate return system, a condensate
receiver with duplex pumps shall be specified. Steam-to-hot-water or HTW-to-building heating water
converters shall be selected on the basis of design criteria contained in the ASHRAE Handbook ofHVA C
Systems and Equipment and ASHRAE HVAC Applications Handbook.
15.5.6.3 The use of direct and indirect gas-fired units, electric heating, heat pumps (air-cooled and water-cooled),
low-temperature gas infrared heating, and hot-water radiant heating and hot-water distribution to
terminal units, shall be considered, with selection based on the building type, the facility preference, and
LCCA. Office buildings, and particularly buildings with occupants sitting near fenestration, shall be
designed with perimeter finned-tube radiation heating systems or other perimeter heating systems.
• If the selected heating fuel is fuel oil, storage tanks, installed in accordance with national, state, and
local EPA regulations, shall provide 30 days of full heating capacity. Each tank shall be fully
trimmed for safety and operating conditions and shall include a remote level gauge. Tanks shall
comply with NFPA 30 requirements.
15.5.7 HEATING EQUIPMENT
Furnaces and boilers for central heating systems shall be enclosed in a room with 2-hour fire-rated walls,
floors, and ceilings, and with openings protected by automatic or self-closing 1 l/z-hour fire doors. For small
units consisting of a single furnace operating a hot air system or a boiler not exceeding IS psi pressure or
a rating of 10 bhp, a 1-hour fire-rated enclosure is permissible.
15.5.7.1 STANDARDS
Heating equipment will comply with the following standards, except where noted otherwise:
• Oil-fired— NFPA 31
- Gas-fired— NFPA 54
• Liquefied petroleum gas-fired— NFPA 58
• Liquefied natural gas-fired— NFPA 59A.
15.5.7.2 FUEL STORAGE
Where liquid fuel is used, a recessed floor or curb shall be provided, with ramps at the openings. The
height of the recess or curb shall be sufficient to contain all the fuel in case the tank or container
ruptures.
15-14
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
15.5.7.3 SHOP OPERATIONS
15-15
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
Shop, storage, and other operations that involve flanunable or combustible materials and are not directly
related to the operations in the furnace or boiler rooms shall be located elsewhere unless the furnace or
boiler room is sprinkler protected. Incidental operations that do not utilize significant amounts of
flammable materials are allowed in furnace or boiler rooms if proper separations are maintained between
combustible materials and ignition sources (e.g., boiler equipment).
15.5.7.4 BURNERS
Regardless of size, burners on suspended oil-fired heaters shall be provided with flame supervision that
will ensure shutdown in not more than 4 seconds if flame failure occurs or trial for ignition does not
establish a flame.
15.5.7.5 SPACE HEATERS
When used in approved locations, space heaters and portable heaters shall be approved or listed by the
American Gas Association, UL, or another nationally recognized testing authority. They shall be
installed in accordance with all of the requirements of the manufacturer, the facility owner, and the EPA
Safety, Health and Environmental Management Manager involved. Any combustion space heater should
be directly vented to the outside by a flue to avoid the contamination of the occupied space with
combustion gases. Portable liquid-fueled space heaters shall not be used in EPA-occupied spaces.
15.5.7.6 GAS PIPING
Gas piping entry into the building shall be protected against breakage due to settling, vibration, or,
where appropriate, seismic activity. Where practical, piping shall be brought in above grade and
provided with a swing joint before it enters the building. Where it is necessary for gas piping to enter
a building below ground, the physical arrangement shall be such that a break in the gas line due to
settling or other causes at or near the point of entry cannot result in the free flow of gas into the building.
Local gas utility and code requirements shall be followed.
15.5.7.7 GAS METER REGULATORS
To avoid placing any strain on the gas piping, any meters, regulators, or similar attachments shall be
adequately supported. Any vents or rupture discs on the equipment shall be vented to the outside of the
building.
15.5.7.8 VALVES
Earthquake-sensitive shutoff valves shall be provided for each gas entry, where applicable.
15.5.7.9 PIPING LOCATION
Gas piping shall not be run in any space between a structural member and its fireproofing.
15.5.7.10 GAS METER ROOMS
Gas meter rooms shall be vented in a way that removes any leaked gas without transporting it through
the structure.
15.5.7.11 FIRE-RESISTANT SHAFTS OR CONDUIT
For large-capacity gas services (piping greater than 3-inch diameter at 4 inches of water pressure head
or any other size with equivalent or greater delivery capabilities) within a building, the piping shall be
enclosed in fire-resistive shafts and vented directly to the outside at top and bottom. Any horizontal runs
of the gas pipe shall be enclosed in a conduit or chase, also directly vented at each end to the exterior
or to the vented vertical shaft. Automatic gas detection and automatic shutoff shall be provided.
15.5.8 WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
Economical pipe sizes shall be selected for chilled water, hot water, condenser water, boiler feed, and
condensate return systems based on the allowable pressure drop, flow rate, and pump selection criteria
prescribed in the ASHRAE Fundamentals, HVAC Systems and Equipment, and HVAC Applications
15-16
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
handbooks. Insulation shall be provided on all water distribution piping and system components. Strainers
shall be provided at the suction side of each pump and of each control valve. Flexible connectors shall be
specified for installation on the suction and discharge piping of base-mounted end-suction type pumps and
on electronically driven chillers.
* Check valves and balancing valves, or combination check-shutoff-balance valves, shall be installed in
the discharge piping of all pumps operating in parallel pumping systems. Balancing valves shall be
installed in the discharge piping of all pump systems.
• Service valves shall be installed in the suction and discharge piping of all major pieces of equipment.
Balancing valves shall be provided in the discharge piping of all coils and in central station cooling
equipment
• An air elimination pressure control, venting, and automatic filling system (with backflow prevention)
shall be provided for each hot-water and chilled-water distribution system; water treatment injection
should also be provided, if required.
• Expansion or compression tanks and fill piping connections shall be located on the suction side of the
distribution system pump or pumps. Expansion tanks and air separation devices shall be sized according
to the methods in the ASHRAE Handbook ofHVAC and Equipment, and specified in accordance with
the requirements of ASME B31.1. Gauge glasses, drain valves, and vent valves shall be provided for
all expansion tank systems.
' • Water treatment design information for chilled-water, hot-water, and boiler feed water systems shall be
provided by a specialist and based on project criteria (tested water condition).
15.5.9 PUMPS AND PUMPING SYSTEMS
Pumps for chilled-water, hot-water, condenser water, boiler feed water, and condensate systems shall be
centrifugal-type pumps and shall be selected on the basis of the criteria in the ASHRAE handbooks.
Materials, types of seals, bearings, wear rings, shafts, and other features shall be selected on the basis of
specific system requirements. Use of primary-secondary type pumping systems and high-efficiency motors
shall be considered for pumps for all hot-water and chilled-water distribution systems.
• For systems where system pumping horsepower requirements are greater than 20 bhp, use of variable-
speed drives or parallel-pumping arrangement shall be considered.
• Standby pumps shall be provided for all systems, as dictated by project-specific criteria.
15.5.10 STEAM DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
All steam piping shall comply with ASME B31.1 and shall be at least Schedule 40 black steel. Fittings,
valves, and accessories shall be selected on the basis of pipe size and temperature and pressure conditions.
15.5.11 AIR-HANDLING AND AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
Air-handling equipment and air distribution systems shall be sized to optimize performance, initial cost,
and operating and maintenance costs over the life of the system. All air-handling system equipment (e.g.,
fans, terminal units, air-handling units) shall be provided with vibration isolators and flexible ductwork
connectors to minimize transmission of vibration and noise. Systems shall satisfy the noise criteria (NC)
levels recommended for various types of spaces and the vibration criteria listed in the ASHRAE handbooks.
Where air-handling equipment and air distribution systems cannot meet these requirements, sound, and
vibration-attenuation devices shall be installed in the air-handling systems.
15.5.11.1 The HVAC system for the sections of the laboratory building (including corridors) where the laboratory
and laboratory support rooms are located shall be a one-pass air system. These sections of the laboratory
15-17
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
building, as well as the hazardous chemical storage building, shall have an independent air-handling
unit(s). The general exhaust and special instrument canopy hoods in these sections and in the hazardous
chemical storage building shall be 100 percent constant volume at all times.
Minimum airflow requirements to be maintained are: 250 cfm with four air changes per hour for an
unoccupied laboratory, or calculated to prevent concentration of volatile vapors at or'above 25 percent
of their lower flammable/explosive limit (LEL) within the hood; and not less than eight air changes per
hourduringoccupiedhours, while maintaining negative pressure within laboratories relative to adjacent
corridors and nonlaboratory spaces. Specifications for controls and monitoring devices for exhaust and
air-handling units should be consistent with these minimum airflow requirements.
The setback mechanism shall provide a low-speed operations setting for the fen motors of air-handling
unit(s) and fume hoods in a particular zone. Fan motors can be simultaneously activated. The setback
mechanism shall be designed to provide 250 dm minimum for 6-foot and smaller laboratory hoods; it
shall provide room temperatures of approximately 55T in the winter and approximately 85°F in the
sununerunJessother.ovemdingteraperaturerequirementsarcspecificallystated. TheHVACsystcm(s)
nighttime setback shall be controlled by a timer connected to the energy management control system of
the building. The fume hood face velocity reduction of25 percent of full open-flow air volume (100 fpm
hood face velocity) and the general exhaust and special canopy hood operation at 100 percent airflow
are to be balanced by an appropriate reduction in supply air (air-handling unit) fan speed in order to
maintain negative pressure in the laboratory and laboratory support rooms with respect to the hallways.
Room exhaust systems shall, at all times, be capable of eliminating concentrations of fumes, odors, heat,
and moisture. HVAC design, materials, and installation shall minimize the occurrence of molds,
mildew, fungi, and microbial agents in the system. The combined noise level generated by mechanical
and electrical building equipment and fume hoods should not exceed 70 decibels [dBa] at the face of the
hoods (with the systems operating) or 55 dBa elsewhere.
The average face velocity shall be 100 fpm for all sash heights up to and including 80 percent open.
Operating sash heights of less than 100 percent open require installations of sash stops and audible and
visual alarms to warn operators of less than 100 fpm velocities.
15.5.11.2 Use of a VAV mechanical ventilation system is permitted if the following design and installation criteria
are achieved.
• The system must be able to consistently provide 100 fpm average face velocity for conventional
laboratory fume hoods irrespective efface opening setting.
• Fume hood systems must pass the performance test outlined in the Procedures Manual for Certifying
Laboratory Fume Hoods To Meet EPA Standard This test requires an average face velocity of 100
fpm.
• Of particular concern is the containment of a tracer test or smoke stick when the sash is opened and
closed. Some VAV systems have unacceptable delays in the supply and exhaust motors in response
to changes in the sash height. This will cause the backflow of contaminants into the work space and
the temporary loss of negative pressure in the laboratory space relative to corridors and other
adjacent spaces.
• In addition to avoiding these unacceptable conditions, a VAV system must maintain a minimal flow
of air within the hood and ductwork to purge gases, vapors, and other substances; avoid
condensation, impaction, and deposition in the ductwork; and achieve sufficient stack velocity so that
15-18
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
the contaminated airstream clears the building and does not reenter the building along with supply
air.
Refer to subsection 15.5.11.1 for minimum airflow requirements.
15.5.12 FANS/MOTORS
Fans shall be designed and specified to ensure stable, nonpulsing aerodynamic operation in the range of
operation, over varying speeds. Fans with motors of 20 horsepower (hp) or less shall be designed with
adjustable motor pulley sheaves to assist in air balancing of systems. Fans with motors of greater than 20
hp shall use fixed (nonadjustable) drives that can be adjusted by using fixed motor pulley sheaves of
different diameters. Supply air-handling units and return air fens in VAV systems shall control capacity
through the use of variable-speed drives, inlet vanes, or scroll bypass dampers. All fans shall comply with
AMCA standard 210, ASHRAE standard 51, and the ASHRAE Handbook of HVAC Systems and
Equipment.
• Fans shall be located within the ductwork system, in accordance with the requirements of AMCA
Publication 201. Motors shall be sized according to properly calculated bhp fan requirements and shall
not use oversized fans and motors to meet future capacity needs unless so directed by the project criteria.
Fan construction materials shall be selected on the basis of corrosion resistance and cost. Spark-resistant
construction shall be used where required by NFPA. All fans and accessories shall be designed and
specified to meet all smoke and flame spread requirements of NFPA 255. Fans used in exhaust systems
of fume hoods shall also be of the noiseless type and shall be corrosion-resistant to the fumes generated
in the hood.
• Smoke detectors for automatic control in air distribution systems shall be located in accordance with the
requirements of NFPA 90A, Chapter 4.
15.5.13 COILS
Heating and cooling coils shall comply with ART 410. Heating and cooling coil selection shall comply with
the guidelines in the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals and the ASHRAE Handbook of HVAC Systems
and Equipment. Coil manufacturers shall certify coil performance by ARI certification or provide written
certification from a nationally recognized independent testing firm that coil performance is in accordance
with ARI 410.
• Heating and cooling coils shall be composed of materials appropriate for the corrosive atmosphere in
which they operate. Cooling coils shall be designed with a maximum face velocity of 550 fpm. Coils
designed with face velocities exceeding 500 fpm shall have features that prevent condensate carryover
or use moisture eliminators. Coils shall have a drain feature.
• Recirculating air systems designed for outside-air winter temperatures below freezing shall have a
preheat coil, located either in the outside air intake or in the mixed-air stream upstream of the cooling
coil, unless the theoretical mixed-air temperature is calculated to be above 35 °F. In this case, the
preheat coils may be omitted if adequate baffling is provided to guarantee positive mixing of the return
and outdoor air. Preheat coils shall be designed to maintain discharge air temperature without
modulation of the steam or hot-water flow through use of modulating face dampers and bypass dampers.
In moderate climates where the method has been proved to be reliable and there is no concern about coil
freeze-up, steam modulation may be used for control of steam coils.
15.5.14 DUCTS
Ducts shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 90 A. Exhaust ductwork for laboratories with fume hoods
shall be constructed with welded longitudinal seams and welded transverse joints, or equivalent
construction, in accordance with the requirements of Section 6, Ductwork, of American National Standard
(ANSI/AMA) Z9.5-1992. Any duct linings or coverings shall be of noncombustible construction. The total
15-19
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
assembly of the duct lining, including adhesive and any coatings or additives involved, shall have an interior
finish rating of Class A (flame spread 0*25, smoke developed 0-450). Use of porous duct liners that can
collect dirt and moisture contributes to indoor air quality problems. The use of such liners should be
avoided and should not be considered for new construction. Where such liners are already in use, and
particularly in areas close to humidification or dehumidification (cooling) equipment, provisions shall be
made to protect the lining from dirt and moisture contamination.
• Duct smoke detectors, as described under Section 16, Electrical Requirements, of this Manual shall be
installed in accordance with NFPA 90A requirements.
15.5.15 WALK-IN ENVIRONMENTAL AND COLD STORAGE ROOMS
Walk-in environmental rooms are rooms in which temperature and/or humidity is controlled at a single set
condition within specified tolerances regardless of activity in the room. In determining the appropriate
room temperature, uniformity, and gradient, the design professional should discuss heat loads (in terms of
process loads and ventilation requirements) with the end user. Walk-in environmental rooms shall be
capable of maintaining a 4°C room temperature with a uniformity of ±0.5°C and a maximum gradient of
1 °C, unless otherwise specified in the program requirements. A walk-in cold storage room shall be capable
of maintaininga minus 20°C room temperature with a uniformity of±1 °C and a maximum gradient of 3 °C,
unless otherwise specified. Rooms shall feature temperature displays visible from a contiguous hallway and
shall be capable of producing a continuous record of temperature. Alarm systems with manual override
capability shall be provided to advise room operators of fault conditions. Doors to rooms shall be provided
with a locking mechanism capable of release at all times from the room interior whether or not the door is
locked. Walk-in environmental and cold storage spaces shall include shelving. Walk-in coolers are
considered enclosed spaces and require automatic fire sprinkler protection inside them.
A separate refrigeration system shall be provided for these rooms. If refrigeration is provided by the main
building's chilled-water system, a backup self-contained system shall also be provided.
15.5.16 CENTRAL PLANT HEAT GENERATION AND DISTRIBUTION
The following criteria shall be applied in the planning and design of steam and HTW generation and
distribution systems and of cogeneration facilities.
15.5.16.1 FACILITY SIZING
The design professional shall consider creating a plant design that can be easily expanded to meet
potential future loads in addition to meeting confirmed near-term loads. Load computations to establish
boiler capacity shall be based on the building design heating load, as determined in conformance with
the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals, plus process heating loads (if any) and an allowance for
piping plants. The process heat losses shall be investigated during the design stage to determine whether
heat can be recovered, thereby reducing the boiler load.
• Modular boiler installation shall be considered for all applications in order to maintain a high
operating plant efficiency throughout the year. The number and size of the boilers shall be based on
the number of operable hours at full and partial load operation, the turn-down ratio of the boiler
being considered, efficiency at partial loads, and year-round process or summer loads. Use of a
caseload boiler shall be considered when a year-round process demand exists. The system shall be
designed to satisfy peak demand by operating over its maximum rating for short periods of time.
' The possibility of operating small local boilers rather than the central plant to satisfy summer loads
shall also be considered. Sufficient capacity shall be furnished to allow one boiler to be down for
inspection or maintenance or to be on standby while the remaining boiler(s) maintain normal
operations.
15-20
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines . February 1998
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
• The generating facilities shall be so located as to allow efficient steam/hot-water distribution
throughout the site and to allow for future expansion of the generating and distribution system. The
facility location shall also be chosen to take advantage of prevailing winds and to minimize problems
associated with the following:
- Noise
- Dirt
• Air pollution
- Harmful effects on adjacent property owners
- Accommodation of fuel deliveries and storage.
• The option of installing one or more satellite boiler facilities rather than a single central boiler
complex shall be evaluated when one or more of the following conditions exist:
- An extensive distribution system connecting several separate steam users is required.
- Requirements exist for several different steam pressures.
- Variable steam loadings exist with respect to time or quantity.
• The use of a cogeneration plant as a possible alternative shall be considered in the planning of any
large steam generation facility. The feasibility of cogeneration with HTW or HTW boilers or HTW-
to-steam generators shall be considered. In determining the feasibility of cogeneration, the following
factors shall be considered:
- Energy demand and cost, peak load, average load, seasonal variations, and utility rate structures.
- Regulatory concerns: Public Utility Regulatory Policies Act (PURPA), relevant environmental
regulations, and current local regulations.
• Cogeneration plants shall be sized to accommodate existing loads.
15.5.16.2 STEAM AND HIGH-TEMPERATURE WATER GENERATION
All boilers shall comply with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
• In determining whether to select a steam or an HTW system, the following factors shall be
considered:
- Whether the system will be operated intermittently or continuously
- Whether fast response to significant load variation is important
- Pumping costs
- Length, size, and configuration of required piping
• The possibility of using HTW to generate the steam at its point of use, in a facility where only
a few processes require steam.
* Steam boilers shall be designed to provide dry, saturated steam unless the economics of electricity
generation, meeting specific process requirements, or accommodating extensive distribution systems
necessitates use of superheated steam. If required for process, the use of high-pressure satellite
boilers located close to the process shall be considered in lieu of distribution of high-pressure steam.
• An HTW system is a system that generates heating or process water with a temperature above 300 °F.
HTW boilers shall be of the controlled forced-circulation type, specifically designed for high-
temperature water service. Because of costs associated with high-pressure pipe, valves, and fittings,
HTW systems should not be designed for higher temperatures and pressures than are absolutely
necessary.
15-21
-------
February 1998
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
* IB a gas-pressurized HTW system, an inert gas, such as nitrogen, shall be used and the pressurizing
tank shall be installed vertically to reduce the area of contact between gas and water, thus reducing
the absorption of gas into the liquid. Gas-pressurized systems should be maintained at a pressure
that is well above the pressure at which the HTW will flash to steam. Pump pressurization is
generally restricted to small process heating systems. In larger HTW systems, pump pressurization
can be combined with gas pressurization.
15.5.16.3 CIRCULATION PUMPS
In selecting and installing circulation pumps, energy efficiency shall be emphasized. Consideration
shall be given to the use of variable-speed circulation pumps. In steam-pressurized systems, circulating
pumps shall be located in the supply lines to maintain pressure above the flashpoint of the hottest water
in the distribution system. A inixing connection that allows some of the coil return water to pass into
the supply line at the pump suction shall be provided to safeguard against flashing or cavitation at the
pump(s). In a gas-pressurized HTW system, the circulating pumps may be installed in either the supply
lines or the return lines.
15.5.16.4 FUEL STORAGE AND HANDLING SYSTEMS
Control, containment, and treatment of rainwater runoff from coal storage yards shall comply with
effluent guidelines and standards for steam-electric power-generating point sources (40 CFR Part 423).
The relative economy of a central natural gas-fired plant compared with a gas distribution system
serving the individual requirements of each building shall be considered. The long-range availability
of the gas supply and the possible need for a secondary fuel shall be established. The economics of
intemiptible versus uninterruptible gas service relative to availability of secondary fuel shall be
considered.
* Fully automatic mechanical-firing equipment and mechanical draft equipment shall be provided.
Mechanical-firing equipment capable of developing 100 percent to 125 percent of the boiler capacity
shall be specified.
• Ash-handling systems shall comply with Federal Construction Council Technical Report No. 51,
Chapter HI, Section 3.1. Land availability for storage or disposal, water availability, nearness to
residential areas, the possibility of selling the ash as a means of disposal, and environmental
regulations shall be considered. Collection and treatment of ash-carrying liquid effluents shall
comply with 40 CFR Part 423.
• Stationary internal combustion engines, such as gasoline- or diesel-powered generators or fire
pumps, shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 37.
• The use of underground tanks shall be avoided.
15.5.16.5 BOILER WATER TREATMENT
Boiler water treatment shall be provided to prevent deposits on or corrosion of internal boiler surfaces
and to prevent the carryover of boiler water solids into the steam. A boiler water treatment specialist
shall be consulted to determine appropriate treatment measures. Water quality measures for the steam
plant and for other site process water users should be coordinated. The design of the plant shall provide
for daily sampling to determine internal water conditions. Provisions shall be made for introducing
treatment chemicals into the feed water. The plant shall contain adequate space and equipment for
storing, handling, and mixing chemicals. Continuous versus intermittent blowdown operations shall
be considered to determine which system will keep the concentration of total solids within acceptable
limits. For continuous blowdown operations, the economics of installing a heat recovery system shall
be considered.
15-22
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
• A minimum of two boiler feed pumps, each sized to handle the peak load, shall be provided to allow
one pump to be oiu of service without affecting facility operations. Pumps shall be equipped with
automatic controls that regulate feed water flow to maintain the required water level and with a relief
valve. Relief valves shall be preset to lift at a lower pressure than the boiler safety valve setting plus
static and friction heads.
15.5.16.6 BOILER ROOM CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION
Boiler plant instrumentation and control panels shall include devices for monitoring the combustion
process and consoles in equipment in which such devices are mounted. Boiler room controls and
instrumentation shall comply with the appropriate standard from among NFPA 8501, NFPA 8502,
NFPA 8503, NFPA 8504, NFPA 8505, and NFPA 8506.
15.5.16.7 PLANT INSULATION
All hot surfaces within 7 feet of the plant floor, or on any catwalk, shall be insulated to prevent surface
temperatures above 60°C (where contact would be unintentional and unlikely) and above 49°C (where
contact is likely or necessary for equipment operation). Insulation shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations and the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals.
15.5.16.8 STEAM AND HIGH-TEMPERATURE WATER DISTRIBUTION
Steam and HTW distributions systems shall be sized to accommodate, without extensive modification,
any future expansion anticipated in the project criteria.
• When aboveground steam or HTW distribution systems are to be constructed, pipe shall be installed
on concrete pedestals, on concrete/steel stanchions, or on poles. Where piping crosses over
roadways, a minimum of 14 feet of clearance shall be provided.
• Provisions shall be made for expansion and contraction in the piping system. Expansion loops shall
be provided where space allows. Where space does not allow expansion loops, expansion joints may
be used. Piping shall comply with ASME B31.1
• Unless economics dictates otherwise, steam shall be supplied to the distribution system at the lowest
pressure that will adequately serve the connected load. The economics of higher pressure
distribution shall be considered. Processes requiring higher pressures shall be serviced, where
practical, by a separate section of the distribution system to avoid operating the entire system at
higher pressures than necessary.
• Warm-up bypass valves shall be provided at all shutoff valves in steam distribution lines. Steam
velocities shall be selected for the type of service being considered but shall not exceed 10,000 fpm.
• Steam and condensate pipe shall, where possible, be graded at a minimum of 1 inch in 40 feet in the
direction of flow. Drip stations and steam traps shall be provided at all low points in steam lines.
• To ensure tightness of the steam system, all joints to valves and fittings that are larger than 1.25
inches shall be welded, except in the boiler house, where flanges shall be used to facilitate
maintenance of equipment, connections, and valves.
• HTW piping shall be sized for an average velocity of 5 feet per second, a maximum velocity of 10
feet per second, and a minimum velocity of 2 feet per second. To ensure tightness of the HTW
system, all joints to valves and fittings that are larger than 1.25 inches shall be welded, except in the
boiler house, where flanges shall be used to facilitate maintenance of equipment, connections, and
valves.
15-23
-------
Architecture/Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
• Unlike steam piping, HTW piping way follow the natural terrain; however, proper provisions shall
be made for draining and venting the piping.
15.5.16.9 PIPING INSULATION
Insulation containing asbestos is prohibited. The possibility that water infiltration will cause physical
damage to, or loss of thermal characteristics of, underground pipe insulation shall be considered in the
selection of insulation. All insulation installed aboveground, in tunnels, and in manholes shall be
provided with either a metal jacket, either factory or field installed, or a hard cement finish.
15.6 Load Calculations
15.6.1 GENERAL
Load calculations shall be based on data and procedures outlined in the ASHRAE handbooks and shall be
in accordance with the conditions specified in this Manual.
15.6.2 SUBMISSION
A complete set of calculations shall be submitted showing building heating and cooling loads and equipment
capacity requirements.
15.6.3 DESIGN
Load calculations may be performed manually or by a nationally recognized computer-based load program.
Specialty programs that are not recognized must be approved by the contracting officer prior to use.
15.6.4 AIR VOLUME/EXCHANGE
For laboratory spaces, the specific volume of air required to achieve a predetermined air exchange rate shall
be dictated by the type of work being performed in the laboratory.
15.6.5 AUXILIARY AIR
If a separate auxiliary air system is provided, the auxiliary air must be heated and cooled to within the room
dry bulb temperature. Auxiliary air shall not exceed 70 percent of total fume hood exhaust requirements.
15.7 Laboratory Fume Hoods
Certification of EPA laboratory fume hoods, as constructed, manufactured, installed, and used, shall
conform to current EPA requirements. The design professional, in consultation with the users of the facility,
shall be responsible for selecting fume hood types and sizes that are appropriate to the hoods* intended use.
The requirements of this subsection and of Chapters, paragraph 12, of the SofetyMonual shall be followed.
The requirements of the EPA fume hood standards, Quantitative Performance Test for Laboratory Fume
Hoods, shall also be followed. In accordance with Procedures Manual for Certifying Laboratory Fume
Hoods To Meet EPA Standard, fume hood face velocity must be provided at 100 linear feet per minute with
a uniform face velocity profile of+10 percent of the average velocity with the sash fully open to provide
protection from operations performed in the hood.
15.7.1 HOOD REQUIREMENTS
Certification of EPA laboratory fume hoods, as constructed, manufactured, installed, and used, shall
conform to current EPA requirements. Before EPA purchases any hood model, the laboratory fume hood
manufacturer, at a test facility provided by the manufacturer, and at no cost to the Government, shall certify
the proper performance of the fume hood in accordance with EPA's criteria. In addition to complying with
EPA's fume hood criteria, each hood shall have an ASHRAE 110 standard performance rating, as
manufactured, of 4.0 AM O.OS. After the new hoods are installed, EPA requires the manufacturer to
evaluate the installation and performance of the hoods prior to acceptance and use by EPA.
15-24
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
SHEMD is responsible for approving the certification of fame hoods. SHEMD should document the
approval of all newly installed fume hoods for AEREB. A list of approved or certified hoods is available
from SHEMD.
Materials used in the construction of fume hoods and of exhaust blowers shall meet corrosion-resistance
standards for the chemicals used and generated in the hood, as described in the hood uses; blowers should
be rated or otherwise approved for use; and plumbing fixtures and electrical outlets should meet existing
codes. EPA specifications and testing procedures for checking the performance of fume hoods are available
from AEREB and SHEMD.
All hoods specified in the design criteria shall have a rating of 04A AM 0.04, in accordance with the
ASHRAE 110-93 fume hood test procedure, EPA Fume Hood Procurement Manual, and the EPA fume
hood standard. Quantitative Performance Test for Laboratory Fume Hoods. Exhaust from fume hoods and
general laboratory exhausts shall be routed to the exterior of the building at the highest part and position
of the exhaust stacks to prevent entrainment of fumes at fresh-air intake points. Exhaust discharge stacks
shall be at least 7 feet above the adjacent roofline and shall be so located with respect to openings and air
intakes of the laboratory or adjacent buildings as to avoid reentry of the exhaust discharge. The operational
exhaust discharge shall have an exhaust velocity of at least 3,000 fpm (at least 4,000 fpm is recommended)
and shall conform to ANSI Z9.S. Stacks shall be designed in accordance with ASHRAE and ACGIH
industrial ventilation guidelines. All fume hoods shall be installed under the manufacturer's supervision.
In the case of VAV fume hoods, the hoods shall be installed under the supervision of the hood manufacturer
and the room control systems manufacturer. All hoods shall be certified per EPA's certification manual
prior to turnover.
* Ceiling and wall supply diffusers for the distribution of supply air in the laboratory shall be designed for
a maximum air velocity of 25 fpm at 6 feet above the finished floor at the face of the hood.
* Face Velocities: Although the Safety Manual allows for an 80 fpm airflow, the Safety, Health and
Environmental Management Program (SHEMP) contends that EPA is unable to demonstrate
uninterrupted "ideal conditions" (e.g., pedestrian traffic). Therefore, EPA must design for realistic
scenarios and demonstrate adequate safety at an airflow of 100 fpm (plus or minus 10 percent at any
given measurement).
15.7.2 FUME HOOD EXHAUST
The design for laboratory fume hood exhaust shall be in accordance with the design criteria of NFPA 45.
Provisions shall be made in the design of the laboratory supply air system for 25 percent future expansion
of fume hoods beyond what is presently required to meet program design needs. Fume hoods, biological
safety cabinets (BSCs), and general laboratory exhaust maybe combined in a commonly manifolded exhaust
duct system for blocks of hoods; however, such combined systems require the prior approval of EPA
Headquarters Health and Safety Approving Officers. Provisions should be made for separate, dedicated duct
and exhaust systems for special fume hood exhausts, including, but not limited to, perchloric acid hoods,
high-energy radioisotope hoods, and exhausted biological safety cabinets, that cannot be combined in a
commonly manifolded system.
15.7.2.1 MANIFOLDING OF FUME HOODS
In order for manifolded fume hoods to be safe, sufficient dilution of air within the ductwork must be
maintained to avoid significant chemical reactions, which may result in fire, corrosion, deposition,
and/or increased toxicity. Low airflows afforded by VAV may increase the potential for significant
reaction. Special purpose hoods (for example, but not limited to, radioisotope hoods, glove boxes,
biocabinets) should not be connected with general chemistry hoods. Hoods used for dissimilar purposes
or hoods that are far apart from each other should not be manifolded. The costs and balancing of
logistics for all affected hoods in the system exhaust and the supply system with each change in the
15-25
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
system may outweigh the advantages of manifolding hoods. (See subsection 15.7.12 below.) Perchloric
acid hood exhaust ducts shall not be manifolded and shall have separate exhaust ducts.
15.7.3 CONSTANT VOLUME BYPASS-TYPE FUME HOOD
The laboratory fume hood is often an integral pan of the building exhaust system. The volume of air
exhausted should be constant, achieved by an airflow bypass above the sash through which room air can pass
as the sash is lowered. A horizontal bottom and a vertical side airfoil must be specified and used on all
hoods, and the face edges must be shaped to minimize entering air turbulence. Vertical foils on the sides
also result in a slight airflow improvement by minimizing the eddies caused as air enters the hood. The
work surface should be recessed three-eighths of an inch or more so that spills can be effectively contained.
The front raised edge should extend just past the airfoil but not far enough to be used as a working surface
near the face opening.
The bypass sizing and design must be such that the following conditions are met:
• The total airflow volume is essentially the same at all sash positions. As the sash is lowered, the face
velocity increases to a rate that shall not exceed three times the design velocity for a fully open sash
position.
• The bypass must provide a sight-tight barrier between the hood work space and the room when the sash
is lowered.
• The bypass opening is dependent only on the operation of the sash. Selected sash configurations are
listed and described below:
• The vertical-rising fume hood sash shall be full-view type providing a clear and unobstructed side-to-
side view of the fume hood interior and the service fitting connections. The sash shall be Vi-inch
laminated safety glass. The sash system shall utilize a single-weight pulley cable counterbalance
system pennitungone-fingeroperationalongthe length of the sash pull. The counterbalance system
will hold the sash at any position without creep and will prevent sash drop in the event of
malfunction or failure of a cable.
- The combination vertical-rising and horizontal-sliding fume hood sash shall be similar in design to
the vertical-rising sash configuration but with multiple horizontal sliding sashes of'/-inch laminated
safety glass panels on multiple tracks within the vertical rising sash frame.
• The following hood models are approved for use in EPA facilities:
- Safeaire 54L597 6-foot bench hood
- Safeaire S54S710 5-foot walk-in hood
- Pace-aire 54L51200 3-foot bench hood.
• The hoods listed above are constant-volume bypass hoods but can be field-converted to an auxiliary
air-type hood (described below). While current EPA policy discourages the use of auxiliary air-type
hoods in new construction, their use may be justified under special circumstances, such as in renovations
where the existing ventilation system is inadequate and where expansion of system capacity may be
mechanically unfeasible or too costly. Auxiliary air hoods are hoods that are provided with a source of
air in addition to that taken from the room. It is essential that all air for these hoods be supplied from
outside the hood face. Any model that introduces air behind the sash must not be used, because this
arrangement reduces the control velocity at the face and could actually pressurize the work chamber if
the exhaust flow is reduced (e.g., by foreign matter in fan, a broken belt, or normal wear and
maintenance). Features described for the constant-volume bypass-type hood, including the bypass
arrangement, are applicable to the auxiliary air hood. Auxiliary air supplies must be turned off to test
15-26
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
the face velocity of the hood; a readily accessible means of turning off auxiliary air electrical power will
facilitate such testing.
15.7.4 VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME (VAV) HOODS
• Certification of EPA laboratory fume hoods, as constructed, manufactured, installed, and used, shall
conform to current EPA requirements. The variable flow controls for the hood exhaust and those for the
laboratory exhaust and supply system must be manufactured by the same company. The control
manufacturer, in conjunction with the hood manufacturer, shall supervise the installation and certify that
the hood and laboratory system operation is as designed. The design shall follow EPA's Standard Chemical
Laboratory Design Recommendations for VAV Fume Hoods (contact AEREB for these design criteria).
Response times for reestablishing the proper face velocity after a maximum change in sash position shall
not exceed 0.8 seconds. The minimum airflow through a VAV hood must meet or exceed 250 cfin, with
four room air changes per hour for an unoccupied laboratory, or must be calculated to limit the accumulation
of volatile vapors within the fume hood to less than 25 percent of their lower flammable limit. The
minimum airflow during occupied hours will be capable of eight room air changes per hour in the
laboratory. As an alternative to relying on minimum airflows for preventing accumulation of vapors, fume
hoods, whose interior may be classified as described in NEC Article 500, and appropriate electric devices
and equipment within the fume hood enclosure may be used. However, the minimum flows still must be
capable of maintaining the laboratories at a negative air pressure relative to adjacent corridors and
nonlaboratory spaces! Refer to NFPA 45 for guidance on electrical classification of fume hood enclosures.
15.7.5 RADIOISOTOPE HOODS
Radioisotope hoods shall be similar to the fume hood types described above, except that the interior liner
material shall have panels at the sides, back, top, and plenum enclosure of 18-gauge Type 302 stainless steel
and structural members, reinforcements, and brackets of 16-gauge Type 302 stainless steel. The work
surface should be 14-gauge Type 302 stainless steel. Joints should be fully sealed by welding or fine-line
solder. The base structure should have a heavy angle frame reinforced to support 1 ton of lead brick
shielding. The work surface shall be reinforced from the underside with heavy steel grating to provide the
necessary strength for holding lead brick radiation-protection and/or shall be capable of supporting at least
200 pounds per square foot. To minimize radioactive emissions into the atmosphere, high-efficiency
paniculate aerosol (HEP A) filters should be considered as a best available control technology for radioactive
isotope hoods. Guidance on the limitations, selection, and design of radioactive air-cleaning devices can
be found in the Nuclear Air Cleaning Handbook, Energy Research and Development Administration
(ERDA) 76-21, and in Nuclear Power Plant Air Cleaning Units and Components, ANSI/ASME N509.
15.7.6 PERCHLORIC ACID FUME HOODS
In addition to the features described for fume hoods, perchloric acid hoods must use materials that are
nonreactive, acid resistant, and relatively impervious. Type 316 stainless steel with welded joints should
be specified, although certain other materials may be acceptable. Corners shall be rounded to facilitate
cleaning. Work surfaces shall be watertight with an integral trough at the rear for collection of wash-down
water.
* Perchloric acid fume hoods shall be constant-volume bypass or auxiliary air type with an average face
velocity of 100 fpm.
• A wash-down system must be provided that has spray nozzles to adequately wash the entire assembly
including the blower, all ductwork, and the interior of the hood, with an easily accessible strainer to
filter particulates in the water supply that might clog the nozzles. The wash-down system shall be
activated immediately after the hood has been used.
• Ductwork shall be installed with a minimal amount of horizontal runs and no sharp turns; ductwork also
must not be shared with any other hood.
15-27
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
• Exhaust fans most be of an acid-resistant, nonsparkiog (AMCA Standard Type A) construction.
Lubrication shall be with a fluorocarbon grease only. Gaskets shall be of a tetrafluoroethylene polymer.
• Perchloric acid must never be used in hoods not specifically designed for its use. Organic materials,
strong dehydrating or desiccating agents, and oxidizing or reducing materials must not be used in a hood
used for perchloric acid.
15.7.7 SPECIAL PURPOSE HOODS
Special purpose hoods are defined as any hood that does not conform to the specific types described above
in this subsection. Special hoods may be used for operations for which other types are not suitable (e.g., as
enclosures for analytical balances, gas vents from atomic absorption, or gas chromatography units). Other
applications might present opportunities for achieving contamination control with less bench space or less
exhaust volume (e.g., using the hoods as special mixing stations, sinks, evaporation racks, heat sources, and
ventilated worktables). Special purpose exhaust hoods shall be designed in accordance with ANSI A9.2 and
NFPA 45. Appropriate applications for specific types of special purpose hoods are described below.
• Canopy Exhaust (Capture) Hoods: These shall be provided as required for the removal of heat from
specific laboratory apparatus, such as furnaces, ovens, and sterilizers, or as otherwise called for in the
laboratory program.
• Flexible Spot Exhausts (Snorkels): These shall be required to remove chemical fumes or heat from
specific laboratory instrumentation, such as high-performance liquid chromatography (HPLC), gas
chromatography/mass spectrometry (GC/MS), and atomic absorption (AA) units. Snorkels require an
estimated exhaust rate of 100 to 200 cfm or a rate appropriate to the intended use.
* Gas Cabinets: Special exhaust cabinets will be required to bouse individual or pairs oftoxic/pyrophoric
gas cylinders. Leak detectors and low-exhaust flow alarms, as well as a gas purge system, shall be
considered to provide for safe exchange of cylinders. Exhaust for these cabinets is estimated at 50 to 75
cfm each.
i
15.7.8 HORIZONTAL SASHES
Horizontal sashes, as well as other nonstandard features (larger-than-usual opening in distillation hoods,
vented sinks, hoods larger than 6 feet), may be used under the following conditions. (It should be noted that
horizontal sashes may put additional demands on VAV performance.)
* A conventional hood does not meet the specific requirements of the user (this should be reflected in the
"standard operating procedures").
* The hood is used as intended by the manufacturer (i.e., the hood is not altered after installation).
• The hcKxi passes the prepurchase performance test in accordance with the Quantitative Performance Test
for Laboratory Fume Hoods.
15.7.9 OTHER VENTILATED ENCLOSURES
Ventilated enclosures are often required by a laboratory to help dissipate heat and ensure containment of
chemical or biological airborne contaminants produced during certain work. The various types of ventilated
enclosures include laminar flow hoods, biological safety cabinets, glove boxes for known toxic or hazardous
materials, canopy hoods, and slot hoods for known nonhazardous materials. These types of enclosures have
special design requirements for their intended uses. Ventilated devices used to control hazardous materials
must be individually approved by SHEMD and AEREB. Biological safety cabinets and glove boxes shall
comply with NSF 49. Ventilating devices used for removal of heat or nuisance odors must comply with the
parameters set forth in Industrial Ventilation, published by the ACGffl.
15-28
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines \ February 1998
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
15.7.10 FACE VELOCITIES
The use of a ventilated enclosure to contain and exhaust a contaminant is predicated on the ability to provide
an airflow that is sufficient to overcome operator or other exterior influences but is not excessive. Average
control velocities (velocity measured at the face of installed hood) required for fume hoods located in
accordance with the room data sheets contained in Appendix C must be 100 fpm at the operating sash
height. Under no circumstances can the control velocity be less than 80 fpm at any sash height. The sash
shall be equipped with a control device to maintain it at the operating height (e.g., releasable sash stops);
the hood shall be equipped with a device to monitor the face velocity and shall provide a visible and audible
alarm when the face velocity is less than 100 fpm.
15.7.11 ANNUAL CERTIFICATION
The performance of fume hoods shall be certified annually and after any significant maintenance has been
performed on the exhaust system or room air supply system. The performance certification shall be
performed in accordance with EPA guidelines and the procedures prescribed by SEFA
All fume hoods purchased by EPA shall conform to the following EPA regulations:
• The fume hood shall be in compliance with the EPA fume hood specifications for constant-volume
bypass-type hoods, radioactive isotope hoods, VAV-type hoods, and percholoric acid hoods.
* The fume hood shall pass the prepurchase tests outlined in ASHRAE110 with a performance rating of
8.0 AM 0.05.
• After installation, fume hoods shall meet the EPA certification criteria outlined in ASHRAE 110. The
test shall be performed by the manufacturer, in accordance with SHEMD's annual certification
guidelines, in the presence of an EPA representative. The recommended airflow rates will provide the
desired worker protection for any operation that should be performed with this type of equipment. Under
airflows lower than those proposed, the protection factors desired for normal conditions, such as operator
movement, are uncertain. Higher flows than those proposed are not required for a good laboratory
arrangement and will not improve hood performance. If the laboratory arrangement is unsatisfactory,
the problem should be solved by improving the arrangement rather than by increasing hood face
velocity. Increased turbulence within the hood and around the operator results when higher velocities
are used.
15.7.12 EXHAUST SYSTEM
Individual exhaust systems should be provided for each fume hood when the mixing of effluents from the
individual hoods is inadvisable or when the effluent must be filtered, scrubbed, washed down, or otherwise
treated before discharge. Manifolding of fume hood exhausts is allowed if a single discharge point is
advantageous and the air supply suitably controls comfort conditions while maintaining proper laboratory
pressure conditions. Pressure in laboratories shall be maintained as negative with respect to adjacent areas.
Manifolded exhaust systems should incorporate staged multiple constant volume fans with control dampers
to maintain a constant static pressure in the manifold in order to ensure quick response to changing hood
conditions. Variable-speed fans are permitted if they are advantageous. Manifolding of fume hoods shall
meet the requirements of NFPA 45. Blowers should be rated and should be installed at the end of each duct
system so that all ducts within the occupied areas of a building are maintained under negative pressure.
Refer to subsection 15.7.2.1 above. Hood exhaust should be designed in accordance with the
recommendations in Industrial Ventilation, published by ACGIH; ANSIZ9.5, American National Standard
for Laboratory Ventilation; and NFPA 45. Fume hood exhaust stacks should extend a minimum of 10 feet
above the adjacent roof level. Additional height may be required to properly disperse the exhaust. Exhaust
stacks should provide vertical discharge of at least 3,000 fpm without caps or heads. Air intakes for the
facility's HVAC system shall be located as far as possible from the exhaust stack discharges.
15-29
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
15.7.13 NOISE
The noise exposure at the working position in front of the hood shall not exceed 70 dBa with the system
operating. Each new hood installation shall be certified as meeting this requirement before initial use and
shall be recertified annually thereafter. Total room performance with respect to noise levels must not exceed
the limits specified in 29 CFR §1910.95.
15.7.14 EFFLUENT CLEANING
When air-cleaning devices are required, the type is determined by the contaminant and the degree of
cleaning necessary. The type of air cleaner required can vary from a simple scrubber and filters to
incinerators or specially designed units. A typical cleaning system consists of a prefilter, followed by a
solvent-resistant HEP A filter, followed by an activated-charcoal filter. Some analytical activities may
require a different cleaning system, and all cleaning systems must be approved by AEREB and SHEMD.
HEP A filters offer considerable resistance to airflow, especially when airflow is loaded with contaminants.
This resistance must be considered in designing a system with HEPA filters. To maintain building air
balance, laboratories shall be kept under negative pressure relative to surrounding areas and proper hood
control shall be maintained. It is recommended that a compensating damper be installed with aHEPAfilter
so that the airflow will remain constant over the life of the filter. It is good practice to install a roughing
filter ahead of a HEPA filter to prolong the life of the HEPA filter. In some situations, bag-in/bag-out fitter
housings should be used to minimize the spread of contaminants when the HEPA or roughing filter is
changed. The pressure drop across HEPA and roughing filters should be monitored, and filters changed
when necessary. The filter plenum should be located on the inlet side of the fan to allow the fan to be
serviced from the clean side of a filter. It is good practice to allow a straight run of duct before the ran in
order to obtain good fan performance as well as to allow for future installation of other air-cleaning
equipment.
15.8 Other Equipment
15.8.1 GLOVE BOXES
Glove boxes will be Government-furnished equipment These ventilated enclosures are often required by
laboratory personnel to ensure containment of chemical and biological airborne contaminants produced
during the employee's work in the box and to prevent escape of those contaminants into the room. Such
enclosures permit manual manipulations within the box by means of armholes provided with impervious
gloves, which are sealed to the box at the armholes. These types of enclosures have special design
requirements that are related to their intended use, and they must be individually approved by SHEMD and
AEREB.
15.8.2 BIOLOGICAL SAFETY CABINETS
Laminar-flow biological safety cabinets shall have met minimum standards for cabinet classifications, as
stated in NSF pamphlet 49, for personnel, environmental, and product safety and shall be identified by a
distinctive NSF seal. Field recertification, performed by a competent technician and done according to the
procedures outlined in NSF standard 49, will be required once the cabinet(s) is installed. Cabinet
classification shall be determined during laboratory programming, in consultation with the users of the
facility. These types of cabinets have special design requirements depending on their intended use (such
as protecting personnel from harmful agents inside the cabinet; protecting the work product, experiment,
or procedure from contaminants outside the cabinet; or protecting the laboratory environment from
contaminants inside the cabinet) and must be individually approved by SHEMD and AEREB.
15.8.3 FLAMMABLE LIQUID STORAGE CABINETS,
Cabinets for the storage of Class I, Class n, and Class III A liquids shall be provided in accordance with the
design, construction, and storage capacity requirements stated in NFPA 30, Chapter 4. Venting of storage
cabinets is not required for fire protection purposes, but venting may be required to comply with local codes
or authorities having jurisdiction.
15-30
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
• If cabinet venting is required, the cabinet shall be vented to the outside as recommended by the unit
manufacturer and in a manner that will not compromise the specified performance of the cabinet The
cabinet shall be vented from the bottom with makeup air supplied at the top. Mechanical exhaust
ventilation should be provided at a rate of SO cfin and should comply with NFPA 91, standard for
Exhaust Systems for Air Conveying of Materials. Manifolding the vents of multiple storage cabinets
is not recommended.
• Nonvented cabinets shall be sealed with the bungs supplied with the cabinet or with bungs specified by
the manufacturer of the cabinet
15.8.4 LABORATORY SERVICE FITTINGS
Laboratory service fittings for each laboratory space are specified in the room data sheets and shall be
compatible with their intended use. All service valves, fittings, and accessories shall be of cast brass with
a minimum copper content of 85 percent except for items that are to be brass-forged or bar stock. All
service valves, fittings, and accessories shall be especially designed for laboratory use. All laboratory service
fittings shall have an acid-resisting and solvent-resisting clear plastic coating applied over a clean, polished,
chrome-plated surface. Service fittings at fume hoods shall have an acid-resistant and solvent-resistant
plastic coating applied over a fine sandblasted surface, properly cleaned.
15.9 Air Filtration and Exhaust Systems
15.9.1 DRY FILTRATION
Air-cleaning equipment for ductwork and for equipment installation shall be easily removable, serviceable,
and maintainable. Air-cleaning equipment shall have face velocities as recommended by the filter
manufacturer in order to achieve the specified efficiency at the lowest possible pressure drop. Filters shall
be constructed of noncombustible materials that meet the requirements of UL 900, Class I. Air filters shall
be located on the suction side of fans and coils and in other special locations as required for air treatment.
Air-filter pressure drop gauges of the diaphragm-actuated dial type (preferred) or the inclined manometer
type shall be located on all filter assemblies except small fen coils and fan-powered VAV terminal units.
The ASHRAE dust spot method shall be used in specifying the efficiencies required for medium-efficiency
filters. Filters shall be specified, and installed for use, as prefilters, medium-efficiency filters, or high-
efficiency filters. These filters shall comply with ARI 850. Prefilters are normally provided for high-
efficiency filters, being either prefilters or medium-efficiency filters depending on the upstream air particle
size distribution.
15.9.2 ABSOLUTE FILTRATION
Absolute filtration, where required in fume hood exhaust systems, will have an efficiency of 99.97 percent,
as determined by the dioctyl phthalate (DOP) aerosol test for absolute filters, and shall satisfy ASHRAE
standard 52-76. Filter housing shall be of bag-in/gas-out design.
15.9.2.1 TEST ACCESS
The design location shall facilitate in-place testing of HEP A filters, with particular attention given to
plenum hardware that allows the HEP A filter bank to be tested without requiring the testing personnel
to enter the plenum. Utility services shall be extended to the plenum location (e.g., electrical receptacles
and compressed air) to facilitate testing work. In-place testing design requirements shall meet all the
recommendations of UL 586 and ASME N510. HEPA filtration systems shall be designed with
prefilters installed upstream of HEPA filters to extend the HEPA filter's life. The installation of
prefilters may be omitted if an analysis of filtration requirements and consideration of the filter assembly
justify omission.
15-31
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
15.9.2.2 FIRE PROTECTION OF HEPA FILTER ASSEMBLIES
15-32
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines ; . February 1998
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
In providing fire protection for the HEP A filters, the design shall sufficiently separate prefilters or fire
screens equipped with water spray from the HEP A filters in order to restrict impingement of moisture
on the HEP A filters. Under conditions of limited separation, moisture eliminators or other means of
reducing entrained moisture shall be provided. Moisture eliminators may be omitted where system
design provides sufficient filter redundancy to ensure continued effluent filtration in the event of fire
within any portion of the system. The HEP A filter fire protection system shall be activated in a manner
consistent with the fire protection system in the room or building in which the filters are located.
15.9.3 AIR-CLEANING DEVICES FOR SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
Filters include dry-type dust collectors, wet collectors, centrifugal collectors, absorbers, oxidizers, and
chemical treatment filters, which are used primarily in industrial and process-type applications associated
with air or gases that have heavy dust loadings in exhaust systems or stack gas effluents. Filters shall be
designed according to the requirements given in the project criteria, the ASHRAE Handbook ofHVAC
Systems and Equipment and ACGHVs Industrial Ventilation.
15.9.4 OPERATION
All building systems shall be designed for continuous operation, unless otherwise specified in the project
criteria.
15.9.5 MAINTENANCE ACCESS
The air supply and exhaust plenums shall be designed so that such elements as motors, bearings, control
valves, and steam traps are easily accessible for maintenance.
15.9.6 LOCATION OF AIR INTAKE
The outside air intake(s) shall be located to provide the cleanest possible source of fresh air for the building
and shall be so placed, relative to the building's exhausts, vent stacks, etc., as to prevent entrainment of
contaminated air from outside sources, including, but not limited to, fume hood exhaust, vehicle exhaust,
exhaust from adjacent structures, and sources of potential microbial contamination, such as vegetation,
organic matter, and bird and animal droppings.
15.9.7 VENTILATION RATES
Ventilation devices, in general, shall be those recommended in ASHRAE standard 62-1989 and Section 1
of Indoor Air Quality Requirements: Design Process. At a minimum, Table 15.9.7, Special Ventilation
Rates, shall be taken into account in the design of the system.
Table 15.9.7 Special Ventilation Rates
Area Ventilation Requirements
Laboratories A minimum of 8 air changes per hour, single-pass air, per
ASHRAE 62-1989 and this Manual, subsection 15.5.11.
Offices and administrative As required for human comfort but with a minimum of 20 cfm of outside
spaces air per occupant as stated in ASHRAE 62-1989.
Chemical storage Must meet NFPA 30 or NFPA 45 requirements, depending on use.
Minimum of 6 to 10 air changes per hour, single pass only.
Smoking rooms Air supply from smoking rooms shall not be recirculated. Air should
be exhausted to outside by separate ductwork and exhaust fan.
Minimum of 60 cfm of outside air per person, per ASHRAE 62-1989.
15.9.8 ROOM AIR CHANGE RATES
EPA experience generally shows that the existing policy, which calls for a minimum of eight air changes
per hour, provides sufficient dilution to manage background levels of toxic substances and is acceptable in
terms of chemical analysis operations, odor control, comfort, and provision of 20 cfm of outside air per
15-33
-------
, Architecture, Engineering,
February 199B and Planning Guidelines
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
person. Air change rates may have to be greater to provide heat control or to provide adequate ventilation
for exhausting toxic or noxious materials.
15.9.9 PLUME STUDY (LABORATORY EXHAUST)
A study of prevailing wind patterns shall be obtained for the proposed building site. The study shall be
performed to ensure proper design height of the laboratory exhaust stack(s) and of fresh-air intake locations.
Stack design shall consider all elements of the site, including ground-level landscaping, large variations in
terrain, complex groupings of adjacent buildings, height and massing of building(s) (taking into account
exterior details), complex emission geometry, orientation to prevailing winds, nature of discharge particles,
and volume of discharge. On the basis of the results of this study, the design professional can recommend
optimum building orientation on the site and incorporate structural details that minimize effects on the
dispersion of exhaust emissions.
15.10 Plumbing
15.10.1 PIPING
These criteria apply to plumbing systems (fixtures, supply, drain, waste and vent piping, service water
heating system, safety devices, and appurtenances) inside the building and up to 5 feet beyond the building
exterior wall. For new systems, domestic water shall be supplied by a separate service line and not by a
combined fire protection and potable-water service or a combined process water and potable-water system
within the building. Plumbing shall comply with the National Standard Plumbing Code (NSPC) (or another
locally adopted, nationally recognized plumbing code), the ASHRAE handbooks, and ASHRAE standard
90.
15.10.1.1 SUPPLY
Type K copper tubing shall be used below grade. Type L copper tubing shall be used above grade.
Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC) and polybutylene (PB) plastic pipe and tubing may be used in
lieu of copper tubing above grade where not subject to impact damage or otherwise prohibited by the
project criteria.
• Fittings for Type K tubing shall be flared brass, solder-type bronze or wrought copper. Fittings for
Type L tubing shall be solder-type bronze or wrought copper. Fittings for plastic pipe and tubing
shall be solvent-cemented or shall use Schedule 80 threaded. No lead solder shall be used for copper
pipe in potable-water systems.
• Stop valves shall be provided at each fixture. Accessible shutoff valves shall be provided at branches
serving floors, fixture batteries for isolation, or at risers serving multiple floors. Shutoff valves also
shall be provided to isolate equipment, valves, and appurtenances for ease of maintenance.
• Accessible drain valves shall be provided to drain the entire system. Manual air vents shall be
provided at high points in the system.
• Provision for expansion shall be made where thermal expansion and contraction cause piping
systems to move. This movement shall be accommodated by using the inherent flexibility of the
piping system as laid out, by loops, by manufactured expansion joints, or by couplings.
• Accessible manufactured water hammer arresters shall be provided. Dielectric connections shall be
made between ferrous and nonferrous metallic pipe.
• Where domestic water or fire protection service lines enter buildings, suitable flexibility shall be
• provided to protect against differential settlement or seismic activity, in accordance with the NSPC
and NFPA 13, respectively.
15-34
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
15.10.1.2 DRAIN, WASTE, AND VENT LINES
Underground lines that do not service the laboratory areas shall be service-weight cast-iron soil pipe
hub-type (with gasket); hubless cast-iron soil pipe may be used in locations where piping is accessible.
Aboveground (above grade) lines that are l'/4 inches in diameter and larger shall be either hubless or
hub-type (with gasket) service-weight cast-iron pipe. Lines that are 1V4 inches through 6 inches in
diameter may be acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene (ABS) or PVC plastic pipe where allowed by the project
criteria. Pipe and fittings shall be joined by solvent cement or elastomeric seals. Lines that are less than
l'/j inches in diameter shall be either (1) Type L copper with solder-type bronze fittings or wrought
copper fittings or (2) galvanized steel with galvanized malleable iron recessed threaded and coupled
fittings. Cast-iron soil pipe fittings and connections shall comply with Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
(CISPI) guidelines. Provisions for expansion shall be included, as above. Underground lines servicing
the laboratory area shall be acid-resistant sewer pipe ANSI/ASTM D-2146-69; polyethylene plastic pipe
and fittings, Schedule 40, ASTMD-1785; poly (vinyl chloride) (PVC) plastic pipe, Schedule 40,80, and
120, ASTMD-2241; poly (vinyl chloride) (PVC) plastic pipe (SDR-PR), ASTM D-2683; or socket-type
polyethylene fittings for outside diameter-controlled polyethylene pipe. They shall be welded together
following ANSI/American Welding Society (AWS) D1.1, structural welding code; ASTM D-2241; and
ASTM D-28S5. Solvent-cemented joints with poly (vinyl chloride) (PVC) pipe and finings shall be
made.
15.10.1.3 TRAP SEAL PROTECTION
A trap primer valve and floor/funnel drain with trap primer valve discharge connections shall be used
where there is the possibility of loss of the seal in floor/funnel drain traps.
15.KU.4 STERILIZATION
New supply systems or existing supply systems that have undergone rehabilitation will require
sterilization in accordance with American Water Works Association (AWWA) C652, AWWA C5186,
or the local governing plumbing code.
15.10.1.5 MISCELLANEOUS
Access panels shall be provided where maintenance or replacement of equipment, valves, or other
devices is necessary. Escutcheons shall be provided at wall, ceiling, and floor penetrations of piping in
occupied areas.
15.10.2 PLUMBING FIXTURES
Fixtures and appurtenances suitable for use by handicapped persons shall comply with the Americans with
Disabilities Act (ADA). Fixtures shall contain no lead. Self-contained mechanically refrigerated coolers
shall be provided wherever a need for drinking fountains exists. Ratings shall be based on ARI 1010.
Electrical equipment shall be UL listed.
15.10.3 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
Backflow preventers of the reduced-pressure-zone type shall be provided on any domestic water and fire
protection lines serving the building. All domestic water lines shall be provided with water hammer
suppressors and vacuum breakers at high points of supply lines or at the fixture.
15.10.4 SAFETY DEVICES
Tempering valves shall be of the fail-safe pressure-balance type. Hot-water generation equipment shall be
provided with ASME code-stamped tanks, when of sufficient capacity, water temperature, or hot input rate
to be within the jurisdiction of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Approved pressure-relief
devices—combination temperature-pr --
-------
Architecture, Engineering,'
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
15.10.4.1 PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVES
Pressure-reducing valves shall be provided where service pressure at fixtures or devices exceeds the
normal operating range recommended by the manufacturer. Wherever a pressure-reducing valve's
failure may cause equipment damage or unsafe conditions, a pressure-relief valve shall be provided
downstream of the reducing valve.
15.10.5 EMERGENCY EYEWASH UNITS
Emergency eyewash units or combination eyewash/safety-shower units shall be provided in all work areas
where, during routine operations or during foreseeable emergencies, the eyes of an individual may come into
contact with a substance that can cause corrosion, severe irritation, or permanent tissue damage, or that is
toxic by absorption. Eyewash units shall be designed to flush both eyes (double-headed unit) simultaneously
and to provide hands-free operation. Units shall be placed in a location away from potential sources of
hazard (e.g., fume hoods) and near the exit door. The eyewash units chosen should provide protection of
the nozzle area with pop-off covers, and other protective features to prevent contamination of the flushing
system. Design, operation, flow, water temperature, and similar characteristics shall meet the criteria in
ANSI Z358.1-1990. Water for the units shall be supplied by the potable-water system. Eyewash units shall
be in accessible locations that require no more than 10 seconds to reach; units should be no more than 50
feet travel distance from the potential hazard. Their location in all laboratory spaces shall be standardized
as much as possible. The location shall be well lighted and shall be clearly identified with a highly visible
sign. Final location shall be approved by the EPA project officer during the design phase.
15.10.6 EMERGENCY SAFETY SHOWERS
Emergency safety shower units shall be provided in areas where, during routine operations or during
foreseeable emergencies, areas of the body may come into contact with a substance that is corrosive, severely
irritating to the skin, or toxic by skin absorption. Each safety shower unit shall be equipped with an
installed flexible hand-held drench hose with a spray head like that used in hand-held eyewash units; this
shall be mounted on a rack. All piping for the emergency safety showers shall be above the ceiling except
for the shower head and the pull bar connection. Design, operation, flow rates, and similar characteristics
shall meet the criteria in ANSI Z358.1-1990. Water for shower units shall be supplied by the potable-water
system. Rigid pull bars of stainless steel should be used to activate the shower and should extend to within
54 inches of the floor. The floor area of the emergency safety shower shall be textured, well lighted,
identified with a highly visible sign, and maintained tree of items that obstruct its use. A water flow alarm
shall sound when the safety shower is activated. Location of safety showers shall be standardized as much
as possible. Emergency safety showers in laboratories shall be located at the room entrance on the right-
hand side of the exit door (hinge side); instrument laboratories and laboratory support spaces shall have
showers located in the corridor at the pull side of the room door.
15.10.7 GLASSWARE WASHING SINKS
Sinks dedicated to the purpose of washing laboratory glassware shall have a high or telescoping spigot with
a swing-type gooseneck to accommodate large pieces of glassware. Large sinks shall be provided with a
hand-held sprayer whose weight is supported for ease of operation. All glassware washing sinks shall be
ventilated at a rate of 280 to 300 dm with an exhaust air duct connection at the top of the sink below the
bench top.
15.10.8 COMPRESSED-AIR SYSTEMS
When compressed-air systems are required, these systems should have oil and water traps, a dryer, and all
controls. Unless otherwise specified in the project criteria, each compressed-air system shall have duplex
compressors (one redundant) with an automatic lead/lag switch and a single compressor tank. Compressed-
air systems for processes shall be completely independent of the compressed-air system for the HVAC
controls. The compressed-air system shall provide a water trap and pressure regulation at each laboratory.
An audible alarm and remote annunciation shall be provided to alert personnel to a loss of air pressure. Air
compressors shall use vibration pads and springs, as needed, to substantially diminish vibration and sound
15-36
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
generated by compressors. Further, compressor location should minimize transmission of vibration and
sound to the building or rooms that the compressors service.
15.10.9 VACUUM SYSTEMS
When a laboratory vacuum system is required, it shall be composed of several vacuum pumps capable of
evacuating air at a regulated suction of 25 inches of mercury or as specified in the project criteria. Storage
volume and number of pumps shall be determined at the design stage as needed to meet laboratory
benchwork requirements. Unless otherwise specified in the project criteria, each vacuum system shall have
duplex pumps, an automatic lead/lag switch, and a single tank. An audible alarm and remote annunciation
shall be provided to alert personnel to a loss of vacuum. Vacuum pumps shall use vibration pads and
springs, as needed, to substantially diminish vibration and sound generated by the pumps. Further, pump
location should minimize transmission of vibration and sound to the building or rooms that the pumps
service.
15.10.10 CENTRALIZED LABORATORY WATER SYSTEMS
The following requirements apply to laboratory water systems.
15.10.10.1 DEIONIZED WATER (DI) SYSTEM
Unless otherwise specified in the project criteria, the central deionized water system shall have a
resistivity of greater than 10 megaohms at the tap in each laboratory. Water quality shall conform to
ASTM Type I requirements for reagent-quality water and to American Pharmaceutical Association
(APhA) requirements for water used in microbiological testing. Type I water is typically prepared by
distilling feed water that has a maximum conductivity of 20 megaohms per cm (at 25 °C), then polishing
it with mixed-bed deionizers and passing it through a 0.2-micron membrane filter. Pipes and fittings
for the Dl system shall be polyvmylidine fluoride (PVDF) schedule 80 or unpigmented polypropylene.
A bypass or drain legs shall be provided at the lowest points in the piping system to avoid stagnation of
water at the branch pipes during extended periods of non-use.
15.10.10.2 HOT AND COLD WATER, POTABLE
(Refer also to subsection 15.10.1.1.) The laboratory potable-water supply shall be piped in Type K or
Type L copper. Only potable water shall be used for emergency eyewash units and emergency showers.
15.10.10.3 INDUSTRIAL HOT AND COLD WATER, NONPOTABLE
The laboratory nonpotable-water supply, identified as industrial hot/cold water, shall be piped in Type
K or Type L copper. Approved backflow prevention devices shall isolate the laboratory nonpotable water
system from the potable-water system. Hot-water supply shall be insulated, and hot water shall be
recirculated to conserve energy.
15.10.10.4 CULTURE WATER SYSTEM
Culture water system piping shall be of Schedule 80 unpigmented polypropylene and shall have no metal
in contact with the water. The holding tank shall be lined with unpigmented polypropylene. Transfer
pumps shall be of solid unpigmented polypropylene.
15.10.11 NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
Unless otherwise specified in the project criteria, each laboratory must have a natural gas distribution
system.
15.10.12 NONFLAMMABLE- AND FLAMMABLE-GAS SYSTEMS
Systems for flammable and nonflammable gas must meet the following requirements.
15-37
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
15.10.12.1 GENERAL.
Special gas services for flammable and nonflammable gases shall be provided to all laboratories
requiring their use. Gases shall be stored and piped in accordance with NFPA 45, Chapter 8, and shall
conform to Chapter 4, paragraphs 11 and 12, of the Safety Manual, as applicable.
• Gas cylinders for nonflammable gases, both in-use and standby, shall be manifolded from a remotely
located space that is central to the laboratory areas and served by and accessible from the main
storeroom or loading and receiving dock area. This space shall be designed and ventilated in
accordance with code requirements.
• Flammable-gas cylinders shall be provided at the point of use only and shall be housed in ventilated
cabinet enclosures with leak detection and alarm-monitoring devices.
15.10.12.2 DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
For all laboratories except metals analysis laboratories, a seamless-copper-piping gas-distribution system
for nonflammable gases shall be provided from the space identified in the previous subsection to all
designated laboratories. Ideally, the length of the gas distribution lines should not exceed 100 feet, to
avoid the necessity for pipe joints. If pipe joints are required due to line length, prior approval by EPA
is required. Each copper line of this system shall be placed inside a larger diameter PVC pipe and
vented to the outside of the building. Regulator valves and other auxiliary equipment required to furnish
gas at the required pressures shall be provided. Pipe sizes shall be coordinated to ensure proper velocity
of the gas from the cylinders^) to the point of application. The number and type of gas outlets in each
room are indicated in the room data sheets. Exact and final outlet location in each laboratory must be
approved by EPA during the design phase. The system design shall include a capability for individual
room cutoff.
15.10.12.3 DISTRIBUTION TO METALS LABORATORIES
For all laboratories used for metals analysis, a seamless-Teflon-piping gas-distribution system shall be
provided from the space identified in subsection 15.10.12.1. to all metals laboratories. The Teflon lines
shall be placed inside larger PVC pipes and vented to the outside of the building. Each Teflon line in
this system shall be equipped, at both ends, with regulator valves and other auxiliary equipment required
to furnish gas at required pressures. Gas-distribution systems other than Teflon may be utilized if
approved by EPA. Pipe sizes shall be coordinated to ensure proper velocity of the gas from the
cylinders) to the point of use.
15.10.12.4 PIPING EXIT CORRIDOR RESTRICTION
No piping from any of these systems shall be run above or in the exit corridors.
15.10.12.5 BOTTLE GAS SUPPLY
The bottle gas supply shall be provided with duty and standby sets with automatic changeover valves and
controls. For all gases, an indicator panel shall be installed close to the point of use in each of the
laboratories. Rooms may be clustered in the panel as long as the distance between the point of use and
the panel does not exceed 75 feet. See room data sheet requirements for the types, volumes, and other
design information.
• Multipoint gas analyzer and alarm system. When toxic or explosive gases are used in a confined
space, a multipoint gas analyzer and alarm system shall be provided to monitor concentration of the
gases within this space. This system shall consist of gas sensors/transmitters, wiring, and a
microprocessor-based monitoring-and-alarm control panel. The number and type of sensors/
transmitters shall depend on the specific application. Each sensor/transmitter shall transmit a
frequency signal proportional to the gas concentration and shall have a special amplifier to eliminate
the effects of radio frequency interferences. The control panel shall be capable of monitoring, and
providing an alarm on, different types of gases in different zones; the panel shall have an audible and
15-38
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines . February1998
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
a visible alarm. The control panel shall also have a factory-wired terminal strip to interface with the
energy management system for remote monitoring and alarms.
15.10.12.6 LIQUID NITROGEN AND LIQUID ARGON
Liquid nitrogen and liquid argon must be delivered to the point of use in liquid form. Insulation in the
delivery system must be sufficient to prevent evaporation losses of liquid nitrogen. The gas distribution
room for these two gases shall be as close as possible to the laboratory rooms where the gases are
used—preferably adjacent to them. This gas distribution room shall also be directly accessible from the
outside of the building without use of the laboratory corridors. One large tank for each gas shall be
provided; each tank shall be permanently fixed in the room. The tanks shall be outfitted with necessary
valves and controls, as required by the gas supplier.
15.10.12.7 TESTING AND PURGING
Before acceptance, the distribution system must be pressure tested and purged. The required level of
purity specified at the point of use shall be maintained at all points in the system during testing and
purging.
15.10.13 DRINKING FOUNTAINS
At least one drinking fountain shall be provided on each block of space so that no person will have to travel
more than 150 feet to reach it The water shall be chilled. The refrigeration coils shall not be assembled
using lead solder nor shall these coils contain lead as a lining. All drinking fountains and locations for
drinking fountains shall comply with ADA.
15.10.14 TOILETS, SINKS, AND LAVATORIES
Requirements are as follows.
15.10.14.1 GENERAL
Separate toilet facilities for men and women shall be provided. The facilities must be located so that
employees will not have to travel more than 150 feet to reach them. Unless otherwise specified by EPA,
each toilet room shall have a sufficient number of water closets, with a minimum of two for each men's
toilet room and a minimum of four for each women's toilet room, enclosed with modem stall partitions
and doors. Each men's toilet room should also have at least two urinals. The number of water closets
in each women's toilet room shall be no less than the sum of water closets plus urinals of the adjacent
men's toilet room. The toilet rooms' hot water should be set at 105°F, or as required by the project
criteria. Water closets and urinals shall not be visible when the toilet room entry door is open.
15.10.14.2 ACCESSORIES
Each main toilet room shall contain:
• A soap dispenser, shelf, and minor above the lavatory.
• A toilet paper dispenser in each water closet stall.
• A coat hook on the inside face of each water closet stall door and on the wall immediately inside the
door of the toilet room.
• At least one modem paper towel dispenser and waste receptacle for every two lavatories.
* A coin-operated sanitary napkin dispenser in women's toilet rooms.
• Ceramic tile or comparable wainscot from the floor to a minimum height of 4 feet 6 inches.
• A disposable-toilet-seat-cover dispenser.
• A convenience electrical outlet located adjacent to one mirror in each toilet room.
• A small covered container located inside each water closet partition enclosure in the women's toilet
room for the disposal of used sanitary napkins.
15-39
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
15.10.14.3 TOILET ROOM ACCESSIBILITY
All public toilet rooms shall be located along an accessible path of travel; must have accessible fixtures,
accessories, and doors and adequate maneuvering clearances; and shall meet UFAS and ADA
requirements.
15.10.14.4 DIMENSIONS
All toilet rooms designated for public access shall have one toilet stall that:
• Is 60 inches wide.
• Has a minimum depth of 56 inches when wall-mounted toilets are used or 59 inches when floor-
mounted sets are used
• Has a clear floor area.
• Has a door that is 32 inches wide and swings out.
• Has handrails on each side (front-transfer stall) or on the side and back (side-transfer stall).
Handrails shall be 33 to 36 inches high and parallel to the floor, shall be 1V4 to 1V4 inches in outside
diameter, shall have l'/i inches of clearance between rail and wall, and shall be fastened securely at
ends and center. Handrails shall have no sharp edges and must permit the continuous sliding of
hands.
* Has a water closet mounted at a height of 17 to 19 inches, measured from the floor to the top of the
seat. Hand-operated or automatic flush controls shall be mounted no higher than 44 inches above
the floor.
15.10.14.5 ALTERNATE DIMENSIONS
A toilet stall measuring 36 or 48 inches wide by 66 inches, but preferably 72 inches, deep may be
acceptable, as determined by EPA.
15.10.14.6 LAVATORY ACCESSIBILITY
Accessibility shall be in compliance with ADA. At least one lavatory shall be mounted with a clearance
of 29 inches from the floor to the top of the bottom of the apron. The height from the floor to the top
of the lavatory rim shall not exceed 34 inches. Faucets shall be lever operated, push type, or
electronically activated for one-hand operation without the need for tight pinching or grasping. Drain
pipes and hot-water pipes under a lavatory must be covered, insulated, or recessed far enough so that
individuals in wheelchairs who are without sensation will not burn themselves.
15.10.14.7 ACCESSIBLE MIRRORS, URINALS, AND ACCESSORIES
Accessibility shall be in compliance with ADA. One mirror with shelf shall be provided above the
lavatory at as low a height as possible and no higher than 40 inches above the floor, measured from the
top of the shelf and the bottom of the mirror. A common mirror provided for both the able and the
disabled must provide a convenient view for both. Toilet rooms for men shall have wall-mounted urinals
with elongated lips, with the basin opening no more than 17 inches above the floor. Accessible floor-
mounted stall urinals with basins at the level of the floor are acceptable. The toilet room shall have at
least one towel rack, towel dispenser, and other dispensers and disposal units mounted no higher than
48 inches from the floor, or 54 inches if a person in a wheelchair has to approach it from the side.
15.10.14.8 TOILET SCHEDULE
The number of water closets, urinals, and lavatories shall comply with all state and local codes and with
project criteria. If a conflict exists between the project criteria and the state and local codes, the more
stringent shall apply unless otherwise directed by the contracting officer.
15-40
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
15.10.14.9 WATER-CONSERVING WATER CLOSETS, SINKS, AND LAVATORIES
Flow control devices shall be installed (unless otherwise dictated by the project criteria) on all water
closets, sinks, and lavatories. Devices shall limit water closet flow to 154 gallons per flush, public
lavatories to 1A gallon per minute, and regular lavatories lo\lA gallons per minute.
15.10.15 SHOWER STALLS
Shower stalls shall be of fiberglass construction, complete with door, soap ledge, shower head, separate hot-
and cold-water knobs, non-skid floor finish, and standard 2-inch floor drain. Shower stalls shall also
provide a small change area with lockers. Emergency shower deluge heads shall not be used in regular
shower stalls. For more information about emergency showers see subsection 15.10.6. Accessibility shall
be in compliance with ADA.
15.10.16 HOSE BIBBS
Three-quarter-inch hose bibbs should be provided on exterior walls of the building(s), 30 inches above
grade. At least one hose bibb shall be installed on each wall. When an exterior wall exceeds 75 feet in
length, additional bibbs shall be installed so that distance between bibbs does not exceed 75 feet Depending
on the geographical location of the facility, the design professional shall use freeze-proof hose bibbs.
15.11 Nonsanitary Laboratory Waste
All nonsanitary wastewaters from the laboratories are required to pass through an acid neutralization system
prior to discharge into the local publicly owned treatment works. The system shall be designed and
constructed in accordance with EPA standards for wastewater neutralization. The system shall have the
capability of continuous pH flow monitoring and recording. The recorders shall be located in the office of
the facility engineer, or in another suitable area. Sampling capability is required to allow for routine
monitoring of facility wastewater effluent
15.12 Codes and Standards
In addition to the references presented earlier in this section, the codes and standards of the organizations
listed in Table 15.12, Codes and Standards, shall apply to all mechanical and plumbing systems, equipment,
and piping, whether or not they are specifically listed in Section 15, Mechanical Requirements, of this
Manual. In the event of conflict between the codes and standards of the listed organizations and other codes
and standards that may be listed elsewhere in this document, the most stringent shall govern.
15-41
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
Table 15.12 Codes and Standards
AABC Associated Air Balance Council
ACGIH American Conference of Government industrial Hygienists
ADC Air Diffusion Council
AGA American Gas Association
AMCA Air Movement and Control Association
ANSI American National Standards Institute
ARI Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
AWWA American Water Works Association
CGA Compressed Gas Association
NEC National Electrical Code
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
NSC National Safety Code
N5F National Sanitation Foundation
OIL) Owners Insurance Underwriters
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air-Conditioning Contractors National Association
UBCC Uniform Building Code Congress
UL Underwriters Laboratories
Other federal, state, and local authorities having jurisdiction. '
15.13 Testing, Balancing, and Commissioning
15.13.1 INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR
An independent air balance and testing agency that specializes in the balancing and testing of HVAC
systems shall be used to balance, adjust, and test air-moving equipment and the air distribution system,
water system, gas system, and compressed air-piping systems.
15.13.2 CONTRACTOR CREDENTIALS
The independent contractor shall be an organization (1) whose specialty is testing and balancing
environmental systems, (2) that is a member of the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) and the
National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB), and (3) that has satisfactorily balanced at least three
systems whose type and size are comparable to those of this project.
15.13.3 CONTRACTOR REGISTRATION
The independent testing and balancing contractor shall be registered in the state in which the project is
located.
15.13.4 SCOPE OF WORK
The testing and balancing work shall include, but shall not necessarily be limited to, the following items:
• All air-conditioning supply and return systems
* Air exhaust systems
• Hood supply and exhaust systems (including certification and performance testing)
* All hydronic systems
* Gas and compressed-air systems.
15-42
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
February 1998
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
15.13.5 TESTING AND BALANCING DEVICES
HVAC air and water distribution systems shall be provided with permanently installed calibrated testing
and balancing devices and with access, as needed, to accurately measure and adjust water flows, pressures,
or temperatures as required. At a minimum, the balancing devices in Table 15.13.5.1, Required Balancing
Devices for Water and Steam Distribution Systems, and Table 15.13.5.2, Required Balancing Devices for
Air Distribution Systems, shall be provided. Test devices shall be located and installed according to AABC
Volume A-82.
Table 15.13.5.1 Required Balancing Devices for Water and Steam Distribution Systems
System Components (Water) Required System Devices
Pump suction and discharge piping
Pump discharge piping
Chiller evaporator water suction and discharge
piping •
Boiler or heat exchanger suction and discharge
piping
Heating or cooling coil (air-handling unit [AHU])
suction and discharge piping
Heating or cooling coil (AHU) discharge piping
Reheat coil, fan coil unit, unit heater, ports, and
finned tube radiation, convector (1) discharge
piping
(2) suction piping
Three-way control valves (each port) suction and
discharge piping
Boiler discharge piping
Manifold pressure gauge with pressure taps
Flow-measuring device (type depending on accuracy
required) or inlet and discharge pressure gauges
Thermometer/test well; pressure gauge and
gaugecock
Same devices as required for chiller evaporator
piping
Thermometer/test well; pressure gauge/pressure tap
Presettable calibrated balancing valve with integral
pressure test ports
Presettable calibrated balancing valve with integral
pressure test ports; temperature test; and pressure
tap
Pressure tap
Flow-measuring device (orifice or venturi type)
Table 15.13.5.2 Required Balancing Devices for Air Distribution Systems
System Components
Required System Device
Diffusers, grilles, registers
Branch ductwork runs
Fan discharge ductwork
Fan suction ductwork
Cooling coil suction and discharge airstreams
Heating coil suction and discharge airstreams
Mixed-air plenum airstream
Round butterfly or square/rectangular opposed-blade
volume damper, either integral with device or in spin-in
takeoffs
Rectangular/square or round (with more than one
opposed-blade damper and terminal device). Sealed
test hole for pilot tube traverse
Sealed test holes for pitot tube traverse. Sealed test
hole for static pressure measurements
Sealed test hole for static pressure measurement
Duct-mounted airstream thermometer
Duct-mounted airstream thermometer
Duct-mounted airstream thermometer
15-43^
-------
February 1998
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
15.13.6 MECHANICAL SYSTEM COMMISSIONING
Before acceptance for occupancy and Government assumption of operating responsibilities for the facility,
the lessor/contractor shall conduct commissioning of all mechanical and associated building systems. The
lessor/contractor shall record all system operation verifications and submit a statement that all systems
operations have been observed and that all systems meet the intent of the design and are operating properly.
15.13.7 REPORTING
The testing and balancing contractor approved by the contracting officer shall, at the completion of the
balancing work, submit a complete report to EPA for approval. The report shall be delivered at least 15 days
prior to final inspection of the building.
15.14 Ductwork
15.14.1 GENERAL
The Contractor shall provide all ductwork, including that required for air supply and exhaust return of
laboratory fume hoods and equipment. Ductwork systems shall be designed for efficient distribution of air
to and from the conditioned spaces; noise, available space, maintenance, air quality, air quantity, and
optimum balance between expenditure of fan energy (annual operating cost) and duct size (initial
investment) shall also be considered.
15.14.2 FABRICATION
Ductwork for air supply, return air, and general exhaust shall be fabricated of galvanized sheet metal.
Laboratory fume hood and equipment exhaust shall be of P VC-coated galvanized sheet metal or of Type 316
welded stainless steel, depending on the specific laboratory function and type of process being exhausted.
Polypropylene and glass duct material shall be considered for highly corrosive exhaust applications.
Construction of exhaust ductwork for laboratories with fume hoods shall conform to the requirements of
ANSI/AHA Z9.5-1992.
15.14.2.1 COMPLIANCE
Ductwork systems shall be designed to meet the leakage rate requirements of the SMACNAHVACAir
Duct Leakage Test Manual. Ductwork, accessories, and support systems shall be designed to comply
with the following:
ACGIH Industrial Ventilation Manual
ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals
NFPA 45 Fire Protection for Laboratories Using Chemicals
NFPA 90 A Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
NFPA 91 Installation of Exhaust Systems for Air Conveying of Materials
NFPA % Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations
SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible
SMACNA Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards
SMACNA Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards
SMACNA HVAC Duct Design Manual.
15.14.2.2 SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
Ductwork shall also meet the following requirements.
• Ductwork shall be designed to comply with NFPA 90 A. This includes specifications and installation
of smoke and fire dampers at rated wall penetrations and smoke pressurization/contairunent dampers
as required for smoke pressurization/evacuation systems. Fire dampers shall not be used on the
exhaust system ducting if the system must maintain confinement of hazardous materials during and
after a fire.
15-44
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines ' February 1998
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
• Ductwork shall be designed to resist corrosive contaminants if any arc present. Exhaust ductwork
from laboratory fume hoods shall not be of spiral construction and shall be sloped toward the fume
hood for drainage of condensation. Laboratory ductwork shall be in accordance with the
requirements of NFPA 45.
• Ductwork that handles moisture-laden air that is exhausted from areas such as shower rooms,
dishwashing areas, and other areas where condensation may occur on the duct interior shall be of
aluminum construction, have welded joints and seams, and provide drainage at low points.
• Penetrations of ductwork through security barriers shall be minimized. Any such penetrations that
are more than % square inches in area and 6 inches in smallest dimension must be provided with
a penetration delay equal to that required for the security barrier. The physical attributes, intended
service of the ductwork, and the axial configuration of the barrier penetration shall be considered in
the design of the penetration delay.
15.14.3 ACCESS PANELS
All ductwork shall have an access panel that provides access to each operating part, including:
• Splitter dampers
• Manual volume dampers
* Motorized volume damper
• Fire dampers.
15.14.4 INSULATION
All supply air ductwork shall be insulated with a vapor barrier unless otherwise dictated by the project
criteria. Supply air ductwork installed below ceilings and in conditioned spaces may not require insulation
if the surrounding air has a low dew point and condensation will not occur. Return and exhaust air
ductwork may be insulated where condensation may occur when air is routed through nonconditioned areas.
15.14.5 FIRE DAMPERS
Fire dampers shall be provided in accordance with codes, except in the exhaust systems of laboratory areas.
15.15 Fire Protection
15.15.1 GENERAL
The decision to install sprinkler protection in the facility shall Debased on NFPA 101, NFPA 45, the Safety
Manual, state and local codes, and the project criteria, whichever is most stringent. All sprinkler systems
shall comply with NFPA 13 and be approved by Factory Mutual or another nationally recognized insurance
company. Special protection systems may be used to extinguish or control fire in easily ignited, fast-burning
substances such as flammable liquids, some gases, and some chemicals. Such protection systems shall also
be used to protect ordinary combustibles in certain high-value occupancies that are especially susceptible
to damage. Special protection systems supplement automatic sprinklers as described by NFPA and shall
not be used as a substitute for them except where water is not available for sprinkler protection. Halon
systems shall not be used unless directed by the project criteria.
15.15.2 WATER SUPPLIES
Except as noted below, every building shall be provided, at a minimum, with a water supply that is available
for use by fire department mobile pumping apparatus. The water supply shall normally be provided by fire
hydrants suitable for firefighting apparatus and located within 5 feet of paved roadways. The hydrants shall
be supplied from a dependable public or private water main system. Alternative water supplies shall be
developed in accordance with NFPA 1231. Other water supplies shall be available to buildings where fire
protection requires them. Fire protection water does not have to meet drinking water standards.
15-45
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 \ ) and Planning Guidelines
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
The water supply system shall provide ample water for each of the three types of fire protection water use:
outside fire department hose streams from hydrants, small and large hose streams from inside-building
standpipe or hose connections, and automatic sprinkler systems. The minimum requirements for each type
of water use shall not be cumulative or additive and are determined as described below.
15.15.2.1 FIRE DEPARTMENT HOSE STREAMS
The hose stream required shall be determined by using the needed fire flow calculation method outlined
in Section 300 of the Fire Suppression Rating Schedule of the Insurance Service Office. The needed fire
flow shall be based on the fire areas of the building, not on the entire area of the building. The fire flow
for the fire area requiring the greatest water flow shall be the needed fire flow for the building.
15.15.2.2 STANDPIPE HOSE STREAM
When standpipe systems are provided or required, the minimum water supply shall be in accordance
with NFPA14 and the local building code and shall be based on the number of standpipe risers provided
in the building or in each fire area.
15.15.2.3 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLERS
The minimum flow required to meet the needs of the automatic sprinkler system shall be determined by
hydraulic calculations as required for sprinkler system designs. The water supply requirements shall
include all sprinkler flow and required hose stream allowances outlined in NFPA 13.
15.15.3 SIZE AND ZONING
The sprinkler system main shall be sized to meet the fire flow and pressure requirements set by the local
authority. Fire pump(s) shall be provided, if needed, and shall be installed in a separate room along with
the sprinkler system main valves. Sprinkler system protection zones shall have the same boundaries as the
fire alarm system fire zones. Each sprinkler system protection zone shall be equipped with electrically
supervised control valves and water flow alarm switches connected to the fire alarm system.
15.15.4 SYSTEMS
Fire protection systems must meet the following requirements.
15.15.4.1 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER PROTECTION
Automatic sprinkler protection shall be provided in all new EPA facilities. All sprinkler systems shall
be hydraulically calculated in accordance with NFPA 13. All design documents, including the hydraulic
calculations, must be maintained at the building to facilitate future modifications of the sprinkler system.
Existing facilities shall be provided with sprinkler protection under the following circumstances:
' * In major modifications to existing laboratories that use chemicals, flammable liquids, or explosive
materials.
• Throughout all floors of any building where EPA occupancy is 75 feet high or higher. The height
shall be measured from the lowest point of fire department access to the floor level of the highest
occupiable story.
• Throughout occupancies exceeding the area or height limitations allowed by the local building code.
• In all areas below grade that meet the definition of "windowless" in local code.
• In all areas that contain a high-severity occupancy as defined by the General Services Administration
(GSA).
• Throughout windowless buildings, windowless floors ofbuildings, and windowless areas that exceed
the allowable limits of the local building code.
15-46
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
February 1998
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
• In cooling towers of combustible construction under the conditions described in subsection 15.5.5.
• In any location where the maximum fire potential of the occupancy exceeds the fire-resistance
capabilities of exposed live-load-bearing structural elements (e.g., when a flammable-liquids
operation is moved into a former office area).
• Throughout open-plan office space that has a fuel load in excess of 6 pounds per square foot.
• Throughout electronic equipment operation areas, including data storage areas. On/off type
sprinkler heads and sprinkler guards may be used to minimize water damage in these areas.
15.15.4.2 WET PIPE
Sprinkler systems shall normally be wet pipe. Hydraulic designs shall be performed for all systems.
15.15.4.3 DRY PIPE
In unheated areas or other areas subject to freezing temperatures, dry-pipe systems shall be provided.
Because of the time delays associated with the release of the air in the system, water demands for dry-
pipe systems shall be computed on the basis of areas 30 percent greater than those used to computer
demands for comparable wet-pipe systems. Where the unheated area is small, it may be cost-effective
to install an antifreeze system or a small dry-pipe system supplied from the wet-pipe system in the main
heated area.
15.15.4.4 PREACTION
A preaction system shall be used where it is particularly important to prevent the accidental discharge
of water. Need for a preaction system shall be determined on the basis of review by, and
recommendation of, a professional fire protection engineer. The detection system chosen to activate the
preaction valve shall have a high reliability and shall be equipment with a separate alarm/supervisory
signal to indicate status. The detection system must be designed to be more sensitive than the closed
sprinklers in the preaction system but should not be so sensitive as to cause false alarms and unnecessary
actuation of the preaction valve.
15.15.4.5 DELUGE
For extra hazard areas and specific hard-to-extinguish fuels such as explosives and pyrophoric metals,
a deluge system with open sprinkler heads may be used to wet down the entire protected area
simultaneously. Deluge systems shall comply with NFPA 13. If quick response is required, deluge
system piping may be primed with water. The nozzles must be provided with blow-off caps for water-
filled deluge systems.
15.15.4.6 SELF-RESTORING
Self-restoring sprinkler systems, such as the on/off multicycle system or systems using individual on/off
sprinkler heads, shall be considered where the water from sprinklers will become contaminated by
contact with room contents, where there is a concern about water damage, or where water supply or
storage volume is marginal.
15.15.4.7 QUICK RESPONSE
Quick-response sprinklers must be used in new installations except where prohibited. Other specialized
automatic sprinklers, such as large drop, early-suppression fast-response, or extended-coverage heads,
are acceptable for use in sprinkler systems. The use of specialized sprinklers is appropriate when a
higher level of protection is desired or an equivalent level of protection is necessary to compensate for
failure to meet other code requirements. Use of specialized sprinkler heads should be limited to
applications for which they have been specifically listed (e.g., UL, FM).
15-17
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
15.15.4.8 WATER SPRAY
Installation of water spray systems shall comply with NFPA IS.
15.15.4.9 CARBON DIOXIDE
Agent quantity requirements and installation procedures shall comply with NFPA 12.
15.15.4.10 DRY CHEMICAL
Systems shall comply with NFPA 17.
• Design requirements. Systems shall be designed in accordance with NFPA 17 and NFPA 96.
Discharge of dry chemical shall actuate a pressure switch connected to an alarm in the building fire
alarm system. Refer to Section 16, Electrical Requirements, of this Manual for fire alarm
requirements.
* Acceptance tests. Afierinstallation,aUmechamcalandelectricalequipmentshallbetestedtoensure
correct operation and function. When all necessary corrections have been made, a full discharge test
shall be conducted. Plastic or cotton bags shall be attached to each individual nozzle, and the system
activated. Cooking appliance nozzles must discharge at least 2 pounds of the agent, and duct or
plenum nozzles must discharge at least 5 pounds of the agent Preengineered systems that fail to
discharge these amounts will be considered unsatisfactory.
15.15.4.11 FOAM
Foam systems shall comply with NFPA 11, NFPA 11 A, NFPA 16, NFPA 16A, and NFPA 409.
15.15.4.12 STANDPIPES AND HOSE SYSTEMS
NFPA 45 requires the installation of standpipe and hose systems in all laboratory buildings that are two
or more stories above or below the grade level. Installation of standpipe systems shall comply with
NFPA 14.
15.15.4.13 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
Portable fire extinguishers shall comply with NFPA 10 except that halon extinguishers shall not be
placed in any EPA facility. See Section 10, Specialties, of this Manual for more information on portable
fire extinguishers.
15.15.4.14 HALON-1301 FIRE-EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS
Fire protection systems that contain halon-1301 (CFjBr, a halogenated hydrocarbon) shall not be used
in EPA facilities. Existing systems that use halon-1301 should be removed from service in accordance
with Title VI of the 1990 Clean Air Act Amendments. (The halon from the systems should have been
recovered by the end of fiscal year 1994.) The hardware may be left in place in anticipation of an
environmentally acceptable replacement. No new systems that use halon are to be installed in EPA
facilities. This policy applies to both fixed and portable systems. The halon recovered from systems
should be made available through the Halon Recycling Corporation (1-800-258*1283). Refer to list of
acceptable halon substitutes approved under significant new alternatives policy (SNAP) as of October 16,
1996 (published by EPA's Air and Radiation Stratospheric Protection Division).
15.15.4.15 GASEOUS FIRE-EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS
. While carbon dioxide systems are allowed in normally occupied spaces, it is recommended that their use
as a total flooding agent be limited to areas that are usually not occupied. Any carbon dioxide automatic
extinguishing system that is to be used in usually occupied space must be reviewed and approved by
AEREB and SHEMD and must meet the design requirements of NFPA 12 and 29 CFR §1910.162(0)5.
A number of clean-agent, gaseous fire-extinguishing systems are becoming available as an alternative
to halon and carbon dioxide systems. Among these are FM-200 and Inergen. Because of the unique
nature and limited approvals for these new systems, any design and installation shall be certified by a
15-48
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
licensed professional engineer as appropriate for the hazard to be protected against. The certification
must include a detailed analysis of the hazards to be protected against; any limitations on, or exclusions
of, hazardous chemicals that may be protected against by the design; and documentation to support the
design concentration of the agent. Any documentation of the design shall meet the requirements under
Flame Extinguishment of NFPA 2001. The installation of such a system shall meet the requirements
described below.
* Design requirements. Systems shall be designed in accordance with NFPA 2001 and other
applicable standards for the hazard to be protected against Discharge of a system shall actuate a
pressure switch or other device connected to initiate an alarm in the building fire alarm system.
Refer to Section 16, Electrical Requirements, of this Manual for fire alarm requirements.
• Acceptance tests. After iristallatiori, all mechanical and electrical ep,ujprnent shall be tested to ensure
correct operation and function. All approval or acceptance testing shall be performed in accordance
with Section 4-7 of NFPA 2001.
15.15.5 OPERATION
Operation and maintenance instructions and system layouts shall be posted at the control equipment. All
personnel who may be expected to inspect, test, maintain, or operate fire protection apparatus shall be
thoroughly trained and kept trained in the functions they are expected to perform.
15.15.6 CODES
In addition to meeting the code requirements mentioned in the above subsections, the design shall comply
with the requirements of the local authority that has jurisdiction over the project
END OF SECTION 15
15-49
-------
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines ; February 1998
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
16.1 General
16.1.1 CODE COMPLIANCE
All work done in this section shall comply with the applicable requirements of the most current edition of
the following codes and references:
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) codes and references
National Electrical Code (NEC) (NFPA 70)
Life Safety Code (NFPA 101)
National Fire Alarm Code (NFPA 72)
Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems (NFPA 90A)
Factory Mutual (FM) Engineering Loss Prevention Data Sheet 5-4, Transformers
Emergency and Standby Power Systems (NFPA 110)
Stored Electrical Energy Emergency and Standby Power Systems (NFPA 111)
Lightning Protection Systems (NFPA 780)
29 CFR §§1910.303-305
Prudent Practices in the Laboratory: Handling and Disposal of Chemicals, National Research Council
Title m Standards for the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
Standards of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
National Electrical Safety Code (NESC)
Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCEA)
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) standards.
In addition, all work must comply with all applicable federal, state, city, and local codes, regulations,
ordinances, publications, and manuals. All newly manufactured equipment shall be listed by Underwriters
Laboratories Inc. (UL) or a similar testing laboratory acceptable to EPA. When codes conflict, the most
stringent standard shall govern.
16.1.2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
Electrical installations shall maintain the integrity of fire stopping, fire resistance, fire separation, smoke
control, zoning, and other structurally oriented fire safety features in accordance with NEC Article 300-21
and NFPA 101.
16.1.3 ENERGY CONSERVATION IN DESIGN
After careful study of the facility's requirements as well as of the day-to-day operation of its various
departments, the design professional shall design systems that meet facility operating requirements in an
energy-efficient manner. The health and safety aspects of the operation must retain first priority, however,
and cannot be relaxed or traded off for more efficient systems. System and lighting design shall comply
with the requirements of American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.
(ASHRAE) standard 90, the Facilities Management and Services Division (FMSD) Energy Conservation
Planning Handbook, EPA's Green Lights Program and Partner Supports Program, and any state or local
energy conservation codes or recommendations.
16.1.3.1 LOCAL ENERGY CONSERVATION PROGRAMS
The local utility company shall be contacted to investigate any energy conservation programs that they
may have in effect. The economic validity of pursuing these programs shall be presented to EPA in the
early design phase of the project, and if the programs are deemed viable, they shall be incorporated into
the design for the project.
16-1
-------
'Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
16.1.3.2 LOAD SHEDDING/PEAK SHAVING
The payback involved in introducing a load-shedding/peak-shaving system into the facility design shall
be investigated. If the payback is sufficient to warrant the initial capital expenditure and if approval is
obtained from EPA, this type of system shall be included in the design of the project If a generator is
involved in this system, careful consideration should be given to the rating of the generator and the type
of duty it will be subject to. Such factors as the various fuel sources, exhaust fume contribution to
outdoor air quality, local air quality standards, and energy-efficient generator equipment shall also be
considered.
16.1.3.3 DEMAND-SIDE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
A demand-side management system to keep the peak demand for the facility below a predetermined level
shall be investigated. An economic analysis shall be done to determine the payback on such a system
(if demand rates are already very low, this type of system may not be economically feasible).
16.1.4 COORDINATION OF WORK
A coordinated set of documents (i.e., coordination between architectural; electrical; heating, ventilation, and
air-conditioning [HVAC]); plumbing; equipment; and structural systems for bidding) shall be provided.
Documentation shall clearly identify the division of work among the trades and delineate the coordination
responsibilities of the contractor. Special attention shall be given to designed-in equipment and equipment
to be provided by the facility occupants.
16.1.4.1 CALCULATIONS
Short-circuit, load, and lighting calculations shall be provided early in the design phase.
16.1.5 POWER FACTORS
Electrical utilization equipment rated greater than 100 volts (V), as well as all lighting equipment, shall
have a power factor of not less than 85 percent under cated-load conditions. If the equipment to be used for
this project cannot be obtained with the above power factor, power factor correction devices shall be installed
to bring the building system power factor up to 85 percent All required devices shall be switched with the
utilization equipment unless doing so results in an unsafe condition.
16.1.6 HANDICAPPED ACCESSIBILITY REQUIREMENTS
The facility shall also comply with the electrical requirements of the Uniform Federal Accessibility
Standards (UFAS) (1984), adopted by the General Services Administration (GSA) in 41CFR Parts 101-
19.6, as well as with ADA and all state and local laws and standards for buildings and facilities that must
be accessible and usable by physically handicapped people. The most stringent of these codes shall apply.
16.1.7 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT STANDARDS
All specified materials and equipment shall be standard products of manufacturers that are regularly and
currently engaged in production of such items. Items that are obsolete or to be discontinued by the
manufacturer, as well as materials and equipment of an experimental nature (or products that would be
installed in a facility for the first time with this project), are not acceptable and will not be permitted. All
material and equipment shall be specification grade, new, free from defects, and high quality, and shall be
entirely suitable for these specific facilities.
16.1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Careful consideration shall be given in the design to the types of materials to be used for the project as they
relate to the environment in which they will be installed. Exterior equipment may be subject to different
types of corrosive atmospheres. Interior equipment in laboratories and testing and storage areas may also
be subject to corrosive conditions. All equipment and material shall be suitable for the environment in
which it will be installed. Noise mitigation shall be provided for equipment such as transformers and
generators.
16-2
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
16.2 Primary Distribution
16.2.1 DUCTBANKS AND CABLE
All primary cable shall be run underground in ductbanks for new building sites. For extension of, or
addition to, existing buildings where primary cabling will be used to extend an existing system to a new
substation, primary cabling may be run within the building provided that it is installed in a raceway system
(conduit) appropriate to the installation.
16.2.1.1 DUCTBANK ENCASEMENT
All underground ductbanks shall be concrete encased for primary circuits (600 volts and above) and
where secondary-service reliability is a prime consideration. Minimum duct size shall be 2 inches. A
minimum of 25 percent spare ducts (but not less than two spare ducts) shall be provided in each duct
run. Spare ducts shall be plugged or capped to prevent contamination. The locations where manholes
are to be included shall be investigated to ensure that they will drain properly. Ductbank runs shall be
located in the exterior utility corridors established in the master plans. Locations shall be carefully
coordinated with other site utilities in the corridor to avoid any conflicts. A 4-inch-wide yellow plastic
marker tape saying "Danger: Buried High Voltage Cable" shall be placed directly over the high voltage
line at no more than 6 inches below finished grade.
16.2.2 SWITCHES
When a new campus-type utility distribution system or an extension of an existing campus-type distribution
system is a part of the project, a loop system shall be considered. This system shall have sectionalizing
primary switches. Primary switches shall be of load break design. All switches shall be pad mounted.
Enclosures for switches shall be suitable to the environment in which the switches will be located. Where
switches are to be located indoors, they shall be physically isolated from any emergency electrical equipment
and shall be located in electrical rooms only.
16.2.3 OVERHEAD POWER SUPPLY LINES
Overhead power supply lines can be used only where service is to be installed in remote or unsettled areas,
industrial areas, or areas where underground service is not feasible. Maximum use shall be made of single-
pole structures. Overhead power supply lines may also be used for feeders to small single-phase loads or
buildings. Careful consideration shall be given to the location of overhead lines in relation to future land
use.
16.2.3.1 POWER AND COMMUNICATION POLES
Joint use of poles for power and communications distribution shall maintain safety standards and shall
limit electrical interference to communications services. In joint use of poles, either for multiple
electrical distribution systems or for both electrical distribution and communication lines, underbuilt
lines or cables shall be of vertical construction. Use of double-stacked cross run construction shall be
allowed only where proper clearances for hot-line maintenance work can be ensured. Clearances shall
comply with American National Standards Institute (ANSI) standard C2.
16.2.4 SYSTEM REDUNDANCY
A risk/benefit analysis should be performed to justify added capital costs for system redundancy.
16-3
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
16.3 Service Entrance
16.3.1 OVERHEAD SERVICES
Overhead services to buildings should not be used except in particular circumstances where underground
services are not feasible, and then only with approval of the EPA contracting officer's representative (COR).
Where electrical service to the building is by overhead lines, proper dip poles, weatherheads, and supports
shall be provided. Hie main service switch, panelboard, or switchboard shall be located immediately
adjacent to the entrance of feeders into the building. Code-required clearances shall be maintained under
all overhead lines. The openings necessary for bringing conductors into buildings shall be grouted or
otherwise fire-stopped.
16.3.2 UNDERGROUND SERVICES
To the greatest extent possible, public utility transformers shall be located outside of the actual building.
If public utility transformers must be located within buildings because of site constraints, they shall be
installed in standard transformer vaults conforming to the requirements of the NEC. These vaults shall not
be located adjacent to, or directly beneath, any exit from the building.
16.3.3 SERVICE CAPACITY
Incoming transformers must be provided, as required, and must be of sufficient capacity to accommodate
the full design load. In calculating the design load, a demand factor of 100 percent should be used for
lighting and fixed mechanical equipment loads and a demand factor of 75 percent for all other loads. The
incoming service shall have sufficient capacity to accommodate the full design load plus 30 percent
additional capacity for future growth.
16.3.4 METERING
Where medium voltage power is brought to the facility, electrical energy metering (kilowatt hour Pcwh])
shall be furnished at each substation of 500 kilovolt-ampere (kVa) or greater capacity. Demand metering
(kilowatt demand [kwd]) shall be furnished as required for load management. The economics of primary
metering and secondary metering for campus-type facilities shall also be investigated; the most cost-effective
method shall be used.
16.3.4.1 LOCAL UTILITY COMPANY
Coordination with the local utility company should be performed to determine points of utility metering
requirements. Single metering is preferred.
16.3.5 SERVICE ENTRANCE EQUIPMENT
Service entrance equipment shall consist of a main switch or switches, a main circuit breaker or circuit
breakers, or a main switchboard or panelboard. In determining whether the service entrance equipment
should be of the fused or circuit breaker type, careful consideration shall be given to the short-circuit current
available at various points in the proposed distribution system.
16.3.5.1 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
All service entrance equipment shall have copper busing. If the main service consists of a switchboard
or panelboard, it shall have at least 10 percent of the switchboard rating as spare breaker or switches and
20 percent of the rating as bused spaces. The electrical system shall be properly coordinated for selective
tripping in order to permit removal of only that portion of the system that has experienced a fault or
overload condition.
16.3.5.2 RENOVATION
If this project is a renovation or an extension of an existing building, the history of the loads shall be
carefully studied to ensure that the existing service entrance equipment has sufficient capacity to handle
the loads of the addition or renovation and has spare capacity for future loads.
16-4
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines ; February 1998
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
16.4 Interior Electrical Systems
16.4.1 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
Electrical systems shall be designed so that all components operate within their capacities for initial and
projected loads. Preferred standard voltages (per ANSI C84.1) shall be used, with a single voltage level
characteristic in any classification, in order to minimize stocks of spare equipment and to standardize
operating and maintenance practices and procedures. On-site acceptance testing shall be required for each
major electrical system. Tests shall be performed in the presence of EPA personnel. Copies of all test
results shall be submitted for approval. All receptacles, switches, and wiring devices shall be specification
grade. All safety switches shall be heavy duty. All equipment shall be new. Refer to subsection 16.13,
Service Entrance, for requirements for electrical components located in various environmental conditions.
16.4.2 SERVICE EQUIPMENT
All service entrance equipment shall be UL listed for use as service entrance equipment. All components
shall be factory wired for switchboards, panelboards, or unit substations before shipment. Service entrance
equipment shall be physically isolated from all emergency power systems so that a failure in either system
will not affect the operation of the other system. All service switchboards shall have factory-installed
ammeters and voltmeters.
16.4.3 CONDUCTORS
All conductors (wire and cable) shall be copper. All conductors for systems operating at 480 volts and below
shall have 600-volt insulation with distinctive markings, as required by UL, for identification in the field.
All conductors shall be continuous, without splices. All conductors operating at 600 volts and above shall
be insulated and shall have the appropriate voltage and insulation ratings as required by their location in
the system and in the facility. Branch circuit wiring shall not be smaller than No. 12 American Wire Gage
(AWG.) All conductors shall be color coded to identify each phase and the neutral. The grounding
conductor shall be green or bare.
16.4.4 RACEWAYS
All electrical wiring shall be installed in conduit or raceway or shall be otherwise physically protected in
accordance with the NEC. Conduit shall be at least V* inch. Conduits installed in stud partitions or above
lay-in ceilings may be electrical metallic tubing (EMT). Conduit concealed in floor slab or in concrete
masonry walls, or conduit run exposed 5.0 feet above finished floor, shall be of rigid galvanized steel.
Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit may be used underground to feed site lighting and site power circuits; the
remaining outdoor conduits shall be of PVC-coated rigid galvanized steel.
16.4.4.1 CONDUIT
Service entrance conduits shall be concrete-encased P VC or PVC-coated rigid galvanized steel. Rigid
galvanized steel conduit shall be used in hazardous areas, as described by the NEC, unless the
environment is corrosive to steel conduit, in which case PVC conduit may be used. Aluminum conduit
shall be used for high-frequency circuits, where steel will cause magnetic problems, or in atmospheres
in which steel conduit is unsuitable. Aluminum conduit shall not be used underground, encased in
concrete, or used in atmospheres that are corrosive to aluminum.
16.4.4.2 FLEXIBLE-METAL CONDUIT
Liquid-tight flexible-metal conduit shall be used for connections to meters, transformers, pumps, and
other equipment, as required by the NEC, where vibration or movement can be a problem and where
there is a need for protection from liquids, vapors, or solids.
16.4,4.3 RATED ASSEMBLIES
Raceways that penetrate fire-rated assemblies shall be noncombustible. Openings shall be sealed to
maintain the established fire ratings as defined by UL.
16-5
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
16.4.4.4 SURFACE METAL RACEWAYS
Surface metal raceways shall be used to provide receptacles with power and for low-potential sendees
(e.g., data, telecommunications, wiring) in the laboratories themselves. The design professional shall
review and make recommendations to EPA concerning the type of surface metal raceways appropriate
to the project. The design professional shall consider using single-compartment surface metal raceways
(2% inches high by VA inches deep, minimum size) where only power receptacles are required and
double-compartment surface metal raceways (43/i inches high by 2Vi inches deep, minipnmt size) where
both power receptacles and telecommunicadons/data outlets are required. Raceway covers shall be
precut to 12-inch sections. The raceway shall be divisible into two or three separate wiring components
to facilitate installation of power or low-potential wiring. The material and color of the raceway shall
be appropriate to the atmosphere in which the raceway will be installed.
16.4.4.5 PLENUMS, DUCTS, AND OTHER AIR-HANDLING SPACES
All wiring shall be in accordance with NEC Article 300, except that communication circuits (Article
800) and Class 2 and Class 3 circuits (Article 725) need not be run in conduit when conductors are of
materials that are classified by UL as having adequate fire-resistant and low smoke-producing
characteristics.
16.4.5 HARMONICS
The design of the electrical distribution system (both normal and emergency power) shall take into account
the effects that harmonics from nonlinear loads can produce on the system. Harmonics from nonlinear loads
can affect the capacities of the neutral conductor, panelboards, phase conductors, and emergency generators.
"K" rated transformers shall be used where the associated panelboards are feeding a large quantity of
nonlinear loads. Special attention shall be given to the harmonics produced by variable-speed and variable-
frequency drive units used for control of HVAC equipment
16.4.5.1 NEUTRAL CONDUCTOR
The neutral conductors of four-wire system feeders), directly serving nonlinear load shall be sized at
double the amperes of the phase conductors through the entire interior electrical distribution system.
The neutral conductors of 480/272-volt, four-wire feeders serving the lighting panels that control the
electronic ballast fluorescent fixtures shall be sized at double the wire size of the phase conductors.
16.4.6 DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT
The facility may have special requirements with respect to ground fault protection on the main switchboard
(such as two levels of ground fault). EPA shall be consulted concerning any special requirements above
those required by the NEC. Ground fault protection shall be used in all laboratory areas where personnel
are operating electrical equipment and are exposed to electrical shock hazards while operating the
equipment. Ground fault protection systems shall also be installed in areas where they are required by the
Safety Manual.
16.4.6.1 TRANSFORMERS
Transformers shall be located and installed in accordance with NEC Article 450 and in such a way as
to minimize the fire and contamination hazards to the EPA facility and its occupants. The following
requirements also apply:
• Whenever any public utility transformer or other equipment involves a dielectric fluid that is
combustible, toxic, or otherwise hazardous, it shall not be located inside an EPA facility.
• Utility transformer vaults or transformer locations abutting an EPA building shall conform to the
requirements of the NEC. Transformer equipment shall not be located adjacent to, or directly
beneath, any exit.
16-6
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines \ February 1998
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
• Transformers, fluorescent fixtures, and other electrical devices containing polychlorinatedbiphenyls
(PCBs) shall not be used in EPA facilities.
• All transformers located within an EPA building shall be dry-type only, unless they are located
within a transformer vault.
16.4.6.2 DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS
Dry-type transformers shall be provided with four 2.5 percent taps, two above and two below rated
primary voltage. All transformers shall be designed for continuous operation at not more than a 150
degrees Celsius (°C) temperature rise, above 40°C ambient. All transformers shall conform to the
design, temperature-rise, testing, and other requirements specified by the Acoustical Society of America
(ASA), NEMA, and IEEE standards and shall have a rated sound level of 45 decibels (dB) or below.
To ensure against objectionable levels of noise being transmitted through the building, the dry-type
transformers shall be mounted on approved vibration-eliminating mountings. Connection to
transformers shall be made with flexible steel conduit (Greenfield) with grounding jumper. All
transformers shall comply with the requirements of the Safety Manual. All dry-type transformers shall
be designed for nonlinear loads and shall be isolated-type transformers. They shall not be K-rated and
shall be shielded and located as close as possible to the load. The designer shall consider the use of
shielded isolation transformers or uninterruptible power supply (UPS) power for sensitive computer and
other electronic equipment loads.
16.4.6.3 OUTSIDE SUBSTATIONS AND TRANSFORMER INSTALLATIONS
In addition to the requirements above, outside substations and transformers shall meet the following
requirements:
* The installation of transformers should meet the most current requirements of Article 450 of the
NEC.
• Transformers insulated with a dielectric fluid identified as nonflammable shall be permitted to be
installed indoors or outdoors. If such transformers are installed indoors, they shall be within a
transformer vault and furnished with a liquid confinement area and a pressure relief vent. A
nonflammable dielectric fluid is one that does not have a flash point or fire point and is not
flammable in air.
16.4.6.4 PANELBOARDS AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Panelboards and circuit breakers must meet the following requirements.
16.4.6.4.1 COMPLIANCE
Panelboards shall comply with UL 67 and UL 50. Panelboards for use as service-disconnecting
means shall also conform to UL 869. Panelboards shall be equipped with a circuit breaker. Design
shall be such that any individual breaker can be removed without disturbing adjacent units and
without loosening or removing supplemental insulation supplied as a means of obtaining clearances
as required by UL. Where "space only" is indicated, provisions should be made for the future
installation of a breaker, which shall be sized as indicated. All panelboard locks included in the
project shall be keyed alike. All distribution panels serving fluorescent fixtures, laboratory room
distribution panels, and any other panels serving nonlinear load shall be UL listed and labeled for
nonlinear loads.
16.4.6.4.2 DIRECTORIES
Directories shall be provided to indicate the load served by each circuit. These directories shall be
typed and shall be mounted in a holder behind transparent protective covering. Bus board shall be
supported on bases independent of the circuit breakers. Main buses and back pans shall be designed
so that breakers may be changed without machining, drilling, or tapping. An isolated neutral bus
16-7
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February1998 arid Planning Guidelines
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
shall be provided in each panel for connection of circuit-neutral conductors. A separate ground bus
marked with a yellow stripe along its front and bonded to the steel cabinet shall be provided for
connecting grounding conductors. A separate ground bus marked with a green strip along its front
and isolated from the panel cabinet shall be provided for connecting isolated insulated ground wires.
16.4.6.4.3 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Circuit breakers shall comply with Federal Specification W-C 375 and shall be thermal magnetic
type with an interrupting capacity of 10,000 amperes symmetrical minimum. Breaker terminals
shall be UL listed as suitable for the type of conductor provided. Plug-in circuit breakers are not
acceptable. Common trip-type multiple breakers with a single operating handle shall be provided.
Breaker design shall be such that an overload in one pole automatically causes all poles to open.
Phase sequences should be maintained throughout each panel so that any adjacent breaker poles are
connected to phases A, B, and C, respectively. Circuit breakers should be provided with ground fault
interrupter (UL 1053 and the NEC). In addition, circuit breakers should be provided with a push-to-
test button, visible indication of tripped condition, and an ability to detect a current imbalance of
approximately 5 milliamperes.
16.4.6.4.4 SHUNT TRIP BREAKERS
Shunt trip breakers shall be provided in branch circuit panelboards, as designated by EPA, to remove
power to laboratory modules or other areas or equipment upon activation of fire protection systems
or devices in the immediate area.
16.4.6.5 LABORATORY MODULE
Each laboratory module shall be provided with a separate 120/208-volt, three-phase, four-wire
panelboard. The branch circuit system shall be as flexible as possible to accommodate any type of
laboratory alteration. In addition, each laboratory module shall be provided with emergency power from
an emergency power panelboard; the emergency power panelboard may serve more than one module.
The panelboard should be rated for nonlinear loads.
16.4.6.6 WIRE CLOSETS
Wire closets that leave passages between floors constitute shafts and shall be protected in accordance
with local building codes and the Safety Manual. In any case where wire closet ventilation arrangements
or other features cannot conform to the requirements for a shaft, all openings through the floor shall be
fire-stopped (grouted). In any building where smoke control systems are likely to be involved, such
additional fire stopping, or other methods to increase the smoke passage resistance of openings around
doors or through wire passes, shall be provided as necessary to meet the needed level of efficiency for
smoke control systems.
16.4.7 MOTOR CONTROLLERS AND DISCONNECTS
Motor controllers and starters shall be provided for all motors and equipment containing motors. All
controllers shall have thermal-overload protection in each phase. Magnetic-type motor controllers shall
have undervoltage protection when used with momentary-contact pushbutton stations or switches and shall
have undervoltage release when used with maintained-contact pushbutton stations or switches.
When used with a pressure, float, or similar automatic-type or maintained-contact switch, the controller
shall have a hand-off-automatic selector switch. Connections to the selector switch shall be such that only
the normal automatic regulatory-control devices will be bypassed when the switch is in the "hand" position.
All safety control devices, such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor-
overload protective devices, shall be connected in the motor circuit in both the "hand" and the "automatic"
positions. Control circuit connections to any hand-off-automatic selector switch or to more than one
automatic regulatory-control device shall be made in accordance with a manufacturer-approved wiring
diagram. The selector switch shall be capable of locking in any position.
16-8
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
For each motor that is not in sight of the controller, either the controlled disconnecting means shall be
capable of being locked in the open position or a manually operated, nonfused switch that will disconnect
the motor from the source of supply shall be placed within sight of the motor location.
Overload protective devices shall give adequate protection to the motor windings, shall be of the thermal
inverse-time-limit type, and shall include a manual-reset pushbutton on the outside of the motor controller
case. Hie cover of a combination motor controller and manual switch or circuit breaker shall be interlocked
with the operating handle of the switch or circuit breaker so that the cover cannot be opened unless the
handle of the switch or circuit breaker is in the off position. Variable-frequency drive units shall be
considered for larger HVAC equipment loads, and for other motor loads as feasible. See Section 15,
Mechanical Requirements, of this Manual for equipment to be used with variable-speed drives.
16.4.7.1 CONTROL EQUIPMENT
Control equipment shall comply with the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
Industrial Controls and Systems (ICS) standards and with UL 508. Single-phase motors may be
controlled directly by automatic control devices of adequate rating. Automatically controlled polyphase
motors and all polyphase motors rated greater than 1 horsepower (hp) shall have magnetic starters.
Control devices shall be of adequate voltage and shall have an adequate current rating for the duty to
be performed. Pilot control circuits shall operate with one side grounded and at no greater than 120
volts. Where control power transformers are required, they shall be located inside the associated motor
starter housing, shall be protected against faults and overload by properly sized overcurrent devices, and
shall be of sufficient capacity to serve all devices connected to them without overload. Reduced-voltage
starters shall be provided for larger motors to avoid an unacceptable voltage dip when the motors are
started.
16.4.7.2 SAFETY DISCONNECT SWITCHES
Safety disconnect switches shall be provided for all hard-wired electrically operated equipment and
motors in locations where they are required by code. Switches shall meet the requirements of Federal
Specification W-S 865c and NEMA Type HD. Enclosure shall be NEMA I for indoor use and NEMA
3R for exterior use. All safety switches shall be horsepower rated. The switches shall be of the quick-
make quick-break type, and all parts shall be mounted on insulating base to permit replacement of any
part from the front of the switch. All current-carrying parts shall be of higher rated load without
excessive heating. Contacts shall be plated to prevent corrosion and oxidation and to ensure suitable
conductivity.
16.4.7.2.1 GROUND FAULT PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT
With the exception of emergency systems, systems carrying 150 volts or greater to ground and not
exceeding 600 volts phase-to-phase shall be provided with ground fault protection for each service-
disconnecting means rated 1,000 amperes or more. Necessary precautions shall, however, be taken
to minimize the possibility of nuisance tripping. In addition, all buses or other conductors at motor
control centers, switchgear, switchboards, and busways shall be insulated or isolated.
16.4.7.2.2 GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER PROTECTION FOR PERSONNEL
At a minimum, ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) protection shall be provided for all 125-volt,
single-phase, 15- and 20-ampere receptacles located outdoors; elevator electrical systems; as required
by NEC Article 620 and the National Research Council's Prudent Practices; and receptacles
installed on roofs. GFCI protection shall also be required in the following circumstances:
• In any location where EPA personnel are operating electrical equipment in direct contact with
water or other liquids or where electrical receptacles are installed within 6 feet of a sink provided
with a plumbed water supply or a drain, tub, or other water source.
* If GFCI protection is prescribed for electrical equipment by the equipment's manufacturer.
16-9
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
• If previous experience indicates a need for GFCI protection.
This protection shall be provided in new and existing construction by means of interrupter devices
incorporated in receptacles or circuit breakers. These GFCI receptacles may be terminating type or
feed-through type, whichever will satisfy the need. GFCI receptacles shall be color coded or shall
otherwise indicate GFCI protectioa Scheduled testing of the GFCI is required in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations, but not less than semiannually.
16.4.7.2.3 REMOVAL OF GFCI CIRCUITS
Existing circuits with GFCI protection shall remain unless persistent problems are encountered or
unless renovations occur that would alter the use so that GFCI protection is not necessary. An
example of such a renovation would be converting an aquatic laboratory to office space. Upon
completion of the initial installation, the electrical ground system shall be checked or verified for
continuity with the conduit system, the equipment housing, and the final connection to the receptacle
grounding stud. In aquatic laboratories and other required areas, not only will the GFCI-protective
device be installed in the receptacle, but also the receptacles will be connected to the grounded
system.
16.4.7.3 MOTOR CONTROL CENTER
Where several motors (all of larger-than-fractional horsepower) are located in one room or space, a
motor control center should be used. Busing in the control center should be arranged so that the center
can be expanded from both ends. Bus shall be of silver-plated copper. Interconnecting wires shall be
copper. Terminal blocks should be of the plug-in type so that controllers may be removed without
disconnecting individual control wiring.
16.4.8 GROUNDING
The grounding system for the facility shall be permanent, effective, and complete from the service entrance
to most electrical devices. The grounding system shall conform to the mandatory and applicable advisory
rules of NEC Article 250. In addition, green insulated copper ground wire shall be connected between each
laboratory electrical outlet and the feeder panel isolated ground bus. This conductor shall be sized in
accordance with NEC Table 250-95. Grounding systems shall comply with the NEC and IEEE 142. A
separate ground conductor shall be used. Raceway systems shall not be used as a ground path.
16.4.8.1 LABORATORY BUILDING MODULE GROUNDING
In addition to the grounding indicated above, all laboratory building modules shall have a bare earth
copper ground grid or field, direct buried outside, to provide an isolated ground for instrumentation.
This ground system (and any other isolated ground system required for special areas) shall be clearly
identified and protected against improper usage. All building ground systems shall be tied together as
required by NEC Article 250.
16.4.8.2 GROUND BUS
Every panelboard and switchboard in the facility shall be provided with a ground bus.
16.4.9 LABORATORY POWER REQUIREMENTS
See the room data sheets for specific and generic laboratory room requirements. Specific and generic
electrical requirements are indicated for most spaces. In the design of a new facility, however, these
requirements must be reviewed, verified, and tested with the appropriate EPA representatives and must gain
approval from EPA. This reviewing, verification, and testing should occur during the program verification
and design phase of the project. Refer to subsections 16.4.6.4 and 16.4.8.1 above for requirements for
panelboard and grounding requirements for laboratory modules, respectively. In addition, the following
requirements apply:
16-10
-------
Architecture, Engineering.
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
• All 120-volt general convenience receptacles shall be rated a minimum of 20 amperes and shall be
grounding type (NEMA S-20R) and specification grade.
• 120-volt circuits shall have a minimum rating of 20 amperes.
• A maximum of four general convenience receptacles shall be connected to a circuit
• Equipment such as refrigerators, freezers, and centrifuges shall each have individual dedicated circuits.
• Receptacles for 6-foot-Iong or longer fume hoods shall be alternately wired for two circuits.
• Receptacles located within 6 feet of a sink shall be GFCI type.
* All branch circuits or panelboard feeder conduit runs shall be provided with separate equipment
grounding conductors sized per NEC Table 250-95.
• Each laboratory shall be provided with separate, dedicated 120/208-volt, three-phase, four-wire
panelboards; panelboards shall be spaced at a maximum spacing of one panelboard every two modules.
Additional panelboards shall be provided as required by electrical usage or as directed by the EPA
project officer.
• Each laboratory panelboard shall be provided with a separate ground bus.
* Receptacles that are located above wall or island benches and at equipment spaces shall be in surface
metal raceways wherever possible. Raceways shall be single compartment or double compartment (for
both power and telecommunications/data) as directed by the EPA project officer.
» In accordance with NEMA 14-30R, 30-ampere, 125/250-volt single-phase receptacles will be provided
for 30-ampere, 208-volt single-phase equipment.
• One receptacle on a dedicated 20-ampere, 120-volt emergency power circuit shall be provided in each
laboratory. Emergency power shall also be provided for special equipment requiring such power.
• UPS systems within the computer/data-processing rooms and laboratories and their supply and output
circuits shall comply with NEC Article 645-10.
16.5 Interior Lighting System
16.5.1 ILLUMINATION LEVELS
The minimum acceptable levels of maintained illumination shall be as indicated in Table 16.5.1,
Illumination Levels, for the particular areas. For areas not listed in Table 16.5.1, the recommendations of
the Institute of Environmental Science (IBS) handbooks shall be followed.
16-11
-------
February 1998
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
Table 16.5.1 Illumination Levels
FUNCTION
FOOTCANDLES
FUNCTION
FOOTCANDLES
General office space 50
Animal room 70
Autopsy 100
Boiler room 20
Corridors 25
Emergency lighting (general) 3
Emergency lighting in laboratory blocks 5
Examination 100
Laboratories (dual switching) . 50/100
Loading dock 20
Lobby 50
Locker rooms 20
Shops (dual switching) 50/100
General office and record rooms 50
Parking, driveway, and walkways 1-3
Stairways 20
Storage
Inactive 5
Rough bulky 10
Medium 20
Fine 50
Telephone equipment room 70
Toilets 30
Exterior entrances 5
Desk level (task lighting) 70-100
Utility rooms 20
X-ray 10
Parking decks 5
Library-conference rooms (dual switching) 50/100
Note:
al illumination 30 inches above the floor.
16.5.2 LIGHTING CONTROLS
Switches shall be provided to control lighting in all areas. Large rooms (more than 200 square feet) shall
have multiple switching to reduce the lighting level by approximately half.
16.5.2.1 DAYLIGHT-LEVEL SENSORY CONTROLS
In building areas (except laboratories) that are larger than 200 square feet and that will have a large
contribution of natural daylight, daylight-level sensory controls shall be used to control lighting levels.
16.5.2.2 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEMS
In buildings with building automation systems (HAS), the BAS (in addition to light switches) shall
control overall building lighting. Each floor shall be a separate control zone with appropriate subzoning
of each floor for special functions.
16.S.2.3 OCCUPANCY SENSORS
Occupancy sensors shall be provided (in addition to switches) to control lighting in offices and smaller
rooms, bath and locker areas, and conference rooms.
16.5.3 LAMPS AND BALLASTS
Electrical discharge lamps and high-intensity discharge (HID) lamps should be the primary lamps
considered in the selection of the illumination concept. The lighting system shall use, to the maximum
extent feasible, energy-efficient fixtures with electronic high-frequency ballasts, T-S fluorescent lamps, and
high-quality light reflectors and lenses. The use of filament light sources should be kept to an absolute
minimum (i.e., only in spaces that do not have a need for high levels of illumination, that are normally
occupied only for short durations, and for which discharge lamps are not suitable). Where fluorescent lamps
will be utilized, these lamps shall be of the T-8 type to conserve energy.
16.5.3.1 INDOOR HID LIGHTING
In using HID lighting indoors, the required color rendition shall be carefully considered from both visual
and health safety perspectives.
16-12
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
16.5.3.2 BALLASTS
16-13
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
All ballasts to be used on this project shall be of the energy-saving type (electronic high-frequency
ballasts shall be used in all possible locations).
16.5.3.3 LIGHT FIXTURE SELECTION
The selection of light fixtures should involve careful consideration of the quality of construction, ease
of maintenance, ease of relamping, efficiency, illumination characteristics, mounting technique, and
special purpose characteristics (e.g., vapoiproof, explosion-proof, elimination of radio frequency
interferences).
16.5.4 EMERGENCY LIGHTING (BATTERY UNITS)
An emergency lighting system shall be provided in accordance with. NEC Article 700 and arranged to
provide a minimum of 3 footcandles of illumination (measured at floor level) throughout the path of egress,
including exit access routes, exit stairways, and other routes, such as exit passageways to the outside of the
building.
• Laboratories and large open areas such as cafeterias; assembly areas; large mechanical, electrical, and
storage rooms; and open-plan office spaces where exit access is normally through the major portion of
the areas shall be provided with emergency lighting. In addition, emergency lighting systems shall be
provided in any location where chemicals are stored, handled, or used and in large computer rooms.
• The emergency lighting in laboratory rooms should provide at least 5 footcandles of illumination,
measured at the exit access door.
• The type of system used shall be such that it will operate in the event of any failure of a public utility or
internal disruption of the normal power distribution system in a building.
• Buildings of seven stories or less may be powered from connections to two separate substations from a
reliable public utility. Automatic transfer switching shall be provided for the emergency power supply.
• The emergency lighting shall be connected to a generator, when a generator is provided. In buildings
where there is no emergency generator, battery backup shall be provided for egress and emergency
lighting. This battery backup may be by unit-type battery fixtures, battery packs in fluorescent fixtures,
or use of inverters. Where HID lamps are used (and connected to a generator), a standby lighting system
shall be provided to meet emergency lighting requirements during HID lamp restrike periods.
16.5.5 ENERGY CONSERVATION
EPA seeks to minimize energy use dedicated to electric lighting and the resulting cooling loads through
proper use of natural lighting in the facility. In effect, it seeks a well-integrated lighting system for its new
buildings that makes optimum use of both natural and artificial lighting sources and balances the buildings'
heating and cooling needs. A lighting-power budget shall be determined, in conformance with ASHRAE
90, and strictly adhered to in the design of the lighting for each facility. This budget may be exceeded in
laboratory areas and in shops where a higher level of illumination is required because of the type of work
being performed.
16.5.6 GREEN LIGHTS
All design of lighting for EPA facilities shall be in accordance with the EPA Green Lights Program.
16.5.7 GLARE
The selection of the type of diffuser and lens to be used on the lighting fixtures shall take into account the
glare that can be produced on the work surface. All lighting design shall minimize the effects of glare on
the task surface. Indirect lighting shall be used wherever possible.
16.5.7.1 LIGHT FIXTURE LOCATION
16-14
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
In locating lighting fixtures, consideration must be given to the fact that many of the surfaces in the
facility (especially in laboratory areas) have highly reflective materials at the task location. Fixtures
should be located to keep glare to a minimum.
16.S.8 AUTOMATIC DATA PROCESSING AREAS
Lighting fixture types, location, and illumination levels shall be coordinated with the equipment and
functions of the telecommunications, alarm, and automatic data processing (ADP) centers to provide the
required illumination without: •
• interfering with prompt identification of self-illuminated indicating devices
• Creating reflecting glare that might detract from adequate observations of essential equipment
* Creating electrical or electromagnetic interference detrimental to proper operation of equipment
16.6 Fire Safety Requirements for Lighting Fixtures
Lighting fixtures shall comply with the NEC and the following criteria.
16.6.1 MOUNTING
All lamps shall be mounted in a way that prevents direct contact between the lamp and any combustible
material. Wherever accidental contact is remotely possible, the lamp shall be protected by a guard, globe,
reflector, fixture, or other protective means (NEC Article 410).
16.6.2 FLUORESCENT FIXTURES
All fluorescent fixtures installed indoors shall be provided with ballasts that have integral thermal overload
protection (NEC Article 410).
16.6.3 LIGHT DIFFUSERS
Light difiusers shall be either of noncombustible material or of a design or material that will drop from the
fixture before ignition. Where combustible dropout-type fixtures are used, plastic material shall not
constitute more than 30 percent of the total ceiling area. Where luminous or difiuser ceilings are used, these
restrictions also apply.
16.6.4 LOCATION
Lighting in locations where dangerous gases, liquids, dusts, or fibers may exist shall meet the requirements
of NEC Article 500.
16.7 Exterior Lighting Systems
16.7.1 GENERAL
Exterior lighting systems shall comply with the IES lighting handbook. System controls shall use a time
clock and/or photocell to provide illumination only when needed. In buildings with a BAS (building
automation system), exterior lighting shall be switched by photocells in series with timers and the BAS
system.
16.7.1.1 EXTERIOR LIGHT GLARE
Light glare shall be kept to a minimum in situations where it would impede effective operations of
protective force personnel; interfere with rail, highway, or navigable water traffic; or be objectionable
to occupants of adjacent properties.
16.7.1.2 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE LAMPS
Maximum use shall be made of HID lamps such as metal halide or high-pressure sodium vapor lamps.
16-15
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
16.7.1.3 EARLY HOURS LIGHTING
Consideration shall be given to reducing the amount of light in parking lot areas daring times (early
morning hours 12:00 AM to 4:30 AM) when it is very unlikely that the lots will be in use. EPA personnel
at the site shall be contacted before this is made a pan of the design.
16.7.2 PARKING LOT LIGHTING
Lighting over driveways and parking areas shall consist of a complete HID lighting system, including
control equipment, underground wiring, luminaries, and all necessary accessories for a complete and
functioning system. The maintained level of illumination shall be at least 1 to 3 footcandles.
16.7.3 BUILDING FACADE LIGHTING
Appropriate lighting shall be provided at each exterior door and for functional and security illumination of
exterior programmed areas.
16.7.4 TRAFFIC CONTROL LIGHTING
If the facility is on a site where traffic controls are necessary and will not be provided by the local
municipality or state transportation authority, a complete traffic control system for the facility shall be
designed, including all stoplights, directional lights, controls, and wiring, for a complete operating system.
16.7.5 ROADWAY LIGHTING
All new access roadways, or continuations of loop or access roadways, and driveways shall be lighted. The
maintained level of illumination shall be at least 1 to 3 footcandles on vehicular roadways and pedestrian
walkways. The same type of lighting that is used for parking lots (HID source) shall be used for roadways.
16.7.6 EXTERIOR ELECTRIC SIGNS
All exterior electric signs and nonelectric signs shall be integrated into the total design of the facility and
approved by the COR.
16.8 Emergency Power System
16.8.1 GENERAL
An emergency power system shall be designed and provided for all administrative and laboratory space.
The system shall provide electric power in the event of loss of normal power and shall provide power for
emergency and egress lighting. The system shall also supply power to critical equipment during planned
outages for maintenance. The emergency power system shall comply with NFPA37,theNEC,NFPA101,
NFPA 110, and IEEE 446.
16.8.1.1 BATTERY-TYPE LIGHTING
In smaller buildings when the emergency power system is installed primarily for egress lighting, battery-
type lighting units shall be used.
16.8.1.2 EMERGENCY POWER
In facilities where the emergency power needs are larger than can be handled by battery packs, an
emergency generator shall be supplied. This emergency power system shall be composed of a diesel
engine-driven generator equipped with phase-synchronized automatic transfer switch or switches and
with necessary controls for automatic operation. If the loads and the availability of natural gas allow,
a natural gas generator shall be considered. All automatic transfer switches shall be of the
isolation/bypass type. The generators) shall transfer and pick up the critical load(s) within 10 seconds.
The system shall be able to cany a continuous full load for not less than 24 hours. The exhaust and fuel
pipe vents shall be arranged and located away from fresh-air intakes. The exhaust shall be located where
maximum dilution can be accomplished. The generator shall be designed to handle nonlinear loads plus
25 percent spare capacity. The generator shall be water cooled.
16-16
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
Table 16.8.1, Emergency Power Requirements, outlines the emergency power requirements for
different building heights and particular fire safety systems. Generators are not required by these
criteria unless an analysis of the cost of installation and maintenance of acceptable emergency power
sources shows that a generator is the most cost-effective power source. Automatic switching schemes
shall be provided for all emergency power sources. Where emergency generators are used, their
installation shall be in accordance with NFPA 110 and NEC Article 700.
Table 16.8.1 Emergency Power Requirements
Acceptable Sources of Emergency Power*
Building Height* Building Height *
Emergency System 75 Feet or Less Over 75 Feet
Emergency lighting (1V4 hours)
Exit lighting (1!4 hours)
Fire alarm
Fire pump
Jockey pump
Elevator
Smoke control
Sprinkler system air compressor
Special extinguishing system power supply (dry chemical,
CO2, or other EPA-approved system)
Fume hoods (full or partial containment or where deemed
necessary)
1.2.3
1, 2, 3
1.3
N.R.
N.R.
N.R.
—
N.R.
N.R.
1.2
1.3
1,3
1,3
1.2
1.2
1. y
N.R.
N.R.
N.R.
1.2
Note: 1 = Generator; 2 ^Qnnectioaeitliv to two sepanteprimaiy source
N.R. = Not Required.
* Power source must be capable of providing power to one elevator on a selective basts when the building contains six or fewer elevators.
Otherwise, two elevators must be supplied on a selective basis.
' The building height for application of the criteria shall be determined by measurement of the distance from grade level of the lowest
accessible floor to ceiling height of the highest occupied floor in the building. Mechanical rooms and penthouse are not considered
occupied floors in this case.
16.8.1.3 EMERGENCY GENERATOR LOCATION
The preferable location for the generator is outdoors. The location should be such that the generator will
be hidden from view and should be to the rear of the main facility. The generator should be placed over
vibration isolators and should make use of noise dampers and other devices, as required, to substantially
attenuate noise and vibration resulting from its operation. The generator shall be equipped with a low-
noise exhaust silencer (hospital or critical type) and weatherproof housing.
16.8.1.4 ECONOMIC ANALYSIS
For all installations where a generator is provided, an economic analysis shall be done to determine the
economic feasibility of including load-shedding or peak-shaving equipment as part of the installation.
EPA will provide instructions on the possible inclusion of this item in the project after the economic
analysis has been completed.
16.8.1.5 FUEL STORAGE TANK
If a diesel-type generator is used, the system shall be provided with a fuel storage tank that is capable
of carrying a continuous full load for not less than 24 hours. The preferred type of tank is an
aboveground storage tank. If allowed by EPA, the tank may be installed underground. If so, the tank
16-17
-------
February 1998
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
shall be of double-wall construction and of noncorrosive material with interstitial monitoring
capabilities. The tank shall meet all of the interim prohibition (40 CFR §280.1) requirements or the
most current promulgated rules effective on the date of installation. Cathodic protection shall be
installed for protecting all metal parts of underground fuel storage tanks.
16.8.2 EMERGENCY LOADS
In addition to the loads required by NFPA 101, NEC, and the room data sheets, the following loads shall
be connected to the emergency power system:
One receptacle in each laboratory
Fire alarm system
Exit lights
Emergency lighting system—3 footcandles minimum for egress; 10 footcandles at switchboards
Special laboratory equipment
Telephone relay system
Controlled-temperature rooms
Certain HVAC systems (as required by the applicable state and local codes and as directed by EPA)
Critical sump pumps and other associated mechanical equipment and controls
All animal care facilities
Local HVAC air compressors for special rooms
Paging system
Selected elevators (as required by the applicable state and local codes and as directed by EPA)
Gas chromatograph
Selected refrigerators and freezers (as directed by EPA)
Incubators
X-ray fluorescent analyzer
UPS system
Air-conditioning system associated with computer rooms and environmental rooms
Security systems
Safety alarm systems.
16.8.3 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
A UPS system shall be provided for loads requiring guaranteed continuous power. The application of UPS
. systems shall comply with IEEE 446. UPS equipment can be of the rotary or stationary type. A
recommendation shall be made concerning the appropriate type of system for a particular facility. UPS
equipment shall be provided with multiple power supplies (normal power, static switch bypass power, and
total system bypass power). The UPS system shall be sized to provide at least 5 minutes of protection upon
loss of normal power. Total system bypass power shall include an isolation transformer. All components
shall be UL listed. The supplied UPS system shall be specified to operate properly with an emergency
generator.
16.8.3.1 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS
The UPS system shall operate continuously and in conjunction with the existing building electrical
system to provide precise power for critical equipment loads. The static system shall consist of a solid-
state inverter, a rectifier/battery charger, a storage battery, a static bypass transfer switch, synchronizing
circuitry, and an internal maintenance bypass switch. The rotary system shall include a solid-state
inverter, a battery charger, a storage battery, an automatic transfer assembly, an internal (automatic)
bypass switch, and a low-voltage transient synchronous generator. The UPS system, along with the
supporting equipment, shall be housed in dedicated room(s) under controlled environmental conditions
that meet the manufacturer's recommendations and code requirements.
16.8.3.2 CODES, STANDARDS, AND DOCUMENTS
The UPS shall be designed in accordance with the applicable codes and standards of the following:
16-18
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines ; February 1998
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
NEMA
IEEE inverter standards
ASA
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
National Electrical Code
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
Local codes.
16.8.3.3 ON-LINE REVERSE TRANSFER SYSTEM
The UPS shall be designed to operate as an on-line-reverse transfer system in the following modes:
• Normal (Static). The critical load shall be continuously supplied by the inverter. The
rectifier/battery charger shall derive power from the utility alternating current (AC) source and
supply direct current (DC) power to the inverter while simultaneously float-charging the battery.
• Normal (Rotary). The critical load shall receive power from the utility company to the motor-
generator set, which powers the critical load and charges the batteries.
• Emergency (Static). Upon failure of the utility AC power source, the critical load shall be supplied
by the inverter, which, without any switching, obtains its power from the storage battery. There shall
be no interruption to the critical load upon failure or restoration of the utility AC source.
* Emergency (Rotary). Upon failure of the utility AC power source, the control logic shall turn on the
inverter and provide AC power from the battery to the motor-generator set and from the motor-
generator set to the critical load. The inverter shall be capable of full-power operation within 50
milliseconds afterjoss of utility power.
• Recharge. Upon restoration of the utility AC source (prior to complete discharge of the battery), the
rectifier/battery charger powers the inverter and simultaneously recharges the battery. This shall be
an automatic function and shall cause no interruption to the critical load.
• Bypass mode. If the UPS must be taken out of seiviix for inaintenance or repair of internal failures,
the static bypass transfer switch shall be used to transfer the load to the alternate source without
interruption. Automatic retransfer or forward transfer of the load shall be accomplished after the
UPS inverter synchronizes to the alternate bypass AC input source. Once the sources are
synchronized, the static bypass transfer switch shall forward transfer the load front the bypass input
source to the UPS inverter output by paralleling the two loads and then disconnecting the bypass AC
input source. Overlap shall be limited to one-half cycle.
• Maintenance bypass/test Internal switches shall be provided to isolate the UPS inverter output and
static bypass transfer switch output from the AC bypass input source and the load. The switches, in
conjunction with the staticbypass transfer switch, shall enable the lead to be reverse-transferred from
the UPS inverter output to the AC bypass input source without interruption. The switches shall
enable the UPS inverter and static bypass transfer switch to be tested without affecting load
operation.
• Downgrade. If only the battery will be taken out of service for maintenance, it shall be disconnected
from the rectifier/battery charger and inverter by means of an external battery disconnect. The UPS
shall continue to function as specified herein, except for power outage protection and transient
characteristics.
16.8.3.4 UPS OUTPUT
The UPS output shall have the following characteristics:
16-19
-------
February 1998
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
• Frequency: 60 hertz (Hz) nominal +0.5 Hz (when synchronized to the bypass AC input source).
• Output voltage transient characteristics for
- 25 percent load step change +4 percent
- 50 percent load step change +6 percent
• 100 percent load step change +10 percent/-8 percent
• Output voltage transient response: The system output voltage shall return to within +1 percent of
the steady state value within 30 milliseconds.
• Output voltage regulation: The steady state output voltage shall not deviate by more than +1.0
percent from no load to full load.
16.8.3.5 OUTPUT FREQUENCY REGULATION
The UPS shall be capable of providing the nominal output frequency +0.1 percent when the UPS inverter
is not synchronized (free running) to the AC bypass input line. •
16.8.3.6 SYSTEM OVERLOAD
System overload is a load of at least 125 percent of the system rating for aperiod of 10 niinutes, and 150
percent current for 1 minute. Overloads in excess of 170 percent of the UPS rating, on an instantaneous
basis, or in excess of the overload time periods previously stated shall cause the static bypass transfer
switch to reverse-transfer and allow the AC bypass input source to supply the necessary fault-clearing
current After approximately 5 seconds, the static bypass transfer switch shall automatically forward-
transfer, and normal UPS operation shall resume. If the overload still exists after the 5-second period,
the static bypass transfer switch shall automatically reverse-transfer the load to the AC bypass input
source and the UPS inverter shall turn off. The system shall require manual restart after this sequence.
16.8.3.7 SYSTEM EFFICIENCY
The overall efficiency, input to output, shall be at least 95 percent with the battery fully charged and the
inverter supplying full-rated load.
16.8.3.8 LOCATIONS AND LOADS
The UPS system shall be located in special rooms or in the same room as computer equipment. These
rooms shall have special HVAC equipment to maintain the proper environmental conditions for the UPS
system and its batteries both under normal conditions and during a power outage.
16.8.3.8.1 UPS LOAD
The UPS load will consist of the equipment and outlets designated for UPS power connection in the
room data sheets.
16.8.3.8.2 BATTERY ROOM
The battery room for the UPS shall be well ventilated so as not to allow an explosive mixture of
hydrogen to accumulate. A minimum air change rate of six air changes per hour is required. These
battery rooms shall contain all devices required by the Safety Manual (including mechanical
ventilation, an emergency eyewash station, and a fire/smoke sensing device). An exhaust fan, roof
ventilator, or ducted in-line fan should be used for ventilation. The fan shall be connected to the
normal (e.g., utility) power system. Makeup air shall be provided and should be filtered. The
mechanical ventilation system for a UPS room shall be monitored to ensure that any failure is
detected promptly. The system may be designed so that failure triggers a wanting from the fire
alarm system of an audible alarm at a constantly attended location. The ventilation requirements
in this subsection are not meant to apply to sealed battery units that are provided for specific
equipment. The installation of the UPS system shall be in accordance with NFPA 111. An
16-20
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
emergency eyewash station, isolated from electrical power sources, shall be provided in battery
rooms, and an emergency shower shall be nearby. Explosion-proof wiring, however, is normally not
required in battery rooms. A fire- or smoke-sensing device shall be installed in battery rooms.
Selection of this device should be appropriate to the design of the battery room.
16.9 Lightning Protection System
16.9.1 MINIMUM SCOPE
A lightning protection system shall be provided for all facilities containing laboratory modules, as well as
for facilities containing radioactive or explosive materials. The requirements and installation criteria for
lightning protection systems shall be in accordance with NFPA 780, UL 96A, and the local building code.
16.9.2 ADDITIONAL SCOPE
For building types not in the above description, the guide in NFPA 780 shall be used to assess the risk of
loss due to lightning.
16.9.3 MASTER LABEL
For buildings described in subsection 16.9.1 and for facilities with a strong risk potential (per NFPA 780),
equipment, accessories, and material necessary for a complete master-labeled lightning protection system
for all building components should be furnished and installed. The system shall comply with NFPA 780,
UL 96A, and Lightning Protection Institute (LPI) 175. All cables, lightning rods, and accessories shall be
copper. All connections and splices shall be of the exothermic weld type.
16.9.3.1 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS
The installed system shall be unobtrusive, with conductors built during construction (so they are
concealed). The system shall also be properly flashed and watertight Installation shall be done in
conformance with shop drawings prepared by the supplier and approved by the Government.
16.9.3.2 CERTIFICATION DELIVERY
Before the lightning protection system is accepted, the contractor shall obtain and deliver to the
supervising architect the UL master label or an equivalent certification.
16.10 Seismic Requirements
16.10.1 SEISMIC REVIEW
The design ad construction of all new EPA facilities shall comply with those standards and practices that
are substantially equivalent to, or exceed, the National Earthquake Hazard Reduction Program (NEHRP)
Recommended Provisions for the Development of Seismic Regulations for New Buildings.
16.11 Automatic Data Processing Power Systems
16.11.1 ISOLATION OF ADP SYSTEMS
Adverse effects that voltage level variations, transients, and frequency variations may have on ADP
equipment shall be minimized. ADP equipment shall be isolated as needed for protection. UPS or power
distribution units (PDUs) may be used for isolation.
16.11.2 COMPUTER POWER
All computer power shall enter the UPS room or computer room at 480 volts and feed 120/208-volt UPS
or PDUs that have monitoring capabilities with some transient protection. PDU shall limit the cable runs
16-21
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
to 100 feet from the PDU to the ADP equipment The user will provide a list of equipment cable types and
plug types. All circuits shall have separate neutrals. All UPS units and PDUs shall be connected to a
central monitoring and control system.
16.11.3 POWER PANELBOARDS AND DISTRIBUTION PANELS
All individual power panelboards not exceeding 200 amperes shall have meters for the main breaker, with
readouts on panel. All main distribution panels shall have meters on all breakers. Non-UPS/PDU outlets
shall be spaced every 20 feet around the computer room for utility use (vacuums, drills, etc.).
16.11.4 LIGHTING
Under-floor lights with cutoff timer(s) shall be installed in computer room(s). Room lighting for computer
rooms shall be either indirect lighting, to reduce glare on terminal screens, or overhead lighting of the
parabolic type, to reduce eye strain.
16.11.5 GROUNDING
All computer power shall be grounded to a large single-point ground within the raised floor system grid
(bolt-in type).
16.12 Cathodic Protection
16.12.1 INVESTIGATION AND RECOMMENDATION
An investigation shall be conducted and a determination made, on whether cathodic protection is required.
for buried utilities. If a cathodic protection system is required, a system shall be recommended to satisfy
the local conditions. The cathodic protection system shall be designed by a design professional who is
National Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE) certified and has 2 to 3 years* experience in similar
installations.
16.13 Environmental Considerations (Raceways, Enclosures)
16.13.1 CORROSIVE ATMOSPHERE
Special consideration shall be given to the type of raceways to be used in corrosive environments (such as
chemical storage areas, some laboratories, and areas near air-handling exhausts for spaces with corrosive
fumes). All raceways to be used in corrosive atmospheres shall be deemed suitable by the raceway
manufacturer for the atmosphere in which they will be installed.
16.13.1.1 EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES
The enclosures for electrical equipment (e.g., panels, switches, breakers) shall have the proper NEMA
rating for the atmosphere in which the equipment is being installed.
16.13.2 SALTWATER ATMOSPHERE
Careful consideration shall be given to the type of materials to be used for exterior electrical work (including
lighting) when the facility is located near or in a coastal area. Salt air can have a detrimental (corrosive)
effect on steel and any painted electrical surfaces. The use of EMT or any thin wall raceways in the interior
of the building should also be weighed carefully because storage of these materials outside of the building
(or storage or installation in the building before it is fully enclosed) could result in corrosion.
16.13.3 EXTREME COLD
Electrical equipment such as emergency generators, transformers, and switch gear installed in weatherproof
enclosures of the facility that are subject to extremely cold temperatures should be provided with
supplemental heating within the enclosures.
16-22
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
16.13.4 EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE
In all areas where atmospheres contain combustible materials, all electrical equipment, including raceways,
fittings, and boxes, shall be designed in accordance with NEC Article 500. Steps shall be taken to control
or eliminate static electricity in areas where materials that are ignitable by static spark discharge are
processed or handled. These materials include spark-sensitive explosives, propellants, and pyrotechnics,
as well as solvent vapors and flammable gases. Electrical wiring, fittings, boxes, and devices located at
exhaust fens that are exhausting areas containing combustible materials shall also be designed in accordance
with NEC Article 500.
16.13.5 FLOODPLAIN AREAS
Electrical equipment shall not be located below grade in facilities sited in floodplain areas. Emergency
generators shall be located so that they are not subject to water damage due to flooding. Normal power
equipment (floor mounted) located at grade level in floodplain areas shall be placed on at least 6 inches of
housekeeping pads (higher if water level will reach the equipment on 6-inch pads).
16.14 Communication Systems
16.14.1 TELECOMMUNICATIONS/DATA SYSTEMS
All telecommunications and data systems must comply with the "EPA Structured
Wiring/Telecommunication Guidelines."
16.14.2 VIDEO CONFERENCE ROOMS
Designated video conference rooms must be supported by communication wiring specified in AT&T's
Technical Advisory-T1.5 Premise Wiring Requirements and "FTS-2000 Switched Digital Video Guidelines
for EPA Video Teleconference Facilities," January 2,1991. These requirements suggest that cabled video
teleconference space (CVTS) communication wiring should be limited to 300 unrepeated cable runs. The
network interface (service delivery point) to support CVTS rooms will be located in the network control
facility (NCF); therefore, CVTS room locations must be within 300 cable feet of the NCF and have conduit
access for 22-gauge shielded solid copper twisted-pair wire. Longer runs may require repeaters and require
additional expenses, but they must remain within the 1.5-decibel loss specifications of the technical advisory
manuscript concerning the wiring.
16.14.3 RECORDING SYSTEMS
In areas where conferences are to be recorded, built-in microphones shall be provided along with a closet
containing the recording equipment. Wiring shall be installed from the microphone (omnidirectional) to
recorders for a complete system.
16.14.4 SATELLITE DISHES
An area may be required for the installation of satellite dishes that will be used for telecommunications,
television reception, or data transmission. If required, an area shall also be designed for location of satellite
dish head-in equipment (receivers and transmitters). Where use of a satellite dish is required, power shall
be furnished for all head-in equipment Cable raceways shall be provided from the satellite dish location
to the room for the head-in equipment and from the head-in equipment to each outlet served and to the
controller location for the dish. All equipment and cable will be furnished by EPA.
16.14.5 TELEVISION BROADCAST SYSTEMS
In facilities from which a local or national television station will be broadcasting live meetings or press
conferences, a complete raceway (or cable-tray) system shall be furnished to allow the station to run cables
from the designated television van parking areas to the conference/press room. If cable tray is provided, it
shall be completely accessible throughout its length.
16-23
-------
Architecture. Engineering,
February 1998 . and Planning Guidelines
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
16.14.5.1 WEATHERPROOF RECEPTACLES/DISCONNECT SWITCHES
In addition, weatherproof receptacles or disconnect switches (fused) shall be provided at the van parking
areas to allow each van to receive power from the building.
16.14.6 MICROWAVE COMMUNICATIONS
Where required, an area shall be designed for the installation of a microwave dish that will be used for
telecommunications or data transmission. An area shall also be designed for microwave head-in equipment.
Power shall be furnished for all head-in equipment Cable raceways shall be provided from the microwave
dish location to the room for the head-in equipment and, from there, to the room where the controller will
be located. All equipment and cables will be furnished by EPA.
16.14.7 OTHER
A complete raceway system shall be furnished for other communication/data systems (systems not otherwise
mentioned in subsection 16.14). The raceway system shall include raceways, outlet and junction boxes, and
power connections (direct or receptacle) for all associated equipment to be located in the facility. Unless
otherwise directed by EPA, all cabling and equipment for these other systems will be furnished by EPA.
16.15 Alarm and Security Systems
16.15.1 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
Fire alarm systems must be installed in accordance with NEC Article 760. Devices that activate fire alarm
systems and evacuation alarms must be completely separated from other building systems such as
environmental monitoring systems and security systems. Other features of the fire alarm system (e.g., fan
shutdown) may be shared with these other building systems, but the performance of the fire alarm system
must not be compromised and must meet the requirements stated in this subsection. In general, auxiliary
functions, such as elevator recall and smoke control, are not performed by the fire alarm system but by other
mechanical or electrical systems. The main fire alarm system should supervise any auxiliary system (e.g.,
computer room). Activation of the main fire alarm shall also activate the audible (and visual, if applicable)
devices of the auxiliary system in the associated alarm area. The fire protection system shall be in
compliance with the most current codes and publications, as listed below (see other sections for additional
codes and standards):
Sprinkler Systems, NFPA 13
Standpipe and Hose Systems, NFPA 14
National Fire Alarm Code, NFPA 72
GSA/PBS-PQ100
ADA Requirements
Safety Manual, Chapters 2, 3, and 5.
16.15.1.1 BASIC REQUIREMENTS
In any office, computer room, library, classroom, cafeteria, or similar business-type occupancy, fire
alarm systems are required if the occupancies have any of these characteristics:
• The occupancies are two or more stories above the level of exit discharge.
• The occupancies may have 100 or more occupants, above or below grade.
• The occupancies consist of more than 50,000 square feet.
* A human voice, gas-powered horn, or other similar nonelectric system cannot efficiently or
effectively be used to alert occupants to an emergency.
Storage occupancies equal to or larger than 100,000 square feet shall have fire alarm systems. All other
occupancies shall follow the requirements in NFPA 101.
16-24
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
16.15.1.2 MANUAL SYSTEMS INPUT
Each system shall provide manual input from manual fire alarm stations, which shall be located is exit
or pubUccoiridon adjacent to each stairway and to each exit fiom the building. Additional stations may
be provided at any location where there is a special risk or where the travel distance to the nearest station
exceeds 200 feet. As a general principle, the station shall be placed so that a person using it will be
between the fire and the exit If necessary, emergency telephone systems shall be provided in the exit
stairs or in another protected location, as indicated for manual fire alarm stations. In addition,
telephones shall be provided at each elevator lobby, at the ground floor, and on alternate elevator-capture
floors.
16.15.1.3 AUTOMATIC SYSTEMS INPUT
Automatic fire detection shall be provided as described below.
* A water flow switch shall be provided for each floor or fire area protected by wet-pipe sprinkler
systems. Other types of sprinkler systems will be activated by a pressure switch at the dry or deluge
valve only.
* Automatic heat or smoke detection shall not be installed in lieu of automatic sprinkler protection
unless this decision is otherwise supported through recognized equivalency methodologies (NFPA
101M). Detection shall be provided where a preaction or deluge sprinkler system exists. Automatic
sprinkler protection requirements are described in Section IS, Mechanical Requirements, of this
Mamiat
• Smoke detectors shall be provided for essential electronic equipment (NFPA 72, Chapter 7), air-
handling systems (NFPA 72, Chapter 5), and elevator lobbies and machine rooms (NFPA 72,
Chapter 5). All smoke detectors shall be approved for their intended use and installation. Smoke
detectors require periodic maintenance, and arrangements for this should be made at the time of
installation to ensure proper operation and to guard against false alarm or unintended discharge.
• Heat and smoke detection in air-handling systems shall comply with NFPA 90A. Detectors, when
required, shall be located in the main supply duct downstream of a fan filter and in the return air
ducts for each floor or fire area.
• When heat and smoke detectors are installed, they shall be designed and installed in accordance with
NFPA 72.
• Special hazard protection systems shall initiate an alarm. These special systems include, but are not
limited to, dry chemical extinguishing systems, elevator recall systems, and computer detection
systems.
• Supervisory signals shall be transmitted under each of the following conditions:
- Operation of generator
- Operation of fire pump
- Loss of primary power to a fire alarm system, fire pump, or extinguishing system
- Loss of air pressure for dry-pipe sprinkler system
- Loss of a central processing unit (CPU) or of CPU peripheral equipment in a multiplex system
- Low water level in pressure tanks, elevated tanks, or reservoirs
- When control valves in the supply or distribution lines of automatic sprinkler systems, fire
pumps, standpipe systems, or interior building fire main systems are closed either a maximum
of two complete turns of a valve wheel or 10 percent closure of the valve, whichever is less. (In
this case, the signal will be transmitted by tamper switches.)
16-25
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
16.15.1.4 AUTOMATIC SYSTEMS OUTPUT
In all buildings, the primary alarms to the occupants and the fire department, and other critical signals
or activation of emergency equipment shall be initiated automatically. In no case shall these alarms
depend on manual action. Various outputs include those listed below.
* Elevator control smoke detector actuation shall sound an alarm at the fire alarm panel, recall
elevators, and notify the fire department but shall not initiate an audible alarm signal to building
occupants or start any smoke control system, except as noted below. The smoke detector alarm
signal shall be received at a central station or some other location that is constantly attended. This
will ensure an investigative response to the alarm.
• General area smoke detectors shall initiate an evacuation alarm for the portion of the building or area
in which they are used to increase the level of protection. In such situations, smoke detectors and
fire alarm panels equipped to provide alarm verification may be desirable.
• All alarm signals or messages shall be continuous. Where public address systems are provided for
the facility, there shall be provisions for making announcements from the main fire alarm panel or
from an attended location where the fire alarm signal is received. The public address system does
not have to be an integral part of the fire alarm system. Coded alarm signals are unacceptable.
• The output of special extinguishing systems, such as those provided for kitchens, shall include the
actuation of the building fire alarm system. Special detection systems shall indicate a supervisory
signal at the fire alarm panel.
• If an entire building can be evacuated within 5 minutes, the fire alarm shall sound either throughout
the building or on selected floors. Where selective evacuation is used on the basis of local code
requirements, features such as smoke control and automatic sprinklers shall be provided, as
necessary, to ensure the safety of occupants remaining in the building.
• For voice communications systems, only the occupants of the fire floor, the floor below, and the floor
aboveareexpectedtorelocateorevacuate. These occupants must automatically receive that message
and be notified of the emergency. Where automatic prerecorded voices are used, message
arrangement and content shall be designed to fit the needs of the individual building (e.g., bilingual
messages where appropriate).
• The use of visual signals to supplement the audible fire alarm system shall be provided in accordance
with NFPA 72 and Title IH standards of ADA.
* Every alarm reported on a building fire alarm system shall automatically actuate one of the
following:
- A transmitter approved by UL, connected to a privately operated, central-station, protective
signaling system conforming to NFPA 72. The central-station facility shall be listed by UL;
automatic telephone dialers shall not be used.
- An auxiliary tripping device connected to a municipal fire alarm box to notify the local fire
department, in accordance with NFPA 72.
- A direct supervised circuit between a building and the local fire alarm headquarters or a
constantly manned fire station, in accordance with NFPA 72.
- As a last resort, an alternate method approved by SHEMD.
16-26
-------
Architecture. Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
February 1998
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
Notification of the fire department shall occur no more than 90 secondsafter the initiation of an
alarm. The specific location of the alarm may be determined by fire department personnel after
they arrive.
A supervisory condition shall transmit a separate signal to a central station, different from an
alarm signal. No more than one supervisory signal shall be provided for an entire building.
Refer to the automatic systems input information in subsection 16.15.1.3 above for required
supervisory conditions.
Additional automatic actions shall be performed for smoke control, elevator capture, and door
closings. Smoke control and elevator capture shall be coordinated with the evacuation plan for
a building. (A summary of system actions is shown in Table 16.15.1.)
Table 16.15.1 Status Condition
Input Device
Output Function
Transmit signal to fire department
Indicate location of device on control panel and annunciator
Cause audible signal at control panel
Initiate emergency operation of elevators
Initiate smoke control sequence
Result in a record on system printer
Cause audible alarm signal throughout building
(voice or nonvoice)
A - Manual fire alarm station D = Water flow detectors and automatic extuu
A
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
wishing
B
X
X
X
X*
X
systems
C
X
X
X
X
D
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
E
X
X
X
X
F
X
X
B = Smoke detectors (other than duct)
C - Duct smoke detectors
E • Supervisory device
F = Emergency telephone
Note: Only smoke detectors associated with the elevators (e.g., the elevator lobby) must initiate elevator emergency operation.
16.15.1.5 MANUAL SYSTEMS OUTPUT
Any action that can be performed automatically must be able to be initiated manually from the control
center or fire alarm system control panel. A smoke control panel shall be provided when smoke control
systems are required. The control center, or fire alarm system control panel, shall have the capability
of canceling and restoring any action that has been initiated automatically or manually.
16.15.1.6 SYSTEMS FEATURES
All systems shall include the following:
* Indication of normal or abnormal conditions
• Annunciation of alarm, supervisory, or trouble conditions by zone
• Graphic annunciation of alarm conditions by zone
* Ringback feature when a silence switch for audible trouble signal is provided.
16.15.1.7 HIGH-RISE SYSTEMS FEATURES
For buildings 12 stories tall or higher, the systems shall also include the following:
• Permanent record of alarm, supervisory, or trouble conditions via printer
* Initiation of an alert tone followed by a digitized voice message.
16-27
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 • and Planning Guidelines
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
All power supply equipment and wiring shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of NEC
andNFPA72.
16.15.1.8 RELIABILITY
The maximum amount of time from actuation of a system input device to initiation of all system
functions shall be 10 seconds. Any system alarm input device shall be capable of initiating an alarm
during a single break, or a single ground fault condition, on any system alarm-initiating circuit (Class
A feature, Style D or E). In addition, any signaling line circuit of a multiplex system (other than
combination multiplex-point wired systems) shall also perform its intended service during a wire-to-wire
short or a combination of a single break and a single ground of a circuit (Class A feature, Style D or E).
16.15.1.9 CODE COMPLIANCE, MANUAL SYSTEM
A complete, code-complying fire alarm system shall be designed. For small buildings, and where
allowed by code, the system may be a manual system only. The manual system shall include manual
stations, fire alarm annunciator signals, and an annunciator panel indicating the zone where the alarm
was initiated. The alarm shall be sent to the local fire station.
16.15.1.10 CODE COMPLIANCE, AUTOMATIC SYSTEM
1 In large facilities, or where required by code, the systems shall be automatic and shall include smoke
detectors, manual pull stations, rate of rise detectors, alarm bells or horns and strobe lights, sprinklers,
and a central annunciator panel. Suppression systems shall be tied to the central annunciator panel.
The fire alarm system shall be tied to the local fire station in the area. Smoke detectors shall be provided
in all corridors and designated laboratory modules.
16.15.1.11 CENTRAL, LOCAL, AND PROPRIETARY ALARM SYSTEM
The building(s) shall be protected by a central, local, proprietary-type fire alarm system. Location of
pull stations, bells, automatic fire detectors, and other equipment pertinent to the fire alarm system shall
be in accordance with the referenced NFPA and local codes. When there is a difference between the
NFP A codes and local codes, compliance with the most stringent code will be required. Visual alarms
are required throughout the facility for handicapped fire warning. The system shall meet GSA
requirements for fire alarms and communication systems, as contained in Chapter 18 (Electrical) of the
GSA Fire Safety Criteria.
16.15.1.12 CENTRAL STATION SERVICE
The building(s) shall be protected by local fire alarm system(s) connected to either a UL-listed central
station or central station service (NFPA 72).
16.15.1.13 SYSTEM GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Pull stations shall be installed adjacent to all exit stair doors. Actuation of a manual station shall set off
an alarm throughout the building, as required, and shall send a manual station alarm signal to the local
fire department through a central station service. Actuation of any suppression system (sprinkler,
dry/wet chemical) protecting the building and its occupants shall set off an alarm as described for pull
stations, but will send a suppression signal to the central station service. All valves on the building's
sprinkler system and/or standpipe systems shall be supervised by the fire alarm control panel. The
closure of a valve shall initiate a supervisory signal to the building's fire alarm control panel and to the
central station service. Low-air-pressure switches on dry-pipe sprinkler systems and low-nitrogen-
pressure switches on preaction sprinkler systems shall be supervised by the building's fire alarm control
panels. The closure of these normally open supervisory switches shall initiate a supervisory signal to
the building's fire alarm control panels and to the listed central station service. Elevator lobby smoke
detection systems shall be incorporated into zones labeled "Elevator Smoke Detector" and shall actuate
a prealarm signal in the fire alarm control panel and send a prealarm signal to the central station
service. Likewise, elevator lobby smoke detectors shall be monitored for trouble by the building fire
alarm system. Smoke detector systems and subsystem(s) shall be connected to actuate a prealarm signal
16-28
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
February 1998
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
to a central station service. These panels shall also be monitored for trouble by the building fire alarm
system. Visual and audible alarm signals are required throughout the facility.
16.15.1.14 FIRE ZONES
Building(s) shall be subdivided into fire zones as recommended by NFPA and local codes. Graphic
annunciators shall be provided at the main entrances and the security control center. These annunciators
shall clearly show the outline of the buildings, the fire zones, and the alarm-initiating devices. Alarm
signals shall be transmitted directly to a UL-listed central station service.
16.15.1.15 WIRE CLASS AND CIRCUIT SURVIVABILITY
The fire alarm system-initiating device circuits shall be wired Class A, and alarm-indicating circuits
(visual and audible) shall be wired Class A (NFPA 72). All initiating and indicating circuits shall be
wired to be survivable, as defined in paragraph 13.i, Chapter 18, of the GSA Fire Safety Criteria.
16.15.1.16 CONTROL CENTER
Building(s) must have a control center where fire-related control panels are located. This control center
must be located next to the main entrance and shall be separated from the rest of the building by 1-hour
fire resistive construction. Emergency lighting must be provided. Air-handling, lighting, and fire
protection systems for the emergency control center must be arranged to operate independently of the
effects of fire anywhere in the building.
16.15.1.17 SYSTEM AND OPERATION STANDARDS AND CODES
The fire alarm system and its operation shall be in accordance with NFPA standards, local codes, and
the requirements of GSA handbook PBS-PQ100, Facilities Standards for the Public Building Service.
16.15.1.18 SIGNAL DEVICES
Signal devices shall include pull stations, heat and smoke detectors, and signals tarn, the sprinkler
system fire pump (if required). Smoke detectors shall be provided in the spaces described above, in all
corridors, elevator lobbies, air-handling equipment, and ductwork, and in special spaces as described
in the room data sheets. Heat detectors shall be provided in all mechanical equipment rooms, and in
electrical rooms. All signal devices shall be addressable (i.e., each device shall have its own address,
which shall report to monitoring devices in the English language for clear and quick identification of
the alarm source). The fire alarm central panel shall report the various signals, defined to suit smoke
purge requirements, to the direct digital control (DDC) portion of the building automation system,
which, in turn, will sequence fans and smoke dampers to meet the smoke control requirements. The fire
alarm central panel shall be able to adjust the sensitivity of all smoke detectors.
16.15.1.19 HELD-OPEN FIRE DOORS
Fire doors that are normally held open by electromagnetic devices should be released by the action of
any automatic detection, extinguishing, or manual alarm signaling device. Additional information on
door requirements may be found in Section 8, Doors and Windows, of this Manual. Maintenance,
operation, testing, and equipment shall conform to NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code.
16.15.1.20 ELECTRICAL SUPERVISION/EMERGENCY POWER
The fire alarm wiring and equipment must be electrically supervised. Emergency power must be
provided and must be able to operate the system in the supervisory mode for 48 hours and to operate all
alarm devices and system output signals for at least 90 minutes. All alarm-initiating devices, except
smoke detectors, must be capable of signaling an alarm during a single break or a single ground fault.
16.15.2 SAFETY ALARM SYSTEM
Requirements for this system are as follows.
16.15.2.1 ANNUNCIATOR PANEL
16-29
-------
February 1998
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
A central safely alarm system annunciator panel that will indicate any abnormal condition shall be
designed for the facility. The annunciator panel shall include all relays, switches, and controls, as
required for system operation. The basic operation of the panel shall indicate any abnormal condition
in a function supervised by the annunciator system, causing the associated indication to flash and the
common audible signal to sound continuously. The audible signal can be silenced at any time by the
operation of an "acknowledge" push button. The audible signal will automatically sound again with any
new indication. The visual signal shall become steady when acknowledged.
16.15.2.2 INDICATING PLATES
Indicating plates shall be red with filled-in place characters. All lamps in the annunciator are tested
simultaneously by pressing the remotely mounted "Lamp Test" push button. The annunciator shall
indicate the following systems and equipment statuses:
Fire alarm initiation
HVAC system motors alarms
Emergency generator running
Freezer and cold box temperature alarms
UPS system failure
Fume hood and bio-safety cabinet alarms (critical low-flow)
Location of activated detection, extinguishing or tuajnat alarm device
Exhaust hood and ventilated cabinet failure alarms (critical low-flow)
Exhaust systems for instrument and safety cabinet failure alarms (critical low-flow)
Acid neutralization system alarms
Power failure
Incubator temperature alarm
Gas alarm
Sensor (gas) alarm
Laboratory negative pressure failure alarm
Additional systems to be identified by the agency.
16.15.3 SECURITY SYSTEMS
General requirements and requirements for particular types of systems and facility and site areas are as
follows.
16.15.3.1 . GENERAL
A complete security system shall be designed for the facility. All security systems shall be operated and
monitored from a central point selected by EPA. All security systems shall have a primary and an
emergency power source.
16.15.3.1.1 STANDBY BATTERIES
Standby batteries or a UPS shall be furnished to power the system automatically in the event of
commercial power failure. If the facility has a generator, batteries shall ensure that there is no loss
of power to central equipment until the generator takes over. An alarm shall not be generated when
the equipment transfers from AC to DC operation as it does from DC to AC operation. If the facility
does not have an emergency generator, sufficient batteries shall be provided to power the controller
and necessary devices to prevent unauthorized entry into the building (electronic locks shall stay in
the locked position upon power loss but shall still allow emergency egress). Batteries shall be
chargeable. If batteries lose charge, an alarm condition shall indicate this at the control console.
16.15.3.1.2 CONDUIT OR RACEWAY
All wiring shall be in conduit or surface metal raceway.
16-30
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
16.15.3.2 ACCESS SYSTEMS
A complete building access system shall be designed; this system shall be of the on-line type that reports
to a central controller. The professional designing this system shall have at least 2 to 3 years of
experience in the design of similar installations.
16.15.3.2.1 KEY CARD CONTROL
Key card control shall be provided for all entry to the facility. The key card reader should read key
cards with numbering encoded within the card. The card reader shall be capable of operating in an
off-line mode to allow persons to enter and exit without recording of card numbers. The card reader
shall also be capable of operating in an on-line mode, which causes the card reader to report into a
central controller that provides additional security checks on the key card and provides a printout
of time, date, card number, etc., for the person entering or leaving the premises. The system shall
be of the anti-passback type. In addition, one key access lock and card reader shall be furnished
inside the building for every 5,000 square feet of gross floor area (in addition to the vestibules) and
at entry to controlled computer areas.
16.15.3.2.2 COMPUTERIZED ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
The computerized access control system shall be capable of programming access cards by hour and
day. The system shall be designed with 50 percent spare capacity for both card readers and number
of cards on the system. Key cards, once removed from the system, shall be replaceable without
lowering the integrity of the system or reducing the system's capacity.
16.15.3.2.3 PROXIMITY TYPE CARD READERS
Card readers shall be of the proximity type and shall be suitable for the environment in which they
will be located.
16.15.3.2.4 PROGRAMMABLE KEY PAD, SMALL FACILITIES
For very small facilities, a programmable keypad may be used at each entry to control access to the
system. The keypad shall be suitable for the environment in which it will be located.
16.15.3.3 INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEMS
A design professional with a minimum of 2 to 3 years' experience in the design of similar installations
shall design a complete intrusion detection system. The intrusion detection system shall protect all grade
level doors, operable windows, and openings leading into the facility, as well as roof hatches and roof
. access doors. Operable windows shall be lockable and accessible windows shall be equipped with an
alarm. Roof access doors or hatches shall be secured with heavy-duty hardware and equipped with an
alarm. All floor telecommunications closets shall be locked with dead bolt locking devices. In addition
to installing perimeter protection, the design professional shall equip a minimum of 10 interior doors
with an alarm, as designated by EPA. Door switches shall be of the balanced magnetic type.
16.15.3.3.1 CENTRAL CONTROL, REMOTELY MONITORED
The entire system shall be monitored at the central control desk of the facility and remotely
monitored either on the campus, by an alarm company, or by the local law enforcement agency.
16.15.3.4 SITE ACCESS SYSTEMS
One alarm zone with an infrared beam shall be provided to monitor vehicles passing through the gate
of the fenced area. The beam should be positioned to monitor the entire length of the fence on the side
with the gate. The alarm zone shall be monitored at the central alarm desk (as part of the intrusion
detection system) by remote monitoring of the same type as the intrusion detection system. One zone
and an infrared beam detection system shall be provided for each location where there is a gate in the
fenced-in area of the site.
16.15.3.5 CLOSED-CIRCUIT TELEVISION SECURITY SYSTEMS
16-31
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
A complete closed-circuit television (CCTV) security system shall be designed. The professional
designing this system shall have at least 2 to 3 years of experience in the design of similar installations.
Conduit and wiring shall be installed for the system and a camera shall be installed at all entrance and
exit areas. The location of the camera shall be suitable for monitoring persons' movements when they
are entering or leaving the building. An emergency circuit shall provide power for each camera
location. Conduit, wiring, cameras, and all other appropriate monitoring equipment shall also be
installed in all parking lots, loading docks, and computer areas.
16.15.3.5.1 CAMERAS, FIXED OR PAN-TILT-ZOOM
Cameras shaU be of the fbced or oan-tUt-zoomtvpe, as required for each specific location. Cameras
shall be housed in proper enclosures for the environment in which they are to operate (e.g.,
enclosures with defrosters or heaters, weatherproof enclosures, corrosion-resistant or vandal-proof
enclosures). «
16.15.3.5.2 CAMERAS, MONITORED AND CONTROLLED
All cameras shall be monitored and controlled at the facility's central control station. Monitors shall
be event driven. A video cassette recorder (VCR) shall be provided to record unauthorized access
(control by guard). A 120-volt single-duplex receptacle (emergency power) shall be provided
immediately next to all CCTV camera locations.
16.15.3.5.3 CCTV SECURITY CAMERAS, LOADING DOCKS
CCTV cameras shall be provided to monitor entry and exit from the loading dock areas. CCTV
monitors (in addition to that at the central console for the loading dock areas) shall be provided in
the loading dock office to provide identification of delivery vehicles before the loading dock doors
are opened.
16.15.3.6 PERIMETER SYSTEMS
A complete grade-level perimeter intrusion detection system shall be designed. This system shall be in
addition to the intrusion detection system described above and shall be monitored at the same control
panel provided for the intrusion detection system.
16.15.3.6.1 ULTRASONIC PROTECTION
Ultrasonic protection should be furnished to protect the grade-level, glass-enclosed office area and
any other area that contains exterior glass at grade level. The ultrasonic control panel shall be the
type that controls nominally 20 pairs of transmitters and receivers. Input should be connected into
the main alarm panels as a separate zone. Sufficient transmitter-receiver pairs shall be installed to
protect the entire office area and other grade level areas with exterior glass.
16.15.3.7 DATA PROCESSING
A complete access-intrusion detection system shall be designed for all data processing areas. A card
reader and balanced magnetic switch shall be provided at each door leading into the data processing
areas. Card readers shall be of the proximity type. The system shall be monitored at the central control
station for the facility. The control computer shall be capable of programming access cards by hour and
day. The central controller shall also furnish a printout of time, date, card number, etc., for the person
entering or leaving the data processing area. The system shall be of the anti-passback type.
16.15.3.7.1 COMPUTER AREA DOORS
. If a card access system is being furnished for other doors in the facility, the same cards shall work
for the computer area doors (if so encoded for certain personnel).
16.15.3.7.2 CENTRAL CONTROL DOOR MONITORING
The door shall be monitored at the central control station in case it is left open or the card access
system is bypassed.
16-32
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
16.15.3.8 PARKING CONTROLS
The parking facility(s) shall be enclosed and equipped with a perimeter sensor system and lockable
gates. The gates shaU be equipped with a computerized access control system. EPA card readers shall
be installed in parallel with any other card readers (if required) on all the access roads.
16.15.3.8.1 ACCESS SYSTEM
The parking control access system shall have all the components discussed above for access systems.
For very small facilities, a programmable keypad may be used in lieu of a card reader. The same
cards used for building access shall operate the parking controls (if so encoded).
16.15.4 DISASTER EVACUATION SYSTEM
If the facility is located in an area prone to tornados or hurricanes, a wanting/evacuation alarm system for
the building shall be included. The system shall provide for building evacuation in accordance with the
facility's emergency preparedness plan, which shall be coordinated with the community's emergency
preparedness plan.
16.15.5 EXIT LIGHTING AND MARKINGS
The requirements for exit lighting and marking are contained in NFPA 101 and the local building code.
* Exit lighting and exit signs shall be provided to clearly indicate the location of exits in conformance with
29 CFR §1910.36 and §1910.37 and the Life Safety Code (NFPA 101). The means of egress, exterior
steps, and ramps shall be adequately lighted to prevent accidents.
• Internally illuminated signs shall meet the following criteria:
. Emergency lighting for the area shall conform to OSHA and the Life Safety Code and shall provide
at least 5 footcandles on the sign surface.
• Exit signs shall be at least 8 inches high by 12'A inches long.
- Letters shall be at least 6 inches high.
• The maximum physical distance to a visual sign shall not exceed 100 feet. In addition, an exit sign
shall be visible from all points in the corridor.
END OF SECTION 16
16-33
-------
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
February 1998
Appendix A
Appendix A - Codes, Regulatory Requirements,
Reference Standards, Trade Organizations, and Guides
For all documents listed in this appendix, the latest edition shall be used unless indicated otherwise by the EPA
contracting officer. (Where an acronym may stand for more than one name, use in this document shall be as indicated
in the specific Section.) '
AA Aluminum Association ABMA
900 19th St., NW
Washington, DC 20006
AAA American Arbitration Association
140 W. 51st. St.
New York, NY 10020 ACCA
AABC Associated Air Balance Council
1518K.SI..NW
Washington, DC 20005
ACEA
AAMA Architectural Aluminum
Manufacturers Association
2700 River Rd., Suite 118
Des Plaines, EL 60018
ACEC
AASHTO American Association of State
Highway and Transportation
Officials
444 N. Capitol St., NW, Suite 225
Washington, DC 20001 ACGffl
ABC Associated Builders and Contractors,
Inc.
729 15th St., NW
Washington, DC 20005 ACI
or
Association of Bituminous ACPA
Contractors
2020 K St., NW, Suite 800
Washington, DC 20006
ABCA American Building Contractors ACPA
Association
11100 Valley Blvd., Suite 120
El Monte, CA 91731
American Boiler Manufacturers
Association
950 North Glebe Rd.
Suite 160
Arlington, VA 22203
Air-Conditioning Contractors of
America
1513 16th St.
Washington, DC 20036
Allied Construction Employers
Association
180 N. Executive Drive
Brookfield, Wl 53008
American Consulting Engineers
Council
1015 15th St., NW, Suite 802
Washington, DC 20005
American Conference of Government
Industrial Hygienists
6500 Glenway Ave., Building D-7
Cincinnati, OH 45211
American Concrete Institute
22400 W. Seven Mile Rd.
Detroit, MI 48219
American Concrete Pavement
Association
3800 N. Wilke Rd., Suite 490
Arlington Heights, IL 60004
American Concrete Pipe Association
8320 Old Courthouse Rd.
Vienna, VA 22180
or
A-l
-------
February 1998
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
Appendix A
American Concrete Pumping AHA
Association
P.O. Box 4307
1034 Tennessee St.
Vallejo, CA 94590 AHLI
ACSM American Congress on Surveying and
Mapping
210 Little Falls St. AHMA
Falls Church, VA 22046
ADA Americans with Disabilities Act
(For employment questions)
U.S. Equal Employment Opportunity AI
Commission
ADA Legal Services
1801 L St., NW
Washington, DC 20507 AIA
(For transportation questions)
U.S. Department of Transportation
Office of Assistant General Counsel AIA / NA
for Regulation and Enforcement
400 7th St., SW
Washington, DC 20590
(For public accommodations questions) AIC
U.S. Department of Justice
Office of Americans with Disabilities
Act
P.O. Box 66118 AISC
Washington, DC 20035-6118
(For telecommunications questions)
Federal Communications Commission
Consumer Assistance AISI
1919MSt.,NW
Washington, DC 20554
(For architectural accessibility AITC
questions)
Access Board
1331 F St., NW, Suite 1000
Washington, DC 20004-1111
ALSC
AGA American Gas Association, Inc.
1515 Wilson Blvd.
Arlington, VA 22209
AGC Associated General Contractors of AMCA
America
1957 East St., NW
Washington, DC 20006
American Hardboard Association
520 N. Hicks M
Palantine,IL 60067
American Home Lighting Institute
435 N. Michigan Ave., Suite 1717
Chicago, IL 60611
American Hardware Manufacturers
Association
93 IN. Plum Grove Rd,
Schaumburg, IL 60173
Asphalt Institute
Asphalt Institute Building
College Park, MD 20740
American Institute of Architects
1735 New York Ave., NW
Washington, DC 20006
Asbestos Information Association/
North America
1745 Jefferson Davis Hwy., Suite 509
Arlington, VA 22202
American Institute of Constructors
20 S. Front St.
Columbus, OH 43215
American Institute of Steel
Construction, Inc.
400 N. Michigan Ave.
Chicago, IL 60611
American Iron and Steel Institute
1133 15th St., NW, Suite 300
Washington, DC 20005
American Institute of Timber
Construction
11818 S.E. Mill Plain Blvd.
Vancouver, WA 98684
American Lumber Standards
Committee
P.O. Box 210
Germantown, MD 20874
Air Movement and Control
Association
30 West University Dr.
Arlington Heights, IL 60004
A-2
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
February 1998
Appendix A
ANL Argonne National Laboratory
9800 South Cass Ave.
Argoime, IL 60439
ANS American Nuclear Society
555 North Kensington Ave.
LaGrange Park, IL 60525 ASC
ANSI American National Standards
Institute
1430 Broadway
New York, NY 10018
APA American Plywood Association
P.O. Box 11700
Tacoma,WA 98411
ASCC
APA Architectural Precast Association
• 825 E. 64th St.
Indianapolis, IN 46220
APFA American Pipe Fitting Association ASCE
8136 Old Keene Mill Rd., #B-311
Springfield, VA 22152
API American Petroleum Institute
1220 L. St., NW
Washington, DC 20037
or
American Subcontractors Association
1004 Duke St
Alexandria, VA 22314
Adhesive and Sealant Council, Inc.
1500 Wilson Blvd., Suite 515
Arlington, VA 22209-2495
or
Associated Specialty Contractors
7315 Wisconsin Ave.
Bethesda,MD 20814
American Society of Concrete
Construction
426 S. Westgate
Addison, IL 60101
American Society of Civil Engineers
345 E. 47th St.
New York, NY 10017
AREA American Railway Engineering
Association
50 F St., NW, Suite 7702 ASID
Washington, DC 20001
ARI Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration
Institute
1501 Wilson Blvd., 6th Floor ASME
Arlington, VA 22209
ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers
Association
6288 Montrose Road
Rockville,MD 20852 ASPE
ARTBA American Road and Transportation
Builders Association
525 School St., SW
Washington, DC 20024 ASSE
ASA Acoustical Society of America
500 Sunnyside Blvd.
Woodberry, NY 11797
ASHRAE American Society of Heating,
Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning
Engineers Inc.
179 ITulie Circle, NE
Atlanta, GA 30329
American Society of Interior
Designers
1430 Broadway
New York, NY 10018
American Society of Mechanical
Engineers
United Engineering Center
345 E. 47th St.
New York, NY 10017
American Society of Professional
Estimators
3617 Thousand Oaks Blvd., Suite 210
Westlake, CA 91362
American Society of Sanitary
Engineers
P.O. Box 40362
Bay Village, OH 44140
A-3
-------
February 1998
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
Appendix A
ASTM American Society for Testing and
Materials
1916 Race St.
Philadelphia, PA 19103
AWCI Association of the Wai! and Ceiling
Industries International
25 K St., NE, Suite 300
Washington, DC 20002
AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute
2310 S. Walter Reed Dr.
Arlington, VA 22206
AWS American Welding Society, Inc.
550 N.W. LeJeune Rd.
Miami, FL 33126
AWWA American Water Works Association
6666 West Quincy Ave.
Denver, CO 80235
BHMA Builder's Hardware Manufacturers
Association, Inc.
60 E. 42nd St., Room 511
New York, NY 10165
BIA Brick Institute of America
11490 Commerce Park Dr., Suite 300
Reston,VA 22091
BMRI Building Materials Research
Institute, Inc.
501 5th Ave., #1402
New York, NY 10017
BOCA Building Officials and Code
Administrators International
4051 W. Flossmoor Rd.
Country Club Hills, IL 60477
BRB Building Research Board
2101 Constitution Ave., NW
Washington, DC 20418
BSC Building Systems Council
15th and MSts., NW
Washington, DC 20005
BSI Building Stone Institute
420 Lexington Ave., Suite 2800
New York, NY 10170
CA Congressional Acts
Superintendent of Documents
Government Printing Office
Washington, DC 20402
CABO Council of American Building
Officials
5203 Leesburg Pike, Suite 708
Falls, Church, VA 22041
CDA Copper Development Association,
Inc.
Greenwich Office Park 2
51 Weaver St.
Grant, CT 06836
CERC Coastal Engineering Research
Center
U.S. Army Corps of Engineers
P.O. Box 631
Vicksburg,MA 39180
CFR Code of Federal Regulations
Superintendent of Documents
Government Printing Office
Washington, DC 20402
CGA Compressed Gas Association
Crystal Gateway One, Suite 501
1235 Jefferson Davis Highway
Arlington, VA 22202
CIEA Construction Industry Employers
Association
625 Ensminger Rd.
Tonawanda,NY 14150
CIMA Construction Industry
Manufacturers Association
111 E. Wisconsin Ave., Suite 940
Milwaukee, WI 53202-4879
CISCA Ceilings and Interior Systems
Construction Association
104 Wilmot, Suite 201
Deerfield,IL 60015
CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
1499 Chain Bridge Rd., Suite 203
McLean, VA 22101
A-4
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
February 1998
Appendix A
CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers DIPRA
Institute
1776 Massachusetts Ave., NW
Suite 500
Washington, DC 20036
DOE
CMAA Crane Manufacturers Association of
America
1326 Freeport Road
Pittsburgh, PA 15238
Ductile Iron Pipe Research
Association
245 Riverchase Parkway E., Suite 0
Birmingham, AL 35244
U.S. Department of Energy
1000 Independence Ave., SW
Washington, DC 20585
CPMA Construction Products
Manufacturing Council
P.O. Box 21008
Washington, DC 20009-0508 DOT
CRA California Redwood Association
405 Enfrente Dr., Suite 200
Nevato, CA 94949 EIA
CRI Carpet and Rug Institute
P.O. Box 2048
Dalton, GA 30722-2048 EIMA
CRSI Concrete Reinforced Steel Institutes
933 N. Plum Grove Rd.
Schaumburg, EL 60195
DOE/OSTI DOE/Office of Scientific and
Technical Information
P.O. Box 62
Oak Ridge, TN 37831
EO
EPA
ESCSI
CSI Construction Specifications Institute
601 Madison St.
Alexandria, VA 22314
CTI Ceramic Tile Institute
700 N. Virgil Ave.
Los Angeles, CA 90029
or
Cooling Tower Institute
P.O. Box 73383
Houston, TX 77273
DFI Deep Foundations Institute FAA
P.O. Box 359
Springfield, NJ 07081
DHI Door and Hardware Institute
7711 Old Springhouse Rd. FCC
McLean, VA 22101-3474
U.S. Department of Transportation
400 7th St., SW
Washington, DC 20590
Electronics Industries Association
2001 Eye St., NW
Washington, DC 20006
Exterior Insulation Manufacturers
Association
Box 75037
Washington, DC 20013
Executive Orders
National Archives and Records
Administration
8th St and Pennsylvania Ave., NW
Washington, DC 20408
Environmental Protection Agency
401 M St., SW
Washington, DC 20460
Expanded Shale, Clay and Slate
Institute
6218 Montrose Rd.
Rockville,MD 20852
Federal Aviation Administration
U.S. Department of Transportation
400 7th St., SW
Washington, DC 20590
Federal Construction Council
Building Research Board
National Research Council
2101 Constitution Ave., NW
Washington, DC 20418
A-5
-------
February 1998
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
Appendix A
FEMA Federal Emergency Management
Agency
Federal Center Plaza
500 C St., SW
Washington, DC 20472
FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association
White Lakes Professional Building
3310 Harrison St.
Topeka,KS 66611
FHA Federal Housing Administration
4517thSt.,SW,Rm.3158
Washington, DC 20410
FITS Federal Information Processing
Standards
National Bureau of Standards
Room 64-B, Technology
Gaithersburg, MD 20899
FM Factory Mutual Engineering and
Research
1151 Boston Providence Turnpike
Norwood, MA 02062
FPRS Forest Products Research Society
2801 Marshall Ct.
Madison, WI 53705
FR Federal Register
Superintendent of Documents
U.S. Government Printing Office
710 North Capitol St., NW
Washington, DC 20402
FS Federal Specifications
Attention: NPFC Code 1052
Naval Publications and Forms Center
5801 Tabor Ave.
Philadelphia, PA 19120-5099
FTI Facing Tile Institute
P.O. Box 8880
Canton, OH 44711
GA Gypsum Association
1603 Omngton Ave., Suite 1210
Evanston, IL 60201
GBCA General Building Contractors
Association
36 S. 18th St.
P.O. Box 15959
Philadelphia, PA 19103
GSA General Services Administration
Public Buildings Service
Office of Governmentwide Real
Property Policy and Oversight
19th and FSts.,NW
Washington, DC 20405
HES Health Education Services
P.O. Box 7282
Albany, NY 12224
HPMA Hardwood Plywood Manufacturers
Association
P.O. Box 2789
Reston, VA 22090
International Association of Bridge,
Structural and Ornamental Iron
Workers
1750 New York Ave., NW, Suite 400
Washington, DC 20006
IAEA International Atomic Energy Agency
'Vienna International Center
Wagranerstrasse 5
Post Fach 100
A-1400 Vienna, Austria
IALD International Association of Lighting
Designers
18 E. 16th St., Suite 208
New York, NY 10003
IAPMO International Association of
Plumbing and Mechanical Officials
20001 Walnut DriveS.
Walnut, CA 91789
ICAA Insulation Contractors Association of
America
15819 Crabbs Branch Way
Rockville,MD 20855
ICBO International Conference of Building
Officials
5360 S. Workman Mill Rd.
Whittier.CA 90601
A-6
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
February 1998
Appendix A
ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers
Association
P. O. Box P
South Yarmouth, MA 02664
ICRP International Commission on
Radiological Protection
Maxwell House
FairviewPark
Ehnsford,NY 10523
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers
345 E. 47th St.
New York, NY 10017
IES Institute of Environmental Sciences
940 East Northwest Highway
Mount Prospect, DL 56056
EESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of
North America
345 E. 47th St.
New York, NY 10017
IFI Industrial Fasteners Institute
1505 E. Ohio Building
Cleveland, OH 44114
IHEA . Industrial Heating Equipment
Association
1901 N. Moore St.
Arlington, VA 22209
IILP International Institute of Lath and
Plaster
795 Raymond Ave.
St. Paul, MN 55114
ILIA Indiana Limestone Institute of
America
Stone City Bank Building, Suite 400
Bedford, IN 47421
IMI International Masonry Institute
823 15th St., NW, Suite 1001
Washington, DC 20005
IPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineers
Association
IRF International Road Federation
525 School SL, SW
Washington, DC 20024
ISDSI Insulated Steel Door Systems
Institute
712 Lakewood Center North
14600 Detroit Ave.
Cleveland, OH 44107
LANL Los Alamos National Laboratory
P.O. Box 1663
Los Alamos, NM 87545
LBL Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory
1 Cyclostron Road
Berkeley, CA 94720
LLNL Lawrence Livermore National
Laboratory
Livermore, CA 94550
LPI Lightning Protection Institute
48 North Ayer St.
Harvard, IL 60033
Manufacturers Standardization
Society of the Valve and Fittings
Industry
127 Park St,NE
Vienna, VA 22180
MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers
Association
1230 Keith Building
Cleveland, OH 44115
MCAA Mason Contractors Association of
America
17W601 14th St.
Oakbrook Terrace, IL 60181
or
Mechanical Contractors Association
of America
5410 Grosvenor, Suite 120
Bethesda,MD 20814
MIA Marble Institute of America
33505 State St.
Farmington, MI 48024
A-7
-------
February 1998
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
Appendix A
MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers
Association
60 Revere Dr., Suite 500
Northbrook, IL 60062
MLSFA Metal Lath/Steel Framing
Association
600 S. Federal, Suite 400
Chicago, IL 60605
National Building Material
Distributors Association
1701 Lake Ave., Suite 170
Glenview.IL 60025
National Forest Products Association
1250 Connecticut Ave., NW, Suite 200
Washington, DC 20036
National Housing Rehabilitation
Association
1726 18th St., NW
Washington, DC 20009
National Particlcboard Association
2306 Perkins PI.
Silver Spring, MD 20910
National Wood Window and Door
Association.
205 Touhy Ave.
Park Ridge, EL 60068
NAAMM National Association of Architectural
Metal Manufacturers
600 South Federal St.
Chicago, IL 60605
NACE National Association of Corrosion
Engineers
P.O. Box 218340
Houston, XX 77218
NADC National Association of Demolition
Contractors
•4415 W. Harrison St.
Hillside, IL 60162
or
NADC National Association of Dredging
Contractors
16251 St., NW, Suite 321
Washington, DC 20006
NAEC National Association of Elevator
Contractors
4053 La Vista Rd., Suite 120
Tucker, GA 30084
NAFCD National Association of Floor
Covering Distributors
13-126 Merchandise Matt
Chicago, IL 60654
NAHB National Association of Home
Builders
15th and MSts.,NW
Washington, DC 20005
NAHRO National Association of Housing
Redevelopment Officials
1320 187th St., NW
Washington, DC 20036
NAPA National Asphalt Pavement
Association
68.11 Kenilworth Ave., Suite 620
P.O. Box 517
RiverdaIe,MD 20737
NAPHCC National Association of Plumbing,
Heating, and Cooling Contractors
P.O. Box 6808
Falls Church, VA 22046
NARSC National Association of Reinforcing
Steel Contractors
10382 Main St.
P.O. Box 225
Fairfax, VA 22030
NASA National Aeronautics and Space
Administration
300 East St., SW
Washington, DC 20546
NAVFAC U.S. Naval Facilities Engineering
Command
Attention Cash Sales/Code 1051
Naval Publications and Forms Center
5801 Tabor Ave.
Philadelphia, PA 19120-5099
A-8
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
February 1998
Appendix A
NAWIC National Association of Women in
Construction
327 S. Adams St.
Fort Worth, TX 76104
NBMA National Building Manufacturers
Association
142 Lexington Ave.
New York, NY 10016
NBS National Bureau of Standards
(currently National Institute of
Standards and Technology)
Gaithersburg, MD
NCA National Constructors Association
1101 15th St., NW, Suite 1000
Washington, DC 20005
NCMA National Concrete Masonry
Association
P.O. Box 781
Herndon, VA 22070
NCR? National Council on Radiation
Protection and Measurement
7910 Woodmont Ave., Suite 800
Belhesda, MD 20814
NCSBCS National Conference of State
Building Codes and Standards
481 Carlisle Dr.
Herndon, VA 22070
NEC National Electrical Code
National Fire Protection Association
Batterymarch Park
Quincy, MA 02269
NECA National Electrical Contractors
Association
7315 Wisconsin Ave.
13th Floor, West Building
Bethesda,MD 20814
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers
Association
2101 L St., NW, Suite 300
Washington, DC 20037
NESC National Electrical Safety Code
Institute of Electrical & Electronics
Engineers, Inc.
345 East 47th St.
New York, NY 10017
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
Batterymarch Park
Quincy, MA 02269
NGA National Glass Association
8200 Greenssboro Dr., Suite 302
McLean, VA 22101
Nffl National Institutes of Health
Public Health Service
U.S. Department of Health and Human
Services
Bethesda, MD 20205
NU National Institute of Justice
633 Indiana Ave., NW
Washington, DC 20531
NIOSH National Institute of Occupational
Safety and Health
U.S. Public Health Service
NKCA National Kitchen Cabinet Association
P.O. Box 6830
Falls Church, VA 22046
NLA National Lime Association
3601 N.Fairfax Dr.
Arlington, VA 22201
NLBMDA National Lumber and Building
Material Dealers Association
40 Ivy SL, SE
Washington, DC 20003
NOAA National Oceanic and Atmospheric
Administration
Washington Science Center, Building 5
6010 Executive Blvd.
Rockville, MD 20852
NOFMA National Oak Flooring
Manufacturers Association
P.O. Box 3009
Memphis, TN 38173-0009
A-9
-------
February 1998
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
Appendix A
NPCA National Paint and Coatings
Association
1500 Rhode Island Ave., NW
Washington, DC 20005
NPCA National Precast Concrete
Association
825 E. 64th St.
Indianapolis, IN 46220
NRC U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission
Publications Division
Washington, DC 20555
NRCA National Roofing Contractors
Association
1 OBare Center
6250 River Rd.
Rosemont,IL 60018
NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete
Association
900 Spring St.
Silver Spring, MD 20910
NSA National Security Agency/
Central Security Service
FortMeade, MD 20755
or
National Stone Association
1415 Elliot PL, NW
Washington, DC 20007
NSF National Sanitation Foundation
P.O. Box 1468
34 Plymouth Rd.
Ann Arbor, MI 48015
NSPC National Standard Plumbing Code
Published by: National Association of
Plumbing-Heating-Cooling Contractors
P.O. Box 6808
Falls Church, VA 22040
NSPE National Society of Professional
Engineers
1420 King St.
Alexandria, VA 22314
NTIA National Telecommunications and
Information Administration
Main Commerce Building
Washington, DC 20230
NTIS National Technical Information
Service
5485 Port Royal Rd.
Springfield, VA 22161
NTMA National Terrazzo and Mosaic
Association
3166 Des Plaines Ave., Suite 132
DesPlaines, IL 60018
NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturers'
Association
400 W. Madison St.
Chicago, IL 60606
NWWDA National Wood Window and Door
Association
1400 East Touhy Ave.
Des Plaines, IL 60018
OMB Office of Management and Budget
Old Executive Office Building
Washington, DC 20503
OPCMIA Operative Plasterers' and Cement
Masons4 International Association of
the United States and Canada
1125 17th St., NW, 6th Floor
Washington, DC 20036
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health
Administration
U.S. Department of Labor
200 Constitution Ave., NW
Washington, DC 20201
Pipe Line Contractors Association
4100 First City Center
1700 Pacific Ave.
Dallas, TX 75201
PCA Portland Cement Association
5420 Old Orchard Rd.
Skokie,IL 60077
PCI Precast Concrete Institute
175 W. Jackson Blvd., Suite 1859
Chicago, IL 60604
A-10
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
February 1998
Appendix A
PDCA Painting and Decorating Contractors
of America
7223 Lee Highway
Falls Church, VA 22046
PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute
1106 W. 77th St. Dr.
Indianapolis, IN 46260
PHCIB Plumbing-Heating-Cooling
Information Bureau
303 E. Wacker Dr., Suite 711
Chicago, IL 60601
PMI. Plumbing Manufacturers Institute
800 Roosevelt Rd., Building C, Suite
20
GlenEllyn,IL 60137
PPI Plastics Pipe Institute
355 Lexington Ave. ^
New York, NY 10017
PSIC Passive Solar Industries Council
2836 Duke St.
Alexandria, VA 22314
PTI Post-Tensioning Institute
1717 W. Northern Ave., Suite 218
Phoenix, AZ 85021
RCRC Reinforced Concrete Research
Council
5420 Old Orchard Rd.
Skokie, IL 60077
RCSHSB Red Cedar Shingle and Handsplit
Shake Bureau
515 116th Ave., NE, Suite 275
Bellevue, WA 98004
RFCA Resilient Flooring and Carpet
Association, Inc.
14570 E. 14th St., Suite 511
SanLandro, CA 94570
RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute
966 Hungerford Dr., Suite 12B
Rockville,MD 20850
Scientific Apparatus Makers
Association
225 Reinekers Lane
Suite 625
Alexandria, VA 22314
SBA Systems Builders Association
P.O. Box 117
West Milton, OH 45383
SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress
International, Inc.
900MontclairRd.
Birmingham, AL 35213
SCS Soil Conservation Service
U.S. Department of Agriculture
14th St. and Independence Ave., SW
Washington, DC 20250
SDI Steel Deck Institute
P.O. Box 9506
Canton, OH 44711
or
Steel Door Institute
712 Lakewood Center N.
14600 Detroit Ave.
Cleveland, OH 44107
SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass
Manufacturers Association
111 E. Wacker Dr., Suite 600
Chicago, IL 60601
SJI Steel Joist Institute
1205 48th Ave., N., Suite A
Myrtle Beach, SC 29577
SMA _ Screen Manufacturers Association
655 Irving Park, Suite 201
Chicago, IL 60613-3198
or
Stucco Manufacturers Association
14006 Ventura Blvd.
Sherman Oaks, CA 91423
A-ll
-------
February 1998
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
Appendix A
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
Contractors National Association,
Inc.
8224 Old Courthouse Rd.
Vienna, VA 221*80
SMWIA Sheet Metal Workers International
Association
1750 New York Ave,, NW
Washington, DC 20006
SNL Sandia National Laboratories
P.O. Box 5800
Albuquerque, NM 87185
SPRI Single Ply Roofing Institute
104 WilmotRoad, Suite 201
Deerfield,IL 60015-5195
SSFI Scaffolding, Shoring, and Forming
Institute, Inc.
1230 Keith Building
Cleveland, OH 44115
SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council
4400 5th Ave.
Pittsburgh, PA 15213
SWI Sealant and Waterproofcrs Institute
3101 Broadway, Suite 300
Kansas City, MO 64111
or
Steel Window Institute
1230 Keith Building
Cleveland, OH 44115
TCA Tile Council of America
P.,O. Box 2222
Princeton, NJ 08542
or
TCA Tilt-Up Concrete Association
5420 Old Orchard Rd,
Skokie,IL 60077
TCAA Tile Contractors Association of
America, Inc.
112 N. Alfred St.
Alexandria, VA 22314
TIMA Thermal Insulation Manufacturers
Association
7KirbyPlaza
Mount Kisco, NY 10549
U.S. Department of Labor/
Occupational Safety and Health
Administration
200 Constitution Ave., NW
Washington, DC 20210
U.S. Forest Products Laboratory
One Gifford Pinchot Dr.
Madison, WI 53705-2398
UBC Uniform Building Code
International Conference of Building
Officials
5360 Workman Mill Road
Whittier, CA 90601-2298
UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
333 Pfingsten Rd.
Northbrook, IL 60062
USACE U.S. Department of the Army
Corps of Engineers
20 Massachusetts Ave., NW
Washington, DC 20314
USAF U.S. Department of the Air Force
Manuals may be ordered from
headquarters of any Air Force Base
VMA Valve Manufacturers Association of
America
1050 17th St., NW, Suite 701
Washington, DC 20036
WMA Wallcovering Manufacturers
Association
355 Lexington Ave.
New York, NY 10017
WPCF Water Pollution Control Federation
601 Wythe St.
Alexandria, VA 22314-1994
WRC Water Resources Council,
Hydrology Committee
U.S. Department of the Interior
C St. between 18th & 19th Sts., NW
Washington, DC 20240
A-12
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
February 1998
Appendix A
WRI Wire Reinforcement Institute
8361-A Greensboro Dr.
McLean, VA 22102
WWPA Western Wood Products Association
Yeon Building
522S.W. 5th Ave.
Portland, OR 97204
END OF APPENDIX A
A-13
-------
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Appendix B - Indoor Air Quality Requirements
Appendix B - Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Requirements
B.1 Design Process
The Indoor Air Quality Requirements are organized to correspond to the design and construction process.
This section addresses the design process.
B.1.I GENERAL
A new facility using good building practices in indoor air quality design and operation is required. It is also
the intent that IAQ be achieved without sacrificing other important aspects of the facility. A facility is
required in which indoor air quality is maintained at the best practicable level using currently available
knowledge and proven technology that is cost effective and consistent with the normal function of a
laboratory facility with related office space. As a result, a Quality Assurance/Quality Control Manual shall
be produced. The Indoor Air Quality Control Plan referenced throughout this document shall be contained
in this Manual. The IAQ Plan shall address in detail building materials selection, minimizing introduction
of outdoor air pollution, pre-occupancy procedures to accelerate off-gassing, and operations and
maintenance procedures that limit introduction of harmful chemicals. A number of considerations are
presented here to emphasize the significance in achieving acceptable indoor air quality. These
considerations are followed by primary strategies for IAQ control. They are listed below and discussed in
more detail at various points throughout this section.
B.l.1.1 CONSIDERATIONS FOR ACCEPTABLE INDOOR AIR QUALITY.
Refer to the publication, Building Air Quality: A Guide for Building Owners and Facility Managers.
U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS), Center for Disease Control (CDC), National
Institute of Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) Pub. No. 91-114.
B.I. 1.1.1 The most effective means of indoor air pollution control is to eliminate, reduce, or contain the
sources of indoor air pollution. Evidence must be provided that this strategy has been applied to
every aspect of the building design, construction requirements, and operational requirements. The
overall strategy must include control strategies for outdoor sources, building materials and
equipment, furnishings, occupants, and maintenance, including housekeeping activities that occur
indoors.
B. 1.1.1.1.1 Training of operations and maintenance personnel, as well as occupants, in heating, ventilation,
and air-conditioning (HVAC) operations is a requirement.
B. 1.1.1.1.2 Proper operation and maintenance of the facilities and their HVAC systems are critical to
maintaining IAQ. Training of operations and maintenance personnel is a requirement. Explicit
assumptions regarding operation and maintenance must be made during design and must be
documented in a facilities operation manual. They must reflect a clear intent to maintain indoor
air quality at the highest practicable level.
B. 1.1.1.1.3 Required ventilation air must be delivered to occupants' "breathing zone." This requires careful
attention to the design and installation of the air distribution system and its controls, particularly
at the local level. Innovative approaches to achieving improved "ventilation efficiency" are
sought in order to minimize wasteful and ineffective space air distribution. A clear presentation
of the ventilation system space air distribution concept is a part of the design professional's
responsibilities. (For definition of "breathing zone" and 'Ventilation efficiency" see B.2 -
Supplemental Indoor Air Quality Information.)
B-l
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Appendix B - Indoor Air Quality Requirements
B.U.I.1.4 American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
Standard 62-1989, Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality, is to be considered a part of
. these requirements.
B.I.1.2 PRIMARY STRATEGIES FOR IAQ CONTROL
Primary strategies are as follows:
• Source control
• Ventilation controls
- Outside air supply
• Air cleaning
• Space air distribution
• Operation and maintenance.
B.1.2 SOURCE CONTROL
While it shall be required that all of the above-listed strategies be employed to control IAQ, source control is
considered the most effective control method for most pollutants. Effective source control requires that
potential sources be clearly identified and addressed. It must be demonstrated that the design involved
thorough consideration of sources of indoor pollutants and their control. The discussion on source control
is organized to cover outdoor sources and indoor sources of indoor air pollutants. Potential pollutant
sources shall be examined at each stage of the building design and development process and effective
control strategies shall be utilized.
B.l.2.1 OUTDOOR POLLUTANT SOURCES
B.1.2.1.1 The sources of air pollutants that must be considered are adjacent and nearby stationary pollution
sources, for example, exhausts from other research facilities or from commercial buildings such as
dry-cleaning establishments or restaurants, nearby roadways, parking lots, loading docks, trash
storage, and garage and their motor vehicle traffic patterns. Consideration must be given to
variations in the potential sources over time, including daily, weekly, and seasonal patterns.
B. 1.2.1.2 Temporal and spatial variations in wind direction and velocity, traffic patterns, and emissions from
industrial processes that affect air quality at the site must be considered. The locations and forms of
adjacent buildings that might result in local wind patterns causing reentrainment of the facility's
own exhausts must be considered and addressed. The potential impact that ponds, cooling towers,
cooling coil drip pans, and other potential sites of microbial contamination may have on IAQ must
also be considered. Previous land uses, such as agriculture or industry, might result in emissions
from contaminated soil or groundwater as a potential source of indoor air pollutants. Some
examples of potentially significant prior uses are wood preservation and treatment; solid or
hazardous waste handling, storage, treatment, or disposal; dry-cleaning processes; leather, paint, or
chemical manufacturing; refrigerated storage; gasoline storage or dispensing; and agriculture. Even
nearby building demolition can result in significant site contamination through release of building
materials such as asbestos into air or into soil, which may remain on-site or be backfilled onto it.
B.l.2.1.3 SITE EVALUATION
B.l.2.1.3.1 Solutions must include the potential impact of the site itself on indoor air quality. The prior
history of the site must be disclosed as part of the research and review process (see the
Supplemental Indoor Air Quality Information, Site Evaluation, and Contaminants Source
Distribution subsections later in this appendix). Solutions must include consideration of the
following factors:
• Prior history of the site
B-2
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Appendix B - Indoor Air Quality Requirements
• Off-site and on-site sources of pollution )
• Soils and soil gases (including radon, organic chemicals, metals, and microbes)
• Ambient air quality
• Landscaping (including highly sporulating types of plantings).
B.I.2.1.3.2 The design professional shall review his responsibilities for an Environmental Assessment (EA)
and an Environmental Impact Study (EIS) as described in Section 2, Site Work, of this Manual
(subsection 2.3.1). Also see Chapter 7, paragraph 9, of the Safety Manual for additional
requirements.
B. 1.2.1.4 EXTERIOR DESIGN IMPLICATIONS
Solutions must include the following considerations:
B. 1.2.1.4.1 If this project is a new facility, locate the building on the site as far removed as possible from
pollutant sources, or out of the normal wind patterns coming from pollutant sources. Vegetation
or other screens should be utilized to form a barrier to paniculate matter or to absorb certain
chemicals. Vegetation should be used, where effective, to protect a building from motor vehicle
pollutant sources. Where vegetation is used, potential microbial contamination from it should be
avoided.
B. 1.2.1.4.2 Building designs must include locating air intakes remote from pollution generation points or
areas, creating architectural barriers to direct polluted airflow away from building air intakes,
providing appropriate filtration for identified pollutants, and locating air-pollutant-sensitive
elements away from exterior sources. Air intake locations for both mechanical and natural
ventilation shall not be located near exhaust outlets or where outdoor air pollution plumes are
expected.
B. 1.2.1.4.3 Selection and location of window and door systems must include consideration of their designed
protection against infiltration and the outdoor air pollutants that might pass through the
openings.
B.l.2.1.4.4 The chemical and physical interactions between the building fabric and identified pollutants that
might cause deterioration of the building fabric and systems or that might result in amplification
of the contaminant concentrations in indoor air must be addressed.
B.l.2.2 INDOOR POLLUTANT SOURCES
B. 1.2.2.1 Indoor sources include the building fabric itself, equipment, furnishings, appliances, human
metabolism and activities, consumer products, maintenance materials and processes, pest control
materials, and others.
B. 1.2.2.2 INTERIOR DESIGN APPLICATIONS
B. 1.2.2.2.1 Major approaches to source control for indoor pollutants include building design, careful material
selection, materials modification and treatment; isolation of pollution-generating activities; and
management controls on polluting activities.
B. 1.2.2.2.2 Source reduction involves a variety of design strategies and practices, including the following:
* Source removal
• Product selections
• Substitution
• Product use controls
B-3
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Appendix B - Indoor Air Quality Requirements
• Enclosure
• Encapsulation
• Treatment
• Conditioning.
B. 1.2.2.2.3 The building design must reflect consideration of the IAQ impacts of siting, orientation,
configuration, materials, environmental control, and interior layout. The basic characteristics of
the building—its size, shape, and exterior shell, as well as major environmental control
strategies, including illumination, ventilation, acoustics, and thermal environment—must reflect
the emphasis placed on IAQ. This requires that the preliminary estimates of loads and the
capacities of systems designed to handle them include specific loads related to ventilation
requirements and air cleaning (filtration, precipitators, absorption, or scrubbing, as required by
ambient air and indoor air quality standards referenced in this section and applicable codes and
standards).
B.1.2.2.2.4 Ideally, precipitators, absorbers, and scrubbers should be avoided because of their high
maintenance costs. Where proposed, a cost/benefit study must be submitted.
B.l.2.3 BUILDING MATERIALS EVALUATION
The design professional shall provide descriptions of measures that will be taken to minimize the use of
indoor air pollution sources in the building construction, finishes, maintenance, and operation.
Measures consist of the following four phases.
B.l.2.3.1 It shall be the responsibility of the design professional to review all products and materials and
identify those considered likely to emit toxic or irritating chemicals in the completed facility. The
design professional shall establish a library or repository that is locally available for inspection and
use by the Government. This library shall contain product composition specifications for all
products and materials used in construction. Copies of all specifications shall also be submitted to
the Government.
B. 1.2.3.2 The Government reserves the right to screen all products and materials, based on printed
information from manufacturers and information in the open literature, and to target selected
products for testing.
B.l.2.3.3 The Government reserves the right to require emissions testing of selected products, at no cost to the
Government, to determine chemical content, emissions rate, or change in composition due to
environmental exposure. Based on test results, the Government reserves the right to disallow
installation of a given product or material in the completed facility. All testing will be by the
suppliers, with test guidance provided by the Government. The design professional shall coordinate
this process.
B. 1.2.3.4 Material selection, modification, and handling shall minimize indoor air pollution.
B.l.2.4 RESULTS OF MATERIALS EVALUATION
B. 1.2.4.1 The results of the process must be the selection and appropriate installation of materials that have
low content of toxic or irritating chemicals and that have stable chemicals (low emissions). The
design professional may be required to computer-model selected materials for the purposes of
exposure assessment. Details of the materials evaluation process are presented in the Supplemental
Indoor Air Quality Information presented later in this appendix.
B-4
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines ; \ February 1998
Appendix B - Indoor Air Quality Requirements
B.1.2.4.2 Special procedures available to prevent or remedy problems of indoor air quality that result from
material emissions will be required prior to occupancy of the building. These procedures are .
discussed in the Supplemental Indoor Air Quality Information presented later in this appendix.
B.l.2.5 MATERIALS AFFECTING INDOOR ADR QUALITY
Careful selection and application are required for all interior finish materials and compounds that may
result in indoor air residues. Particular attention should be paid to the following materials:
• Adhesives
• Sealants
• Caulking
* Wood preservatives and finishes
• Pesticides
• Fungicides
• Carpet
• Carpet padding
• Paints
• Insulations: thermal, fire and acoustic
• Wood paneling
• Composite wood products such as particle board, cardboard, wafer board, chipboard, etc.
• Gaskets
• Glazing compounds
• Control joint fillers
• Floor coverings
• Wall coverings
, * Ceiling tiles, panels
• Furniture
* Systems furniture.
B.l.2.6 DESIGN
B. 1.2.6.1 The design of the HVAC system shall minimize conditions conducive to microbial growth, chemical
contamination, and paniculate matter releases, and distribution of such within the building. Designs
shall minimize conditions of accumulated moisture that, together with warmth and darkness,
encourage the growth of microorganisms.
B. 1.2.6.2 Reliable control of humidity shall be provided. Water shall not be permitted to accumulate in drain
pans. Drip or drain pans must be readily maintainable. Carbon-containing materials shall be
avoided in areas where water accumulates.
B. 1.2.6.3 The HVAC system must be readily accessible to allow for maintenance, frequent inspection, and
cleaning of surfaces exposed to the airstream. Care must be taken to avoid use of materials that will
release nonbiological particles into the airstream.
B.1.3 HVAC SYSTEM DESIGN
B.l.3.1 IMPORTANT IAQ ISSUES
Important IAQ issues are as follows:
• The selection and installation of components and materials
• Control of moisture accumulation within the system
• Deliver}' of required outside air to the occupants' breathing zone
• Design of a readily maintainable system
B-5
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Appendix B - Indoor Air Quality Requirements
• Implementation of energy management strategies that do not compromise indoor air quality
• Space air distribution (both supply and return)
• Humidity control
* Isolation zones for IAQ control.
B.l.3.2 VENTILATION STANDARD
B. 1.3.2.1 ASHRAE standard 62-1989, Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality, shall be followed.
Additionally, requirements of Section 1S, Mechanical Requirements, of this Manual shall be
followed. Certain aspects of the ASHRAE standard are highlighted within this document.
B.1.3.2.2 Emphasis on maintenance of ventilation system equipment is presented in terms of "readily
maintainable" installations. This is a change from earlier language, which read "readily accessible."
B.L3.3 OUTSIDE AIR SUPPLY
6.1.3.3.1 The HVAC system design must reflect the anticipated ventilation efficiency as the basis for
assumptions that result in the sizing of equipment that impacts outside air supply quantities.
B.I.3.3,2 The general office minimum ventilation rate is 20 cubic feet per minute (cfm) per person. This
refers to the quantity of outside air actually delivered to the breathing zone. Maintaining this rate
will require a larger quantity of outside air at the building intakes to compensate for ventilation
efficiency below 100 percent. Twenty cfm per person is the required minimum quantity of outside
air delivered to the occupants under conditions of minimum outdoor air supply. Where multiple
spaces with dissimilar ratios of outside air to total air are served by a common air supply system, air
quality shall be determined by Equation 6-1 of ASHRAE standard 62. Performance will be
determined by tracer gas injection at the supply fan and measurement at representative locations.
B. 1.3.3.3 It is important to note that the minimum outside air requirements in the ASHRAE standard are
predicated on an indoor environment that is free of significant sources of pollution.
B.l.3.3.4 The presence of unavoidable sources of pollutants will require a higher percentage of outside air
supply. Thus, the HVAC system must be capable of providing and sustaining higher outdoor air
supply rates.
B.l.3.4 AIR CLEANING
B. 1.3.4.1 The facility will utilize the most technologically advanced and cost-effective techniques to minimize
the presence of gas, vapor, and paniculate phase pollutants to the maximum practical extent.
B. 1.3.4.2 The trade-offs between cleaning and recirculating return air and conditioning outside air vary greatly
from time to time. The HVAC system and the building automation system (BAS) must be capable of
detecting critical factors that will allow the automatic selection of the most cost-effective mix of air
cleaning, outside air supply volume, and recirculated air. The critical factors are the thermal
properties and contaminant contents of both the outside air and the return air relative to the design
conditions.
B.I.3.4.3 OUTSIDE AIR CONTAMINANTS
Air-cleaning devices (e.g., scrubbers) may be required that are capable of removing outdoor
pollutants that periodically exceed established standard (National Ambient Air Quality Standards
[NAAQS] and Table E-l, Ambient Air Quality Guidelines) from ASHRAE standard 62-1989. This
may involve the provision of air cleaning beyond the usual panel type paniculate filters currently
used in most commercial building. However, as stated earlier, precipitators, absorption and
B-6
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Appendix B - Indoor Air Quality Requirements
scrubbing should be avoided because of their high maintenance costs. Where proposed, a
cost/benefit study must be submitted.
B. 1.3,4.4 RE CIRCULATION AIR CONTAMINANTS
Furthermore, additional air-cleaning technologies must be used, if necessary, to achieve acceptable
indoor air quality where recirculation air contaminant levels result in supply air quality problems.
B.l.3.5 SPACE AIR DISTRIBUTION
B. 1.3.5.1 This method of indoor contaminant control presents a large potential for significant improvement in
ventilation efficiency and, thereby, in indoor air quality. Poor ventilation efficiency results in
deterioration of indoor air quality and increased operational costs. The Government requires that the
design professional address the ventilation efficiency of the system.
B. 1.3.5.2 The Government requires that Air Distribution Performance Index (ADPI) exceed 80 percent and
that the design professional describe the approach and provide calculations.
B. 1.3.5.3 Ceiling plenums may be used for return air provided that sufficient return dampers and duct headers
are provided to permit accurate air balancing and provided that all code wiring provisions are
followed for smoke and fire safety.
B.I.4 INDOOR AIR QUALITY REFERENCE GUIDELINES
The design professional shall review and respond to the EPA publication, Building Air Quality: A Guide
for Building O\vners and Facility Managers, U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS),
Center for Disease Control (CDC), National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) Pub. No.
91-114, as well as the American Institute of Architects (ALA) documents composing the Environmental
Resource Guide.
B.2 Supplemental Indoor Air Quality Information
B.2.1 GENERAL
The accompanying material has been provided to advise users of this Manual on the nature of testing and
evaluative procedures to which the facility may be subject.
B.2.1.1 SITE EVALUATION
B.2.1.1.1 Valuable air quality and weather data are available from local air quality monitoring and regulatory
agencies, National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration monitoring stations, airports, harbors,
and even certain resort and athletic establishments. Data on prior uses of sites may be available
through historic building surveys or documentation, older fire insurance maps, municipal land use
records, assessors' and recorders' files, and other state and local health, waste disposal, or hazardous
materials control agencies.
B.2.1.1.2 A set of manuals for air quality considerations in residential planning was prepared for the United
States Department of Housing and Urban Development in 1978. While written for the residential
environment, the methods and procedures described there will be useful for any type of building.
These manuals provide illustrative base maps, calculations sheets, and other aids for the preparation
of a comprehensive assessment.
B.2.1.1.3 The following references are for the manuals cited above; they will be helpful in the site evaluation.
Thuillier, R.H. 1978. Air Quality Considerations in Residential Planning, Volume 1. Guide for
Rapid Assessment of Air Quality at Housing Sites. Volume 2. Manual for Air Quality
B-7
-------
•• Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 . and Planning Guidelines
Appendix B - Indoor Air Quality Requirements
Considerations for Residential Locations. Volume 3. Scientific Support and Documentation.
Washington, D.C.: United States Department of Housing and Urban Development.
B.2.I.2 CONTAMINANTS SOURCE DISTRIBUTION
Table B.2.1.2, Sources Contributing to Indoor Air Pollution, provides a summary of likely sources of
indoor air pollution.
Table B.2.1.2 Sources Contributing to Indoor Air Pollution
Type of Location Description and Characteristics •
Outdoor Air Cyclical
Daily traffic patterns
Diurnal thermal patterns
Seasonal thermal patterns
Seasonal air quality variations
Daily or seasonal releases from neighboring structures or land
Episodic
Extreme weather conditions
Accidental releases
Base Building Building materials and equipment
Exposed to interior
Exposed to air distribution system
Concealed .
Occupants and Their Activities Metabolic activity
Work, recreational, food preparation, personal hygiene
Operation of machines and equipment
Building Maintenance Routine cleaning
Dusting, vacuuming
Waxing and polishing
Repair of building equipment
Treatment for pests, odors
B.2.1.3 BUILDING MATERIALS EVALUATION PROCESS
B.2.1.3. 1 PHASE 1 - IDENTIFYING TARGET PRODUCTS
B.2.1.3.1,1 The first step is to become familiar with the overall project, design, and space planning program;
building design; and construction schedule. This understanding is essential for other tasks as
well as for the building materials evaluation work. The simultaneous timing of certain
construction tasks in relation to installation of major interior furnishings and workstation
components increases the potential for retention of airborne contaminants from construction
processes on large-surface area materials such as carpets and textiles until long after initial
occupancy. Table B.2.1.3.1.1, Potential Sources of Indoor Air Pollutants, shows pollutant
sources warranting particular attention.
B-8
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Appendix B * Indoor Air Quality Requirements
Table B.2.1.3.1.1 Potential Sources of Indoor Air Pollutants
Adhesives
Sealants
Caulking
Wood preservatives and finishes
Pesticides
Fungicides
Carpet
Carpet padding
Paints
Insulations: thermal, fire, and acoustic
Wood paneling
Composite wood products such as particle
board, chipboard, wafer board, cardboard, etc.
Gaskets
Glazing compounds
Control joint fillers
Floor coverings
Wall coverings
Ceiling tiles, panels
B.2.1.3.1.2 This is followed by a review of the design-professional-intended use of major interior finish
materials including floor coverings, wall coverings, ceiling system, HVAC duct materials, and
furnishings. Considerations include the criteria for selection of certain products (for example,
maintenance, cost, acoustics, aesthetics, and functional performance) as well as the quantities
and applications contemplated. This review phase concludes with identification of products and
materials that might emit toxic or irritating chemicals in the completed building. At this point,
all questionable products and materials are considered for further screening.
B.2.1.3.1.3 The "Environmental Resource Guide" published by AIA may be of assistance in evaluating
building materials.
B.2.1.3.2 PHASE 2 - SCREENING TARGET PRODUCTS
B.2.1.3.2.1 GENERAL
Screening of major components of the building fabric and furnishings is done by determining the
following:
• Components' quantity and distribution in the building
• Chemical composition
• Stability of chemical substances of concern
• Toxic or irritation potential of components' major chemical constituents.
The result of this screening process is the identification of products and materials for further
investigation.
B.2.1.3.2.2 PHASE 2 (A) - QUANTITATIVE ASSESSMENT
Quantitative use and distribution assessment involves identifying the major classes of materials,
furnishings, and finishes to be used and determining the extent of use, use per unit of floor area,
and potential exposure of occupants due to the nature of the product use.
B.2.1.3.2.3 PHASE 2 (B) - CHEMICAL CONTENT
At this phase, chemical content is assessed from published general information on building
products and materials, information obtained from the building's interior designers, or
manufacturers' and suppliers' product literature and data sheets. The last are obtained by
requiring all potential vendors to provide Manufacturer's Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs) for all
products assembled by them and the names of suppliers of each product not assembled by them.
Additionally, manufacturers should be required to provide contact information for each of their
suppliers and to request the contact individual to cooperate with the design team. These
secondary suppliers and manufacturers are contacted and additional MSDSs and other
information are obtained.
B-9
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Appendix B - Indoor Air Quality Requirements
MSDSs are U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) mandated documents
listing all hazardous substances contained in the product they cover, they are generally available
for most products of interest. OSHA requires that MSDSs be available for most products of
interest. OSHA requires that MSDSs be available to workers for all hazardous substances to
which the worker will be exposed. Thus, whether in a factory or at the construction site, each
substance used in building materials, products, and furnishings is theoretically covered by an
MSDS.
B.2.1.3.2.4 PHASE 2 (C) - CHEMICAL STABILITY
Stability (chemical emissions) assessments are done by reviewing the vapor pressure and
molecular weight data for chemicals of concern, as identified on the MSDSs. Many sources can
be used to obtain the data:
• American Conference of Government Industrial Hygienists, 1988. Industrial Ventilation:
A Manual of Recommended Practice.
• National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health 1982,1984. Registry of Toxic Effects of
Chemical Substances. 1981-1982. Volumes 1-3 (RTECS) plus the RTECS 1983-4
Supplement (2 volumes).
• National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health 198S. Pocket Guide to Chemical
Hazards.
• Sax, N.I. 1979. Dangerous Properties of Industrial Materials. 5th Edition. New York: Van
Nostrand Reinhold.
* Verschueren, K. 1983. Handbook of Environmental Data on Organic Chemicals. 2nd
Edition. New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold.
Additional information on potential emissions into building air is obtained by reviewing
emissions test reports and articles in the published literature. See especially:
• Tucker, W.G. 1986. "Research Overview: Sources of Indoor Air Pollutants." in
Proceedings oflAQ '86, Managing Indoor Air for Health and Energy Conservation. Atlanta:
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.
• Levin, H. 1987. "The Evaluation of Building Materials and Furnishings in New Buildings."
inlAQ '87, Practical Control of Indoor Air Quality. Atlanta, Georgia: American Society
for Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers.
Emission factors can vary significantly—up to a factor of 1,000—for different brands of similar
products. Therefore, it is important to obtain as much information as possible about the identity
and quantities of constituents in a given product. While such a paper evaluation cannot be
definitive, it can be useful in selecting potentially acceptable products. It also can be useful in
identifying specific compounds to be measured if laboratory testing is performed.
B.2.1.3.2.5 PHASE 2 (D) EXPOSURE AND TOXICITY EVALUATION
B.2.1.3.2.5.1 Toxicity and irritation potential of the constituent compounds are evaluated using standard
reference sources (ACGM 1980). Exposure evaluations by computer modeling may also be
required.
B-10
-------
Architecture, Engineering.
and Planning Guidelines ; February 1998
Appendix B - Indoor Air Quality Requirements
• American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists, Inc. Documentation of the
threshold limit values, 4th ed. Cincinnati.
• Gosselin, G.D., and F.C. Clayton, eds. 1981. Patty's Industrial Hygiene and Toxicology.
3d rev. ed. Volumes 1-3. New York: John Wiley and Sons.
• NIOSH. 1983. Registry of Toxic Effects of Chemical Substances. 1981-2, Volumes 1-3.
Cincinnati: National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health, U.S. Public Health
Service.
• NIOSH. 1985. Registry of Toxic Effects of Chemical Substances. 1983-4. Supplement,
Volumes 1-2. Cincinnati: National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health, U.S.
Public Health Service.
• NIOSH. 1985. Pocket Guide to Chemical Hazards. Cincinnati: National Institute of
Occupational Safety and Health, U.S. Public Health Service.
• Olishifski, J.B., ed 1979. Fundamentals of Industrial Hygiene. National Safety Council.
• Sax, N.I. 1979. Dangerous Properties of Industrial Materials. 5th ed. New York: Van
Nostrand Reinhold.
• Sparks, L. 1989. IAQModel.
B.2.1.3.2.5.2 . Sax (1979), for example, lists a "summary of toxicity statement" or rating (THR) for each
substance covered. Ratings of "none," "low," "moderate," "high," or "unknown" are given.
The route or routes of entry are given for specified toxic effects. LD50 (lethal dose for 50% of
experimental animals) are given for various exposure routes, tests and experimental species.
Human irritation potential and target organs or sites are also listed, and carcinogenicity and
mutagenicity assessment is reported.
B.2.1.3.2.5.3 NIOSH's Registry of Toxic Effects of Chemical Substances 1981-1982. Volumes 1-3
(RTECS) plus the RTECS 1983-4 Supplement (2 volumes) provide an annotated listing of
toxicity and irritation research for tens of thousands of chemical substances. RTECS also
provides a comprehensive list of alternative trade and generic names by which products may
be known or marketed, chemical formulas, and cross-references to the Chemical Abstracts
Service (CAS) number for each chemical.
B.2.1.3.2.5.4 A database on building materials emission rates is now being developed by EPA. There is
also a large database developed by the National Aeronautics and Space Administration
(NASA) for spacecraft design and operation. Work currently in progress will make both of
these databases accessible and useful at this point in the process. From this review,
determinations are made regarding materials that will require laboratory testing according to
the outcome of the combination of reviewed factors. A combination of high volatility and
moderate toxicity would result in further consideration of the substance and the product. A
very low volatility and moderate toxicity would be examined in terms of the quantity of the
product and the quantity of the substance present in that product. No algorithm has been
established for this evaluation; a qualitative assessment is the most reasonable approach given
the limited amount of data currently available.
B.2.1.3.2.6 RESULTS
The results of this screening process allow identification of the products most likely to emit
significant quantities of irritating or toxic substances. These are likely to be the carpet system
B-ll
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 '_ and Planning Guidelines
Appendix B - Indoor Air Quality Requirements
(carpet, pad or backing, and adhesive), workstation (office furnishings) work surfaces and
interior partitions, and ceiling tiles. Shelving materials, adhesive, caulking compounds, and
some wood finishes are also materials of concern. These materials should be evaluated by
emissions testing.
B.2.1.3.3 PHASE 3 - EMISSIONS TESTING
B.2.1.3.3.1 Test methods include bulk testing and environmental chamber and headspace air sampling. Air
sampling can also be done in the first completed building prior to, during, and after materials
installation to develop air quality profiles of the installation. Chamber tests can be conducted in
a very small chamber (less than 0.1 cubic meter) or in a medium-size chamber capable of
accommodating full-size samples.
B.2.1.3.3.2 Cut samples create problems of distorted ratios between surface area and edges, and cuts through
materials can expose materials not normally exposed in the assembled product. Sealing the
edges reduces some of these effects. Room-size chambers can also be used, but they are
' expensive and require larger quantities of materials.
B.2.1.3.3.3 Ratios of materials, surface area, and weight to chamber volume and wall area should be kept
reasonably similar to the ratios found in actual building situations. Multiple materials tests may
also be run to determine "sink" effects, the tendency of materials to absorb airborne substances on
their surfaces and rerelease them to the air.
B.2.1.3.3.4 Air movement, temperature, and relative humidity, as well as outdoor (or pure) air exchange..
rates in the chamber should approximate those found in buildings. Airflow should be controlled
within the chamber to ensure good mixing and to minimize unusually high velocities at material
surfaces. Guidance is available from A Standard Guide for Small-Scale Environmental Chamber
Measurements of Organic Emissions from Indoor Materials /Products now under development
by ASTM Subcommittee D-22.05 on Indoor Air (1916 Race St., Philadelphia, PA 19103).
B.2.1.3.3.5 Material samples are generally conditioned by being placed in the chamber at controlled
temperature and under forced air circulation for several hours or even days prior to testing. In
order to best meet the purpose of the testing, handling of the material should resemble that
employed in actual installations of the materials in buildings. Products are stored in factory
containers until testing. Once opened, they are kept in a normally ventilated room containing
typical, new office furnishings until additional testing is conducted. Complete and careful
recordkeeping is essential to interpretation of testing results.
B.2.1.3.4 ANALYSIS AND RECOMMENDATIONS
Based on the results of the four-phase materials evaluation process, products can be selected,
modified, treated, or otherwise managed to improve indoor air quality.
B.2.1.3.5 DEFINITIONS
B.2.1.3.5.1 BREATHING ZONE
The air space bounded by the lower and upper horizontal planes where human respiration occurs.
For office space, this zone is between 42 and 64 inches above the floor. All breathing zone
measurements shall be made at a height of 42 inches.
B.2.1.3.5.2 ROOM VENTILATION EFFICIENCY
Percentage of the outdoor air entering the room per person that actually ventilates the breathing
zone.
B-12
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Appendix B - Indoor Air Quality Requirements
B.2.1.3.5.3 OVERALL (BUILDING) VENTILATION EFFICIENCY
Percentage of the outdoor air entering the building per person that actually ventilates the
breathing zone.
B.2.1.3.5.4 VOLATILE ORGANIC CHEMICALS
Such compounds having vapor pressures above 0.1 mm of mercury.
B.2.1.3.5.5 SEMTVOLATILE ORGANIC CHEMICALS
Such compounds having vapor pressures of less than 0.1 mm of mercury down to .0000001 mm
of mercury.
B.3 Construction Process
B.3.1 GENERAL
The construction process offers many opportunities to observe and correct problems before the building is
completed and occupied. As part of the Quality Assurance/Quality Control Manual, a review of change
orders, shop drawings and other submittals, and installations in the field shall be used to avoid construction
and occupancy delays, call-backs, and problems in the occupied building.
B.3.1.1 CHANGE ORDERS, SHOP DRAWINGS
B.3.1.1.1 Changes made and details supplied by contractors or designers during construction can significantly
affect indoor air quality. Changes made in response to previously anticipated problems or events
during construction must meet the design intent and the established performance criteria outlined in
the IAQ Quality Assurance/Quality Control Manual.
B.3.1.1.2 The design professional must review, evaluate, and follow-up on change orders, field orders, and
shop drawing approval requests for items determined to be significant to indoor environmental
quality. These include HVAC system design and components, insulations, sealants, finish materials,
and furnishings, among others. The list of items requiring special attention with respect to IAQ
shall have been identified in the IAQ Quality Assurance/Quality Control Manual and the procedures
and criteria for their selection specified.
B.3.2 COMMISSIONING
B.3.2.1 Simultaneous thermal and air balance must include complete system balancing under heating, cooling,
and economizer cycles. Limitations imposed by weather conditions shall be overcome by completion of
the balance work at the earliest available opportunity.
B.3.2.2 Effective training programs must be included in control system and HVAC equipment construction
contracts.
B.3.2.3 Evidence that the facility's ventilation system is fully functional and that air quality is acceptable prior
to initial occupancy of any specific area will be the responsibility of the design professional. This will be
accomplished through performance testing during or immediately after the "commissioning" of the
completed facility.
B.3.2.4 While no specifics for performance verification are included in the proposed OSHA 29 CFR indoor air
quality standard, it is the intent that the actual facility be measured prior to occupancy and periodically
after occupancy to determine IAQ conformance to ASHRAE, the requirements of this document, and
other specified code and Governmental requirements in force.
B-13
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Appendix B - Indoor Air Quality Requirements
B.3.3 AIR-OUT PROCEDURES
Refer to the requirements of Chapter 4, paragraph 3.b, and Chapter 7, paragraph 3.e(4), of the Safety
Manual for off-gassing.
B.3.3.1 An IAQ control procedure known as the "air-out" will be employed after completion of the building,
commissioning of the equipment, and installation of major furnishings.
B.3.3.2 The purpose of the air-out is to remove chemical emissions from materials in the building in order to
reduce occupant exposure to these chemicals once occupancy commences. The air-out is achieved by the
use of adequate ventilation for an extended period of time. This will require an additional time period of
1 to 3 weeks after commissioning and prior to occupancy.
B.3.3.3 Some material, such as carpets and other flooring systems, may require elevated air temperatures to
accelerate their chemical emissions. Refer to the IAQ Quality Assurance/Quality Control Manual
and/or the building acceptance test manual for appropriate recommendations.
B.3.3.4 Supplemental air movement devices such as portable fans shall be used to increase airflow within
enclosed spaces to improve the efficacy of the air-out procedure.
B.3.3.5 The air-out must be carefully planned and conducted to avoid adverse effects on building components
and equipment. Refer to the IAQ Quality Assurance/Quality Control Manual and/or building
acceptance test manual.
B.3.3.6 Such a process requires careful planning of commissioning and occupancy. The Government will
provide an occupancy schedule for purposes of planning the air-out process.
END OF APPENDIX B
B-14
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines . February 1998
Appendix C - Room Data Sheets
Appendix C - Room Data Sheets
C.1 General
This section contains the room data sheets for various typical functional layouts for EPA laboratories and
laboratory support spaces. These data sheets should be used as guides and references during the
programming and design process of a specific project Final laboratory layouts must be developed with the
individual users and their research requirements as provided in Section 1, General Planning and Design
Data, of this Manual. Specific criteria and requirements should be verified by the design team with EPA,
local, state, and federal regulatory agencies.
C.2 Typical Room Requirements
C.2.1 ROOM DATA SHEETS
The room data sheets for typical room arrangements are shown in the following laboratory and laboratory
support room layouts. Specific requirements, developed during the programming process with the
individual user of the room, shall be in accordance with Section 1, General Planning and Design Data, of
this Manual. The final layouts for these areas will be the responsibility of the design professional with
approval by EPA.
C.2.2 STANDARDS AND SYMBOLS
Standard requirements for each area or room, as indicated in the various sections of this Manual, must also
be defined for each specific laboratory facility Program of Requirements (POR). A listing and definitions of
typical standard requirements, symbols, and abbreviations are provided in the following subsections as
examples.
C.3 Definition of Standard Requirements
AH standard requirements shall be in accordance with codes and with all other requirements of this
document. The narrative description of requirements in this section and elsewhere in this Manual shall take
precedence over drawings. If an item is described in the narrative but not shown in a drawing, that is not to
be taken as a waiver of the requirement. The schematic drawings are provided for illustrative purposes
only.
C.3.1 LABORATORY CLASSIFICATION STANDARD
The required construction for all laboratory units shall be classified as Fire Hazard Class B laboratories per
NFPA 45.
C.3.2 ARCHITECTURAL STANDARDS
The following typical standards may be modified in accordance with specific project requirements.
C.3.2.1 FLOORING
Provide chemical-resistant vinyl tile or seamless vinyl flooring. When a seamless vinyl floor material is
required, the base shall also be seamless and integrally coved. Floor and base materials are described in
Section 9, Finishes, of this Manual.
C.3.2.2 BASE
Provide 4-inch-high vinyl or rubber base with matching end stops and preformed or molded corner
units.
C-l
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 • and Planning Guidelines
Appendix C - Room Data Sheets
C.3.2.3 WALLS
Provide masonry or gypsum wallboard partitions extending from the floor to the underside of structural
slab. Wall surfaces shall be painted with semigloss enamel paint. In instrumentation rooms, where
sound absorption is required, walls shall be properly attenuated Reverberating wall areas should be
reduced to a minimum. See also Partitions in Section 1, General Planning and Design Data, of this
Manual for flame spread and smoke development specifications.
C.3.2.4 CEILING
Finished ceilings shall be suspended acoustical tile system. Tiles shall be of a nonflaking material.
Ceilings in extraction, preparation, glassware washing, microbiology, and similar wet laboratories shall
be of water-resistant tile materials or painted gypsum wallboard. Ceiling height in all laboratory spaces
shall be a minimum of 9 feet 8 inches.
C.3.2.5 DOORS
Open doors should not protrude more than 6 inches into exit corridors. Door sizes and hardware are as
follows:
• Hallway access doors: pair doors; 3 feet (active) with 1 foot panel (top and bottom bolts at inactive);
wire glass (4-inch-by-25-inch or 5-inch-by 20-inch vision panel); no threshold; Americans with
Disabilities Act (ADA)~compliant hardware; automatic closure.
• Interconnecting (between laboratories): 3 feet; push plate; vision panel; dual swing.
• Interconnecting (between blocks): 4 feet (minimum) with panic bar hardware; automatic closures.
* Exterior fire doors: 4 feet with panic bar hardware; automatic closures.
• All doors shall be a minimum height of 7 feet.
C.3.2.6 CASEWORK
Laboratory casework shall be of modular design and interchangeable. Standard casework shall be of
metal construction; room data sheets will indicate exceptions (wood or approved plastic laminate) to
these requirements. Casework shall be as described in Section 10, Specialties, of this Manual under
Laboratory Casework. Unless otherwise noted in the room data sheets, peninsulas shall not have reagent
shelves. Six-inch drawers are standard in the base drawer units. All units shall include label holders on
all drawers and doors.
• Vented Storage Cabinets: Vented acid/base storage cabinets shall be 3-foot-wide metal cabinets.
The inner surfaces of the cabinet shall be factory coated to resist acid/base fumes and spills. One
adjustable shelf shall be provided. Venting shall be as for vented chemical storage cabinets.
• Countertops: Man-made stone impregnated with chemical (e.g., acids, bases, solvents) resistant
epoxies. Countertops adjacent to sinks shall have grooved drainboards. Casework along walls shall
have a 4-inch-high backsplash.
• Knee Space: Unless otherwise noted in specific room data sheets, knee spaces shall be 3 feet in
length and 29 inches in height.
C.3.2.7 EMERGENCY RESPONSE EQUIPMENT CLOSETS
Hallway closets approximately 3 feet by 3 feet shall be located throughout the laboratory block, with
equal travel distance between closets. These closets will house laboratory supplies for spill cleanup.
C-2
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Appendix C - Room Data Sheets
C.3.3 MECHANICAL STANDARDS
C.3.3.1 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)
The laboratory HVAC system shall be designed as a one-pass air system with exhaust through hoods
where hoods are used. HVAC systems should be continuously operational 24 hours a day, 7 days a
week, summer and winter. Design temperatures shall be as follows:
C.3.3.1.1 Every laboratory room shall be controlled individually in accordance with the following: summer:
72 degrees Fahrenheit (°F) dry bulb (db) ± 2°F and 50 percent relative humidity (RH) ± 5 percent;
winter: 72 °F db ± 2°F and 30 percent RH ± 5 percent. For laboratories that are primarily
instrumentation rooms, the standard shall be 72 °F db ± 2°F.
C.3.3.1.2 See also Mechanical Requirements, Section IS, of this Manual under Load Calculations for
additional requirements.
C.3.3.2 EMERGENCY EYE/FACE WASH
Emergency eye/face wash stations shall be provided at a minimum of one per single module (308 net
usable space feet [NUSF]) in accessible locations. These stations shall be away from fume hoods, shall
require no more than 10 seconds to reach, and should be within a travel distance of no greater than SO
feet from the hazard. See Section IS, Mechanical Requirements, of this Manual for additional
requirements.
C.3.3.3 EMERGENCY SHOWERS
Emergency showers shall be provided in all work areas where, during routine operations or foreseeable
emergencies, areas of the body may come into contact with a substance that is corrosive or severely
irritating to the skin or that is toxic by skin absorption. Emergency showers shall be in accessible
locations, away from fume hoods; shall require no more than 10 seconds to reach; and should be within
a travel distance of no greater than 50 feet from the hazard. See Section 15, Mechanical Requirements,
of this Manual for additional requirements.
C.3.3.4 DEIONIZED WATER SYSTEM
A deionized water (DI) system shall be provided at a resistivity > 10 megaohms at tap. Refer to Section
IS, Mechanical Requirements, of this Manual under Deionized Water (DI) System for specific
requirements. This system may be a centralized system or several decentralized systems depending on
the requirements of the specific laboratory facility.
C.3.3.5 NONFLAMMABLE-GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
Outlets shall be provided as specified in the room data sheet (exact location to be determined by the
Government during design stage). See also Section 15, Mechanical Requirements, of this Manual for
additional requirements. This system may be a centralized system or several decentralized systems
depending on the requirements of the specific laboratory facility.
C.3.3.6 FIRE PROTECTION
The entire laboratory facility shall be sprinklered. Instrumentation laboratories shall have a preaction
sprinkler system. Portable fire extinguishers shall be provided in all laboratory rooms. Refer to
Section 10, Specialties, under Portable Fire Extinguishers, and Section IS, Mechanical Requirements, of
this Manual for additional requirements.
C.3.3.7 FUME HOODS
All fume hoods called for in the specific design criteria of this document shall satisfy all requirements
stated in Section 15, Mechanical Requirements, of this Manual under Laboratory Fume Hoods.
C-3
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 ' and Planning Guidelines
Appendix C - Room Data Sheets
• Fume hoods shall be equipped with a low exhaust flow safety alarm system designed to signal unsafe
operating conditions whenever fume hood velocity falls below 70 percent of specified design value.
The alarm system shall consist of an audible and visual alarm to indicate malfunction or unsafe
operating conditions. Additional specific standard utility and service requirements shall be indicated
for each specific laboratory facility project.
• Noise Control. The noise level at the face of the hood shall not exceed 70 decibels (dB) with the
system operating, nor shall it exceed 55 dB at benchtop level elsewhere in the laboratory room.
C.3.3,8 LABORATORY SERVICE FITTINGS
Laboratory service fittings for piped utilities (e.g., water faucets and spigots, gas jets or nozzles, etc.)
shall have a solvent, and acid-resistant epoxy-powder coating or shall be made of poiyvinyl chloride
(PVC) or equivalent corrosion-resistant materials where required.
C.3.4 ELECTRICAL STANDARD
C.3.4.1 ELECTRICAL OUTLETS
Laboratory standard electrical outlets shall be duplex convenience 20 ampere (amp)/120V outlets in
surface metal raceways as defined in Section 16, Electrical Requirements, of this Manual. These outlets
should be provided in addition to specific electrical outlets called for or shown in the respective room
data sheets, and in addition to outlets needed to feed the equipment used in each room. These outlets
shall be located either on the reagent shelf or, if no reagent shelf is required, 8 inches above countertop
level when base cabinets are used, and 44 inches above floor level in other locations. The maximum
spacing between outlets shall be 3 feet.
Additional requirements are as follows:
• Peninsulas Without Reagent Shelf. Provide a quadruplex pedestal or other type of outlet every 3 feet
in the center of the peninsula; pedestal units shall have brass, waterproof covers.
• Peninsulas With Reagent Shelf. Provide duplex outlets in surface metal raceway every 3 feet flush
along the face of the bottom shelf on each side of the peninsulas.
ft
• Equipment Outlet Location. Electrical outlet location shall be near the equipment to be powered; the
exact location of equipment and outlets shall be determined by the Government during early design
stage.
• GFCI protection shall be provided within 6 feet of water sources.
C.3.4.2 LIGHTING
Laboratory standard lighting should be fluorescent uniform lighting with two levels of lighting at
benchtop and double switching. The high level should be 100 footcandles and the low level should be
50 footcandles. See also Section 16, Electrical Requirements. Pendant lighting with direct/indirect
light is recommended.
C.3.4.3 EMERGENCY LIGHTING
Provide a minimum of 5 footcandles throughout exit path, including laboratory modules. See also
Section 16, Electrical Requirements, of this Manual for specific requirements.
C3.4.4 SWITCHES
Provide at least one snitch for room lighting at 54 inches above the finished floor (AFF) at each door
that provides hallway egress. See also Section 16, Electrical Requirements, of this Manual for specific
requirements.
C-4
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Appendix C - Room Data Sheets
C.3.4.5 EMERGENCY POWER SYSTEM
Emergency power system shall be provided by a diesel-driven emergency generator. See room data
sheets and Section 16, Electrical Requirements. An uninterruptible (UPS) system or systems shall be
provided if required by specific laboratory facility needs.
C.3.4.6 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
Fire alarm systems shall be provided in accordance with the criteria set forth in Section 16, Electrical
Requirements, of this Manual.
C.3.4.7 TELEPHONE OUTLETS
Telephone outlets shall be provided, one per single laboratory module space. The exact location for
outlets shall be determined by the Government at an early design stage. Provide one telephone outlet
per 125 NUSF of office space. If workstations are identified and are smaller than 125 NUSF, one outlet
per workstation will be required.
C.3.4.8 LOCAL AREA NETWORK (LAN) COMPUTER OUTLETS
LAN computer outlets shall be provided, one per single module space. The exact location for outlets
shall be determined by the Government at an early design stage. Provide one LAN outlet per 125 NUSF
of office space. If workstations are identified and are smaller than 125 NUSF, one outlet per
workstation will be required.
C.3.4.9 LEWS COMPUTER OUTLETS
Laboratory Information Management Systems (LIMS) computer outlets shall be provided, one per single
module space. The exact location for outlets shall be determined by the Government at an early design
stage. Provide one LIMS outlet per 125 NUSF of office space.
C.3.4.10 OUTLET COVER PLATES
All telephone, computer, and electrical outlets shall be PVC or equivalent corrosion-resistant cover/face
plates; metal covers shall not be used.
C-5
-------
February 1998
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
Appendix C - Room Data Sheets
C.4 Laboratory Symbols List
PLUMBING SYMBOLS
A AIR.COMP. (100PSIGU.O.N.)
LA AIR, LAB (15PSIGU.N.O)
C02 CARBON DIOXIDE
RO REVERSE OSMOSIS WATER
SS SAFETY SHOWER
CW COLD WATER
CHWS' CHILLED WATER SUPPLY
CHWR CHILLED WATER RETURN
HW HOT WATER
C33 CUP SINK
I n LAB SINK
EJro FLOOR DRAIN
0 FLD FUNNEL DRAIN
FO FLOOR SINK
SHUT-OFF VALVE
EW EYE WASH
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
D
DIMMER SWITCH
20A SOL REC 120V
20A DUPLEX REC 120V
30A SGL REC 208V SINGLE PHASE
30A SGL REC 120« 208V SINGLE PHASE
20A SGL REC 208V 3 PHASE
SPECIAL PWR ERC
PEDESTAL BOX WITH REC
SURFACE RACEWAY
(J) - JUNCTION BOX
W]3 WARNING LIGHT
£J LIGHT FIXTURE
SQ SAFE LIGHT
CZH DISC SWITCH
*< TELEPHONE
WP WEATHERPROOF
EP EXPLOSION PROOF
EM EMERGENCY CKT
HS3 COMPUTER OUTLET
C-6
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
February 1998
Appendix C - Room Data Sheets
C.4 Laboratory Symbols List (Continued)
ARCHITECTURAL SYMBOLS
Cup Sink
Epoxy Sink
0
Stainless Steel Sink
Fume Hood
Biological Safety Cabinet
Government Furnished Equipment
Umbilical 5" x 18"
Snorkle
150 cfm Exhaust (U.N.O.)
COUNTERTOP MATERIALS
Epoxy Top
Acid Resistant Plastic Laminate
Stainless Steel
C-7
-------
February 1998
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
Appendix C - Room Data Sheets
EXAMPLE 1
EXAMPLE 2
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 4
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 6
EXAMPLE?
EXAMPLES
APPENDIX C
TYPICAL LABORATORY ROOM EXAMPLES
I MODULE LABORATORY
2 MODULE LABORATORY
2 MODULE LABORATORY
3 MODULE INSTRUMENT LABORATORY
4 MODULE CHEMISTRY LABORATORY
ICP-MS LABORATORY
VOA LABORATORY (CONTRACTOR)
LOW LEVEL EXTRACTION LABORATORY
C-8
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Appendix C - Room Data Sheets
ROOM DATA SHEETS
The following information shall be provided for each laboratory space.
SPACE TYPE
Information given to generally describe type of laboratory space by Junction.
AREA
Information provided as part of a specific space requirement for a particular project.
Example is used to illustrate a Typical I-Module Laboratory.
SPACE NAME
Information provided as part of specific description of space usage for a particular project.
ACTIVITY / PROGRAM NAME
Information provided to assign responsibility for a specific space to a particular Branch/Section for a project.
OCCUPANCY
Identifies number of personnel in a given space for a defined period of time.
BUILDING SECTION
Identifies functional grouping in which space is to be located.
ADJACENCIES
Information is to be developed during programming by the design professional in consultation with representative
facility users and with approval by EPA.
OPERATION / TASK DESCRIPTION
Information is to be developed during programming by the design professional in consultation with representative
facility users and with approval by EPA.
LIST OF REQUIREMENTS
Ceiling - height and type
Doors - size and type
Flooring - material
Walls - materials and finishes
Window Treatment
Special Construction - if required
Outfitting
Fixed Laboratory Equipment - list of casework requirements such as:
• Metal Casework - "C" Frame
• LF of Base Cabinets - 36 Inches High
• * LF of Wall Cabinets - Glass Door
• LF Adjustable Wall Shelving - 2 Tier
C-9
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Appendix C - Room Data Sheets
Epoxy Top
Fume Hood with Services
Vented Solvent Storage Cabinet Below Hood
Vented OSHA Cabinet (30 Gallon)
Laboratory Sink
Cup Sink
Laboratory Desks with Bookshelves, Tackboards and File with Storage Cabinets
Mechanical Service Requirements
• Temperature and Humidity Control
• 100 Percent Supply and Exhaust - 24 Hour-Operation
Electrical Service
• 120V/20 Amp AC at Fume Hood
* 120V/20 Amp Receptacles 24 Inches on Center in Raceway
• 208V/30 Amp-1 Phase, 4 Wire AC at Fume Hood
• Disconnect Switch at Door for 120/208V Laboratory Power
• Telephone
• Cable Tray
• Emergency Power
• Fluorescent Lighting -100 Footcandles at 36 Inches AFF
• Security
• Computer Outlets
Plumbing/Fire Protection
• Industrial Hot and Cold Water, Sink
• Industrial Cold Water, Cup Sink
• Deionized Water
• Laboratory Drain (Acid Waste)
• Compressed Air, 15 psi Serrated Connection
* Nitrogen Cylinder
• Laboratory Vacuum
• Water Sprinklers
* Dry Chemical and Carbon Dioxide Extinguisher in Safety Niches
• Safety Shower/Eyewash Station
CHEMICALS USED IN THIS ROOM
Types and quantities used are to be identified during programming by the design professional in consultation with
representative facility users and with approval by EPA. The following is used as an example:
Small quantities of organic solvents, acids, and bases (generally less than 1 gallon of each at any one time) in
concentrations ranging from weak solutions to concentrated materials. Standard reagent chemicals in gram
proportions.
MOVABLE EQUIPMENT & FURNISHINGS
List of Government Furnished/Government Installed (GFGI) equipment and furnishings is to be identified during
programming by the design professional in consultation with representative facility users and approval by EPA.
The following is used as an example:
• Analytical Balances
• Bench Top Drying Ovens
• Refrigerators
• Other
C-10
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
February 1998
Appendix C - Room Data Sheets
EXAMPLE 1
1 MODULE LABORATORY
1 . =r
\
.
\
C-ll
-------
February 1998
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
Appendix C - Room Data Sheets
EXAMPLE 2
2 MODULE LABORATORY
Desk Height
n
a
Space-
Cabinets
• Kef.
Knee Space
Fiannable
Storage.
Cobwts
C-12
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
February 1998
Appendix C - Room Data Sheets
EXAMPLES
2 MODULE LABORATORY
Weigh.
Tabie
H
Glass,.
0
C-13
-------
February 1998
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
Appendix C - Room Data Sheets
EXAMPLE 4
3 MODULE CHEMISTRY LABORATORY
o
O
I I
§ I
ii
1,1
'Jl
a
o
C-14
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
February 1998
Appendix C - Room Data Sheets
EXAMPLES
4 MODULE CHEMISTRY LABORATORY
CD
OD
o
o
cz>
CD
O
C-15
-------
February 1998
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
Appendix C - Room Data Sheets
EXAMPLE 6
ICP-MS LABORATORY
Adjustable Shelves
O
P
o
Instrunent
A
C-16
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
February 1998
Appendix C - Room Data Sheets
EXAMPLE?
VGA LABORATORY (CONTRACTOR)
C-17
-------
February 1998
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
Appendix C - Room Data Sheets
EXAMPLES
LOW LEVEL EXTRACTION LABORATORY
o
Fine Hood
CD
ir*
(V)
^J
Tabtr
O
Move«fel*
C&totnetC-
too Snt«r
•-R
^^
S
C-18
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines ; February 1998
Appendix D - Design Guidelines
Appendix D - Design Guidelines
D.1 Amenities
Amenities in laboratory facilities are spaces and/or features that provide an enjoyable environment for
staff and visitors. An amenity exceeds the minimum functional requirements established by the program
and may include the following:
D, 1.1 Interaction spaces, lounges, and break areas should be strategically located to foster maximum interaction
•while being convenient to both offices and laboratories.
D. 1.2 Conference and meeting room spaces appropriate to the laboratory/office functions should be provided in
close proximity to the laboratory. The meeting room spaces should be of various sizes and shapes to
accommodate a wide range of conference needs. At least one of these conference rooms should be
designed to accommodate teleconferencing.
D.I.3 Lunchroom facilities should be sized specifically to each facility. Quality design of food service areas,
concession areas, and seating areas will contribute to an enhanced quality of life for the researchers.
Refrigerator space must be integrated into coffee and vending areas to eliminate the temptation to store
lunches in refrigerators within the laboratories. Consideration should be given to appropriate microwave
and oven appliances. A "white board" for impromptu conversations should be considered.
D. 1.4 Toilets and lockers in close proximity to the laboratories and offices should be coordinated to provide
maximum benefit to the staff. These facilities could be contiguous in most cases. Where appropriate, the
toilet/locker combination should accommodate a shower. The shower could satisfy staff after exercise and
be used to stabilize a chemical accident victim prior to medical assistance.
D. 1.4.1 Attempt to locate lockers and toilets close to laboratories and offices in such a manner that clothing
and valuables are easily accessible to the staff, precluding co-location of casework in the laboratory for
personal items. Avoid placement of lockers in corridors.
D. 1.5 Space for an employee wellness center with appropriate facilities should be considered.
D. 1.6 Provide special attention to artwork and/or photos and how they are to be integrated into the design. The
solution should include an integrated design for the display of research materials throughout the
laboratory. Displays should be easily, quickly, and inexpensively changeable.
D. 1.7 For reasons of safety, day or elder care facilities should not be included inside a laboratory facility.
D.2 Aesthetics
Aesthetics refers to the nature of both the interior and exterior of the facility. Aesthetic considerations
should include, but shall not be limited to, the following:
D.2.1 Contextual relationship of the adjacent buildings and environment. Color, texture, and massing of
building components should be investigated. Historical and contextual details should be considered.
D.2.2 The landscape design shall integrate site and building into one concept.
D.2.3 The sequence of access, entry, and use of the building from the viewpoint of both staff and visitor must be
considered.
D-l
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Appendix D - Design Guidelines
D.2.4 The interior finishes must be integrated into a single concept for the entire facility. This shall include all
visible materials.
D.2.5 Consider accent and background colors, with special attention to their psychological effect on people.
D.2,6 Consideration shall be given to lighting from the view of both visual comfort and aesthetics. Visual
comfort probability (VCP) for lighting fixtures should be a factor in selection. Consider accent, indirect,
artwork, and general lighting.
D.2.7 Consider the introduction of natural light in the design. Consider methods to introduce natural light into
the interior circulation spaces.
D.2.8 Special aesthetic consideration should be given to all building entrance lobby spaces.
D.3 Interaction
Interaction of researchers is important in a research facility. There is a relationship between researcher
interaction and the flow of technical information (Managing the Flow a/Technology, Thomas Allen,
1977,1984, NOT Press). Incorporate appropriate interaction space where feasible.
D.3.1 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
Design considerations to promote researcher interaction shall include, but shall not be limited to, the
following:
D.3.1.1 Communication is a function of both organization and proximity. People communicate more if they
work on a similar project or are in close proximity to each other. For weekly contact, it has been
shown that communication drops off dramatically after 30 meters. It is desirable to cluster researchers
in 30-meter-diameter groups, with shared facilities in between these research clusters.
D.3.1.2 Building form has an influence on communication. Whenever possible, the researchers that need to
communicate should be located in close proximity on the same floor. It has been shown that floor
space of less than 10,000 square meters (108,000 square feet) should be located on one floor if
possible.
D.3.1.3 The laboratory director shall be located strategically among his or her research staff. The director's
office is best located toward the center of the facility. From an interaction perspective, a corner office
with the best view is not the best location for the director's office.
D.3.1.4 Offices in a cluster may be a better form to promote communication and interaction among
researchers. To minimize separation, a square configuration is desirable. Buildings that are arranged
in odd shapes to provide everyone with an outside office view, often compromise researcher
communication. Solutions that provide for both natural light and office clusters should be strongly
considered.
D.3.1.5 When offices are put near laboratories, the researchers located in these offices have a greater sense of
territoriality than if offices are farther away.
D.3.1.6 Direct access should be provided to managers. Locating secretaries directly outside the manager's
door often inhibits a subordinate from initiating informal contact with that manager.
D.3.1.7 Library space appropriate to the laboratory/office functions should be located strategically to promote
researcher interaction and efficiency.
D-2
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
February 1998
Appendix D - Design Guidelines
D.3.1.S Shared but Wing facilities can be used as a tool to promote greater researcher communication. Place
the shared facilities to provide maximum intergroup communication. Shared building facilities should
be located by proximity and in locations that enhance the users' ability to positively influence
researcher interaction. Shared building facilities include, but are not limited to, the following:
Washrooms
Copy machine areas
Coffee areas
Computer rooms
Secretarial and message areas
Computer printer terminals
Instruction areas
Lounges
Special test equipment
Libraries
Conference rooms
Supply rooms
Food vending
Common refrigerator
Locker facilities
Exercise facilities
Day-care facilities
Elevators
Stairs
Reception
Drinking fountains.
D.4 Color
Color selection for building exterior and interior shall be responsive to the local environment, provide a
favorable psychological effect on people, and minimize maintenance.
D.4.1 SITE CONTEXTURALKM
Color of both building and landscape elements should complement the context environment.
D.4.1. J LANDSCAPE MATERIAL
Concepts for the design shall include the color and texture of the landscape material, how it relates to
existing vegetation, how accent colors are to be used, and how color changes throughout the year.
Establish a concept or strategy for landscape material selection.
D.4.1.2 SITE AND BUILDINGS
Concepts for the design shall include the color, texture; and details, and how they relate to the existing
site and buildings. Establish the existing materials. New building materials shall relate to the existing
materials. New details shall relate to the existing details in a coherent manner.
D.4.1.3 MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
Color affects the maintenance requirements of buildings. Care should be exercised to take color and
maintenance into consideration during the color selection process.
D-3
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Appendix D - Design Guidelines
D.5 Laboratory/Office Location
There are four basic locations of researcher offices related to the laboratories: offices separate from
laboratories, grouped offices across the corridor from laboratories, offices not grouped but across the
corridor from the laboratories, offices not grouped but on the same side of the corridor as the laboratories.
D.5.1 ASSETS AND LIABILITIES
There are assets and liabilities for each design choice. The following questions shall be answered on a
building-by-building basis. After the questions are answered, the designer needs to "test" various
laboratory/office options with the users. The designer must keep in mind that clustered offices offer
greater potential for researcher interaction then do offices lining the corridors.
Do the offices require an exterior view, interior view, or no view?
What is the relationship between secretarial support and the offices?
What is the proportion of offices to laboratories?
What are the user needs and how do they affect office configuration and location?
How are the laboratories to be configured?
How should the offices relate to the laboratories?
What are the sizes of the offices?
Are there any special psychological influences regarding office location?
Who will use the offices?
Where will technicians be located?
Is constant visual supervision over the laboratories required?
D.5.2 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
The following design considerations should be kept in mind while configuration is under design.
D.5.2.1 OFFICES SEPARATE FROM LABORATORIES
Advantages:
• Noise or vibration to offices is minimized.
• Some offices may need to be separated from prime researchers to foster other administrative needs.
• In renovated building solutions, the close proximity of laboratories and offices may not be an
option due to other factors.
• There is less researcher territoriality of laboratories if researchers are farther from their
laboratories.
• Separate heating, ventilation, and air-conditioning (HVAC) system allowing for recirculated air,
thereby reducing operational costs.
Disadvantages:
• Longer circulation between offices and laboratories.
• Reduced researcher interaction unless offices are clustered.
D.5.2.2 OFFICES NOT GROUPED BUT ACROSS THE CORRIDOR FROM THE LABORATORIES
Advantages:
• Close office laboratory relationship reduces walking distance for researchers.
• Very efficient use of a double-loaded corridor.
• Relatively easy to integrate this massing into an easy and efficient structural solution.
* Relatively contiguous building mass that will be more energy efficient than other solutions.
D-4
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Appendix D - Design Guidelines
Disadvantages:
* The advantages of clustering offices in terms of interaction are not possible.
• Exterior light normally does not penetrate wall to the corridor or to the laboratories unless
clerestory lighting is used.
• Promotes an uninteresting corridor environment
• Promotes territoriality of laboratory space.
D.5.2.3 GROUPED OFFICES ACROSS THE CORRIDOR FROM LABORATORIES
Advantages:
• Offices in relatively close proximity to laboratories.
• Outside light to offices, laboratories, and corridors.
• This concept presents increased opportunity for researcher interaction.
• Offices are slightly removed from laboratories, thereby reducing noise and vibration to and from
offices.
• Allows offices to be on separate HVAC system from the laboratories, thereby reducing operational
costs.
Disadvantages:
• Does not provide flexibility in reconfiguration of office space.
• The clustered office configuration significantly increases the exterior envelope of the building,
resulting in higher energy and construction costs.
D.5.2.4 OFFICES NOT GROUPED BUT ON THE SAME SIDE OF THE CORRIDOR AS THE
LABORATORIES
Advantages:
• Provides close proximity to the laboratories, which reduces walking time between offices and
laboratories.
• Provides greater safety due to the almost constant supervision of the research laboratories.
* Promotes natural lighting to corridors since exterior is not lined with offices.
Disadvantages:
• Office dimensions are more controlled by the laboratory module than other concepts.
• Because the office is between the corridor and the laboratory, the amount of light available to the
laboratory tends to be reduced.
• Premium cost for office space in locations better allocated for laboratories or laboratory support.
• HVAC costs cannot be reduced because office space is on laboratory ventilation system.
D.6 Lockers and Showers
Lockers must be provided for both sexes. Each locker room can be designed as a separate element or
integrated into a locker/toilet/shower group. There are some advantages to providing these functions in a
coordinated group.
• Utilities are clustered for service to both toilet and shower areas.
• Duplicated functions in these areas can be eliminated.
• Close proximity provides greater efficiency in use of facilities.
D-5
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 .. and Planning Guidelines
Appendix D - Design Guidelines
D.7 Environmentally Conscious Design
EPA's objective is to foster environmentally conscious design in its facilities. To that end, consideration
must include, but shall not be limited to, the following:
• Site planning that is environmentally based.
• Facility designs that reflect environmental as well as energy conscious concepts.
• Material selection based on low energy consumption both in the production and in transportation to
the site.
• Material selection based on using indigenous materials and retraining from using ecologically
sensitive materials.
• Material selection based on reducing hazardous chemicals within the buildings due to off-gassing of
material.
* Material selection based on the products' life cycle energy use.
• Ecologically sensitive use of water within the facilities.
• Sensitive use of HVAC components to reduce pollution, conserve energy, and maintain the appropriate
quality for the interior environment
• Concepts that focus on recycling of materials.
D.8 Office (Administration)
The administrative offices shall be designed considering the following factors:
D.8.1 CIRCULATION PATTERNS OF VISITOR GROUPS
If there are visitors expected at the facility, the design shall accommodate not only tour groups, but all
other visitors and their potential circulation patterns from the administration area to their destination
point. Staging areas for tours should be anticipated.
D.8.2 CIRCULATION PATTERNS OF RESEARCH STAFF
Often, the placement of administration and administration support between research groups will foster
intergroup interaction. Consider researchers' interaction as a prime determinant for location of
administration and administration support.
D.8.3 EFFICIENT ACCESS TO ADMINISTRATIVE SUPPORT AREAS
The use of and control over administration support functions necessitate their close proximity to
administrative offices, especially the resource center and meeting rooms.
D.8.4 SUPPORT SPACE FOR ADMINISTRATION OFFICES
The support space shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:
Security control / reception
Conference room
Teleconference room
Storage
Copier
Coffee area/vending
Computer access/printer output
Visitor information center.
D-6
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
February 1996
Appendix D - Design Guidelines
D.8.4.1 SECURITY CONTROL/RECEPTION
Security control shall be at the main entrance to the facility. The security control area shall have good
visual control over the building entrance and lobby area. Administrative areas shall be in close
proximity to the security control to provide reception function activities to support the security control
staff.
D.8.4.2 CONFERENCE ROOM
Conference room areas must be sized in proportion to the number of staff and conference activities
anticipated. In most building programs, conference room areas have been under programmed. The
proper and adequate design of conference space for administrative areas and research areas reduces
travel time and promotes interaction. "Satellite conference rooms" can also double as "satellite
resource centers" for periodicals related to special laboratory groups.
D.8.4.2.1 Conference areas that are centrally located for general administrative meetings are often designed
to be subdivided with the use of folding sound-resistant doors. A vending area and related seating
area may be coordinated adjacent to the main conference area to provide a broader use of the
conference area. When conference areas and food-related areas are adjacent to one another, walls
and doors must provide adequate sound control.
D.8.4.3 TELECONFERENCE ROOM
The teleconference room shall be designed to meet the specific teleconferencing needs of the facility.
Additional issues to resolve include:
Number of participants anticipated
Special lighting requirements
Special acoustic requirements
Acoustic isolation from adjacent spaces
Storage requirements
Control room requirements
- Determine whether a common control room for two conference rooms is required
- Define control room requirements
- Identity equipment requirements
• Is a control room even required.
D.8.4.4 STORAGE
Storage areas adjacent to administrative offices are required to hold paper stock and miscellaneous
equipment storage. Storage areas are often underprogrammed in facilities. Special attention shall be
exercised regarding the need for storage space to hold extra supplies related to administrative
conference space (e.g., tables, chairs, overhead projectors, slide projectors, and easels).
D.8.4.5 COPIER
Copier area shall be provided in close proximity to administrative areas. It shall be located to promote
researchers/staff interaction. Area shall be exhausted to the outside to provide adequate air quality.
Adequate space adjacent to the copier is needed for proper storage, recycle paper bins, and collating or
layout areas for sorting copies.
D.8.4.6 COFFEE/VENDING
A coffee/vending area shall be strategically located within a short travel distance from the area
serviced. The coffee/vending area should be located to promote communication and researcher
interaction. Adequate area shall be provided for storage of various kinds of recycled products. Often
coffee/vending areas are co-located with concession purchased items. Special attention must be given
to designing concession areas for both functional use and good aesthetic design.
D-7
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Appendix D - Design Guidelines
D.8.4.7 COMPUTER ACCESS/PRINTER OUTPUT
Computer areas including computer staff offices, paper storage and computer tape storage are often
designed into a "computer suite." Often, the "suite" will include printer output areas.
D.8.4.7.1 The computer area shall be located as centrally as possible to reduce travel as well as wiring to
computer terminals. The computer printer output areas are good interaction areas for researchers
and should be located to promote interaction.
D.8.4.7.2 Special care is required to design both floor loading and fire ratings for film and paper storage
areas. Special fire protection consideration is required for the computer areas. A preaction fire
protection system shall be a part of the fire protection analysis for these areas.
D.8.4.7.3 Computer areas will probably have access flooring that may require accessible ramps (Americans
with Disabilities Act [ADA] compliance required) to these areas. Special acoustical consideration
is required in computer and printer output areas. If a glass wall is used to view into the computer
area, adequate attention shall be given to fire protection of this glass wall.
D.8.4.8 VISITOR INFORMATION CENTER
If the laboratory will be open to domestic and/or foreign visitors, a visitor center should be considered.
A visitor center shall include, at a minimum, the following amenities:
• Relaxation area
• Projection/sound equipment
* Large screen television with video cassette record (VCR)
* Coffee area.
D.8.5 SIGNAGE
Provide coordinated and integrated signage in compliance with ADA requirements. The signage solution
should encompass the following:
Exterior facility signage
Directory signage (lobby)
Directional signage
Room signage (integrate with safety information)
Employment information
Employee photo information
Current events notices
New publications display
Position opening notices.
D.9 Laboratories
The laboratory layout results from an in-depth analysis of research type, workflow patterns, and
relationships to support spaces and other laboratories.
D.9.1 MODULE
A laboratory module is usually 11 feet in width and between 26 and 33 feet in length. Laboratories with
heavy instrumentation requirements may require the wider module due to equipment wire and service
access.
D-8
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Appendix D - Design Guidelines
D.9.2 DISTRIBUTION OF SERVICES
An important consideration for the laboratory design is the distribution of services on a modular basis
within the laboratory. Special design attention shall be paid to location of structural members related to
penetrations for services along the walls and near the benches located in the center of the laboratory.
D.9.3 FUME HOOD PLACEMENT
Fume hood placement is important and shall be away from egress and circulation patterns. A 5-foot
minimum aisle width shall be maintained in front of fume hoods. It is good design practice not to have
"dead-end" circulation patterns that may trap an individual in case of a laboratory accident. Two means
of egress from a laboratory with any fume hood are required. Refer to Chapter 5, paragraph 12, of the
Safety Manual for additional requirements.
D.9.4 EYEWASH AND SAFETY SHOWER
Eyewash and safety shower placement is important A good location for both safety items is at the hinge
side of the egress laboratory door out of the path of travel. A fire extinguisher location in the laboratory is
preferable. Refer to Chapter 4, paragraph 16, of the Safety Manual for additional requirements.
D.9.4.1 SAFETY SHOWER
Safety showers shall be located in a position away from the face of a hood; if a hood accident occurs,
staff will be able to use the safety shower facility.
D.9.5 ELECTRICAL PANEL/FIRE EXTINGUISHER
The electrical panel to "shut down" the laboratory may be located outside of the laboratory; if an accident
occurs, researchers may exit the laboratory and "shut it down" from the outside. It is good practice to
locate a fire extinguisher in the corridor outside the laboratory in addition to those located within the
laboratory.
D.9.6 SIGNAGE
The laboratory signage should contain the room number, room name, occupants by name, hazardous
chemicals within the laboratory, emergency telephone number, and special procedures in case of
emergency. Provide coordinated and integrated signage in compliance with ADA requirements. The
signage solution should encompass the following:
Directional signage
Room signage (integrate with safety information)
Special chemical information for each space containing hazardous chemicals
Employment information
Employee photo information
Current event notices
New publications display
Position opening notices.
D.9.7 DOORS
The laboratory doors shall swing in the direction of egress from the laboratory. The laboratory door
consists of a 3-foot active leaf and a 1-foot inactive leaf to facilitate movement of equipment into the
laboratory.
D.9.8 HVAC DIFFUSERS
HVAC diffiisers shall be located so that they do not "short circuit" the airflow to a hood.
D-9
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998 and Planning Guidelines
Appendix D - Design Guidelines
D.9.9 WALLS
Laboratory walls shall be considered for extra structural reinforcing because the potential loads they may
support due to shelving or cabinets. This consideration shall include future modifications to the room
layout and additional shelving or cabinet requirements.
D.9.10 LABORATORY SUPPORT
Laboratory support space shall suit the needs of the specific laboratory. In some cases, a service corridor
is used for laboratory support In some cases, special support spaces are needed between laboratories.
D.9.11 LABORATORY TECHNICIAN
It is desirable to provide work space for technicians outside of the laboratories in order to reduce their
exposure to the laboratory chemicals. There is also a need to provide some work space in the laboratory
for laboratory-related work. Ideally, both requirements can be met to provide the greatest productivity to
technicians within the most healthful environment possible.
D.10 Library
The library shall be located with good access to storage, services elevator, and conference facilities.
Additional issues are as follows:
Type of library storage
Computer terminals required
Study carrels required
Work space required
Floor loading/structural requirements.
D.11 Outside Research Facilities
Any outside related research space shall be constructed and designed to be of a quality that is in keeping
with the research complex environment.
D.11.1 EXTERIOR SPACES
The exterior spaces on the property shall be adequately secured to eliminate the potential of unauthorized
individuals gaining access to the property. Potentially hazardous or accident prone exterior areas shall be
secured by adequate perimeter security.
D.12 Custodial Space
Custodial space shall be strategically located on each floor for efficient maintenance with adequate storage
space for cleaning equipment and supplies. Besides the custodial space located on each floor, a central
custodial office, locker rooms and storage space shall be considered during the early phases of design.
This area shall be located in close proximity to other building services areas.
D.12.1 SHOP FACILITIES
Shop facilities shall be located with exterior access appropriate to their function. The shop facilities shall
be remotely located from vibration, noise, and dust-sensitive areas.
D.12.2 OVERHEAD HOISTS
Overhead hoist requirements shall be defined early in the programming and design phases.
D.12.3 WELDING
Welding areas shall be designed to meet all code requirements.
D-10
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Appendix D - Design Guidelines
D.13 Loading Dock/Staging
Appropriate loading dock/staging facilities are required relative to the size, function, and material
requirements of each laboratory.
D.I3.1 LOADING DOCK SIZE AM) REQUIREMENTS
The truck turning radius to loading facilities should be appropriate to the truck size anticipated. The
loading dock might include a leveling device for accommodating different size trucks. A covered
loading/unloading area is desirable.
D.13.2 HVAC INTAKE
Special care shall be exercised not to locate mechanical air intakes toward the loading dock area. Idling
trucks located in loading dock areas may cause contamination of intake air.
D.13.3 VIDEO MONITORING
The loading dock area shall be considered for video monitoring for security purposes. Issues to resolve
are as follows:
Nitrogen storage requirements and location; note security fence requirements
Breakout area size
Bulk mail process defined
Access for emergency vehicle and ramps
Truck parameters (dock height, leveter requirements)
Security requirements
Concrete paving for loading dock area
Dumpster and compaction requirements.
D.14 Chemical Storage
' The chemical storage area location shall be researched with regard to the quantity and type of chemicals
stored. Chemical storage and gas cylinder storage may be located in close proximity. Special code
consideration shall be given to providing adequate fire protection and separation. Special consideration
shall be given to contaminated chemicals and contaminated fire protection water. The response time of
the fire department is a factor that shall be considered Special attention shall be paid to explosion relief
panels and their location and safety. Refer to NFPA 30 and 45 and Chapter 4, paragraph 10, of the Safety
Manual for additional requirements.
D.14.1 ADDITIONAL ISSUES TO RESOLVE
Type of chemicals to be stored
Quantity of chemicals to be stored
Dispensing procedures
Explosion relief panel requirements
Fire rating separation requirements
Building code requirements
Zoning requirements
Government agency requirements
State agency requirements
Agency having jurisdiction
Safety officers for facility
Local fire marshal.
D-ll
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
February1998 and Planning Guidelines
Appendix D - Design Guidelines
D.15 Recycling/Waste Handling
Recycling design considerations are important and must be considered at the early programming and
design phases. Recycling receptacles most be sized and adequate space provided on each floor and in the
central loading area. Special attention is also required in vending locations for various types of
recyclables. Waste handling in laboratories with animal research requires special consideration at the
early program and design stages. Early in the program and design, identify the type and size of facilities
anticipated for waste storage, waste compaction, and waste removal.
D.16 General Storage
General storage is usually required on every floor. General storage facilities are the most typically
forgotten or undersized spaces in EPA research facilities. In Government research facilities, where it is
difficult to resolve equipment disposition, adequate storage space is critical.
D. 16.1 Additional issues to resolve:
• Ensure good access to service elevator
* Size rooms with freezers relative to freezer dimensions and layout
* Check corridors for movement of equipment
• Resolve signal runs to central control area as required by program.
D.17 Food Service
Food service must be located with good access to the loading dock and the service elevator. The food
service shall be as centrally located as possible with an exterior view if possible.
D. 17.1 Additional issues to resolve:
* Quantity of seating required
* Type of food service to be provided
• Secondary uses of food service spaces.
D. 18 Emergency Generator Location
D. IS. I Location parameters:
* Locate with fresh air intakes
• Locate with exhaust away from fresh air intakes
• Locate away from vibration, acoustic, or electrically sensitive equipment.
D. 18.2 Additional issues to resolve:
• Size and shape of room, including usable space around generator
• Fuel supply and location (note code and environmental requirements)
• If located outside, determine the screening parameters of such equipment
* Exhaust requirements.
D-12
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines February 1998
Appendix D - Design Guidelines
D.19 Floor Loadings
The design professional must secure any special requirements for floor loading from the Project Officer
•with the understanding that building codes, local codes, and agencies having jurisdiction regulate these
requirements. Analysis in the early planning stages of a project is required to establish the loadings for
specific pieces of equipment since these equipment loads may exceed the design floor loads. The timing
and sequencing that the equipment is placed into the building must be considered; this will affect the
design or construction phasing. The travel path of the equipment into the building must also be
considered. The most stringent floor loading requirements shall govern.
D.20 Parking
Parking and its related circulation shall be separated from the service circulation to minimize conflicts.
D.20.1 GENERAL RULES /LOCAL CODE
Parking at EPA facilities varies with the function of the facility. Some facilities' parking accommodates
approximately 19 to 24 cars per 10,000 gross square feet of building. These ranges tend to have parking
problems. As a general rule, parking requirements shall follow local codes. If the parking falls under 25
cars per 10,000 gross square feet of the facility, a more detailed analysis shall be made to verify that
adequate parking is provided. If local codes require more parking spaces, the more stringent requirements
shall apply.
D.21 Fire Department Access
Fire department access to buildings is very important In designing buildings, and fire department access
to them, ensure that the fire access road is far enough away from the building (road to be at least 20 feet in
width with the edge of the road at least 10 feet from building per NFPA I) that the distance will not
hamper fire fighting. Dead-end roadways for fire fighting vehicles shall not be allowed.
D.21.1 HIGH RISE BUILDINGS
For high-rise buildings, special attention to fire fighting apparatus areas is required. A fire control room
inside the building is required.
D.21.2 AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION
In conjunction with local and EPA requirements, the local fire marshal shall be consulted to address and
resolve any of his special concerns.
D.21.3 ELEVATORS AND FIRE VICTIMS
Special attention shall be provided to the elevator/service elevator design and its function in a fire fighting
mode. Special consideration shall be given to the removal of fire victims from the building.
END OF APPENDIX D
D-13
-------
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
February 1998
Appendix E
Appendix E - Abbreviations and Acronyms
Note: Where an acronym is shown to stand for more than one term, use in the document shall be as indicated in
the specific Section.
AABC Associated Air Balance Council
AASHTO American Association of State
Highway and Transportation
Officials
ABS Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene
AC alternating current
ACGM American Conference of
Government Industrial Hygienists
ACI American Concrete Institute
ACMD Atmospheric Characterization and
Modeling Division
ADA Americans with Disabilities Act
ADC Air Diffusion Council
ADP automated data processing
ADPI Air Distribution Performance Index
AE&P Architecture, Engineering, and
Planning
AEERL Air and Energy Engineering
Research Laboratory
AEREB Architecture, Engineering and Real
Estate Branch
AFF above the finished floor
AGA American Gas Association
AHU air-handling unit
AJ A American Institute of Architects
AIHA American Industrial Hygiene
Association
AISC American Institute of Steel
Construction
A1SI American Iron and Steel Institute
AMCA Air Movement and Control
Association
amp ampere
ANSI American National Standards
Institute
APhA American Pharmaceutical
Association
AQMD Air Quality Management Division
AREA American Railway Engineering
Association
AREAL Atmospheric Research and Exposure
Assessment Laboratory
ARI Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration
Institute
ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers
ASHRAE American Society of Heating,
Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning
Engineers
ASME American Society of Mechanical
Engineers
ASTM American Society for Testing and
Materials
AT&T American Telephone and Telegraph
Company
AWG American Wire Gage
AWS American Welding Society
AWWA American Water Works Association
BAS building automation system
bhp boiler horsepower
BIA Brick Institute of America
BOCA Building Officials and Code
Administrators International
BSC biological safety cabinet
E-l
-------
February 1998
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
Btu British thermal unit
°C degrees Celsius
CADD computer aided drafting design
CCTV closed circuit television
CDC Center for Disease Control
CERC Coastal Engineering Research Center
CERCLA Comprehensive Environmental
Response, Compensation, and
Liability Act
CFCs chlorofluorocarbon compounds
cfm cubic feet per minute
C-Frame cantilevered frame
CGA Compressed Gas Association
CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
CFR Code of Federal Regulations
CMD Contracts Management Division
CMU concrete masonry unit
COR Contracting Officer's Representative
CPSC Consumer Products Safety
Commission
CPVC chlorinated polyvinyl chloride
CRF critical radiant flux
CTI Ceramic Tile Institute;
Cooling Tower Institute
CVTS cabled video teleconference space
db dry bulb
dB decibels
dB A decibels of sound measured on an
A-scale
DC direct current
DDC direct digital controls
DHHS ; Department of Health and Human
Services
Appendix E
DI deionized water
DOP dioctyl phthalate
DOT U.S. Department of Transportation
DTD Developmental Toxicology Division
EA Environmental Assessment
ECAO Environmental Criteria and
Assessment Office
EERD Ecosystem Exposure Research
Division
EIS Environmental Impact Statement
EM Engineering Memorandum
EMCS Energy Management Control System
EMF electromagnetic fields
EMS Energy Management System '
EMT electrical metallic tubing
EPA Environmental Protection Agency
ERDA Energy Research and Development
Administration
ESD Emission Standards Division
ETD Environmental Toxicology Division
°F degrees Fahrenheit
°Fdb degrees Fahrenheit dry bulb
FAA Federal Aviation Administration
FFL carpet pill test
FGCC Federal Geodetic Control Committee
FM Factory Mutual
FMSD Facilities Management and Services
Division
FMSD-C Facilities Management and Services
Division - Common Facilities
FMSD-O Facilities Management and Services
Division - Office Facilities
fpm feet per minute
E-2
-------
Architecture, Engineering.
and Planning Guidelines
February 1998
Appendix E
GC/MS gas chromatograph/mass
spectrometer
GDHS geometric design of highways and
streets
GECD Global Emission and Control
Division
gpm gallons per minute
GPS Global Positioning System
GSA General Services Administration
GTD Genetic Toxicology Division
HAZMAT hazardous materials
HCFC hydrochlorofluorocarbon
HD heavy duty
HEFRD Human Exposure and Field Research
Division
HEP A high-efficiency particulate aerosol
HERL Health Effects Research Laboratory
HFC hydrofluorocarbon
HID high-intensity discharge
HMSF hazardous materials/waste storage
facility
hp horsepower
HP high pressure
HPLC high-performance liquid
chromatography
HRMD Human Resources Management
Division
HTW high-temperature water
HVAC heating, ventilation, and air-
conditioning
IAQ indoor air quality
IBM International Business Machines
ICBO International Conference of Building
Officials
ICS Industrial Controls and Systems
ICP inductively coupled plasma
ICSSC Interagency Committee on Seismic
Safety in Construction
ID inside diameter
IPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineer's
' Association
"K" Rated transformers specially constructed
for use with nonlinear loads
kV kilovolt
kVa kilovolt - ampere
kwd kilowatt demand
kwh kilowatt hours •
LAN local area network
LCC life cycle cost
LCCA life cycle cost analysis
LEL lower flammable/explosive limit
LIMS Laboratory Information Management
Systems
low E glass low emissrvity glass
MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers
Association
MDF main distribution frame
MEF Main Entrance Frame
/ug/L micrograrns per liter
mg/L milligrams per liter
MIL-F Military Federal Specification
MRDD Methods Research and Development
Division
MS mass spectrometer
MSDS manufacturer's safety data sheets
N value number of blows per linear foot
E-3
-------
February 1998
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
NAAQS National Ambient Air Quality
Standards
NAD North American Datum
NAVD North American Vertical Datum
NC noise criteria
NCF network control facility
NC/LC noncombustible/timited combustible
NCMA National Concrete Masonry
Association
NCPD National Contracts Payment Division
NDPD National Data Processing Division
NEBB National Environmental Balancing
Bureau
NEC National Electrical Code
NEHRP National Earthquake Hazard
Reduction Program
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers
Association
NEMA KS1.1 Safety Guidelines for the Application
Installation and Maintenance of
Solid State Control
NEPA National Environmental Policy Act
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
NGVD Navigable Ground Vertical Datum
NIOSH National Institute of Occupational
Safety and Health
NOAA National Oceanic and Atmospheric
Administration
NRC noise reduction coefficient
NSC National Safety Code
NSF National Sanitation Foundation
NSPC National Standard Plumbing Code
NTD . Neurotoxicology Division
NUSF net usable square feet
Appendix E
OAQPS Office of Air Quality Planning and
Standards
OAR Office of Air and Radiation
OARM Office of Administration and
Resources Management
OD Office of the Director, outside
diameter
ODF ozone depletion factor
OID Owners Insurance Underwriters
ORD Office of Research and Development
OSA outside air ventilation systems
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health
Administration
OSORD Office of the Senior Official for
Research and Development
PB polybutylene
PBX private branch exchange
PCD Pollution Control Division
pCi/L picocuries per liter
PCI Precast Concrete Institute
PCI-MNL Precast Concrete Institute Manual
PDU power distribution unit
ph phase
plf pounds per linear foot
FOR Program of Requirements
psf pounds per square foot
psi pounds per square inch
psig pounds per square inch gauge
PTI Post-Tensioning Institute
PURPA Public Utility Regulatory Policies Act
PVC polyvinyl chloride
PVDF polyvinylidine fluoride
QATSD Quality Assurance and Technical
E-4
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
February 1998
Appendix E
Support Division
R (values) thermal resistance
RCRA Resource Conservation and Recovery
Act
RD relative humidity
RSD Research Support Division
RTECS Registry of Toxic Effects of
Chemical Substances
SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress
International
SCS Soil Conservation Service
SDR-PR standard dimension ratio - pressure
rated
SDWA Safe Drinking Water Act
SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture
Association
SFO Solicitation for Offer
SHEMD Safety, Health and Environmental
Management Division
SHEMP Safety, Health and Environmental
Management Program
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air-Conditioning
Contractors National Association
END OF APPENDIX E
SNAP Significant New Alternatives Policy
STC sound transmission class
STL sound transmission loss
TC telecommunication closet
HA Traffic Impact Analysis
TM Technical Memorandum
TSD Technical Support Division
UBC Uniform Building Code
U-factor a coefficient of beat loss
UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility
Standards
UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
UPS uninterruptible power supply
UTP unshielded twisted pair
VAV variable air volume
VOA volatile organic analysis
VCP visual comfort probability
VCR video cassette recorder
wb wet bulb
E-5
-------
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
February 1996
Index
Index
TheAE&P Guidelines is indexed by major heading, and numbers refer to subsections, not page numbers. Because
the index is by heading, not subject, the index may not list all specific topics covered in the AE&P Guidelines or all
applicable subsection numbers for a listed topic. The numbers for subsections that contain only cross-references to
other sources or publications are presented in italic type for the reader's convenience.
Absolute Filtration (Air) Systems 15.9.2
Access and Egress, Security 1.8.1
ADP. See Automatic Data Processing
Air Change Rates, Rooms 15.9.8
Air-Cleaning Devices (Special Applications) .. 15.9.3
Air Conditioning Systems. See also HVAC ... 15.5.2
Air Filtration and Exhaust Systems 15.9
Absolute Filtration 15.9.2
Air Intake Location 15.9.6
Dry Filtration 15.9.1
Maintenance Access 15.9.5
Operation 15.9.4
Air-Handling and Air Distribution Systems .. 15.5.11
Air-Handling Units, Gas-Fired, Controls .. 15.4.11
Air Intake, Location 15.9.5
Airports and Heliports 2.6.4
Air Volume/Exchange, Laboratory. See also
Load Calculations, Air Volume/Exchanges 15.6.4
Alarm and Security Systems 16.15
Architectural Requirements, Facility 1.5.5
Atriums , 13.3.1
Automatic Control Dampers 15.4.8
Automatic Data Processing
Grounding 16.11.5
Isolation of Systems 16.11.1
.Lighting '...; 16.11.4
Power Panelboards and Distribution Panels . 16.11.3
Power Systems 16.11
Auxiliary Air System 15.6.5
Load Calculations 15.6.5
Backflow Preventers (Plumbing) 15.10.3
Background Information (Planning and
Design Data) V 1.2
Balancing, HVAC. See Testing, Balancing,
and Commissioning
Ballasts. See Lamps and Ballasts
Biological Safety Cabinets 15.8.2
Blackout Shades 9.6.2
Blinds 9.6.1
Building Codes. See Codes, Development
Building Directory 10.2.4
Building Movement Joints 1.9.5
Cabinets, Laboratory 10.5.4,10.5.5,10.5.6
Assemblies 10.5.4
Base 10.5.5
Wall 10.5.6
Cable (Electrical). See Ductbanks and Cable
Calculations, Structural Design 1.9.2
Carpet 9.4.2
Casework. See Laboratory Casework
Cathodic Protection 16.12
Ceilings, Finished 9.3
AIongExitPath 9.3.3
Not Along Exit Path 9.3.2
Finishes 9.3.4
Open Ceilings , 9.3.5
Cementitious Decks 3.6
Materials, Design, and Construction 3.6.2
Central Heating Plant 15.5.16
Ceramic Tile Flooring 9.4.5
Chemical Storage and Handling ., 1.7.3
Chilled-Water Systems, Load-Control 15.4.15
Coastal Development See also Waterfront
Construction) 2.7.8
Codes. See also specific topics App. A
Development 2.1.2
Electrical 16.1.1
Fire Protection 15.15.6
Mechanical 15.12
Scope of Requirements 1.4.2
Cold Storage Rooms 15.5.15
Communication Systems 16.14
Miscellaneous . « 16.14.7
Compressed-Air Systems , 15.10.8
Computer Power 16.11.2
Concrete, Cast-in-Place 3.4
Climatic Considerations 3.4.6
Materials, Testing, and Quality Control 3.4.2
Mix Proportions 3.4.4
Mixing, Transporting, and Placing 3.4.5
Post-Tensioned 3.4.7
Tolerances 3.4.3
Concrete Flooring. See Exposed Concrete Flooring
Concrete Formwork 3.2
1-1
-------
February 1998
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
Index
Concrete, Precast/Prestressed 3.5
Architectural 3.5.2
Structural 3.5.1
Concrete Reinforcement 3.3
Details 3.3.2
Materials 3.3.1
Concrete, Requirements (General) 3.1
Coal Fly Ash, in Concrete 3.1.3
Codes 3.1.2
Design and Construction 3.1.1
Inspection and Testing 3.8
Concrete Structures, Repair and Restoration . 3.7
Condensors 15.5.4
Controls 15.4.17
Conductors 16.4.3
Constant Volume Bypass-Type Fume Hoods... 15.7.3
Conveyance (Stormwater) 2.7.5
Conveying Systems, Building 14.1
Cooling Towers 15.5.5
Controls 15.4.17
Coordination of Work (Electrical) 16.1.4
Countertops 10.5.8
Curtains 9.6.3
Decks
Cementitious 3.6
Steel 5.4
Design Guidelines App. D
Design Requirements
Environmental . / 1.5.9
Structural 1.9
Development Codes. See Codes, Development
Dewatering 2.4.5
Disaster Evacuation System 16.15.4
Distribution Systems. See Electrical; Natural Gas;
Water
Doors 8.1
Exterior 8.1.2
Fire 8.1.4
Identification 10.2.2
Interior 8.1.3
Laboratory 8.1.5
Drainage. See Street Drainage
Draperies 9.6.3
Drinking Fountains 15.10.13
Dry Filtration (Air) Systems 15.9.1
Dry-Marker Boards 10.1
Ductbanks and Cable 16.2.1
Ducts 15.5.14,15.14
Access Panels 15.14.3
Fabrication 15.14.2
Fire Dampers 15.14.5
Insulation 15.14.4
Noise Control 13.1.2
Earthwork 2.4.7
Effluent Cleaning 15.7.14
Electrical Equipment 11.9
Distribution Equipment 16.4.6
Materials and Equipment Standards 16.4.2
Electrical Service Entrance 16.3
Equipment 16.3.5
Metering 16.3.4
Overhead Services 16.3.1
Service Capacity 16.3.3
Underground Services . 16.3.2
Electrical Systems 16.1
Distribution 2.8.4,16.2
Redundancy 16.2.4
Environmental Requirements 16.1.8
installations 16.1.2
Interior 16.4
Materials and Methods 16.4.1
Service Equipment 16.4.2
Elevators 14.2
Capture Floor 14.2.3
Chemical Transport Use 14.2.5
Recall 14.2.1
Signage 14.2.4
Smoke Detectors 14.2.2
Emergency Eyewash Units 10.4,15.10.5
Emergency Power System 16.8
Emergency Loads 16.8.2
Emergency Safety Showers 10.4,15.10.6
Energy Conservation in Design 16.1.3
Lighting 16.5.5
Energy Efficiency, Facility 15.3.7
Energy Management Control Systems 15.4
Energy Management Systems 15.4.19
Zoning 15.4.2
Energy Metering 15.4.20
Environmental Considerations, Siting 2.2.3
Raceways, Enclosures 16.13
Environmental Design Requirements 1.5.9
Electrical Systems 16.1.8
Environmental Rooms 10.5.13,15.5.15
Equipment. See also specific equipment
categories 11.1
Consultants 11.10
Design 11.1
Electrical 11.9
Floor Preparation 11.4
High-Technology 11.8
Mechanical 11.9
Specifications 11.7
Ventilation, Equipment Rooms 11.6,15.3.5
Erosion and Sedimentation Control 2.7.3
Escalators 13.3.4,14.3
1-2
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
February 1998
Index
Evacuation System, Disaster 16.15.4
Exhaust, Laboratory. See also Fume Hoods,
Laboratory
Plume Study 15.9.9
Existing Facility Description 1.2.1
Exit Lighting and Markings. See Lighting; Signage
Exposed Concrete Flooring 9.4.7
Exterior Areas and Facilities. See Planning, Exterior
Areas and Facilities
Eyewash Units, Emergency. See Emergency Eyewash
Units
Facility and Campus Components 1.2.2
Facility Design and Layout 1.5
Architectural Requirements 1.5.5
Specific Room Requirements 1.5.7
Guide for Architectural Layout 1.5.8
Facility Organization 1.4.3
Facility Siting 2.4.3
Fan Control, Variable-Air-Volume 15.4.9
Fans/Motors 15.5.12
Final Finishing Material. See Finishes, Interior
Finished, Ceilings. See Ceilings, Finished
Finishes, Interior 9.1
Airspace 9.1.3
Combustible Substances 9.1.4
Final Finishes 9.1.2
Trim and Incidental 9.1.1
Finishes, Wall. See Wall Finishes, Paint, and
Covering
Fire Alarm System 16.15.1
Fire Barrier Walls 13.2
Openings 13.2.2-3
Fire Doors 8.1.4
Fire Extinguishers, Portable 10.3
Locations 10.3.1
Fire Protection 15.15
Codes 15.15.6
Operations 15.15.5
Systems 15.15.4
System Size and Zoning 15.15.3
Water Supplies 15.15.2
Fire and Smoke Detection and Protection Controls,
Air-Handling Systems 15.4.10
FireWalls 13.2,13.2.1
Openings 13.2.3
Flammable Gas Systems 15.10.12
Flammable Liquid Storage Cabinets 15.8.3
Floodplain and Wetlands Development. See also
Raceways and Enclosures, Environmental
Considerations) 2.7.7
Flooring, Special 9.4.6
Floor Treatments. See also Carpet; Ceramic;
Exposed Concrete; Vinyl) 9.4
Fluorescent Fixtures 16.6.2
Fume Hoods, Laboratory. See also specific
hoodtypes) 10.5.12,15.7
Certification 15.7.11
Effluent Cleaning 15.7.14
Exhaust 15.7.2
System 15.7.12
Face Velocities 15.7.10
Horizontal Sashes 15.7.8
Noise 15.7.13
Functional Organization 1.2.3
Furniture and Furnishings. See also Cabinets,
Laboratory 12.1
Gas. See Natural Gas; Nonflammable and
Flammable Gas
Geotechnical Investigation 2.3.3
Glare (Lighting) 16.5.7
Glassware Washing Sinks 15.10.7
Glove Boxes 15.8.1
GreenLights 16.5.6
Grounding 16.4.8
Automatic Data Processing Power 16.11.5
Groundwater Investigation 2.3.4
Grout 4.2.1,4.2.3
Handicapped Accessibility (Electrical) 16.1.6
Hardscape Requirements 2.5.4
Harmonics 16.4.5
Hazardous Waste Handling 1.7
Hazardous Materials/Waste Storage Facility .. 1.7.4
Heat Generation and Distribution, Central Planfl5.5.16
Heating and Cooling Coils 15.5.13
Heating and Cooling, Simultaneous 15.4.5
'Heating and Cooling Systems, Combination,
Two-Pipe and Three-Pipe 15.4.14
Heating Equipment 15.5.7
Heating Systems 15.5.6
Heating, Ventilation, and Air-Conditiomng. See
HVAC
Heliports. See Airports and Heliports
High-Technology Equipment. See Equipment
Hose Bibbs 15.10.16
Hot-Water Systems, Load Control 15.4.15
Humidity Control 15.4.4
HVAC Requirements 15.3
HVAC Selection 15.3.3
Control Valve Selection 15.4.13
1-3
-------
February 1998
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
Index
HVAC Systems. See also Testing, Balancing, and
Commissioning [HVAC Systems]) 15.5
Coils 15.5.13
Control Setback and Shutdown Devices 15.4.3
Economizer Cycle 15.4.7
Fire/Smoke Detection and
Protection 15.4.10,15.4.2.2
Laboratory 15.3.8
Performance 15.3.2
Illumination Levels, Interior 16.5.1
Interior Finishes. See Finishes, Interior
Janitor Closets 1.6.2
Laboratory Air Volume/Exchange. See Air
Volume/Exchange, Laboratory
Laboratory Cabinets. See Cabinets, Laboratory
Laboratory Casework. See also Cabinets; Fume
Hoods; Shelving 10.5
Materials 10.5.9
Minimum Standards 10.5.11
Modular Design 10.5.2
Quality 10.5.10
Support Capability 10.5.3
Laboratory Doors 8.1.5
Laboratory Exhaust See Fume Hoods, Laboratory
Laboratory Fume Hoods. See Fume Hoods, Laboratory
Laboratory Power Requirements. See Power
Requirements, Laboratory
Laboratory Service Fittings 15.8.4
Laboratory Waste, Nonsanitary 15.11
Laboratory Water Systems, Centralized 15.10.10
Lamps and Ballasts 16.5.3
Land Resources 2.2.1
Landscaping and Site-Related Requirements 2.5
Lavatories. See Toilets, Sinks, and Lavatories
Layout and Clearances
Equipment 11.3
Guide for Architectural Layout 1.5.8
Programmed Space 1.5.3
Specific Room Requirements 1.5.7
Lead-Based Paint 9.2.1
Lease Administration 1.10
Light Diffusers 16.6.3
Light-Gauge Steel. See Steel, Light-Gauge
Lighting Fixtures, Fire Safety 16.6
Fluorescent Fixtures 16.6.2
Light Diflusers 16.6.3
Location 16.6.4
Mounting 16.6.1
Lighting Systems, Exterior 16.7
Building Facade 16.7.3
Parking Lot 16.7.2
Roadway 16.7.5
Signs (Electric) 16.7.6
Traffic Control 16.7.4
Lighting Systems, Interior 16.5
Automatic Data Processing Areas .. 16.5.8,16.11.4
Controls 16.5.2
Emergency (Battery Units) 16.5.4
Energy Conservation 16.5.5
Exit 16.15.5
Green Lights 16.5.6
Lightning Protection Systems 16.9
Additional Scope 16.9.2
Master Label 16.9.3
Minimum Scope 16.9.1
Liquid Chalk Boards 10.1
Load Calculations 15.6
Air Volume/Exchange 15.6.4
Auxiliary Air 15.6.5
Design 15.6.3
Submitting 15:6.2
Load Control
Chilled-Water Systems 15.4.16
Hot-Water Systems 15.4.15
Loading Facilities 2.6.2
Loads, Building 1.9.3
Magnetic Boards 10.1
Masonry
Accessories 4.4
Codes and Specifications 4.1.2
Design and Construction 4.1.1
Inspection and Testing 4.6
Reinforced 4.5
Unit 4.3
Material and Equipment (Electrical), Standards 16.1.7
Mechanical Equipment. See Equipment; Plumbing;
and other specific systems
Mechanical System Commissioning 15.13.6
Metals, General Requirements 5.1
Metals, Miscellaneous 5.5
Codes and Specifications 5.5.2
Metering. See Electrical Metering; Energy Metering
Microwave Communications 16.14.6
Moisture Transport 7.4
Monumental Stairs 13.3.3
Mortar 4.2.1, 4.2.2
Motor Controllers and Disconnects 16.4.7
Natural Gas Distribution Systems 2.8.3,15.10.11
Noise Control 13.1
FumeHoods 15.7.13
Nonflammable- and Flammable-Gas Systems 15.10.12
1-4
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
February 1998
Index
Nonsanitary Laboratory Wastes. See Laboratory
Waste, Nonsanitary
Offer Requirements L10.1
Open Ceilings. See Ceilings, Finished
Overview, Facility Design and Layout 1.5.1
Paint 9.2.1,9.5
Accent 9.5.4
Colors, Wall and Ceiling 9.5.3
Lead-Based 9.2.1
Reflectance 9.5.2
Panel and Curtain Walls 7.5,7.5.1
Parking Facilities 2.6.2
Lighting 16.7.2
Partitions, Wood and Plastic. See also Panel and
Curtain Walls; Spandrel Walls 6.2
Ceiling High 6.2.1
Less-than-Ceiling High 6.2.3
Wood Stud , 6.2.2
Pedestrian Access 2.6.3
Penetrations 13.3.5
Perchloric Acid Fume Hoods ...'... 15.7.6
Piping
Noise Control 13.1.2
Plumbing 15.10.1
Planning
Criteria 1.3.3
Goals 1.3.1
Objectives 1.3.2
Requirements 1.3
Planning and Design, Site 2.4.2
Planning, Exterior Areas and Facilities 1.5.4
Planning Studies, Evaluations, and Reports 1.1.2
Plumbing 15.10
Fixtures 15.10.2
Piping 15.10.1
Plume Study (Laboratory Exhaust) 15.9.9
Power Factors (Electrical) 16.1.5
Power Requirements, Laboratory 16.4.9
Power Supply Lines, Overhead 16.2.3
Power Systems. See also Electrical Systems
Automatic Data Processing Power 16.11
Emergency Power 16.8
Preengineered Metal Buildings 5.7
Codes and Specifications 5.7.1
Loads 5.7.2
Professional Qualifications, Site Designers 2.5.2
Programmed Space, Design and Layout 1.5.3
Pumps and Pumping Systems (HVAC) 15.5.9
Purpose of Project 1.1.1
Raceways ; 16.4.4
Raceways and Enclosures, Environmental
Considerations 16.13
Corrosive Atmosphere 16.13.1
Explosive Atmosphere 16.13.4
Extreme Cold 16.13.3
Floodplains 16.13.5
Saltwater Atmosphere 16.13.2
Radioisotope Hoods 15.7.5
Radioisotopes, Hazardous Waste 1.7.2
Recording Systems 16.14.3
Recreational Requirements (Site) 2.5.5
References. See also Codes
Mechanical Requirements 15.2
Site Work 2.9
Reflectance. See Paint
Reinforced Masonry. See Masonry
Requirements, Summary of. See Summary of
Requirements
Restrooms 1.6.1,15.10.14
Room Numbering 10.2.3
Room Air Change Rates 15.9.8
Safety Alarm System 16.15.2
Safety Devices 10.4
Plumbing 15.10.4
Safety Showers, Emergency. See Emergency Safety
Showers
Satellite Dishes 16.14.4
Scope of Project 1.1,2.1
General Design and Planning 1.1
Site Work 2.1
Scope of Requirements 1.4
Security 1.8
Systems '. 16.15.3
Sedimentation Control. See Erosion and
Sedimentation Control
Seismic Requirements 16.10
Seismic Review 16.10.1
Service (Electrical) Entrance. See Electrical Service
Entrance
Service Fittings, Laboratory 15.8.4
Shafts 13.3.2
Shelving, Laboratory 10.5.7
Shoring and Underpinning 2.4.6
Shower Stalls. See also Emergency Safety
Showers 15.10.15
Signage
Elevator 14.2.4
Exit Markings 16.15.5
Exterior (Electric) 16.7.6
Interior 10.2
Door Identification 10.2.2
Room Numbering 10.2.3
Sinks. See Toilets, Sinks, and Lavatories
1-5 .
-------
February 1998
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
Index
Site
Development 2.4
Facility Design 1.5.2
Designers, Professional Qualifications 2.5.2
Evaluation 2.3.2
Influences 2.2
Investigation 2.3
Planning and Design 2.4.2
Preparation 2.4.4
Requirements, General 2.5.3
Surveys 2.3.1
Smote Detection Controls. See Fire and Smoke
Detection and Protection Controls
Smoke Detectors, Elevator 14.1.2
Solid Waste Collection Systems 2.8.6
Sound Dampening 13.1.3
Space Identification,- Facility 1.5.6
Spandrel Walls 7.5,7.5.2
Special Purpose Hoods 15.7.7
Special Room Requirements 1.6
Janitor Closets 1.6.2
Restrooms .....". 1.6.1
Steam Distribution Systems 15.5.10
Steam Systems, Control 15.4.18
Steel Decks, Codes and Standards 5.4
Steel Joists
Codes and Specifications 5.3.1
Intended Use 5.3.2
Support of Vibrating Equipment 5.3.3
Steel, Light-Gauge, Codes and Specifications 5.6
Steel, Structural
Codes and Standards 5.2
Inspection and Testing 5.8
Stornrwater Management 2.7
Stormwater Quality 2.7.6
Stormwater Retention and Detention 2.7.4
Street Drainage 2.7,1
Structural Design Requirements 1.9
Structural Steel. See Steel, Structural
Structural Support, Equipment 11.5
Structural Systems 1.9.4
Summary of Requirements 1.4.4
Sun Shading 8.3
Laboratory Windows 8.3.2
Surveying 2.4.1
Switches 16.2.2
TackBoards 10.1
Telecommunications Systems 2.8.5
Telecommunications/Data Systems 16.14.1
Television Broadcast Systems 16.14.5
Testing, Balancing, and Commissioning
(HVAC Systems) 15.13
Contractors 15.13.1-3
Devices 15.13.5
Reporting 15.13.7
ScopeofWork 15.13.4
Thermal and Moisture Requirements
Design Characteristics 7.2
General 7.1
Thermal Resistance 7.3
Tile Flooring. See Vinyl Tile; Ceramic Tile
Toilets, Sinks, and Lavatories 15.10.14
Transportation Systems 2.2.2
Trim and Incidental Finishes. See Finishes, Interior
Underpinning. See Shoring and Underpinning
Uninterruptible Power Supply 16.8.3
Unit Masonry. See Masonry
UPS. See Uninterruptible Power Supply
Utilities and Support Services 2.8
Vacuum Systems 15.10.9
Variable-Air-Volume Hoods 15.7.4
Variable-Air-Volume Systems, Fan Control ... 15.4.9
Vehicle Access and Circulation. See also Lighting
Systems, Exterior 2.6.1
Vehicle and Pedestrian Movement. See also
Transportation Systems 2.6
Ventilated Enclosures (other than fume hoods). 15.7.9
Ventilation Control, Mechanical 15.4.6
Ventilation, Equipment Rooms 11.6,15.3.5
Ventilation-Exhaust Systems 15.3.4
Ventilation Rates 15.9.7
Ventilation Requirements, Equipment .. 11.6,15.3.5
Vertical Openings and Shafts 13.3
Atriums 13.3.1
Escalators 13.3.4
Monumental Stairs 13.3.3
Penetrations 13.3.5
Shafts 13.3.2
Vibrating, Equipment, Support of 5.3.3
Vibration Isolation .' 13.1.1
Video Conference Rooms 16.14.2
Vinyl Flooring, Seamless 9.4.4
Vinyl Tile 9.4.3
Wall Finishes, Paint and Covering 9.2
Covering 9.2.3
Finishes 9.2.2-3
Lead-Based Paint 9.2.1
Waste Heat Recovery Systems 15.3.6
Waste, Laboratory. See Hazardous Waste Handling;
Laboratory Waste, Nonsanitary
Waste, Solid. See Solid Waste
Wastewater Collection Systems 2.8.2
Water Chillers 15.5.3
1-6
------- |